Home

Sony 8000SF Switch User Manual

1. OD G OO Ey EJ We Q Q O O 32 33 34 35 second button numbers settee first button numbers Shift button On each M E bank and the PGM PST bank each cross point button and reentry button has two button numbers and you use the shift button to switch between these numbers In the case of a 32 button layout the button numbers are as follows Cross point control block button numbers Button Number when the shift Number when the shift button is not pressed button is pressed From the left end to the 31st 1 to 31 32 to 62 button Reentry buttons 121 to 123 125 to 127 On the MVS 8000A 8000G you can use the rightmost button number 32 as a SIDE FLAG button In this case the shift button moves one to the left to number 31 and the button numbers are offset by one For details of the SIDE FLAG button see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Switching button numbers The rightmost 32nd button functions as a
2. Control panel configuration 3 with compact transition modules Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel JSUE4 JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ 255 jeued OJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 256 Cross Point Control Block In the cross point control block you can select the signals to be used in this M E bank or PGM PST bank There are also modules without the source name displays shown in the following figure All operations except those of the SHIFT button are the same as for a module with source name displays Key 2 row Key 1 row D Cross point buttons Reentry buttons M E bank display Key bus selection buttons JUUUO EI E er eee a EA Les b Background B row Background A row Source name displays Macro buttons UTIL button XPT HOLD buttons Reentry buttons O SHIFT button Cross point buttons These buttons select the signals used for video creation on this M E bank or PGM PST bank Each row of buttons corresponds to one or more signal buses within the switcher Key 1 row The buttons in this row select the key 1 or key 3 signals to be inserted Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel into the video on this M E ba
3. Operating buttons Joystick When the positioner operation mode is enabled By moving this you can move the pattern in the x axis and y axis directions When the three dimensional transform operation mode is enabled By moving this you can carry out operations in the x y and z axes When the following buttons are held down the joystick operation is switched to a finer control fine mode e The button on the end of the joystick e SRC button e TRGT button Depending on the settings made in the Setup menu the operation speed multiple can be changed When the effect run control mode is enabled By moving the joystick sideways you can run the keyframe effect independent of the STOP NEXT KF EFF LOOP and similar settings in the keyframe control block Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JAJdEUQ Move to the right to run the effect in the When the resizer control mode is normal direction and to the left for the enabled for the MVS 8000G only reverse direction Move for operations in the x y and z axes Hold down the button on the tip of the When the VTR disk recorder frame joystick to switch the joystick operation to memory operation mode is enabled a finer control fine mode Moving the joystick sideways controls th
4. Q Preview selection buttons AUTO button Key delegation buttons Press DSK1 or DSK2 to select the keyer Each button can be assigned to any key in setup see Chapter 16 Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu Volume 2 While these buttons are held down you can select a key source with the cross point buttons on the key bus Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid succession changes its state so that you can make cross point selections on the corresponding key bus in the PGM PST bank Key delegation button Corresponding double press key bus DSK1 key 1 a Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Key delegation button Corresponding double press key bus DSK2 key 20 a The key bus selection button KEY3 in the P P cross point control block goes off b The key bus selection button KEY4 in the P P cross point control block goes off Independent key transition execution section DSK1 ON DSK2 ON buttons Press these to cut in the corresponding downstream key 1 or 2 When the key is already inserted pressing the button cuts it out Each button lights red when the corresponding key is inserted in the program output final output from the switcher and lights amber at other times AUTO TRANS buttons The left button applies to DSK1 and the right button to DSK2 press these buttons to carry out an auto transition
5. 343 Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation 345 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority ee 346 Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation sssssesensesnssness 348 Super Mix Settings cssscscsscssscesscsssssssescsssscsssessecsscescssscesescsscsesssesees 349 Color Matte Settings 1ssnssnnsnnosnnsnnennnnensnnonsenzoanoensenseeneensentonsennoenees 350 Executing a Transition s seesesoososoosossosoesessoscssossesoesosoosossesossossesossosossossesss 351 Transition Indicator Function ss ennenesnnennnnzznnenanzznnnznana 351 Setting the Transition Rate ens 352 Pattermil AME iii i AS A pe ka a on sta a ERPE E ERST 355 Executing an Auto Transition sse eenenennennznnennnenennzzaa 359 Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever Manual Transition 359 Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions sse 360 NOn SV ISTATE e i assar a i g 360 Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode sen 361 Transition Preview ssesneseonszzonenenenzensenenezzeneenenezzonsenennonenzoneanonenzoneanen 363 Independent Key Transitions ssssnesnnonzensonsonzznonnennzonennennennensensensene 364 Basic Independent Key Transition Operations 364 Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation 365 Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate mn 366 Fade to Black sesnsneznznnenenzznennnnennonsnensznensnnenezzensenensnnen
6. To use the software you are required to input an install key For the method of inputting an install key see Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Format converter for MVS 8000G only Installing the MKS 8450G Format Converter Board in the switcher enables the following signal video format conversions e Up conversion from SD 4 3 to HD 16 9 e Down conversion from HD 16 9 to SD 4 3 e Cross conversion from HD 720P to HD 10801 or from HD 10801 to HD 720P The maximum number of input signals for which format conversion is possible is 16 or 8 when only one MKS 8450G board is installed and the maximum number of output signals is 4 2 for output on the MVS 8000GSF e After format conversion input and output signals have one frame delays with respect to the reference signals e Itis not possible to apply the safe title function to output signals subjected to format conversion e When the input reference signal for HD system is set to Tri Sync the format converter function is not available For details see Setting the Signal Format Format Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Format combinations allowing conversion The supported combinations of switcher signal format and format converter inputs 1 to 8 and inputs 9 to 16 are as follows Switcher Format converter signal format setting signal format set
7. 316 Basic Menu Operations Transition control block standard type compact type Buttons Menus See DME Independent key e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt DME Wipe page 477 transition type selection Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select button standard type e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select K SS STORE Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt XX Chapter 14 Volume 2 a Including the key delegation buttons of the transition control block standard type Independent key transition control block simple type a Buttons Menus See WIPE e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt Wipe page 455 Adjust gt Pattern Select e PGM PST 2DSKI 2 3 4 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust gt Pattern Select DME e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt DME Wipe page 477 Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 sTransition gt DME Wipe Adjust gt 1ch Pattern Select SHIFT e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt XX page 378 e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt XX a The menu to be recalled depends on the setup of the key assignment Flexi Pad control block standard type Buttons Menus See WIPE M E 1 2 3 PGM PST gt Wipe gt Main Pattern page 438 DME M E 1 2 3 PGM PST gt DME Wipe gt XX page 467 SNAPSHOT Snapshot gt Snapshot gt XX Chapter 14 Volume 2 EFF Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt XX Chap
8. Buttons Menus See FM1 to 8 signals assigned Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall page 500 buttons Color Bkgd1 signal assigned Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd1 page 538 button Color Bkgd2 signal assigned Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd2 button CCRI signal assigned button CCR gt CCR1 gt XX Chapter 19 CCR signal assigned button CCR gt CCR2 gt XX Name Transition control block standard tvpe compact tvpe Buttons Menus See KEY1 DSK1 a e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 gt XX page 378 e PGM PST gt DSK1 gt XX KEY2 DSK2 9 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key2 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK2 gt XX KEY3 DSK3 9 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key3 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK3 gt XX KEY4 DSK4 a e M E 1 2 3 gt Key4 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK4 gt XX WIPE M E 1 2 3 PGM PST gt Wipe gt Main Pattern page 438 DME M E 1 2 3 PGM PST gt DME Wipe 2XX page 467 SUPER MIX M E 1 2 3 PGM PST gt Misc gt Transition page 349 PST COLOR MIX M E 1 2 3 PGM PST gt Misc gt Transition page 350 FM1 amp 2 CLIP M E 1 2 3 PGM PST gt Misc gt Clip Transition page 524 FM3 amp 4 CLIP FM586 CLIP FM7 amp 8 CLIP PRIOR SET M E 1 2 3 PGM PST gt Misc gt Key Priority page 345 KEY PRIOR M E 1 2 3 PGM PST gt Misc gt Next Key Priority page 346 WIPE Independent key e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt Wipe page 455 transition type selection Adjust gt Pattern Select button standard type e PGM PST 2DSKI 2 3 4 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust gt Pattern Select
9. Control panel configuration 2 left side with simple transition modules 253 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel JSUB4 JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JAJdEUQ 254 Transition control block and Flexi Pad control block simple tvpe page 299 Independent key transition control block simple type page 304 Control panel configuration 2 right side with simple transition modules Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Control Panel Example Configuration 3 With Compact Transition The following illustration shows a typical configuration with compact transition Modules modules used in the transition control block oo0o0000go0g000G0000000000000 00000 JAOVHO0VVOQJHONBUWLHOWDJO Banos Transition control block compact type page 310 00 mm QOOGOGOG0 OOOOOOOQO OOOOOOOOO
10. SUOIISUBIL g 19JdEUQ 344 2 Holding down the PRIOR SET button press the one of the next transition selection buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank for the key to appear on top The selected key now appears on top on the program monitor The priority of keys other than the selected one does not change Key priority 3 1 4 2 Key priority 1 3 4 2 To change the priority of more than one key repeat this operation as required Changing the key priority for after the transition When executing a transition turning on the next transition selection button KEY PRIOR causes the keys to be rearranged based on the set priority To set the key priority for after the transition use the following procedure 1 In the transition control block hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the KEY PRIOR button to turn it on Do not release the PRIOR SET button before advancing to step 2 The KEY PRIOR button lights green and it becomes possible to change the key priority setting for after the transition 2 Hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the one of the next transition selection buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank for the key you want to bring to the front after the transition To set the priority to be the same as before the transition press the BKGD button The BKGD button is only effective when in the mode for changing
11. Selected destination display Destination selection buttons source selection button in the 2nd row it Press a button turning it on to select the lights green destination to which the router source is assigned Selected source name displays The button pressed to assign a destination These show the source name selected for to a source selection button in the 1st row the destination lights amber When another button is If the source names and destination names pressed to assign a different destination to a are set in the Setup menu to SW er Local Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 291 jaued JOJJUOJ pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 292 mode then the description names appear here DEST destination button Press this button turning it on to display the names of the destinations assigned to the destination selection buttons in the selected source name displays Selected destination display This shows the name of the destination selected by the destination selection buttons If a protected destination is selected the indication PROTECT appears Source selection button rows The destination selected with a destination selection button is assigned to a source selection button Press a source selection button to select a source The Ist row of buttons are source selection buttons for the unshifted destinations and the 2nd row are shift
12. 1 In the M E 1 Flexi Pad control block press the WIPE button This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe snapshot mode 2 In the memory recall section press the PTN NO button Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe pattern number recall mode and the memory recall section display changes as shown in the following figure WIPE button Numeric display XPT HOLD ABU W1234 Memory recall section 3 Use the buttons in the memory recall section to enter the pattern number consisting of up to three digits and press the ENTR button The entry is confirmed and now the numeric display shows the pattern number For the pattern numbers see Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 560 Pattern Mix Combining two patterns You can combine two selected patterns referred to as main and sub to form a new pattern Select a main pattern in the Main Pattern menu then use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF3 Sub Pattern The Sub Pattern menu appears Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 441 sodiM gJajdeyo sodiM g Jaydeyo 442 2 In the same way as for the main pattern select the sub pattern The patterns that can be selected for the sub pattern depend on the pattern sel
13. The following information appears on the button Status display For a pair shows the status for the reference Thumbnail when a file is output Black when a black signal is output Through when the input image is output Freeze when a freeze is output Compos when a composite image is processed Record when continuously capturing images record Pair button Press this button turning it on to enable pair mode File selection area You can select from the displayed still image files or clip files Still Image Operations 493 Aowey ewes 7 Jaydeyo Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo File information detail display Ext Anc Date Time Duration E A _ Mar 24 2006 14 40 00 30 00 al C005 ae coro sow C015 Select All Selected file When a pair file is selected each press switches the front and the back Thumbnail indications Still image files and clip files Still image files are displayed as gray buttons and clip files are displayed as yellow buttons Single files and pair files Single files are displayed with shadow and pair files are displayed with no shadow Selected file Pale blue border When more than one file is selected only the first is pale blue and the remainders are amber If the pair file was selected each press switches the front and the back File information detail display For the selected file this shows the file name P if a pair file E if an e
14. Creating a macro To include all information associated with an operation when registering a macro event When registering an auto transition operation as an event you can register the auto transition event to include the transition rate and background A B bus selection status When registering an effect execution rewind or fast forward as an event you can also save the region to which this applies To use this capability assign the following functions to user preference buttons in the menu control block or buttons in the utility shotbox control block and turn the relevant button on before you start an event to register Macro AT with Rate Macro Auto Trans Event with without Rate When registering an auto transition macro event in one of the M E banks or the PGM PST bank include the transition rate Macro AT with A B Bus Macro Auto Trans Event with without A B Bus When registering an auto transition macro event in the transition control block include the background A B bus cross point Macro TL with Region Macro Timeline with Region When registering an effect execution rewind or fast forward as a macro event save the affected region together in the macro For details of the method of assigning these functions to buttons see Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Events requiring adjustment when creating a macro The following events require time for execution to complete and
15. Master snapshot registers There are 99 master snapshot registers numbered to 99 for each control panel They store snapshot regions and the register numbers saved in the regions Regions and Registers 167 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 168 Keyframes A keyframe represents an instantaneous state of an image it can be saved and recalled for reuse Effects Keyframes By arranging a number of keyframes on the time axis and interpolating between successive keyframes you can create an effect in which there is a continuous change from each keyframe to the next The following figure shows three keyframes created with a wipe pattern the circle in different positions This is interpolated to create the effect shown Background A lt gt Interpolated images Background B Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution Example of keyframes and effect execution You can save the sequence of keyframes representing a single effect in a register Then by recalling this register you can replay the same effect For details of keyframe effect registers see Regions and Registers page 165 Saving and Recalling Effects To create a new effect first recall an empty register then create the keyframes one at a time in this register To run an effect it is also necessary to set the time and the path To edit an existing effect recall t
16. Press Rename A keyboard window appears Enter the new folder name and press Enter Frame Memory Clip Operations The following names cannot be used for folders Default Flash1 Flash2 CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COMA COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPTI LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPTO This changes the folder name Deleting a folder 1 In the Frame Memory gt Folder menu select the folder with the arrow keys or by turning the knobs Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Folder selection 1 to 12 2 Num Number of files to select 1 to 12 consecutively from selected file To select all folders select AI 2 Press Delete A confirmation message appears 3 To carry out the deletion select Yes and to cancel the deletion select No It is not possible to delete the default folder named Default Clip Output As for still image operation you can use the reposition and lock functions For details of the operation see Image Output page 507 Frame Memory Clip Operations 521 Kowa ewes 7 Ja deup MOWSJA ewei4 7 Ja deyo 522 Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data Preparations To record ancillary data it is first necessary in the Setup menu to select save with ancillary data as the frame memory saving mode see Saving a frame memory clip including ancillary data in Ch
17. The Transition menu appears 2 Select Super Mix in the lt Transition Type gt group 3 Turn the knobs to adjust the output levels Knob Parameter 2 A Gain Adjustment Background A output level Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 3 B Gain Background B output level 0 00 to 100 00 Super Mix Settings 349 SUOINSUBIL 19 JdEU SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo Color Matte Settings 350 To set the color matte of a preset color mix use the following procedure For an overview of the preset color mix see page 42 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 Select Preset Color Mix in the lt Transition Type gt group 3 In the lt Preset Color Mix Fill gt group select one of the following Flat Color monochrome color matte Utility 2 Bus signal selected on the utility 2 bus The utility 2 bus cannot be selected on the MVS 8000 4 When Flat Color is selected turn the knobs to adjust the color matte Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 3 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 4 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Color Matte Settings Executing a Transition There are two ways of executing a transition as an auto transition by a button operation and as a manual transition using the fader lever You can also use a combination of t
18. Types of Wipe Pattern Wipes The patterns that can be used for a wipe are divided into a number of groups as follows Note that only the standard wipe patterns can be used for an independent key transition For wipe patterns see Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 560 Standard wipe patterns Patterns consisting of straight lines vertically horizontally or diagonally and circular patterns Enhanced wipes More complex shapes such as hearts stars and round corners Rotary wipes These patterns involve rotation of the image about a point Mosaic wipe pattern This divides the image into small tiles Random and diamond dust wipe patterns These patterns consist of small random tiles or fine particles Pattern Mix You can create a new pattern by combining two selected patterns main and sub It is not possible to apply a pattern mix to an independent key transition For details see Pattern Mix page 441 Types of pattern mix There are four ways in which patterns can be combined in a pattern mix as follows Mix The effect of the sub pattern is applied to the main pattern modifying the outline or nature of the main pattern Positive NAM Nam Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all points within the outlines of either of the main pattern and the sub pattern Negative NAM Nam Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all points within the outlin
19. ss sseeesensensennen 463 Chapter 6 DME Wipes Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 1ssensnnonesnnsneonnsennennoennennz 466 DME Wipe Settings Menu nn eneenenennnnnnnnennnnnnn nanna za 466 DME Wipe Pattern Selection 20 me nnnnnnennenennennnnnnnnnnzna 466 Setting DME Wipe Modifiers senza nn nnnnnn 469 DME Wipe Modify Clear a a ens ens ners 476 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions sssesnnsensenes 477 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings 477 Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers 478 Resizer DME Wipe Setting DME Wipe Snapshots ssssneneennenzennenzensonsenzensensenoeneznsonennennenzonsennensenz DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad 482 DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus 0 0 0 0 smennennnnnenn 482 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns ssscscssssssssssessesseeees 483 User Programmable DME Transition Mode sen 483 Chapter 7 Frame Memory Still Image Operations sssesesensennzznosnnnensnnonnsnneensnsennoenoennsenseeneenoennoea 490 Preparationi si e a a seule E 490 Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu meennnenneneznznnnezz 490 Selecting an Input Image ens nee 494 Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory eee 495 Capturing an Input Image Freeze sse eneeennnznnnnn 496 Recalling Still Ima eS iss ii tad tain ee ent a 500 Inverting the Field
20. 466 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings Selecting a DME wipe pattern by a menu operation 1 2 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF1 Ich for one channel mode HF2 2ch for two channel mode or HF3 3ch for three channel mode Select the desired DME wipe pattern group with one of the following buttons Slide Squeeze slide and squeeze Split Door split and door Flip Tumble flip tumble Mirror Sphere mirror and sphere Character Trail character trail Wave Ripple wave and ripple Page Turn Roll page turn and page roll Frame I O PinP frame in out and picture in picture 2D Trans 3D Trans 2D trans and 3D trans Sparkle Split Slide sparkle and split slide Mosaic Defocus mosaic and defocus Brick brick User Program user programmable DME Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in one channel mode All of the above groups except for Brick Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in two channel mode Slide Squeeze Page Turn Roll Frame I O PinP 3D Trans Brick and User Program Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in three channel mode User Program and Brick For details of DME wipe patterns see Types of DME Wipe Pattern page 72 and DME Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 566 The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen Press the button to select the desired pattern For a key transition the page turn page roll and picture in picture cannot be used Adj
21. CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPTI LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 Recalling Files You can recall all of the saved files on the hard disk drive into frame memory 1 Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the procedure Saving Files page 533 It is not possible to select a directory logical drive on which files are not saved 2 Press Restore A popup window for confirming file recall appears When you recall the files any existing data in frame memory is lost immediately before the recalling operations 3 Press Yes This starts the file recall operation A progress bar and numerical indication appear to show the progress of the operation When the operation is completed a popup window reading Completed appears 4 Press OK External Hard Disk Drive Access 535 Kowa ewes 7 Je deu9 Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo 536 External Hard Disk Drive Access Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds Color Background Setting Operations sssssesenssneonnoennsensennsensenssenoes 538 Color Background Settings Menu Lm eneennnnnennenennznnnsna 538 Basic Color Background Setting Operations s seen 538 spunosbyoeg 10jo09 8 JaIdeuQ Color Background Setting Operations You carry out color background settings in the Color Bkgd menu This section describes the settings menu for color background 1 as an example For an
22. For an overview of the key types see page 48 Carry out the following settings as required depending on the key type selected in step 2 To enable clean mode see page 49 for a luminance key linear key or color vector key Select Clean Mode so that it is set on When clean mode is enabled key fill is added to the background without cutting out with key source When chroma key is selected Select Chroma Adjust to access the Chroma Adjust menu see page 382 and make the required settings When a wipe pattern key is selected In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu see page 438 select the pattern and set any modifiers then return to the M E 1 PKevi menu When a key wipe pattern key is selected In the M E 1 PKevi gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust menu see page 455 carry out pattern selection and modifier setting then return to the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu For a wipe pattern selected for a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key the Edge and Direction modifier settings are not available Set the parameters e When a luminance key or linear key is selected Key Setting Operations Using Menus 379 sfog vp saydeyo skey p 13 dey9 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for generating the 109 59 to 7 31 key signal Gain Key sensitivity 100 00 to 100 00 Density Key density 0 00 to 100 00 Filter Filter coefficient 1to99 a Setting this value t
23. In the Frame Memory menu effect creation follows the image file names Of the eight characters in the file names if files have the same characters except for the last three characters they are treated as an image file group and the effect is created with the last three numeric characters in sequence When creating the effect in pair mode see page 87 the files used must be main files and sub files with the same last three numeric characters in the file name Frame Memory Clip Function The frame memory clip function is not supported on the MVS 8000 What is a frame memory clip Movies can be read into frame memory and recalled and played back A movie held in frame memory is called a frame memory clip A frame memory clip can be named using up to four characters For details of frame memory clip names see Continuously capturing still images record page 91 Ancillary data In a frame memory clip in addition to the video image you can also record and play back ancillary data which can be used as embedded audio MVS 8000A and MVS 8000G only To record the ancillary data in the Setup menu the frame memory saving mode must be set to save with ancillary data see Saving a frame memory clip including ancillary data in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e With this setting the saving mode for still images also changes to save with ancillary data but when playing back a still image the ancill
24. Memory Sticks This unit has been confirmed to operate with those of the following Memory Sticks that have a capacity of 8 GB gigabytes or less However operation with all Memory Sticks is not guaranteed e Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO Memory Stick Duo Memory Stick PRO Duo When using a Memory Stick PRO high rate data transfer using parallel interface is not supported A MagicGate Memory Stick can also be used but this system does not support the MagicGate function When using a Memory Stick Duo be sure to use it with a Memory Stick Duo Adaptor MSAC M2 or equivalent If you insert a Memory Stick Duo without using the adaptor there is the possibility that the stick cannot be removed resulting in a serious accident Handling Memory Sticks When using Memory Sticks pay attention to the following points Do not touch the connector of the Memory Stick with anything including your finger or metallic objects Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to the Memory Stick labeling position Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the labeling position Carry and store the Memory Stick in its case Do not strike bend or drop the Memory Stick Do not disassemble or modify the Memory Stick Do not allow the Memory Stick to get wet Do not use or store the Memory
25. P4 0 t 0 t 0 t 70 95100 70 95100 95 100 Last 30 Last 5 Off t transition execution time y change in transition and cropping amount DME Wipe Modify Clear Press Default Recall at the lower left of the menu display turning it on then press VF6 DME Wipe to return the DME wipe settings to their initial status For details of menu operations see Menu Operations page 323 476 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions You carry out independent key transition DME wipe setting operations using the DME Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer For an overview of independent key transitions see page 37 This section describes the independent key transition DME wipe settings taking the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust menu as an example Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings Accessing the independent key transition DME wipe settings menu As an example to access the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust menu carry out the following operation e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and select VF1 Keyl and HF6 Transition to display the Transition menu for key 1 Next press DME Wipe Adjust Press the key delegation button Key1 in the independent key transition control block of the M E 1 bank then press the independent key tra
26. Settings Relating to Signal Inputs Input Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 For an overview of the concepts involved see Copy and Swap page 98 For details of color corrector copy and swap see Chapter 19 Color Corrector Volume 2 Copying and swapping wipe data As an example to copy or swap wipe data use the following procedure 1 In the Copy Swap menu select HF3 Wipe The Copy Swap gt Wipe menu appears The status area shows lists for the copy swap source on the left and the copy swap destination on the right 2 In the lt Data Select gt group select either of the following Wipe The operation applies to wipes in the transition control block Basic Copy and Swap Operations Key Wipe The operation applies to wipes in the independent key transition control block 3 Using any of the following methods select the data to be copied or swapped e Press directly on the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knobs to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Left No Select data for copy swap to 4 4 source jeter 2 Right No Select data for copy swap 4 to 42 destination 110 16 a Transition control block wipe data b Independent key transition control block wipe data For details of the data affected see Copy and Swap page 98 4 To copy press Copy and to swap press Swap
27. The Misc gt Enable gt Port Enable menu appears 2 In the lt DME Override gt group select the DME override mode DME Override When a switcher snapshot or effect using a DME is recalled forcibly select the DME that was used when saving On Air Protect The operation is the same as the DME override function except that a DME being used by an M E bank or P P bank that is on air will not be forcibly selected If effects using the same DME channel are selected simultaneously in two or more regions the DME is selected with the order of precedence P P gt M E1 gt M E2 gt M E3 Enabling or disabling control from System Manager By installing the BZPS 8000 System Management Software System Manager you can use a computer connected on a network for management of some switcher data and control operations To enable or disable this function use the following procedure 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button MISC then select VF1 Enable and HF1 Port Enable The Misc gt Enable gt Port Enable menu appears 2 Press System Manager Each time you press the button toggles between enable and disable Editing Keyboard Settings The following operations are only possible when a license for the BZS 8050 Editing Control Software is activated For details of license registration see Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Misc Menu Operati
28. The key source name display key snapshot button which you pressed lights yellow If you save a key snapshot in a register for which the button is lit orange or yellow the existing contents of the register are overwritten Recalling a key snapshot For example the following procedure recalls the state of the M E 1 key 3 settings 1 2 Key Snapshots In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the K SS button in the key 3 control block turning it on Press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register you want to recall The button you pressed lights yellow and this recalls the key settings excluding the key insertion state on off and key priority Chapter 5 Wipes Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings sssesenssnnsnnsennoensnnonnsennennonssensenc 438 WapersetiinesIMenUgte tr ce acu comuirnu nm uaconec muerte R 438 Wipe PattermSclectionwrct sca A ANA NON 438 Batters Mixer IN NIE 441 Setting Wipe Modifiers emeen E E S 443 Wipe Modity Clean n e E E EAE E EE 454 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions ssssssnssensensennoennenc 455 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings 455 Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers 0 456 Wipe Snapshots es cscccscccscccesnsccsssncsrsssncsacseacsasserscsosentevsseatesssesteasscastencesecesesed 460 Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad 460 Wipe Snapshot O
29. The software described herein may also be governed by the terms of a separate user license agreement Functions Newly Supported in Version 7 20 The functions newly supported in the MVS 8000 system version 7 20 are as follows Functions relating to switcher processor Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 System 1080P 59 94 and 1080P 50 formats 7313 245 and dual link support 2 Transition Preset color mix with an image 1171 342 selected on the utility 2 bus in place of a color matte b Key Fixing key fill and key source in key 1112 4 55 393 drop off mode frame delay mode o Frame memorv Clip transition P 1176 1 42 93 Recording and plavback of ancillarv 2525 7316 8 92 314 data b Recording and recalling of extended 2521 2522 87 clip 9 2523 DME Applying DME effects to a maximum of 7337 7 423 three kevs on the SDI interface in combination with a dedicated interface gt Files e File operations of extended clips 7151 7151 1 205 468 476 e Converting between frame memory 7162 482 clips and extended clips 9 e Importing extended clips 9 Macros Creating and editing macro timelines 5441 5441 1 216 546 Macro take operation using a GPI input 7325 1 7352 369 436 Setting a macro attachment without 7326 6 381 530 changing cross points Recalling frame memory clips 212 Recording with external devices 212
30. When the audio mixer is linked in setup you can carry out an auto transition and also switch the sound with the audio mixer See Transition linked to the audio mixer page 342 Auto transitions Cut A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video When the next transition is a key transition the key cuts in or out instantaneously Auto transition The transition from the current video to the new video is carried out automatically at a constant rate using the transition effect selected as the transition type You can set the transition rate in advance See Setting the Transition Rate page 352 Manual transitions Using the fader lever you can manually control the progress of the transition Moving the fader lever from one end of its travel to the other completes the transition Flip flop mode and bus fixed mode The following describes the difference between flip flop mode and bus fixed mode taking an M E bank as an example the functionality is the same however on the PGM PST bank Normally when a background transition is carried out on an M E bank the signals selected on the A and B rows of cross point buttons are interchanged at the end of the transition That is to say except during a transition the background output is always from the background A bus This is called flip flop mode The alternative is known as bus fixed mode in which there is no bus interchange
31. e Allow a transition to complete before carrying out main and sub delegation switching e The sub background A bus utility 2 bus is shared with wipe edge border fill Making a change to one affects the other e Even if the wipe border width is set to the same numeric value for main and sub the same image is not obtained e Changing the position of the wipe pattern for sub also changes the pattern size Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode The following functions are not available for sub Data copy and swap Default recall except for parametric recall M E link TRANS button function see page 268 TRACE button function see page 270 AUTO button function see page 309 Re entry is limited to four levels Re entry is not possible for main and sub of the same M E However this restriction can be removed For details see Enabling re entry between the main and sub sides of the same M E bank page 240 In the following cases a transition using the fader lever may not be performed correctly When the main and sub bus toggle modes are set differently For a pattern mix preset color mix and so on For an Internal bus link GPI link or External bus link the Utility 2 bus cannot be selected Screen aspect show key and IMCRO ATTCH ENBLI button settings are common to main and sub If a snapshot is recalled simultaneously for main and sub or a keyframe is executed
32. ens nee 232 Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode When Sharing a Switcher Bank i i iii iii a tai b da iva kd 237 Optional Operations sisisi at 237 Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode ss nnennneenn 241 Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode 242 Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode nn 243 Dual Link Support cccssscsseccsscscccsccsccssscsessescsesscssscssesssesscssseesssssees 245 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel ssssessonenzonsnnen 251 Control Panel Example Configuration 1 With Standard Transition Modules e eeenennennzznnenz 251 Control Panel Example Configuration 2 With Simple Transition Modules ss nnennnennenan 252 Control Panel Example Configuration 3 With Compact Transition Modules ss nnnenan 255 Cross Point Control Block nn nennnnnenanenn nanna nena nanna 256 Transition Control Block Standard TVpe seen 260 Flexi Pad Control Block Standard Tvpe sen 264 Key Control Block isisisi rrsantienen riiai iiss 267 Device Control Block Trackball nn eneenenennnaznnenanznnzni 271 Device Control Block Joystick nn nrenesnnn ses 277 Device Control Block Search Dial mn eeennennzznnnnnzzznnezzna 278 Kevframe Control Block pda ners ness 281 Numeric Keypad Control Block eneenennnnnznennennenn 284 Fade to Black Control Block enennennnnena nanna ennnn
33. sse 194 Panel Settpi ei i A nie i iad Roa S 195 SWitcher Setups Mindene eee Aid Be whale ees 198 DME Setuipi i iii i 202 Setup Relating to DCU Input Output eee nee 202 Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface 203 Simple Connection to MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel OPUON cena nae Gertee Serie iia hav O 204 l UI L SESS 205 MarS sscssssssssrsssscsssscsesscsesscssssesosscsssecssssesossesonsessssesseeessesessesessassssassseeceees 210 OVERVIEW ii conse ava ite secedeavetsaviads f E tee were A AS 210 Macro Creation and Editing eeeseceseceeceseseeeeseseeeeeeseeeaeens 212 Macro EXeCutiom iii i i seeds e BE 215 Macro Timelines vies ii cid a A cite oh fa pan pana neues 216 Macro Editing Using Menus sen enennnnenzznnnnnzznnsnnnz nazz 218 Macro Attachmemt 0 0 0 sseesrenesennznnnznznenznnzzanenznnzanestnnntansnanazana 218 Menu Macros iii e p raa p Ee 222 Color Corrector ssssnensanznnanennanennenensenensanensenensenentenentenensenensenensenensenene 223 Simple P P Software ssesesnsennzznnneennzzznenaoenoennoaneeneenseeneensenteensennoeneen 227 OVET VIEW i aE A a da a 227 Restrictions on Use sieb it i dg 227 Multi Program 2 sesnesnsnnenennznnenaonnonzonsensensensensensensenseneensenseneenenneeneez 230 Table of Contents 7 8 OVERVIEW ii EE ees ae ee 230 Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2 232 Basic Operations Required
34. 3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 4 Hue Delav Hue delav 180 00 to 180 00 5 Black Level Y signal black level 7 31 to 109 59 To return the settings to the default values press Unity in the lt Video Process gt group When a pair setting is active it is coupled to the video process on off setting but the above parameter settings are only valid for frame memory source bus The pair setting cannot be used to set the frame memory source bus 2 If you want to set video process for frame memory source bus 1 only with the pair setting when old settings for frame memory source bus 2 remain return the frame memory source bus 2 settings to their default values When setting video process for the frame memory source bus 2 disable the pair setting Setting a mask Masks can be set separately for frame memory source buses 1 and 2 To apply a mask to the signal selected on frame memory source bus 1 for example use the following procedure in the Still gt Freeze Store menu 1 Press Box Mask turning it on 2 Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top position 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Left position 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Right position 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Bottom position 100 00 to 100 00 3 To link the masks on frame memory source buses 1 and 2 press Mask Link turning it on Still Imag
35. Blue selected as the reference channel Amber selected but not the reference channel Black not selected Press one of these to select which of the selected outputs FM1 and FM2 in the example shown the operation applies to The following information appears on the button Status display File name e g image001 and thumbnail when a file is output Black when a black signal is output Through when the input image is output Freeze when a freeze is output Composite when a composite image is processed Record when continuously capturing images record Still duration display When a still image is selected Still is shown When a clip is selected a duration indication such as 00 00 10 is shown Reposition Lock status display This shows R when the reposition function see page 507 is on and shows L when the lock function see page 508 is on Extended clip display For an extended clip an E appears Still Image Operations Ancillary data attached clip display For an ancillary data attached clip an A appears Pair selection button Select the pair to be displayed in the target FM selection buttons in the following figure the pair of FM1 and FM2 is selected Status display Black 4 Black 6 7 Black 8 The border color shows the status as follows Blue selected as the reference channel Amber selected but not the reference channel Black not selected
36. Changing the registers for saving 7142 3 502 macros Color corrector All the internal signals of the switcher 7335 410 can be selected for color correction actions triggered by control panel or DCU GPI output Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 Multi program 2 Re entry between the main and sub 7331 240 sides of the same M E bank b When recalling snapshot keys on main 239 or sub side can be recalled independently Diagnosis Displaying communication status P 7431 567 a For MVS 8000G only b For other than MVS 8000 c For MVS 8000G 8000GSF only d For MVS 8000A or MVS 8000G only Functions relating to operability Classification Functions supported Menu No See page Vol 1 Vol 2 Control panel Inhibiting cross point button operations 7321 12 31 334 7324 Distinguishable color of the shifted 7322 x1 346 button numbers in the Xpt Assign menu External devices Making the USB primary setting 7317 316 automatic Macros Holding down PRE MCRO and POST 218 259 531 MCRO buttons together makes it possible to set a macro attachment in macro only mode Files 40 or more directories can be created 71xx 485 Snapshot Wipe and DME wipe snapshot 1157 1167 182 operations with menu Functions relating to external devices Classification Functions supported Menu No See p
37. Key Setting Operations Using Menus Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Position V Vertical position 100 00 to 100 00 2 3 Size Size 1 00 to 100 00 a The setting ranges depend on the signal format screen aspect ratio and size settings 5 Select Auto Start in the lt Auto gt group This executes an auto chroma key based on the color specified by the sample selector and displays the composite image on the monitor Making key active adjustments When the key active function is on the composite image is output to the monitor and you can watch the monitor while manually adjusting the keying When the key active function is off only the foreground image appears Set this off when manually adjusting color cancel see the next section 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Key Active on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Chroma key reference level 0 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Key gain 100 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 4 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 5 Filter Filter coefficient 1to9 Making color cancel adjustments If the background color is leaking into the foreground video turning the color cancel function on allows you to eliminate this leakage 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu turn Key Active off Only the foreground image appears on the monitor 2 In the lt Color Cancel gt group set
38. SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Transitions In the M E banks and PGM PST bank the switch from the current video stream appearing on the corresponding program monitor to a new video stream is referred to as a transition Selecting the Next Transition To execute a transition it is first necessary to decide how the image will be changed as a result of the transition This selection is carried out using the next transition selection buttons see page 261 in the transition control block of each M E or PGM PST bank For details of operations Basic Operating Procedure page 340 In the M E banks and PGM PST bank you can change one of the images the background and keys 1 to 4 downstream keys 1 to 4 in the PGM PST bank and also vary combinations of these simultaneously The following are examples of transition Changing the background A background transition switches from the video currently selected on the background A bus the current video to the video selected on the background B bus the new video Background A Background B In the default selection of flip flop mode see page 45 the background always switches in the direction from the A bus to the B bus When the transition completes the cross point selections on the A and B buses are interchanged 34 Transitions Inserting and deleting a key You can insert one or more of the four keys downstream keys on the PGM PST bank If you
39. WIPE DME or the TRANS RATE button For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode see page 352 3 Press the ENTR button 366 Independent Key Transitions Setting the independent key transition rate in the numeric keypad control block You cannot use the numeric keypad control block to set the transition rate for a simple transition 1 In the numeric keypad control block hold down the TRANS RATE button and in the independent key transition control block press the delegation button KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank for the key for which you want to set the transition rate The numeric keypad control block changes to the mode for inputting the independent key transition rate and its display now shows the corresponding region name and the current transition rate set for the region 2 With the numeric keypad enter the transition rate e Enter a value of up to three digits e To clear the entry value press the CLR button For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode see page 352 3 Press the ENTER button This confirms the entry and the selected region name and the set transition rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display To enter a difference from the current value After pressing the button enter the difference and press the TRIM button To change the sign or press the button Setting the independent key transiti
40. When the 2ND button is lit Different buses can be assigned to the Ist row buttons and 2nd row buttons When the 32nd button is set as a shift button the Ist row buttons and 2nd row buttons both have the following button numbers Auxiliary bus control block button numbers 2ND button lit Button Number when the shift Number when the shift button is not pressed button is pressed From the left end to the 31st 1 to 31 32 to 62 button Reentry buttons 121 to 124 125 to 128 Inhibiting cross point button operations For each cross point button you can temporarily inhibit operations Signal Selection SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 32 This setting is cleared when you reset the control panel Assigning a button to the function of disabling cross point button operation You can assign the button to be used for the operation to the PRE MCRO button in setup See Chapter 16 Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu Volume 2 You can also use the Inhibit Set and Inhibit All Clear functions assigned to user preference buttons See Chapter 16 Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu Volume 2 Buses for which operations can be inhibited This setting applies to the AUX control block and switcher bank cross point buttons For example if you make the setting for one cross point button in a switcher bank this inhibits operation of all cross point buttons with the same number
41. While the UTIL button is held down the background B bus changes to the utility 2 bus To enable the UTIL button its operation mode must be set to Hold beforehand See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 When Matte is selected In the same Edge Direction menu press Matte Adjust to display the Matte Adjust menu then adjust the single color or two color combination color matte Select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination in the lt Edge Matte gt group Flat Color Adjust color 1 with the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 When you select Mix Color for a two color combination see the next paragraph Carrying out a color mix for the edge fill matte When you selected Matte for the border or soft border edge fill you can combine color 1 and color 2 For the combination you can use not only a normal wipe generator pattern but also the dedicated color mix pattern 1 In the lt Edge Fill gt group of the Edge Direction menu select Matte and press Matte Adjust The Matte Adjust menu appears 2 In the lt Edge Matte gt group select Mix Color turning it on 3 In the lt Mix Pattern gt group make one of the following selections Wipe Use the wipe pattern selected for the tra
42. button me 33 E 22 5 33 ma sz a m lt INH button XPT HOLD ABUW1234 Memory recall section UNDO button Transition type selection buttons You can assign these buttons in setup to any transition type see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Press any of the following buttons turning it on to select the transition type Press one of these buttons turning it on to determine the type of the next transition for a background To select the key transition type hold down the KEY1 or KEY2 button and press one of the following buttons turning it on When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 two or more of the following buttons may light MIX In a background transition the new video fades in as the current video fades out During the transition the overall signal level is maintained at 100 In a key transition the key fades in for insertion or out for removal NAM non additive mix The current and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progre
43. 1 2 Le Keyframe deletion position and the change in effect duration Keyframes 173 suonouny 0008 SAN 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Delay setting You can set the delay from the time of executing an operation to run the effect and the effect actually starting that is the delay until the first keyframe You can make this setting in the keyframe control block See Time Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Note that changing the delay does not alter the duration of the effect Paths The term path refers to the specification of how interpolation is carried out from one keyframe to the next For details of the path setting procedure see Path Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Switcher path settings Carry out path settings in the Key Frame menu For each menu the following settings are available Keyframes M E 1 to M E 3 and P P menus Item M E1 to M E3 P P All Paths that can be set For each M E and PGM PST path settings for the following items are made simultaneously Key1 to Key4 Key 1 All to Key 4 All Overall path settings for items relating to keys 1 to 4 are made simultaneously Source Key source path for keys 1 to 4 Fill Key fill path for keys 1 to 4 Proc Proc path for keys 1 to 4 Trans Transition path for keys 1 to 4 Bkgd Util Overall path settings for items relating to Bkgd Uti
44. Aux Mon AUX bus settings page 555 CCR CCR Color corrector settings Chapter 19 Volume2 COPY Copy Swap Copy and swap settings page 544 SWAP MISC Misc Safe title settings page 548 STATS Status Status display Chapter 11 Volume2 DME DME DME special effect settings Chapter 11 Volume 2 GLB EFF Global Effect Global effect settings Chapter 11 Volume 2 DEV Device Settings for external device Chapter 12 Volume 2 operation MCRO Macro Macro register settings Chapter 18 Volume 2 KEY Key Frame Keyframe settings Chapter 13 Volume 2 FRAME EFF Effect Keyframe effect register settings Chapter 13 Volume 2 SNAP Snapshot Snapshot register settings Chapter 14 Volume 2 SHOT SHOTBOX Shotbox Shotbox register settings Chapter 15 Volume 2 FILE File File settings Chapter 17 Volume 2 ENG Engineering Setup Setup functions Chapter 16 Volume 2 SETUP DIAG Diagnosis Status information display Chapter 20 Volume 2 Basic Menu Operations 315 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ joued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ Menus accessed by pressing a button twice For relevant buttons other than the top buttons of each control block together with menu selection buttons pressing twice in the menus they recall XX represents the rapid succession directly recalls a related HF menu recalled last in the VF menu menu page The following table lists these Cross point control block
45. Control block Event Auxiliary bus control block Cross point selection Cross point selection in router control mode Cross point control block e Cross point selection e Recalling a function assigned to a key 2 row button Control block Transition control block standard type Event Auto transition and cut for the transition execution section Auto transition and key on off for the independent key transition execution section a Next transition setting Transition type selection Pattern limit on off Key snapshot recall VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips playback b VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips stop b VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips cue up P simple tvpe Transition execution section take Tansition tvpe selection Pattern limit on off compact tvpe Transition execution section auto transition and cut Independent kev transition execution section auto transition Next transition setting Transition type selection Pattern limit on off VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips playback gt VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips stop VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips cue up P Independent key transition control block Independent key transition execution section take and key on off 2 simple type e Key snapshot recall e Selection of independent key transition ty
46. Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the settings For each of the M E and PGM PST banks you can display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate and change the settings For more details see Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings page 553 Pattern Limit There are two ways of setting a pattern limit either by operating the fader lever to save the fader position or by using the Wipe menu or DME Wipe menu to access the Edge Direction menu for the M E or PGM PST bank For an overview of the pattern limits see page 46 Executing a Transition 355 SUOMSUBIL g saydeyo SUOIISUBIL g 19JdEUQ e A pattern limit only applies when a wipe or DME wipe is selected as the transition type e A pattern limit cannot be applied to an independent key transition see page 364 ON ON ON ON es 1234123412341234 I r gt me lt TRANS P NAM TRANS PVW button PE EIMER Button ee LIMIT SET button Transition control block standard type Setting the pattern limit with the fader lever 1 Move the fader lever to the position corresponding to a particular pattern size e First make sure that the PTN LIMIT button is off e Toch
47. Fade to black control block Carrving out a fade to black To carry out a fade to black press the FTB button in the fade to black control block The fade to black is carried out with the transition rate set for the program output of the PGM PST bank During the transition the FTB button lights amber When the transition completes the video is completely black the button lit color changes to red For an overview of the fade to black see page 47 Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate Setting the fade to black transition rate 1 In the PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears Fade to Black 369 suolisuel 19 JdEU SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo 370 2 Select FTB 3 Turn the knob to set the fade to black transition rate Knob 1 Parameter Transition Rate Adjustment Transition rate Setting values 0 to 999 frame count Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the settings You can also display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate for each of the M E and PGM PST banks and change the settings For more details see Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings page 553 Fade to Black Simple Transition The simple transitions refer to the transitions carried out using the simple type transition c
48. In this mode when the fader lever is at the top of its travel the output from the A bus is always 100 and when the fader lever is at the bottom of its travel the output from the B bus is 100 Transitions 45 suonouny 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 46 Flip flop mode COBO sBMoooo Bus fixed mode s SOMO jw Buttons lit A B a IBOOOQOL e POWO Flip flop mode and bus fixed mode For details of fader lever operation in bus fixed mode see page 361 Transition preview With the preview output of the M E banks and PGM PST bank you can check the effect of a transition in advance To carry out a transition preview press the TRANS PVW button in the transition control block See Transition Preview page 363 In multi program mode DSK mode page 199 or bus fixed mode page 45 it is not possible to carry out a transition preview Pattern limit Transitions When a wipe or DME wipe pattern is selected for the transition you can specify the range of movement of the wipe pattern through the course of the transition for each bank independently When the pattern limit function is enabled carrying out a transition results in the following effect for example settings e When the limit value is set to 50 the effect at the end of the transition is the same as when the fader lever is at the center position in the normal case
49. Key memory If a DME is being used on the source M E bank then if for example there are insufficient DME channels it may not be possible to select the DME There are no such restrictions on a swap Copy and Swap Keyer copy and keyer swap You can carry out copy and swap operations among the 16 keyers listed in the following table Target bank Target keyer Target data M E 1 Keys 1 to 4 Key settings excluding the following data M E 2 items M E 3 e Setup data PGM PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 e Key snapshots e Key memory If a DME is being used on the source keyer for a copy or either keyer for a swap then if for example there are insufficient DME channels or the limit on using DME channels within an M E bank is exceeded it may not be possible to select the DME Wipe copy and wipe swap You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the banks listed in the following table Target bank Target data M E 1 Wipe settings M E 2 It is not however possible to carry out copy or swap involving M E 3 independent key transition wipe settings PGM PST Wipe copy and wipe swap in the independent key transition control block You can copy and swap the wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in the following table Target bank Target keyer Target data M E 1 Keys 1 to 4 Wipe settings in the independent key M E 2 transition control block M E 3 It is not how
50. Picture in picture Page turn i 1251 51 f EN K RI wr 1309 b 1310 4 1311 A RE 312 fu e K A FM b i 1313 1315 1316 1317 A K N A u 1318 1341 1342 IK 1343 ak 1344 pn 1345 rN DME Wipe Pattern List Page roll Mirror 5 K 7 a 1329 b 1330 4 1331 A K 1332 gt i K A rE ye 1333 1335 1336 1337 ALR 1338 1346 1347 1348 z ka x lt 3 o 1349 1350 i 1355 1356 1357 1358 DME Wipe Pattern List 571 L SLunjoA xipueddv 572 Sphere 1365 Vi Character trail Wave 1378 Ripple 1381 DME Wipe Pattern List Split slide 1384 1385 1386 1387 e a EZ 1388 1389 y IR Sw Sparkle 1391 1398 Mosaic 1701 MOSAIC 1 Defocus 1702 DME Wipe Pattern List 573 L auuNjoA xIpueddy L SLunjoA xipueddy 574 User programmable DME The illustrations for patterns 1901 to 1999 show an effect register number or register name e e 1999 199 DME Wipe Pattern List DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two Channel Mode Slide Squeeze 3D trans 2601 2602 2603 2604
51. See Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 560 You can also carry out the pattern selection by pressing the Mix Ptn Select button to display the Mix Ptn Select menu Select any pattern appearing in the Mix Ptn Select menu standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 and you can then adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 then adjust the parameters To adjust color 1 set Color 1 on and to adjust color 2 set Color 2 on If required set the pattern modifiers e When turning Position on and setting the pattern position Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 65 e When turning Multi on and using replications of the same pattern Color Background Setting Operations 539 Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 spunosbyoeg 10 09 8 saldeyp spunosbyoeg 1000 g JaIdeuQ 540 Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 42 a S
52. Split 64 135 444 566 fader 373 slide 135 Spotlighting 143 Spring 70 453 Squeeze 567 575 580 Standard wipe patterns 60 Standard wipes 560 Start up state 192 Status area 322 Status menu 556 STOP NEXT KF button 284 Sub subsidiary mask 56 using 399 414 Subsidiary menu site 335 SUPER MIX 261 311 Super mix 42 settings 349 Swap 98 544 Swirl 139 Switcher setup 198 System configuration 187 features 22 reset 192 setup 187 T Tallv interface setup 203 Target coordinate space 110 TC button 330 Temporarv attributes 169 184 Three dimensional coordinate space 110 parameter display 122 parameters 112 transformations 110 Time offset execution 39 Timecode input mode 352 Top menu list 313 Top menu selection buttons 294 Top menu window 332 TRACE button 270 Trail 142 TRANS PVW button 262 312 Transformation operation modes 116 Transition auto 45 execution 44 351 indicator 307 manual 45 mode 171 next 34 operating procedure 340 preview 46 363 Transition control block simple type 299 standard type 260 Transition execution section 261 302 311 with the fader lever 359 Transition indicator 261 311 function 351 Transition rate 352 display 262 311 setting by a menu operation 355 setting in the Flexi Pad control block 353 setting in the MISC menu 553 setting in the numeric keypad control block 354 Transition type 41 selecting by a menu operation 348 selection buttons 261 301 311 Trim button 330 Tw
53. The signal determining how the background is cut out is termed key source and the signal that replaces the cut out part is termed key fill The system component responsible for processing a key is referred to as a keyer Each M E bank and the PGM PST bank has four keyers and all of these keyers provide the same functions Key Types The key type indicates the manner in which the key source signal is used to cut out the background In each bank you can use the following key types You can select the key type using the key type selection buttons in the key control block or by a setting in the Type menu for the keyer See Key Type Setting page 379 e Luminance key e Linear key Color vector key Chroma key Wipe pattern key Key wipe pattern key Luminance key The background is cut out according to the luminance Y of the key source signal and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the background signal Linear key This is a type of luminance key but there is a reduced variability in gain allowing more precise adjustment Color vector key Keys The key signal is created from a combination of the luminance and chrominance components of the key source signal When perfect keying is not possible with a luminance key this allows a key signal to be created even if the luminance level is low provided that the colors have high saturation Clean mode In a luminance key l
54. The transition immediately starts and the button lights amber When the transition completes the button goes off K SS key snapshot button Pressing this button turning it on enables the key snapshot mode In this mode you can save and recall key snapshots Key source name display key snapshot buttons Each column of two buttons relates to the corresponding downstream key 1 or 2 The upper button displays the name of the key fill signal selected for the key and the lower button shows the transition rate In key snapshot mode these buttons correspond to registers to 4 of the keyer selected with the key delegation buttons and pressing a button recalls the key snapshot To save a key snapshot hold down the STORE button in the numeric keypad control block and press the button for the desired register FTB fade to black button Press this button to fade to black the program output of the PGM PST bank at the set transition rate You can set the fade to black transition rate in the menu AUTO button When this button is pressed the M E or PGM PST bank preview signal selected on the edit preview bus is automatically switched to the program signal depending on the on air status Preview selection buttons Press one of these buttons to select a signal on the edit preview bus Each button can be assigned to any preview output in setup see Chapter 16 Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu
55. This carries out the copy or swap To undo a copy or swap Press Undo to return to the state before the copy or swap was carried out Copy by Button Operation You can carry out the following copy operations by a simple button operation e M E copy e Keyer copy e Wipe copy e DME wipe copy For an overview of the copy function see Copy and Swap page 98 Basic button operation The basic button operation is to hold down the copy source button then press the destination button You can undo the last operation using Undo in the menu see page 545 Basic Copy and Swap Operations 545 dems pue Adop 6 Ja dey9 dems pue Adoy 6 Jajdeup 546 M E copy button operation In the Flexi Pad control block of each M E bank use the SNAPSHOT button To copy from M E 1 to M E 2 In the M E 1 Flexi Pad control block hold down the SNAPSHOT button then press the SNAPSHOT button in the M E 2 Flexi Pad control block Keyer copy button operation To specify the copy source use the key delegation buttons in the key control block and to specify the copy destination use the key delegation buttons in the independent key transition control block To copy from M E 1 key 1 to M E 2 key 2 In the key control block M E delegation buttons press M E1 turning it on then hold down the KEY 1 button and in the M E 2 independent key transition control block press the KEY2 button Wipe copy button operation
56. This closes the numeric keypad window TC timecode button When the numeric keypad window is opened for a setting requiring a timecode value to be entered this button appears in a depressed state Basic Menu Operations You can enter a timecode value in the range that depends on the signal format see page 189 as follows 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 nn where nn number of frames per second 1 minus button This toggles the sign of the entered value When it is pressed the value is negative Clear button This clears the input It does not change the parameter setting Trim button After entering the difference from the current value press this button to confirm the numeric input Enter button This confirms the entered value If correctly set the numeric keypad window closes If not correctly set the input display changes color Keyboard window Note space comma dot lt gt Except when changing source names the aia following characters cannot be used The same applies to macro file editing 0 BS button Item display Shift button Caps Lock button Input string Space button Q Right button Enter button Close button Enler Clear Del Lefi Righ Left button Del button Clear button Item display This is the name of the parameter being set in the keyboard window Input strin
57. see To apply color to a border page 426 Applying a drop shadow 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key gt Enhanced Effect menu press Dual Rszr Effect turning it on 2 Press Drop Shadow turning it on 3 Set the parameters The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of signal format SD HD and aspect ratio 4 3 16 9 selected in the system as follows e SD format 428 Resizer Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal position of shadow 8 00 to 8 00 2 V Vertical position of shadow 6 00 to 6 00 4 3 4 50 to 4 50 16 9 Size Shadow size 0 00 to 2 00 Soft 4 Softness of shadow 0 00 to 100 00 5 Density Density of shadow 0 00 to 100 00 a Shared with the wide key border Soft value e HD format Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal position of shadow 24 00 to 24 00 4 3 32 00 to 32 00 16 9 2 V Vertical position of shadow 18 00 to 18 00 3 Size Shadow size 0 00 to 2 00 4 Soft Softness of shadow 0 00 to 100 00 5 Densitv Densitv of shadow 0 00 to 100 00 a Shared with the wide key border Soft value Edge enhancement Adjusting the gain sharpens the image 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key gt Enhanced Effect menu press Edge Enhance turning it on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob jParameter Ad
58. software option selection Extensible system configuration By suitable combination of options the switcher can be configured with various inputs and outputs and different numbers of M E banks The system offers the flexibility to change and expand as required You can connect up to two MVE 8000 8000A or MVE 9000 extensible DME processors each of which provides any number from one to four channels for a maximum of eight channels of DME functionality Powerful external device interfaces By connecting to a Sony routing switcher or similar a large system can be built From the control panel it is also possible to operate other equipment including VTRs and disk recorders Powerful tally system The complete system including routing switcher provides an all inclusive tally system The system can be adapted to different applications and settings using multiple tally outputs including both on air and recording tallies Comprehensive video manipulation M E banks Each mix effects bank M E bank is equipped with four keyers and each keyer is capable not only of chroma keying but also independent key transitions separate from the background transitions The four keys can be freely combined to carry out four different program outputs 22 Features of the MVS 8000 Multi Format Switcher System Powerful frame memory functions In an MVS 8000 system an HDTV system can hold 58 still image frames 88 frames in 720P 59 94 format and a
59. 0 0000 Rotation Spin 0 0000 Axis Location 0 0000 Location Size 1 0000 Aspect 1 0000 Digital Multi Effects DME 115 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Operation mode Default value Perspective x y 0 0000 Perspective z 1 0000 Skew 0 0000 Resetting of parameter values set in the source coordinate space In some transformation operation modes if you switch to the target coordinate space after setting up a three dimensional transformation in the source coordinate space the setting values in the source coordinate space three dimensional parameter values are converted to values in the target coordinate space source target conversion Once a conversion has taken place the original source coordinate space parameters do not return to their original values when you switch back to the source coordinate space They are reset to zeros Source target conversion occurs in the following operation modes e Location XYZ e Rotation Transformation Operation Modes The following operation modes are available for three dimensional DME transformations These operations are carried out in the device control block trackball or joystick For details see Three Dimensional Transformation Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 Location XYZ Moves the image on the x axis y axis or z axis The direction of movement differs depending on whether you are manipulating the
60. 2 User1 e AUXI to AUX48 User2 e Monitor 1 to 8 User3 e Frame Memory 1 to 8 User4 e Color correctors 1 and 2 For details of the Userl to User8 region assignment see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Regions and Registers 165 suonouny 0008 SAW L dojdeuD SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 166 Reference region When multiple regions are selected only one region appears in the displays for menu and numeric keypad operations This is called the reference region The reference region is determined according to the following precedence M E1 gt M E2 gt M E3 gt P P PUserl gt User2 gt User3 gt User4 gt User5 gt User6 gt User7 gt User8 gt DME ch1 gt DME ch2 gt DME ch3 gt DME ch4 gt DME ch5 gt DME ch6 gt DME ch7 gt DME ch8 PDevicel gt Device2 gt Device3 gt Device4 gt Device5 gt Device6 gt Device7 gt Device8 gt Device9 gt Devicel0 PDevicell gt Device12 gt P Bus gt GPI gt Router gt Macro Master region The regions saved in a master snapshot register or master timeline register and the register numbers saved in such regions can be recalled at a time as the master region The master region can be saved or recalled using the numeric keypad control block Registers A register is an area of memory in a device which holds a snapshot keyframe macro and so on For details of macros see page 210 Keyframe effect registers Dedicated ef
61. 2 2 bn heen eet 313 About the Top Menu List eee ns nenenzenenna senza 313 Accessing Menus siti si i o A AT sa 314 Displaying a Menu iii ii e e 321 Interpreting the Menu Screen eee nsa 322 Menu Operations 83 ise p pps e A Sna e 323 Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiarv Menu Site 335 Shortcut Men siesena pea a E Sea E 335 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Control Panel Example Configuration 1 With Standard Transition Modules The MVS 8000 system control panel standard transition modules used in the comprises a number of modules transition control block The following illustration shows a typical 32 button 4 M E configuration with Auxiliary bus control block page 288 M E 1 bank M E 2 bank ooogoogocoog0g0g0g0g0g00000000g00000000 eles le elelzlols levels lele otel a eielaisielsielelelzla clcle M E 3 bank PGM PST program preset bank bt Cross point control block page 256 Control panel configuration 1 left side with standard transition modules Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 251 jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 252 Keyframe control block page 281 Menu control block page 294 Key control block page 267 Device control block page 271 page 277 Memory card USB adaptor block page 295 Memory Stick USB connections b
62. 200 00 to 200 00 2 Y Gain Luminance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 4 Hue Delay Hue delay 180 00 to 180 00 5 Black Level Black level 7 31 to 109 59 To return adjustment values to their defaults Press Unity AUX Menu Operations 555 Oy Nua OSIN OL JojdeuD 913 nue OSIIN OLJejdeuo 556 Status Menu The Status menu shows the following information e Operating status of the DME Viewing the DME operating status To view the DME operating status press the top menu selection button STATS in the menu control block This selects VFI DME Status and the Status menu appears Effect 2 2 Free KF 498 gt DME Status M E 1 KF 2 2 01 00 01 00 DME status display For each DME channel you can see how the DME is being used in the corresponding operation block The display background color also indicates the following differences in the way in which a DME is being used Blue The DME is currently being used in other than the final program output Red The DME is currently being used in the final program output Status Menu Video Process Settings This section describes operations on the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST background A and B buses and utility buses 1 and 2 For these operations use the Misc gt Video Process menu in the respective operating bank For video process settings on oth
63. 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 65 e When turning Multi on and using replications of the same pattern Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 42 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 447 sodiM gJaydeyo sodiM g Jaydeyo a See page 68 e When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob Parameter 1 Aspect Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 67 e When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and slanting the pattern Knob Parameter 1 Angle Adjustment Angle of pattern rotation Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 e When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and rotating the pattern at a constant rate Knob Parameter 1 Speed Adjustment Rotation rate of pattern Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 6 To adjust color 1 set Color 1 on and to adjust color 2 set Color 2 on then adjust the parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 7 To interch
64. 268 Appendix Volume 1 Wipe Pattern List 564 Random Diamond Dust Wipes 270 271 272 273 274 Wipe Pattern List 565 L OLnjoA xipuoddv DME Wipe Pattern List DME Wipe Patterns Available in One Channel Mode L ewnjo xipueddy Slide 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 Split 1011 1012 566 DME Wipe Pattern List Squeeze Door E 1029 Bias beam 1030 1031 1041 1042 1043 1044 BA a B oO 8 x lt 3 1045 1046 1047 1048 3 DME Wipe Pattern List 567 L SLunjoA xipueddv 568 2D trans 1051 1053 1054 1055 1057 1058 1061 1063 1064 1068 3D trans 1071 1074 1076 1077 1091 1092 1093 DME Wipe Pattern List Flip tumble 1101 1102 1103 1104 1109 1110 1121 1122 1124 1131 1132 1133 1135 Frame in out 1201 1203 1204 d i 1205 1206 t 1207 1208 1221 1222 1223 1224 DME Wipe Pattern List 569 L auuNjoA xIpueddy L SLunjoA xipueddv 570
65. 600 frames 1080PsF 24 Approx 600 frames 1080PsF 25 Approx 700 frames Frame Memory 85 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 86 Video format Memory capacity 1080PsF 29 97 Approx 800 frames 1080PsF 30 Approx 800 frames 720P 50 Approx 1400 frames 720P 59 94 Approx 1700 frames SD system Without ancillary data Video format Memory capacity 480i 59 94 Approx 5600 frames 576i 50 Approx 4800 frames With ancillary data Video format Memory capacity 480i 59 94 Approx 4700 frames 576i 50 Approx 3900 frames For the MVS 8000A and MVS 8000G up to two frame memory boards can be installed MKS 8440A for the MVS 8000A MKS 8442G for the MVS 8000G The above stated maximum number applies when one frame memory board is installed When two boards are installed the figures are doubled but of the two boards only one can be used for frame memory clips Note that for the MVS 8000 8000SF MVS 8000ASF and MVS 8000GSF it is not possible to install two frame memory boards For details of operations see Still Image Operations page 490 Types of image and terminology used The following types of image are handled in frame memory Freeze image An input image that has been frozen but not saved to memory Still image A freeze frame that has been saved to memory as a file Each file still file holds just one still image Frame memory c
66. Color Cancel on 3 Adjust the following parameters Key Setting Operations Using Menus 383 sfog vp saideyo skey p 13 dey9 384 4 Set Key Active on Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 5 Filter Filter coefficient 1to9 The chroma key composite image now appears in the monitor Making key signal adjustments for color cancel When the color cancel function is set on you can adjust the key signal for color cancel 1 2 In the lt Color Cancel gt group of the Chroma Adjust menu set Color Cancel on In the lt Color Cancel gt group set Cancel Key on The cancel key is now on and you can now adjust the key signal for color cancel Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Color cancel key reference level 0 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Color cancel key gain 100 00 to 100 00 Make the following settings as required in the lt Color Cancel gt group e When setting Key Position on and adjusting the color cancel key edge position Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Phase Move left and right edges of the Left edge position color cancel key simultaneously value shown 2 Left Move left edge of the color cancel 3 00 to 3 00 key 3 Right Move right edge of the color 3 00 to 3 00 can
67. Density 0 00 to 100 00 Masks There are two masks which can be used to mask off unneeded parts of a key or background or to remove defects and these are known as the main mask and subsidiary mask You can either use the main mask and subsidiary mask independently or at the same time For an overview of the masks see page 55 Using the main mask For example to use the main mask for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF3 Main Mask The Main Mask menu appears 2 In the lt Mask Type gt group select the mask type Key Mask Masks a part of a key Bkgd Mask Masks a part of a background 3 In the lt Mask Source gt group select the mask source Box signal from the dedicated box generator Pattern signal from the dedicated pattern generator 4 Set the mask source parameters e When a box is selected Knob 1 Parameter Top Adjustment Top position Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 397 sfog vp saideyo skey p 13 dey9 398 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Left Left position 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Right position 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Bottom position 100 00 to 100 00 5 Soft Box softness 0 00 to 100 00 e When a pattern is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pat
68. E e A ta 152 External Devices sseseonesnannnnensznenonnenazzannnennonsanoneanensanonennensenensenensenenee 158 Shared Functions for External Device Control 158 Control of P Bus Devicesin o enti iii 159 Control of GPI Devices mn esnnenenenannnsn es an means 160 VTR Disk Recorder Extended VTR Control 161 Regions and Registers ssssnsnnonzennoneensonsenzansonsenonnenneonennennenzonsensensenz 165 REGIONS sisa e ge 165 Registers sa iksi ae a a a ahaa a ee 166 6 Table of Contents Ke a sissssssscesesvstsessscscedionssssonassencssscesecaddeseuascssscdsbestasessescsessescdsvssuasiusses 168 Effectar r aa ai 168 Saving and Recalling Effects senser nee 169 Eife t Attribite ii sikka pr e aa E 169 Effect Editing is ijiet a a b bba et 169 Time Settings ii fissa bo Vs bba iena ut b at sa a e casegieeeats 171 Pat Sa a ATA ATA 174 E E tEXE ULON 4 A A i i vi 180 Master Timelines A a A eaves 181 Snapshots cisscsosscseccecdescsadecsoseasecosvasocssenosassurcenodsssovosvadeesondesedcosiuadsnscedsenseseeoes 182 Snapshot Ty Pes U isie eb a tea steed sh nabs EF AE EN EE 182 Snapshot Attributes seirian iriennerien 183 LEIA EA AR N TEPEN EAA T A E E TEET 185 Shotbox sesreneznznnenennenennenennonennonennenennenenene none none eneneneneeneneenenanens sena one 186 NL A A RTE 187 Overview Of Setup si ss ei ita 187 SY Stem SEUUD sis ab a A Nae AL fa a ob 187 Saving and Recalling Setup Data
69. E switcher processor and a 4 channel DME processor in an HD system the Single Processor Simul mode is available In this mode M E 1 on the switcher processor is linked to M E 3 and M E 2 is linked to P P As a result the M E 1 and M E 2 panel buttons go off and cannot be operated In this mode the screen aspect ratio is fixed as follows Processor Bank or channel Screen aspect ratio Switcher processor M E 3 and P P 16 9 M E 1 and M E 2 4 3 DME processor Channels 1 and 2 16 9 Channels 3 and 4 4 3 Relation between switcher and DME Operations are linked with the screen aspect ratios the same e The waveforms for wipe pattern numbers 23 24 26 and 27 are the same in 4 3 and 16 9 modes e Color backgrounds frame memory and other functions used on the whole switcher operate at 16 9 Note on creating a user programmable DME The keyframe registers used for creating a user programmable DME are divided by screen aspect ratio as shown in the following table Register Screen aspect Switcher bank Channel numbers ratio 101 to 149 16 9 M E 3 P P Chi Ch2 201 to 249 301 to 349 Register Screen aspect Switcher bank Channel numbers ratio 151 to 199 4 3 M E 1 M E 2 Ch3 Cha 251 to 299 351 to 399 The actual operation is linked between the top and bottom rows of the table e g M E 3 and M E 1 but the common setting values cannot be used between the two s
70. For details see Chapter 12 External Devices Volume 2 Editing registers You can carry out the following operations on the registers in which the data for controlling external devices is saved e Copy e Move e Swap e Merge this cannot be carried out for registers holding VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR control data e Lock e Name File related functions As effect data you can save and recall using the File menu Control of P Bus Devices You can control P Bus devices from this system through the 9 pin serial port of a DCU P Bus device control modes There are two modes of P Bus device control as follows P Bus trigger mode Operating a previously specified button outputs the command for an action assigned to that button P Bus timeline mode Carrying out a keyframe effect under the control of the center control panel controls external devices In the setup select which of P Bus trigger mode and P Bus timeline mode to use External Devices 1 59 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 160 P Bus trigger mode actions The actions that can be used in P Bus trigger mode are as follows e Store e Recall e Trigger For details of the buttons assigned to each action see Chapter 12 External Devices Volume 2 P Bus timeline At a keyframe point on the P Bus timeline you can set an action setting what action command is output to which device At any singl
71. For up to two channels of FMI to FM8 one from FM1 FM3 FM5 and FM7 and the other from FM2 FM4 FM6 and FM8 you can move the output image with respect to the screen The area of the screen around the image that has been moved is filled with black There are two ways of carrying out this repositioning Normal mode Movement in the horizontal direction is in two pixel increments Black and white mode Movement in the horizontal direction is in one pixel increments and for each pixel moved the color is inverted Frame Memory It is not possible to save an image moved with the reposition function directly to frame memory Fixing the output image selection lock function For the output of each of FMI to FM8 this fixes the image at the current output When this lock is enabled even if the output is recalled in a snapshot or keyframe the images output to FM1 to FM8 are preserved Continuously capturing still images record You can continuously capture freeze a sequence of input video frames and store the sequence of the still images over a specified time interval The name of each image recorded in this way consists of a first character string followed by a second string First character string A common part of name assigned to all the still images captured in one record operation This string includes a maximum of four characters which can be specified using a menu before carrying out the capture The first string is automa
72. Frame Memory gt Still gt Freeze Store page 496 FM1 to 8 signals assigned Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall page 500 buttons Color Bkgd1 signal assigned Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd1 page 538 button Color Bkgd2 signal assigned Color Bkgd gt Color Bkgd2 button CCRI signal assigned button CCR gt CCR1 gt XX Chapter 19 CCR signal assigned button CCR gt CCR2 gt XX Volume Device control block trackball or joystick Buttons Menus See DME1 to DME8 2 DME gt XX Chapter 11 Volume 2 DEV1 to DEV12 assigned Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup amp Play Chapter 12 puttons Device gt DDR VTR sTimeline Vol me 2 Basic Menu Operations 319 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua z J9JdEUQ joued OJJUOQ pue snua Z JAJdEUQ 320 Device control block trackball or joystick Buttons Menus See FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP Frame Memory gt Clip gt Recall z assigned buttons K1 to K4 e ME 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Processed Key page 419 e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Processed Key a When the three dimensional transformation operation mode is enabled b When the MENU button is Off c When the MENU button is On d For the MVS 8000G in resizer control mode Device control block search dial Buttons Menus See DEV1 to DEV12 Device gt DDR VTR gt Cueup 8 Play 9 Chapter 12 Device gt DDR VTR sTimeline P pole FM1CLIP to FM8CLIP Frame Memory gt Cli
73. HF4 Edge Direction 2 The Edge Direction menu appears In the lt Edge gt group select the edge type Border border Soft soft edge Soft Border soft border For an overview of the edge types see Edge page 65 Set the parameters according to the selection in step 2 e When border is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 00 to 100 00 e When soft edge is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 e When soft border is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 00 to 100 00 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0 00 to 100 00 Outer Soft Border outer softness 0 00 to 100 00 When you selected border or soft border select the edge fill signal in the lt Edge Fill gt group Utility 2 Bus signal selected on the utility 2 bus Matte signal from the dedicated color matte generator Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 445 Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Split No Number of splits 1 to 4 integer 2 Spacing Spacing between adjacent 0 00 to 100 00 patterns sodiM G 9jdeuQ sodiM g Jaydeyo 446 5 Depending on the operation in step 4 carry out the following operation When Utility 2 Bus is selected Hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal on the background B bus
74. HF7 Video Process The Video Process menu appears 2 Press Video Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Video gain 200 00 to 200 00 2 V Gain Luminance gain 200 00 to 200 00 3 C Gain Chrominance gain 200 00 to 200 00 4 Hue Delay Hue delay 180 00 to 180 00 5 Black Level Luminance black level 7 31 to 109 59 To return adjustment values to their defaults Press Unity Key Setting Operations Using Menus 405 sfog vp saideyo Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block This section describes the basic procedures for key settings using the key control block Key delegation buttons M E delegation buttons Displays Key type selection buttons ME ME ME RE 1 2 3 PP SIZER Key fill key source selection buttons Edge type selection buttons MORE button s y vp Ja deyo Key control block Operations in the Key Control Block Parameter adjustment with the knobs When the button for a function requiring parameter settings is pressed that is on you can set the parameters with the four knobs If there are more than four values to be assigned to the knobs the MORE bu
75. In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 Press Spiral turning it on 3 Set the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Magnitude Size and direction of the spiral 100 00 to 100 00 2 2 Wave Speed Speed of the lateral waves 100 00 to 100 00 2 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 453 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amplitude Amplitude of modulation 0 00 to 100 00 2 Frequency Frequency of modulation 0 00 to 100 00 Z 3 Speed Speed of waves 100 00 to 100 00 2 4 Shape Form of the modulation 1 to 3 sodiM gJajdeyo sodiM g Jaydeyo a See page 71 Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers Yes Can be used No Cannot be used Modifiers Type of wipe Standard Enhanced Rotary Mosaic Random diamond dust Direction Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Split Yes Yes No Yes No Edge Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Positioner Yes 4 Yes b Yes No No Rotation Yes Yes Yes No No Aspect ratio Yes 9 Yes No No No Pattern Yes Yes Yes Yes No replication Pairing Yes f Yes No No No Modulation Yes Yes Yes No No H V Modulation No 9 Yes No No No Fringe Spring No 9 Yes No No No Spiral No Yes No No No a Not patterns 1 to 16 19 and 20 b Not patterns 300 to 303 c Not patterns 100 to 103 150 151 516 518 604 and
76. L L JOG Reentry buttons SHIFT button Background B row Background A row OOOO COOGO a UTIL button Cross point control block Signal Selection 25 suonouny 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Basics of Signal Selection Each of the M E banks PGM PST bank and auxiliary bus control block has 32 cross point buttons and three reentry buttons four in the case of the auxiliary bus control block These buttons are identified by numbers common to all of the banks and block and a signal is assigned to each number The basis of signal selection is to select in a cross point button row the cross point button to which is assigned the desired signal Reentry buttons To use the output of one M E bank as background input to another bank use the reentry buttons M E1 M E2 and M E3 on the auxiliary bus control block M E1 M E2 M E3 and PGM in the cross point control block of the destination bank For example to feed the output from the M E 1 bank as the background B input to M E 2 in the M E 2 cross point control block press the M E1 button in the background B row Bus Selection Each row of 32 cross point buttons is shared by multiple buses For example in the M E 1 bank the key 1 row of buttons can be assigned either to the key 1 bus or to the key 3 bus The KEY3 button switches between
77. M E 1 Keys 1 to 4 M E 1 gt Key1 to 4 M E 2 Keys 1 to 4 M E 2 gt Key1 to 4 M E 3 Keys 1 to 4 M E 3 gt Key1 to 4 PGM PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 PGM PST gt DSK1 to 4 Accessing a key setting menu For example to access the M E 1 gt Key1 menu carry out any of the following procedures In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 then press VFI Keyl In the M E 1 bank transition control block press the KEX 1 next transition selection button twice in rapid succession In the M E 1 bank independent key transition control block press the key delegation button KEY 1 twice in rapid succession In the key control block press the M E delegation button M E1 then press the key delegation button KEY 1 twice in rapid succession Any of the above operations displays the M E1 gt Key1 menu Note that you can access the DSK menus by pressing the button for the corresponding key in the downstream key control block twice in rapid succession Key Setting Operations Using Menus Key Type Setting Setting the key type in a menu 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF1 Type The Type menu appears In the lt Key Type gt group select the key type Luminance luminance key Linear linear key Chroma chroma key Color Vector color vector key Wipe Pattern wipe pattern key Key Wipe Pattern key wipe pattern key For the selected key type you can now set the parameters
78. Panel Settings Config Menu Volume 2 Simple Transition Key 3 control block Key 4 control block Independent key transition execution section Independent key transition type selection buttons The functions of the key 3 control block and key 4 control block are the same Independent key transition control block simple type Carrying out a transition using a simple type independent key transition control block 1 Select the transition type for key 3 or key 4 using the independent key transition type selection buttons To fade a key in or out Press the MIX button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated wipe pattern Press the WIPE button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern Press the DME button turning it on For details of wipe settings see Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 455 For details of DME wipe settings see DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 477 To cut the key instantaneously in or out Press the CUT button turning it on Simple Transition 375 SUOMSUBIL g sa deyo SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo 376 Simple Transition If in the Setup menus you set insertion and deletion as independent modes make the settings for the next transition in the independent key transition control block Separate set
79. Pattern List a Ta 560 Standards Wipes NN en 560 Ean cedaWwilpes a TO NAT 561 ROLATYs WIESA ae 562 Mosaic Wipes eae EE so R EEA 563 Random Diamond Dust Wipes e nnenenenzenenenzenennasnnznna 565 DIMIBAWiipeiPatterntlistircccccccccccccosstecccccerccestccsersccescesccccssscssctccsstocesecuneees 566 DME Wipe Patterns Available in One Channel Mode 566 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two Channel Mode 575 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three Channel Mode 579 Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List ccscssscsscsesccccscscccssecsscssccesscseseese 580 Wipe Pattern List Standard Wipes B E MME FBRGRE BR Aun E ANNEE Appendix Volume 1 Wipe Pattern List 560 Enhanced Wipes 26 27 300 301 302 303 304 Wipe Pattern List 561 L OLnjoA xipuoddv Rotary Wipes ii kl i b ki ki ii Appendix Volume 1 Wipe Pattern List 562 Mosaic Wipes Appendix Volume 1 203 227 226 230 201 225 229 200 206 210 224 228 li E 563 Wipe Pattern List tl 267 266 ef is gt 265 FI LH f CH 264
80. Polarity of a Saved Still Image Field Invert Function 501 Tm age Processing ida use aei p d Sa ata 502 mage Output lli sie ip i b vitae 507 Continuously Capturing Still Images Record 508 Table of Contents 11 12 Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images Animation 509 Frame Memory Clip Operations csscssscssscsscsssscssssscssssessecsseeseseseees 512 Preparations for Operation nn enennnennz ens nanna 512 Recalling CUPS irern aonn a eE a Pi Ta 512 Clip Playback s2s sscscetoaceshecgacsenptice Ta bi sibi da EEA 514 CHp Creati n isinin ese yeciaes iseased ee E a stbsoieg i 518 Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders nn 520 Clip Output ist te ise bba et ein eek A oa ahaa 521 Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data ss 522 Clip Transition Operations sssesenssnesnnonnesnnsensenaznnennoensennoenteensennoenoes 524 Image Data Management ssssensssnnosnnnoennosenesennoennesnnnoseneeentoenseensoenne 527 Pair File Processing ninenin i ini era tv eee 527 Mowing Biles sisri i rien n a a ives L e ie lose 528 Deleting Flessen nan e uisievied 529 Renaming Filesi i EEE 530 Pil Backups i233 is cinta he A E e N 531 Restoring Files cis i sa a EE A RAEO 531 External Hard Disk Drive ACCESS ssssnsnsnnenonnonenzonsnnensnnenennnennonennenen 532 Hard Disk Formatting ss E ena sense 533 Saying PUSS su i i eat 533 Recalling Piles ninnisin A A E R R 535
81. Region Select 9 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Volume 2 a The menu recalled depends on which of the M E 1 to M E 3 banks and PGM PST bank the numeric control block is delegated to b When other than MASTR is selected with the region selection buttons c When MASTR is selected with the region selection buttons d When the SNAPSHOT button or EFF button is set to On or lit green 318 Basic Menu Operations Downstream key control block a Buttons Menus See DSK1 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 gt XX page 378 e PGM PST gt DSK1 gt XX DSK2 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key2 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK2 gt XX DSK3 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key3 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK3 gt XX DSK4 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key4 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK4 gt XX WIPE e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt Wipe page 455 Adjust gt Pattern Select e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust gt Pattern Select DME e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt Wipe page 477 Adjust gt Pattern Select e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust gt Pattern Select K SS STORE gt Snapshot gt Key Snapshot gt XX Chapter 14 Volume 2 a The menu recalled depends on which of kevers 1 to 4 the downstream key control block is delegated to b Recalling is possible only when the K SS button is On Auxiliary bus control block Buttons Menus See FMS1 FMS2
82. Select All The file names for the selected still images appear in reverse video To cancel the selection press once more returning to the normal display The last still image selected is automatically recalled and a pale blue border appears around the thumbnail You can now select thumbnails while checking the still images To carry out field inversion press Field Invert Field inversion starts and a popup window shows the progress of the operation When the system is powered off files held in memory are lost but backed up files can be recalled in the Frame Memory menu For details see File Backups on page 531 and Restoring Files on page 531 Image Processing Combining the background image and input signal 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VFI Still and HF3 Composite The Composite menu appears Still Image Operations 2 In the frame memory selection area select the FM to be assigned See page 495 To select V K mode press V K Mode turning it on Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area to select the folder to hold the freeze image For details of the selection method see page 496 The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze image It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following step 5 An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder Press Edit Enable turni
83. Stick in a location that is Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun Under direct sunlight Very humid or subject to corrosive substances Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 297 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 298 Utility Shotbox Control Block Bank selection buttons B Memory recall buttons Bank selection buttons Press any of the BANK1 to BANK4 buttons to select a bank of 24 memory recall buttons The selected button lights amber Memory recall buttons You can use these buttons to recall frequently used menus utility functions shotbox registers or macro registers that you have assigned When a utility function is allocated to a button the button lights orange or green depending on the status and the allocated function name appears Pressing the button executes the allocated function When the function constitutes a switching on off operation the button lights green otherwise it only momentarily lights green When a shotbox register or macro register recall is assigned to a button the button lights orange and the assigned register name appears If the register is empty the Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel button goes off In the case of a shotbox
84. Use the WIPE button in the Flexi Pad control block of each M E bank To copy the M E 1 wipe to the M E 2 wipe In the M E 1 Flexi Pad control block hold down the WIPE button then press the WIPE button in the M E 2 Flexi Pad control block DME wipe copy button operation Use the DME button in the Flexi Pad control block of each M E bank To copy the M E 1 DME wipe to the M E 2 DME wipe In the M E 1 Flexi Pad control block hold down the DME button then press the DME button in the M E 2 Flexi Pad control block Basic Copy and Swap Operations Chapter 10 Misc Menu Etc Misc Menu Operations A stoko otsbertEteo ress tes nS ESS Sises 548 Port Settings for Control From an External Device 548 EditinvakkenboardiS CULM O Sweserare O A se eee ee eater 549 SIGE HAG SCN ES a IA A 550 Safe Miles Settin Sica A N 552 Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings 553 AUX Menu Operations AUX Bus Settings IS ta GU SM L Video Process Settings 913 nue OSIN OL Jadeyo 548 Misc Menu Operations In the Misc menu you can carry out the following operations e Enabling and disabling operation from an external device System Manager or an editing keyboard e Enabling and disabling side flags on the background bus of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks e Switching the safe title function on or off for each switcher output e Displaying the transition rate indepe
85. User8 Logical M E Assign Make settings for handling PGM PST hardware logically as an M E DME Config Set the DME channel assignments used on the individual M E and PGM PST banks Side Flags Make settings relating to the side flag function inserting a selected image on both sides of a 4 3 image Input signal settings Input e Input Phase Adjust Carry out phase adjustment for each primary input e Through Mode Set through mode for the input side This applies only to the primary inputs and can be set independently for each primary input Setup suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo 199 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo e Video Process Switch video processing on or off for each input signal and adjust the brightness hue and so forth e Matte Illeg Color Limit Switch the illegal limiter on or off for the signal generated by the switcher internal matte generator e FC Adjust for MVS 8000G only Set the format converter inputs Output signal settings Output Output Assign Assign the signals output from the Output to 48 ports Video Clip Adjust the clip levels White Clip Dark Clip and Chroma Clip for the output signals from each of the Output to 48 ports V Blank Adjust the vertical blanking width for the output signals from each of the Output to 48 ports The setting is the number of scan lines from the reference blanking position of field 1 for the particular format which should be masked Through Mode E
86. Volume 2 PST preset When this button is pressed the signal selected on the background B row of the PGM PST bank is selected on the edit preview bus M E 1 to M E 3 P P M E1 to M E 3 P P preview The preview signal M E 1 PVW M E 2 PVW M E 3 PVW P P PVW of the M E or PGM PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus M E1 K to M E3 K P P K M E1 to M E 3 P P key preview The key preview signal M E 1 K PVW M E 2 K PVW M E 3 K PVW P P K PVW of the M E or PGM PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus DME V DME monitor video When this button is pressed the DME monitor output video signal DME MON V is selected on the edit preview bus DME K DME monitor key When this button is pressed the DME monitor output key signal DME MON K is selected on the edit preview bus Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 309 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeueg JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 310 Transition Control Block Compact Type The compact version of the transition also be controlled with the compact control block shown in the following figure transition control block has fewer buttons than the standard type Independent key transition operations can PRIOR SET button Next transition selection buttons 6 Key status display Transition type selection buttons 6 Independent key transition exec
87. When using the DME for a processed key if you select a DME wipe an available DME is automatically allocated to the DME wipe If all of the DME channels are in use then it is not possible to select a DME wipe If in a Setup menu a setting has been made for DME allocation that Setup menu setting takes precedence see Setting the assignments of DME channels to use on the individual M E banks in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Relation to resizer for MVS 8000G only When resizer is enabled it is not possible to select a DME wipe For the key 1 and key 2 or key 3 and key 4 combinations if one is used for a dual resizer effect the other key cannot be used for a DME wipe Number of DME wipes that can be used simultaneously on a single M E bank DME wipes can be used in five places including the four independent key transitions When the DME dedicated interface is used a maximum of two DME wipes can be used simultaneously and when the SDI interface is used only one DME wipe can be used at one time When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface it may be possible to use up to three wipes simultaneously For details see Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu in Setup Relating to Switcher Processor section of Chapter 16 Volume2 DME Wipe Snapshots You can snapshot and save a DME wipe pattern together with the current settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register f
88. YUV signal e Video signal overall gain adjustment e Y signal gain adjustment e Y signal offset adjustment e C signal gain adjustment e C signal hue adjustment For each of the luminance and color difference signals the following processing White clip setting the maximum level of the luminance signal Dark clip setting the minimum level of the luminance signal Positive clip setting the maximum amplitude in the positive direction of the color difference signal Negative clip setting the maximum amplitude in the negative direction of the color difference signal Copy and swap Copying or swapping data between two color correctors CCRI and CCR2 Color Corrector Simple P P Software Overview By installing the BZS 8250 Simple P P Software in the MVS 8000A 8000ASF 8000G 8000GSF Switcher Processor you can use a separate program preset function without using the M E hardware Getting access to the software To use the Simple P P Software you are required to enter an install key which validates the software If the software has been factory installed the install key is not required For the method of obtaining an install key contact your Sony representative On that occasion you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the switcher you are using You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu of the switcher For details of operating procedures see Chapter 16 Installation and Device
89. Zabton This inserts a translucent pattern behind a key You can adjust the pattern size softness density and color Edge type and key fill key source position Keys The key edge modification function has two modes a mode key drop ON mode in which the key fill key source position moves downward and a mode key drop OFF mode in which it does not move downward Key drop ON mode The key fill key source position moves downward by eight scan lines or four scan lines When a drop border or shadow is selected it is possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key Key drop OFF mode The key fill key source position does not move When a drop border or shadow is selected it is not possible to apply a border to the top edge of the key In the key drop ON mode a menu setting selects between the mode 4H mode in which the key fill key source position is lowered by four scan lines and the mode 8H mode in which the key fill key source position is lowered by eight scan lines When Fine Key is on the edge width is forced to the range 0 00 to 4 00 Note that in the following situations the key drop mode is forcibly turned on Edge fill Masks e When the edge type is border outline or emboss e When the edge type is normal with soft edge being on e When Fine Key is on To fix key fill key source in key drop off mode In the Edge menu switch frame delay mode on see page 393 Regardless of the fi
90. a VF2 1220 series Key2 9 VF3 1230 series Kev3 2 VFA 1240 series Key4 9 VF5 1250 series Wipe 2 VF6 1260 series DME Wipe a VF7 1270 series Misc 9 M E3 VF1 1310 series Key1 a VF2 1320 series Key2 9 VF3 1330 series Key3 9 VF4 1340 series Key4 a VF5 1350 series Wipe VF6 1360 series DME Wipe a VF7 1370 series Misc 9 P P VFI 1410 series DSK1 9 VF2 1420 series DSK2 2 VF3 1430 series DSK3 2 VF4 1440 series DSK4 2 VF5 1450 series Wipe 2 VF6 1460 series DME Wipe a VF7 1470 series Misc COLOR BKGD VFI 2210 Color Bkgd 1 a VF2 2220 Color Bkgd 2 9 CCR VFI 2410 series CCR19 VF2 2420 series CCR22 FRAME MEM VFI 2510 series Still b VF2 2520 series Clip 0 VF3 2530 series Reposition Lock P VF4 2540 series File gt VF5 2550 series Folder gt AUX MON VFI 2311 Aux Busb 326 Basic Menu Operations Top menu selection button VF number Menu number Menu name name HF number DME VF1 4110 series Edge b VF2 4120 series Video Modify b VF3 4131 Freeze B VF4 4141 Non Linear b VF5 4150 series Light Trail P VF6 4160 series Input Output P VF7 4170 series Enhanced Video Modify P GLB EFF VFI 4210 series Chi Cha b VF2 4220 series Ch5 Chs b KEY FRAME HF3 6113 Path gt a Menu to return to the default settings for particular functions or for particular knob parameters for the relevant knob parameters see page 327 b Menu to return to the defaul
91. a reflection in a mirror You can choose to reflect in the directions left to right right to left bottom to top top to bottom or any combination of directions You can also set the position of the border between original and reflections Multi Mirror Divides the image into originals and reflections lining them up vertically and horizontally Digital Multi Effects DME 135 suojouny 0008 SAW 48 deu9 suoljounj 0008 SAW 4a deu9 136 You can set the width of the original the center position of the original the offset of the image with fixed mirrors the direction of the mirrors and other parameters Kaleidoscope Creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope You can set the number of blocks the partition reference point and angle horizontal and vertical offsets a reflection position and other parameters Lens Creates an image like a view through a lens You can set the shape and aspect ratio of the lens the angle the magnification ratio the curve ratio the size the center position and other parameters You can also choose to display only the portion of the image that is seen through the lens Circle Makes a circle with the image Digital Multi Effects DME You can set the size of the circle and make the axis of modulation vertical Panorama Curves the upper and lower edges of the image to emphasize the sense of perspective You can set the horizontal and vertical c
92. a mosaic is gradually applied to the old video then at the 50 point the inner image changes to the new video In the second half the mosaic effect on the new video is gradually reduced returning to the original image at 100 Pattern number 1701 one channel mode Defocus In the first half of the transition the old video is gradually defocused then at the 50 point the inner image changes to the new video In the second half the defocusing effect on the new video is gradually reduced returning to the original image at 100 Pattern number 1702 one channel mode Brick In two channel mode a brick such that the side surface is visible slides in over the old video then rotates so that the new video can be seen Pattern numbers 2801 to 2804 2811 to 2814 two channel mode In three channel mode a brick appears over the old video as the image is expanding and rotating and switches to the new video Pattern number 3601 three channel mode User programmable DME Using a DME keyframe effect created with a keyframe operation this executes a DME wipe Pattern numbers 1901 to 1999 one channel mode 2901 to 2999 two channel mode 3901 to 3999 three channel mode For details of creating keyframe effects see Creating User Programmable DME Patterns page 483 To use the Split Page Turn and Page Roll effects on the MVE 8000 requires the optional MKS 8830M Nonlinear Effect Board In an independent key transi
93. a transition control block for controlling a VTR and assigning the Flexi Pad control block to macro operation Compact Key Module Assign You can select which keys can be operated with an independent key transition control block simple type M E Operation Inhibit For each M E or P P bank enable or inhibit utility 2 bus and key related operations Setup 195 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 196 Cross point button settings Xpt Assign Xpt Assign For each control block or bus display and set the assignments to the main table and tables 1 to 14 You can also carry out settings to link switcher signal selection to the audio mixer Main V K Pair Assign Make cross point settings for the main table Assign video key sources for button numbers to 128 For each table specify whether the rightmost cross point button in each row is used as a shift button and the operation mode when it is used as a shift button For the SHIFT button in the cross point control block and for each table select the mode in which this is a shift button dedicated to the source name displays or the mode in which it is a shift button for all buses Disable cross point buttons to work Mixer Xpt Assign Assign audio mixer cross points to cross point buttons in the main table Table Button Assign Create tables 1 to 14 in the same way as the main table Src Name Set source names of up to 16 charact
94. allows you to use this as a key frame fader Transition rate display This shows the transition rate the time from the beginning of a transition to its completion set for an auto transition in frames You can set the transition rate using the numeric keypad control block Flexi Pad control block or menu AUTO TRANS transition button Pressing this button carries out an auto transition of the set transition rate duration The transition starts immediately and the button lights amber When the transition completes the button goes off CUT button Pressing this button carries out the transition as a cut i e instantaneously Wipe direction selection buttons When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type press one of these buttons turning it on to select the wipe direction NORM normal The wipe proceeds in the direction from black to white as shown on the pattern in the lists of patterns see Wipe Pattern List page 560 and DME Wipe Pattern List page 566 in Appendix Volume 1 or in the direction of the arrow When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button plays the tape REV reverse The wipe proceeds in the opposite direction to that when the NORM button is pressed When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button cues the tape automatically to the start point
95. and PROC K Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 417 sfog vp saydeyo skey pv Ja deyo You cannot select the PROC V and PROC K signals using the cross point selection buttons of the M E or PGM PST bank Using a frame memory feed When you press the FM FEED button in the key control block it lights momentarily amber then the key fill and key source signals processed in the currently selected keyer are assigned to frame memory sources 1 and 2 If a DME is selected on the currently selected keyer then the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned to frame memory sources and 2 Carrying out a frame memory feed causes the PROC KEY button to light amber Using the show key function While the SHOW KEY button is held down the key processed key source signal appears on the specified output Show key mode Even when the SHOW KEY button is released for a preset time the show key mode is maintained You can specify the output to which the show key function is applied and set the time for which the show key mode is maintained after releasing the button in a Setup menu For details see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Using the auto delegation function To couple the selection in the key delegation buttons of the independent key transition control block so that the key control block delegation sele
96. and enter a timecode from the numeric keypad control block To carry out the variable speed playback Use the search dial For details on using the search dial see Controlling the Tape Disk Transport in Chapter 12 Volume 2 To apply a loop to a frame memory clip Press the LOOP button Using the device control block trackball or device control block joystick to play back clips Carry out the following operation with the device control block trackball or device control block joystick A frame memory clip must first be recalled with a menu operation 1 Press the DEV button in the region selection buttons and select the frame memory clip for playback FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP If the pair mode is on both main and subsidiary FMs light 2 Press the PLAY button turning it on To stop playback press STOP or any of the SHTL JOG CUE REW FF and ALL STOP buttons For details of the buttons in the device control block trackball or device control block joystick see Device Control Block Trackball page 271 in Chapter 2 For details of the playback start point stop point and duration settings see the previous item Using the device control block search dial to play back clips page 516 To carry out the variable speed playback Press any of the SHTL JOG and VAR buttons then turn the Z ring or move the joystick The image changes in the forward direction when you t
97. between fields and frames You can select the degree of change detection e Do interpolation in field units e Do interpolation in frame units You can also select the number of pixels used in interpolation processing and select the method used to show the picture reduced or expanded Further you can apply an anti moire filter to reduce the moire patterns created by interpolation e Interpolation processing is possible for the following signal formats and DME systems Digital Multi Effects DME 151 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo MVE 8000 8000A 4801 59 94 5761 50 MVE 9000 4801 59 94 5761 50 10801 59 94 1080i 50 10801 60 e The anti moire filter function is only effective when the MVE 8000 8000A is used in an HD svstem SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW L 19 deyo 152 Kev Densitv Adjustment You can adjust the key density for the key signal input to the DME Key Source Selection You can select either the key signals received from the switcher or the key signals generated in the DME for application to the front and back of the image see page 150 Global Effects Global effects are special effects created by combining the images of successive channels The Global Effect menu is used to add these effects For details of this menu see Global Effect Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 The following types of global effects are available Combiner When multiple channels are selected on one keye
98. case of an Extended VTR it is not possible to record a new file External Devices Regions and Registers The term region refers to some sort of functional block of the system When saving or recalling snapshot registers and effect registers or creating or editing effects you first select the region to which the operation applies You can also select multiple regions simultaneously Classification of the regions The regions are classified as follows e Master region e The following 36 regions Switcher M E1 to M E3 PGM PST User1 to User8 DME DME chi to DME ch8 inclusive of Global External devices P Bus Router Device 1 to Device 12 GPI Macro Only the regions assigned to the region selection buttons of the numeric keypad control block can be used simultaneously For details of the region assignment to the region selection buttons see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Regions applicable to keyframe operations Thirty five regions that is the above 36 regions less the Router region Regions applicable to snapshot operations Twenty one regions that is the above regions less the external devices regions P Bus Device 1 to Device 12 and GPI and the Macro region User regions You can optionally assign the following regions to the regions User to User8 The User regions shown in parenthesis are the default assignments e Color backgrounds 1 and
99. external device control For external device control operations see Chapter 12 External Devices Volume 2 For details on the devices that can be connected consult your Sony representative Shared Functions for External Device Control Keyframe functions There are 99 registers numbered to 99 holding external device control data as keyframe data The following are the keyframe functions that can be used RECALL 1 99 STORE 1 99 RECALL UNDO STORE UNDO empty register search AUTO SAVE RECALL MODE RECALL RECALL amp REWIND EDIT ENABLE EDIT UNDO CONST DUR EFF DUR KF DUR DELAY PAUSE INSERT BEFORE INSERT AFTER MODIFY DELETE COPY PASTE BEFORE PASTE AFTER FROM TO ALL PREV KF NEXT KF GOTO TC GOTO KF RUN REWIND FF STOP NEXT KF NORMAL JOG KF FADER Actions set in a keyframe are executed only when the keyframe effect is executed in the normal direction Take care when executing simultaneously with a switcher or DME keyframe effect since the actions are not executed in the reverse direction External Devices The following keyframe functions cannot be used e KF LOOP EFFECT LOOP REVERSE NORMAL REVERSE e PATH Saving to registers Set the data for controlling external devices in the Device menu You can save the set data in keyframe snapshot or shotbox registers You can recall the register in which the data is saved and carry out operations on it with the keyframe control block
100. fader lever To execute a transition by pressing the AUTO TRANS button first set the transition rate specified as the duration of the transition See Setting the Transition Rate page 352 When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type you can also set the transition range See Pattern Limit page 355 For an instantaneous transition Press the CUT button For details see Executing a Transition page 351 Transition linked to the audio mixer If the video signal selected in the background B row is linked to the audio mixer in setup then the audio mixer sound changes with the transition That is pressing the AUTO TRANS button gives a cross fade and pressing the CUT button gives an instantaneous sound switch For details of setup see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e The audio mixer is not linked to a snapshot or key frame transition e The audio mixer is not linked to a transition using the fader lever e If the bus fixed mode see page 45 is selected in the setup menu and the fader lever is in the lowest position there is a cross fade from the audio selected on the B row to the audio selected on the A row e The audio mixer is not linked to a key transition In the following cases the audio and video may be out of sync When carrying out a cross fade in some DME wipes for example picture in picture When executing a pres
101. for which resizer is on 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key menu press Resizer turning it on This enables the resizer function Press Border Crop The Border Crop menu appears Press Boreder turning it on This enables the adjustment of crop Set the parameters The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of signal format SD HD and aspect ratio 4 3 16 9 selected in the system as follows e SD format Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting Values 1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left 0 00 to 4 00 and right borders 2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top 0 00 to 3 00 4 3 and bottom borders 0 00 to 2 25 16 9 3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all Value of H shown four borders 5 Density Density of the borders 0 00 to 100 00 n e HD format Q amp Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values A 1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left 0 00 to 12 00 4 3 x and right borders 0 00 to 16 00 16 9 3 2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top 0 00 to 9 00 and bottom borders 3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all Value of H shown four borders 5 Density Density of the borders 0 00 to 100 00 Resizer 425 skey p 13 dey9 426 Resizer To apply color to a border 1 In the lt Border Mode gt group of the Border Crop menu press Flat Color 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjust
102. function pressing the button executes the assigned shotbox function and the button lights yellow In the case of a macro register pressing the button executes the assigned macro and the button flashes yellow Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block Simple Type The simple versions of the transition control block and Flexi Pad control block shown in the following figure is designed to allow simplified operations than with the standard type The transitions carried out using these simple type control blocks are also referred to as simple transitions in this User s guide Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 299 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ joued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JBJdEUQ 300 Numeric display XPT HOLD status display B Key transition selection buttons O Key status display D Transition type selection buttons ON ON XPT HOLD OVER OVER ABUW1234 Transition execution section B Pattern limit buttons Wipe direction selection buttons Mode selection buttons UNDO button Memory recall section Shown above is the right hand type transition control block with the right hand fader lever Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block with INH
103. function button area Shape and color of the button Pressing the button turns it on and it lights showing the state Basic Menu Operations 323 jaued O41U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JaJdEUQ 324 Lit pale blue The function is enabled and the parameters can currently be adjusted with the knobs Lit orange The function is enabled Lit purple Execution button Pressing the button immediately executes the function Example Auto Start button in the Chroma Adjust menu Chroma Adjust Pressing a button of this type displays a further menu allowing more detailed settings Example Chroma Adjust button in the Type menu Setting parameters This marking on a function button indicates that there are parameters which can be adjusted with the knobs Pressing this function button assigns parameters to the knobs You can set the parameter values by either of the following methods e Turn the knob 1 to 5 corresponding to the parameter to adjust the value e Press the knob parameter buttons 1 to 5 corresponding to the parameter This displays the numeric keypad window allowing you to enter the desired value In the description of specific setting procedures the knob adjustment is described as follows Example When wipe pattern key is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softn
104. functions Button name Function POS Toggle Position on or off X Y Fix the operating direction CTR Return the pattern position to the center of the screen 2 Press the MAIN button or SUB button turning it on Q Press the POS button turning Position on 4 Move the trackball or joystick to set the wipe position By pressing the X button turning it on you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction and by pressing the Y button turning it on you can restrict movement to the vertical direction Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 449 sodiM gJaydeyo sodiM g Jaydeyo 450 Rotating the wipe pattern Rotation You can apply rotation independently to the main pattern and sub pattern 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 In the lt Rotation gt group select the rotation type Angle Incline the pattern through a fixed angle Speed Rotate at a fixed rate Magnitude Rotate through a particular angle during the course of the transition For an overview of the rotation see page 65 3 According to the selection in step 2 set the following parameters e When Angle is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 e When Speed is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Speed Rotation rate o
105. image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space Image movement in the source coordinate space Movement on the x axis Movement on the y axis Movement on the z axis 116 Digital Multi Effects DME Rotation Spin Image movement in the target coordinate space Movement on the x axis Movement on the y axis Movement on the z axis Rotates the image on the x axis y axis or z axis The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space Image rotation in the source coordinate space oe Rotation around the y axis Rotation around the x axis Rotation around the z axis Image rotation in the target coordinate space re Ta Rotation around the v axis Rotation around the x axis Rotation around the z axis When rotating the image in Rotation mode it may not always be possible to achieve the kind of rotation around an axis that you want Combining Rotation mode with Spin mode creates an effect that rotates the image around a specified axis The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipulating Digital Multi Effects DME 117 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 118 the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space The way the image rotates aro
106. in Chapter 16 Volume 2 3 Shut down the menus see page 333 4 Power the switcher and SCU off and on again Setting the operating mode for each switcher bank To set a desired switcher bank to Multi Program 2 mode use the following procedure 1 Display the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu 2 Select the switcher bank from M E 1 to M E 3 and P P 3 In the lt M E Config gt group select Multi Program2 In the PGM PST when using the simple P P software see page 227 Multi Program2 cannot be selected 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to set the operating mode for all desired switcher banks Assigning output signals for Multi Program 2 mode To assign signals to outputs Use the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt M E Output Assign menu The difference from standard mode is that OUTI is fixed set to PGM1 main program and OUT6 is fixed set to PGM2 sub program and that for the OUT to OUTS signals you can assign any signal selected from the following PGMI PGM2 PGM3 PGM4 PVW1 PVW2 K PVWI K PVW2 CLEAN SUB CLEAN Each of main and sub can use a maximum of four of the six outputs OUT1 to OUT6 The outputs can be used within the following limits Multi Program 2 233 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 234 e OUTI OUT2 main only e OUT3 OUT4 can be used for either main or sub e OUTS OUTS sub only For details see To assign the o
107. is recalled without changing the current key settings including the on off status Xpt Hold The snapshot or keyframe is recalled without changing the current cross point selection When the panel setup is Protect The cross point settings cannot be changed by pressing panel buttons Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Key bus selection buttons KEY3 button Press this button turning it on to assign the key 1 cross point buttons to the key 3 fill bus KEY4 button Press this button turning it on to assign the key 2 cross point buttons to the key 4 fill bus Pressing one of the key delegation buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 in the transition control block standard type twice in rapid succession changes the state of the corresponding one of these buttons so that you can make cross point selections on the key bus see page 263 UTIL utility button While this button is held down the cross point buttons are assigned to the following buses respectively Background A row utility 1 bus Background B row utility 2 bus Key 1 row DME external video bus Key 2 row DME utility 1 bus when the KEY4 button is off or DME utility 2 bus when the KEY4 button is lit In a Setup menu you can select either of the following two modes for these buttons The button takes effect while being held down Every time the button is pressed it toggles between the on and off states for key 1 and key 2
108. kal Status buttons Current position These show the timecode values for red bar the start point current position and end point Plavback start point pale blue bar Playback end point yellow bar When Pair is Off press a target FM selection button to select the target To set loop playback press Loop turning it on To start playback press Play During playback to stop press Stop To cue up Press Cue To play the image at the beginning of the clip Clip Begin Press Rewind To play the image at the end of the clip Clip End Press FF Frame Memory Clip Operations 515 Mowa ewes 7 Jaydeyo Aowey ewei4 7 Ja deyo 516 To specify the playback start point To set the current position as the playback start point in the lt Start TC gt group press Set To set a different position press the Start status button and enter a timecode value from the numeric keypad window To specify the playback stop point Start playback and at the desired position press the STOP button to stop playback then in the lt Stop TC gt group press Set To set to any position press the Stop status button and enter a timecode value from the numeric keypad window To change the current position To change the current position press the Current status button and enter a timecode value from the numeric keypad window Using the device control block search dial to play back
109. key control block can be assigned to any key in setup see Chapter 16 Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu Volume 2 You can carry out key snapshot operations in the independent key transition control block simple type and Flexi Pad control block simple type There are two dedicated key snapshot registers for each of keys 3 and 4 Key 3 control block Key 4 control block Key source name display key snapshot buttons K SS button The functions of the key 3 control block and key 4 control block are the same Independent key transition control block simple type Saving a key snapshot For example to save the settings of M E 1 key 3 use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the K SS button in the key 3 control block turning it on This switches to key snapshot mode and the key source name display key snapshot button shows the state of registers 1 and 2 for key 3 Off Nothing is saved in the register Lit orange Settings are saved in the register For a register holding a snapshot the register name is shown as up to eight characters Key Snapshots 435 sfog vp saydeyo skey p 13 dey9 436 2 In the Flexi Pad control block hold down the SNAPSHOT button and press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register in which you want to save the snapshot
110. lever upward Top two LEDs light fader lever downward Bottom two LEDs light e If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit LEDs this carries out the next transition over the remaining part of the fader lever travel e Even in anon sync state you can carry out an auto transition by pressing the AUTO TRANS button During the auto transition the indicators show the transition progress in the usual way but when the transition completes they once again indicate the non sync state Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode In the bus fixed mode there is a fixed relationship between the position of the fader lever and the signal output on each bus Depending on the direction of the transition the fader lever must therefore always be moved in a particular direction as shown in the following table This does not affect an auto transition which is executed regardless of the fader lever direction For an overview of the bus fixed mode see Flip flop mode and bus fixed mode page 45 Fader lever operating direction in bus fixed mode Next transition Transition direction Fader lever movement Background A B Downward BoA Upward Executing a Transition 361 SUOMSUBIL g 19 dEU SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo 362 Next transition Keys 1 2 3 and 4 Transition direction On Off deletion Fader lever movement Downward Off On insertion
111. lit green Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for generating the 109 to 7 key signal 2 Gain Key sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 3 Density Key density 0 to 100 4 Filter Filter coefficient 1to9 e When the CRK button is lit green Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 407 sfog vp saideyo skey p 13 dey9 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Chroma key reference level 0 to 100 2 Gain Key sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 Hue Hue 0 to 359 Density Key density 0 to 100 e When Key Active is off only the parameters Hue and Density are displayed e When both Key Active and Color Cancel are off only the parameter Density is displayed e When the CVK button is lit green Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Y Clip Reference level for Y signal 109 to 7 2 Y Gain Y signal sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 3 C Clip Reference level for chrominance 100 to 0 signal 4 C Gain Chrominance signal sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Y Filter Y signal filter coefficient 1to9 2 C Filter Chrominance signal filter coefficient 1 to 9 4 Density Key density 0 to 100 e When the PTN button is lit green Knob __ Para
112. maximum of 99 keyframes can be included in a single effect Recalling a sequence of still images Run the effect created by the foregoing procedure The procedure for doing this is the same as for any other effect For details see Executing Effects in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Still Image Operations 511 Kowa ewes 7 Je deu9 oway ewe 7 Ja deyo 512 Frame Memory Clip Operations For an overview of frame memory clip concepts see Frame Memory Clip Function page 92 e The frame memory clip function is supported on the MVS 8000A 8000G only e During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the target FM selection buttons see page 514 frame memory operations may not be performed properly Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip playback Preparations for Operation The preparations for using a frame memory clip hereafter a clip are the same as for a still image operation See Preparations page 490 and Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory page 495 Recalling Clips Recalling a clip You can recall a clip from each of frame memories to 8 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF2 Clip and HF Recall The Recall menu appears See following figure e When Pair is set to On only pair files sets of main file and sub file are shown e When Pair is set to Off both of single files and pair files are shown Frame M
113. mode When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled Turning the Z ring controls the tape transport disk drive frame memory clip operations at a speed determined by the operating buttons Turn clockwise for the normal direction and counterclockwise for the reverse direction Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued OJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 276 MENU button Press this button turning it on to enable adjusting the parameters allocated to the knobs in the menu using the trackball and Z ring In the case of the DME menu the operation applies to the selected DME channel In VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode press this button setting it to On This makes it possible to carry out timeline start stop point setting operation for the device selected with the device selection buttons Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Device Control Block Joystick The description below of frame memory clip operations applies only to the MVS 8000A 8000G All functions of the joystick type device control block are equivalent to the functions of the trackball type except that the trackball and Z ring operations are carried out with the joystick MENU button Region selection buttons Q Joystick
114. moves the edit point to the event immediately before the current event NEXT KF next keyframe When this button is pressed the edit point moves to the keyframe immediately after the current time During macro editing pressing this button moves the edit point to the event immediately after the current event Editing buttons ALL Press this button turning it on to select all keyframes during macro editing all events in the effect FROM TO Press this button turning it on to enter numeric values from the numeric keypad control block and select a specified range of keyframes during macro editing the specified range of events INS insert When this button is pressed a new keyframe is inserted after the current keyframe Pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT button inserts a new keyframe before the current keyframe During macro editing pressing this button registers an event after the current event MOD modify When this button is pressed the selected keyframe is modified with the values of the current keyframe When the edit point is between two keyframes the immediately preceding keyframe is modified You can also select multiple keyframes and modify them in a single operation At this time pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT button modifies all selected keyframes with the changed values taken as relative values During macro editing pressing this button amends the sel
115. nn 287 Auxiliary Bus Control Block for AUX Buses 288 Auxiliary Bus Control Block for Router Control 291 Menu Control BOCK vis iii jen KE ease pe d dooce by 294 Memory Card USB Adaptor Block seen nn 295 Memory Stick USB Connections Block 296 Utility Shotbox Control Block nee n nn 298 Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block Simple Type 299 Independent Key Transition Control Block Simple Type 304 Downstream Key Control Block nee 306 Table of Contents Downstream Key Fade to Black Control Block 308 Transition Control Block Compact Type L 310 Basic Menu Operations ssesnensenzonsonsonzenznsensenoenennsenennennensensenseneene 313 Menu Organization asion e p a e DEI 313 About the Top Menu Listrier 313 ACCESSING MENUS cscs b isiioaiai ap tastactses shctatalas cateasoues szetecotea geckae casagiecuees 314 Displaying a Mentri ieee eae aie ie ie ee 321 Interpreting the Menu Screen mnnenennenzzznsenzzznznnanaz 322 Menu Operations iss si i ia iii a E baie htt hiss tees E E i 323 Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site 335 Shortcut Menus iissseadccteadescvisvenesceeeseqsssestapbcassevsessuessoaneeesecusneaadovewnnasy 335 Chapter 3 Transitions Basic Operating Procedure Key Priority Setting sssesnssnnzznooneseneennennennoenosanonneenzonneensoensensoensennoenes Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block
116. of the equip ment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur pose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation Sony Corporation MVS 8000 8000SF Printed in Japan System SY http www sonv net 2008 05 13 3 206 016 12 1 Printed on recvcled paper 2001
117. of the timeline When the MENU button is Off stop point of Cueup amp Play LOC SIZE VAR variable speed playback Pressing this button and turning the Z ring plays back the tape disk or frame memory clip at a variable Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel speed and direction proportional to the rotation angle of the Z ring The variable speed range is 1 to 3 times normal playback speed LOC XYZ SHTL shuttle Pressing this button and turning the Z ring plays back the tape disk or frame memory clip at a speed and direction proportional to the rotation angle of the Z ring ROT JOG Pressing this button and turning the Z ring plays back the tape disk or frame memory clip at a speed and direction proportional to the rotation of the Z ring CLR WORK BUFR CUE Pressing this button cues the tape disk or frame memory clip automatically to the start point X REW rewind Press this button to rewind the tape disk or frame memory clip Y PLAY Press this button to play the tape disk or frame memory clip Z FF Press this button to fast forward the tape disk or frame memory clip CTR ALL STOP Press this button to stop all tape transport disk drive frame memory operations When the resizer control mode is enabled for the MVS 8000G only LOCAL K1 Select key 1 GLB K2 Select key 2 SRC K3 Select key 3 TRGT K4 Select key 4 LOC SIZE ASP aspect Pressing this button an
118. on the operation mode this shows the pattern number of a wipe or Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel DME wipe a bank number a register number a transition rate and so on in up to four digits Key Control Block Each of the M E banks and the PGM PST any desired keyer In this control block you bank includes four keyers for keys 1 to 4 can adjust and modify keys and you can delegate this control block to Key fill key source selection buttons B Key type selection buttons D Delegation buttons ON AIR indicators B RESIZER button 6 Displavs DME channel Knobs selection buttons OVER RIDE B SHOW KEY button AUTO DELEG button D Key modifier buttons W Output destination specification buttons TRACE button OVERRIDE button MORE button Delegation buttons MEE delegation Press one of the M E 1 Key delegation Press one of the KEY 1 to M E 3 and P P buttons to select to KEY4 buttons to delegate the key the bank an M E bank or the PGM control block to the corresponding PST bank to which the key control keyer block is delegated Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 267 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JaJdEUQ 268 TRANS By pressing this button you can check the DME channel used for DM
119. or FTB button during auto transition execution RUN button during keyframe execution AUTO TRANS and CUT button replacement TRANS PVW button UTIL button XPT HOLD button in key rows Selection of signal assigned to the auxiliary bus control block key source bus either key signal only or either video signal or key signal selectable Sensitivity Adjust trackball joystick and double click sensitivity or set the relationship between the angle of the search dial and the playback speed Main Split Fader When the split fader is active specify whether the fader to control other than mix is the left side or the right side Macro Set the macro execution mode and the mode in which to edit macros using the standard type Flexi Pad control block om Screen saver and other settings Maintenance Screen Saver Make the menu screen saver settings LCD Brightness Adjust the LCD brightness LED Brightness Adjust the LED brightness Switch Brightness Adjust the switch brightness Touch Beep Select whether or not to sound a beep when a menu operation is carried out Touch Panel Calibration Calibrate the touch panel Initial Menu Set Specify the menu to be displayed at menu startup Switcher Setup In switcher setup make settings particular to the switcher processor 198 Setup You can make the following settings Settings relating to overall switcher configuration Config System Phase Adjust the swi
120. over the old video Pattern numbers 1001 to 1008 one channel mode 2601 to 2608 two channel mode Squeeze The new video appears squeezed over the old video and progressively expands to cover it Pattern numbers 1021 to 1031 one channel mode 2621 to 2628 two channel mode Split The old video splits and the new video appears in the gap Pattern numbers 1011 to 1013 one channel mode Door The new video moves like a door closing and progressively covers the old video Pattern numbers 1041 to 1048 one channel mode Flip tumble The old video rotates about an axis and is replaced by the new video During the transition the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M E bank appears as the background Pattern numbers 1101 to 1104 1109 1110 1121 1122 1124 1131 to 1133 1135 one channel mode Mirror The new video appears over the old video as a mirror effect slides in all four directions Pattern numbers 1355 to 1358 one channel mode Sphere The new video appears wrapped around a sphere over the old video then returns to the original video while unwrapping Pattern number 1365 one channel mode Character trail The new video appears with a trail over the old video Next this gradually returns to the original from the periphery Pattern numbers 1371 1372 one channel mode Wave The new video appears with a wave like effect over the old video Next this returns to the original video as the effect
121. reduces Pattern numbers 1378 1379 one channel mode Ripple The new video appears over the old video like outwardly moving ripples Pattern number 1381 one channel mode Page turn The old video moves like a page turning and the new video appears behind it Pattern numbers 1301 to 1313 1315 to 1318 1341 to 1345 one channel mode 2701 to 2713 2715 to 2718 2741 to 2745 two channel mode Page roll The new video unrolls like a scroll over the old video This is a type of page turn Pattern numbers 1321 to 1333 1335 to 1338 1346 to 1350 one channel mode 2721 to 2733 2735 to 2738 2746 to 2750 two channel mode Frame in out Completed in two transitions In the first transition the new video appears then on the second transition the new video goes out and the old video returns Pattern numbers 1201 to 1208 1221 to 1224 one channel mode 2851 to 2854 2861 to 2864 two channel mode DME Wipes 73 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 74 DME Wipes Picture in picture The one channel mode and two channel mode differ as follows In one channel mode this completes in two transitions In the first transition the old video shrinks and the new video appears behind it In the second transition the old video expands again until it is its original size Pattern number 1251 one channel mode In two channel mode in the first half of the transition the old video
122. replayed if the key state matches the saved state Example For a macro with an event that deletes a key when the macro is executed if the key is inserted it is deleted but otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying b Cross point buttons of the bus assigned by AUX delegation setting c Macro attachment can be set with these buttons only when they are assigned to Play Stop Cue in the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt Program Button gt Transition Module menu and when the DEV button in the device control block is lit d Buttons on the standard type module only e Buttons on the standard type module and compact type module only f Independent key transition control block simple type only g KEXX refers to any of KEY 1 to KEY4 and DSKI to DSK4 depending on the key assigned in setup h When there are a number of control blocks on the control panel and the keys assigned to them in setup are the same then the macro attachment settings for the above buttons are the same The keys being the same includes cases such as Key1 2 assigned to PGM PST being the same as DSK1 2 Key1 2 assigned to M E 1 being the same as M E 1 Key1 2 and so on i Only when key row is operated in the utility shotbox mode 220 Macros e After setting a macro attachment to a cross point button in the auxiliary bus control block if in the Setup menu you change the assignment of buses to the AUX delegation buttons the m
123. rows For background A and background B rows utility buses remain disabled Source name displays These show the names of the signals which can be selected on the cross point buttons in two or four characters or in auto mode While the SHIFT button on the right hand side or the SHIFT button assigned to the column of cross point buttons is enabled the source name of the signal assigned to the column of cross point buttons in shift mode appears You can select green orange or yellow for the background color of the source name display for each source separately You can set the source name display mode and background color in a Setup menu SHIFT button When this button is enabled either the source name displays show the shifted signal names or the shifted signals for all buses in this M E P P bank are enabled You can select either mode in a Setup menu Each press of the button toggles between the enabled and disabled states In the case of a module without source name displays when Display is selected in the Setup menu this button is invalid ME bank display This indicates the notional mix effect bank name to which the particular M E or PGM PST bank is assigned as a four character identifier Macro buttons PRE MCRO pre macro button Use this button to set a macro attachment in pre macro mode For setting in macro only mode use this in combination with a macro only set button assigne
124. run is On and therefore the User2 and DME ch3 effects are run as soon as they have been recalled e When register 3 is executed M E 1 effect 1 P P effect 90 and Userl effect 1 are recalled For register 3 auto run is off and therefore to run the recalled effects press the RUN button in the keyframe control block Shotbox settings and execution Carry out shotbox register settings from the Shotbox menu or using the numeric keypad control block You can carry out shotbox execution using the numeric keypad control block the Flexi Pad control block the utility shotbox control block or the cross point control block buttons For details of operation see Chapter 15 Shotbox Volume 2 Shotbox Setup Overview of Setup Various settings are required in order to operate the switcher control panel DME external devices and so on connected together in a single system This is referred to as setup and you can carry out the setup operations from the Engineering Setup menu For details of the operations see Chapter 16 Engineering Setup Volume 2 The settings in the Engineering Setup menu are grouped under the following headings e System setup System Settings relating to the whole system see the following section System Setup e Panel setup Panel Settings particular to the control panel see page 195 e Switcher setup Switcher Settings particular to the switcher processor see pa
125. shift button The shift button function can be disabled in a Setup menu When selecting the signals of button numbers 1 to 31 press the cross point button for the desired signal To select button numbers 32 to 62 hold down the shift button and press the cross point button for the desired signal Signal Selection Button numbers in the auxiliary bus control block 2ND button See 29 30 31 121 124 Ta lobjo PBBBBBBE JO 00O T GOOO aG tib O OOOCOOOCOOHS Googe e Ha minn 60 61 62 125 128 When the 2ND button is unlit The cross point buttons and reentry buttons in the auxiliary bus control block have separate upper 1st row and lower 2nd row numbers In the case of a 32 button layout the button numbers are as follows Auxiliary bus control block button numbers 2ND button unlit suonouny 0008 SAW 4e deyo Button Button Button numbers ist row From the left end to the 31st button 1 to 31 Reentry buttons 121 to 124 2nd row From the left end to the 31st button 32 to 62 Reentry buttons 125 to 128
126. shifted signal names appear in the source name display Pressing this buttons toggles the source name display between the shifted signal names and unshifted signal names In the case of a module without source name displays this button is invalid Q RTR router button Press this button turning it on to assign the auxiliary bus control block to router control For details of the names and functions of parts for router control see the next section B Level selection buttons Used when the auxiliary bus control block is carrying out router control Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Auxiliary Bus Control Block for Router Control Press the RTR button turning it on to assign the auxiliary bus control block to router control KEY button 2ND button Destination selection buttons b RTR button Selected source name displays DEST button Level selection buttons LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL 1 2 4 site alk shee bii ARIE hs cot i beni e EA Cel FA fe fe P ERES ai TIELET OOO amp OOOQDOODOO KE LEVEL 3 DEST r Bai r i SHET Eci BEN p Veh 500000 000o e oooooele660a 2nd B Source selection button rows 1st SHIFT button Source name displays 4 XPT HOLD buttons
127. signal in the key 2 row DME utility 1 bus If the selected DME is channel 7 or channel 8 turn on the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 4 row DME utility 2 bus Key Setting Operations Using Menus 401 sfog vp saydeyo skey p 13 dey9 402 Using four DME channels on one keyer When using the DME dedicated interface proceed as follows 1 Select the DME channel 1 or channel 5 for the first channel see Assigning a DME to a key page 401 In the same way select the DME channel 2 channel 6 for the second channel the DME channel 3 channel 7 for the third channel and the DME channel 4 channel 8 for the fourth channel 2 To select the video signal for the second channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal in the Key1 row DME external video bus 3 To select the video signal for the third channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and carry out the following operation e If the selected DME is channel 3 turn off the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 2 row DME utility 1 bus e If the selected DME is channel 7 turn on the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 4 row DME utility 2 bus 4 To select the video signal for the fourth channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and carry out the following operat
128. source position by four or eight scan lines as set in the key menu To select 4H or 8H use the Key menu When the selected edge type is normal and soft edge is selected or when border outline or emboss is selected this button lights automatically BDR border Apply a border of a uniform thickness to the whole key DROP BDR drop border Apply a border to two sides of the key for example below and to the right or below and to the left SHDW shadow Apply a shadow to two sides of the key for example below and to the right or below and to the left OUTLINE Use the outline of the key EMBOS emboss Apply an embossing effect to the periphery of the key e To select a normal as the edge type that is a plain edge set all five of the above buttons off When border drop border or shadow is selected you can use a special color matte or a signal selected on the utility 1 bus for the edge When emboss is selected you can use the dedicated color matte signal for the emboss function When outline is selected the signal selected on the key fill bus is used to fill the edge MAIN MASK Press this button turning it on to enable the key mask using the main pattern It also enables you to set the parameters with the knobs SUB MASK Press this button turning it on to enable the key mask using the sub pattern It also enables you to set the parameters with the knobs ZABTN zabton W
129. status display Numeric display UNDO button XPT HOLD ABUW1234 Bank selection buttons Memory recall section Mode selection buttons WIPE To save or recall a wipe snapshot or recall the pattern number of a wipe pattern use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section DME To save or recall a DME wipe snapshot or recall the pattern number of a DME wipe pattern use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section SNAPSHOT To save or recall a snapshot use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section EFF effect To recall the master timeline or run an effect use this in combination with the buttons in the memory recall section SHOTBOX To recall or execute a shotbox use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section MCRO macro To save recall or edit a macro use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section TRANS RATE transition rate To enter the transition rate press this button turning it on To enter the independent key transition rate hold down this button and press the key delegation button in the independent key transition control block To select whether the value is entered in frames or as a timecode value switch the TC button in the memory recall se
130. still image recall You can recall an image file saved in memory and allocate to any of the FM1 to FM8 outputs Processing an image You can combine the background image a still image file allocated to any of FMI to FM8 a freeze image written to temporary memory or a black signal and the input signal The following types of processing are available Pattern key Using the signal from a dedicated pattern generator you can cut out the background image and insert the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or a color matte signal You can adjust the size and position of the pattern and add modifiers External key When processing an image in FM1 3 5 7 you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the background image and fill with the signal selected on the frame memory source bus 1 or a color matte signal When processing an image in FM2 A 6 8 you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus 2 to cut out the background image and fill with a color matte signal always white An external key can only be used when the pair mode is enabled see page 87 MIX Mix the background image with the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or color matte signal The mix ratio can be set NAM Non additive mix the background image with the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or color matte signal Image output Moving the output image reposition function
131. te retreat ee eres eer 52 KEVIN rece corre ee eer ee eee eee 56 KEevesmapsliot tn metre ete er A eee ee 57 B Nn Se acer eRe eee A 57 KAIDE A TEN TIEA 57 KOM ad e Na B 58 IRESIZ CM rece sce E E EE EE EEE E AE E ERTE 58 AAO I OTOA E O E A 60 Types of Wipe Ratte mns i A 60 RattermyNa xen A EE RERE E EA A E E 61 Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers 2 0 0 0 nn eeennnnnnnnnenn 63 Mpe Nap Os TA 71 Wipe Modibvitle a A E 71 DME Wipes ccccosce scecsecssccsectersccasecntcacsocesassenesecsescsesstassestactsastescesstescsesecascesecs 72 Types of DME Wipe Eatterni A ANNA ree 72 DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers 10 0 0 sen 80 Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects oe 81 DME Wipe Snapshots 0 cece aen na eaa eE EN anoir 82 DME Wipe Modify Clear eee ceeesccsecesseseceeesseensesseeeeesneesaeenees 83 Resizer DME Wipes ics 2c3 cescis ppt ab sp de Pi 83 Frame Memory sissesscisesssersconesacensecsosccesostssecsecacsedestccecsseasoscesssesenscenssesesesses 85 OVELVIEW iii pe fa et b kat i aE S 85 Still Image File Functions ss mn nnrenennnnnnennnsnnennennennne zz 89 Frame Memory Clip Function e ennenennnenennnennn senza 92 Image Data Management enkarni disradii reesei 94 Image Data Transter cies can Gitte es eel es ES bi P sel 94 External Hard Disk Drive Access ssmeneenennnnnennnzznenzzznn 96 Color BackgroundsS ssrssnnsnsezzoonoennzzznennoenoennonnoeensensensoensenzoensensennonneeno 97 CO
132. the lt Position gt group 1155 12 Main Modify Position gt Multi Adjust 1156 2 Sub Modify Position in the lt Position gt group 1156 1 2 Sub Modify gt Multi Position Adjust 2122 2 Composite Position 1 Position H gt Pattern Adjust 2 Position V 2131 Reposition Normal Black amp White 2210 Color Bkgdi 2 Position 2412 1 0 Primarv CCR Position gt Mask1 Adjust 9 4116 DME Edge Position Size 5 Pattern gt Wipe Crop 4127 DME gt Video Position Size Modify gt Mask a The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for M E 1 the same applies to M E 2 M E 3 and P P Equally content applying to Key1 applies equally to Key2 Key3 and Key4 b The same applies to Color Bkgd2 c The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for CCRI the same applies to CCR2 d The sample applies to Mask2 Adjust Basic Menu Operations 329 jaued JOJJUOJ pue snua Z J9JdEUQ JSUB4 JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JaJdEUQ 330 Numeric kevpad window Item display Max min value indication Input value Clip 10 0 140 0 100 00 button e Enter button Item display This is the name of the parameter being set in the numeric keypad window Max min maximum minimum value indication This shows the maximum and minimum settings of the parameter Input value This is the value being input into the numeric keypad window Close button
133. the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings Q In the lt Ch Select gt group select the target channels Press Position in the lt Position gt group turning it on Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 4 Relative H Relative movement in the 400 00 to 400 00 horizontal direction 5 Relative V Relative movement in the vertical 400 00 to 400 00 direction For details of the method of DME wipe pattern selection see DME Wipe Pattern Selection page 466 Setting the DME wipe pattern size Size 1 2 Q In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows For a pattern in one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time Press Size turning it on Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Set size of effect 0 00 to 200 00 2 a The effect size when Size is off is taken as 100 00 Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same time The indications on the knobs show the settings of th
134. the Misc gt Transition menu press Key To set the key On direction or Off direction independently press Key On or Key Off 2 Turn the knobs to set the number of frames Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Key1 Trans Rate Key 1 transition rate 0 to 999 frames 2 Key2 Trans Rate Key 2 transition rate 0 to 999 frames 3 Key3 Trans Rate Key 3 transition rate 0 to 999 frames 4 Key4 Trans Rate Key 4 transition rate 0 to 999 frames To set the fade to black transition rate in the Transition menu 1 In the Misc gt Transition menu press FTB 2 Turn the knob to set the number of frames Knob __ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Rate Transition rate 0 to 999 frames Misc Menu Operations AUX Menu Operations AUX Bus Settings Making video process settings for an AUX bus Make the settings as follows 1 In the Aux Mon gt Aux Bus menu using any of the following methods select the AUX bus to which the settings apply e Directly press the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 AUX Bus AUX bus selection 1 to 48 2 Press Video Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Video signal gain
135. the input material for the frame memory you can use the signal selected on the frame memory source bus For this signal you can use video processing video levels or hue value adjustment or masking Allocating a frame memory source bus signal to one of FMI to FM8 then carrying out a freeze captures a still image in the corresponding frame memory output image and saves it in temporary memory For a freeze an image can be captured either as video frame a frame freeze or a video field field freeze When the system is powered off any freeze images written to temporary memory are lost Saving a still image store You can save an image in temporary memory which has been placed with the freeze function as a file in memory You can save a single image in a single file and apply a name of up to eight characters to the file The following names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPTI LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 When the system is powered off all the files saved in memory are erased Freeze and store mode When this mode is set to On the freeze and store operations occur simultaneously You can set it to On in the Frame Memory gt Still gt Freeze Store menu see page 498 This function is not supported on the MVS 8000 Frame Memory 89 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 90 Recalling a
136. the new video according to a predetermined pattern This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition For details see Wipes page 60 and Chapter 5 Wipes page 437 DME wipe Using a DME effect it is possible to obtain a transition to a new image from the current image as in a wipe You can also use this transition type as an independent key transition For details see DME Wipes page 72 and Chapter 6 DME Wipes page 465 Clip transitions Linked to a mix dissolve or wipe transition a frame memory clip movie is played back The clip transition function is only supported on the MVS 8000A 8000G Cut A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video When the next transition is a key transition the key cuts in or out instantaneously Executing a Transition There are two modes of executing a transition an auto transition by button operation or a manual transition using the fader lever Transitions It is also possible to combine both methods taking control with the fader lever of an auto transition which has partly completed or complete a transition started with the fader lever as an auto transition By combining common transitions with independent key transitions different transition types can be applied to the background and keys for example allowing a key wipe combined with a background dissolve See Executing a Transition page 351
137. the previous duration of the current keyframe Thus the effect duration does not change Insertion position Change in effect duration Insertion before the first keyframe Seren 2 3 4 ASEAS 2 3 4 5 Insertion between two keyframes 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Insertion at an existing keyframe 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Insertion at the last keyframe 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Keyframe insertion position and the change in effect duration Changes in the effect duration caused by deleting a keyframe e When the effect is stopped on a keyframe a delete operation deletes the keyframe and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted keyframe e When the effect is stopped between two keyframes a delete operation deletes the preceding keyframe and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted keyframe In constant duration mode see page 170 the duration of the keyframe before the deleted keyframe is increased by the duration of the deleted keyframe Thus the effect duration does not change Deletion position Change in effect duration Deletion of the first keyframe 1 2 3 4 Wt A a 1 a 2 3 Deletion of an intermediate keyframe 1 2 3 4 A A 1 je 3 Deletion between two kevframes 1 2 3 4 A 1 2i 3 Deletion of the last keyframe 1 2 3 4 WLLL A
138. the signal type of the monitor output one channel to video or key is assigned to one of the Prefs buttons of the Menu control block or one of the buttons of the Utility Shotbox control block DME MON KEY command For details of the assignment see Settings Button Assignment Prefs Utility Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To switch the signal type of DME output video key assigned to a monitor signal Press the DME MON KEY command assigned button and turn it on to assign DME key output to a monitor signal Then press the button and turn it off to assign DME video output to a monitor signal For selection of the DME channels to be assigned to a monitor signal see Assigning a DME output signal as a monitor signal page 403 under Applying a DME Effect to a Key in Chapter 4 Selecting the signal output from the DME monitor output connector Display the Engineering Setup gt DME gt Output gt Monitor Output menu Press DME1 or DME2 to select the DME to operate on On the left select MONI OUT 1 or MONI OUT 3 AON On the right select the signal You can select any of Chl Video Chl Key Ch2 Video and Ch2 Key Dual Link Support 5 Press Set This assigns the signal Restrictions when using a dual link When using a dual link the switcher and DME resources are linked in duplex link A and link B resulting in the following restrictions Restrictions Details Functions that cannot be Fun
139. the thumbnail is output To recall in direct recall mode Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file In this mode only the front thumbnail file is recalled 1 In step 7 above instead of pressing Recall press Direct Recall 2 Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall This immediately recalls the file To display the subsidiary file in front With the direct recall mode on press Sub Display turning it on Aowey ewei4 7 Ja deyo Clip Playback You can play a recalled clip by a menu operation or by using the device control block With a pair file recalled it is possible to set Pair to Off and carry out a single file operation but if you then set Pair to On again the output of frame memory may be black In such cases it is necessary to recall the pair file once more Playing a clip using the menu 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF2 Clip and HF2 Play The Play menu appears The status of the clip shown in the current target FM selection buttons appears here 514 Frame Memory Clip Operations 3 4 ae ial IR 010001 9 00 00 10 RL RETR R 5 Black 6 7 Black B Clip Begin Clip End 01 00 00 00 01 00 04 29 Current Stop FMI LU l Lal a g a Dur 00 05 00 01 00 00 00_ 01 00 00 05 METEEN Clip Begin Clip End 01 00 00 00 01 00 04 28 e Current Stop as U l L MA 9 Dur 00 05 0 01 01 00 00 05 01 00 00 09 Stop TC Rewind
140. to a border the boundary becomes discontinuous giving an unnatural effect Avoid applying a mask to a border e If mosaic or defocus is enabled and in the lt Mosaic Defocus Mode gt group you select Video Key then the mask is disabled Resizer 431 follows Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Size Size 0 00 to 100 00 5 Aspect Aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 sfog vp saideyo skey vp Ja deyo 432 Restrictions on resizer effects Resizer Restrictions on the use of effects Of the resizer effects using mask drop shadow or wide key border requires two units of hardware for the resizer function These are called dual resizer effects In a dual resizer effect predetermined combinations key 1 and key 2 or key 3 and key 4 are used For example if either of key 1 and key 2 has resizer set to On the other key cannot be used for a dual resizer effect The same restriction applies when using a resizer DME wipe in place of resizer Impossibility of simultaneous use within the same keyer The following combinations of resizer effects cannot be simultaneously on e Mosaic and edge enhance e Defocus and wide key border e Mask and drop shadow e Mask and wide key border Key Snapshots Using the key snapshot function you can instantaneously save all of the key settings except the key insertion state on off and key priority in dedicated registers for later recall as required Fo
141. ways of setting the transition rate using the Flexi Pad control block or numeric keypad control block to enter a numeric value or using the Key menu to access the Transition menu for the M E or PGM PST bank You can also display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate for each of the M E and PGM PST banks and change the settings See Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings page 553 When the setup selection is for separate transition rates for inserting or deleting a key you can set both rates independently For example with the system in the state with the key not inserted the transition rate setting applies to key insertion Setting the independent key transition rate in the Flexi Pad control block In the PGM PST bank or when using a simple type transition control block you cannot use the Flexi Pad control block to set the transition rate 1 In the Flexi Pad control block of the M E bank hold down the TRANS RATE button and in the independent key transition control block press the delegation button KEY 1 to KEY4 for the key for which you want to set the transition rate The memory recall section display is now ready to accept the entered independent key transition rate 2 Enter the desired transition rate with the numeric keypad e Enter a value of up to three digits e To cancel the entry press any of the six buttons in the leftmost column
142. with the pattern limit function disabled the wipe pattern does not complete e When the limit value is set to 0 the wipe effect is completely disabled and carrying out the transition produces no change in the image When the limit value is set to the maximum 100 the image changes in exactly the same way as when the pattern limit function is off but when the transition is completed the cross point selections on the background A and B buses do not interchange You can specify the limit value either by entering a numeric value in the menu or by operating the fader lever to set the fader lever position See Pattern Limit page 355 The pattern limit function is not available in an independent key transition Fade to black The PGM PST bank provides a fade to black function controlled with the FTB button in the fade to black control block See Fade to Black page 369 In multi program mode or DSK mode it is possible to carry out a fade to black on a number of programs simultaneously You can also make a Setup menu setting such that a fade to black does not apply to particular programs For details of the setting see Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Transitions 47 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 48 Keys A key is an effect in which a part of the background image is replaced by an image or superimposed text
143. you save a key snapshot in a register for which the button is lit orange or yellow the existing contents of the register are overwritten Recalling a key snapshot For example the following procedure recalls the state of the M E 1 key 1 settings 1 2 Key Snapshots In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the key delegation button KEY1 turning it on Press the K SS button turning it on Set the following buttons on or off depending on the information you want to recall These buttons are not provided in the downstream key control block K MOD ENBL button When this is on the key settings and key modifiers are recalled When this is off they are not recalled K TR ENBL button When this is on the independent key transition settings are recalled When this is off they are not recalled If both buttons are off the key memory function is enabled and only the saved selection of key fill and key source signals is recalled Press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register you want to recall The button you pressed lights yellow and this recalls the key snapshot To cancel a recall carried out in the downstream key control block press the UNDO button in the downstream key control block Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module When using a simple transition module the key snapshots hold the settings for key 3 and key 4 However each
144. z JaJdEUQ to is a VTR disk recorder the start point updated by the setting of the TIMELINE button is as follows When the TIMELINE button is On start point of the timeline When the TIMELINE button is Off start point of Cueup amp Play STOP TC Press this button to set the timecode of the stop point at that time The timecode of the stop point is updated to the current time each time this button is pressed When the device the operation applies to is a VTR disk recorder the stop point updated by the setting of the TIMELINE button is as follows When the TIMELINE button is On stop point of the timeline When the TIMELINE button is Off stop point of Cueup amp Play SET START TC SET STOP TC SET DUR When pressed these buttons light green START TC STOP TC or DUR appears in the numeric keypad control block display and you can enter a timecode from the numeric keypad If you enter a numeric value and press the ENTER button the button goes off whereas if you press the ENTER button without entering a numeric value the numeric keypad control block display shows To exit the numeric value entry mode either repeat pressing the same button or press a different numeric keypad control block linked button or a mode selection button such as the EFF and SNAPSHOT buttons in the numeric keypad control block If the timecode has been set correctly the entered numeric valu
145. 0 Still Image Operations For an overview of frame memory concepts see Frame Memory page 85 e During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the target FM selection buttons see page 514 frame memory operations may not be performed properly Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip playback The following sections describe the operations available in the MVS 8000A system and MVS 8000G system The MVS 8000 system uses the same menus as those of Version 5 30 For its operating procedures see the User s Guide of Version 6 00 or earlier Preparations Allocating the frame memory outputs FM1 to FM8 to cross point buttons To output a frame memory image to a monitor for example the output signal from the frame memory FM1 to FM8 must be allocated to a cross point button Carry out this allocation in the Setup menu Accessing the Frame Memory menu Most frame memory operations are carried out using the Frame Memory menu To access the Frame Memory menu use either of the following procedures e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button FRAME MEM e Press the cross point button to which the frame memory output is allocated twice in rapid succession Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu The menu screen consists of the following principal parts The frame memory selection area display is the same for all except the Pattern Adjust Pattern Select Fie
146. 0 vertical direction Rot Z Rotation about the Z axis 100 00 to 100 00 Delay Timing for video selected on 100 00 to 100 00 a utility bus to appear on the screen When Brick for three channels is selected pattern number 3601 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Side V Size X Side V horizontal 0 01 to 8 00 magnification 2 Side V Size Y Side V vertical 0 01 to 8 00 magnification 3 Height Height of brick 0 01 to 100 00 2 4 Side V Center X Side V horizontal center 100 00 to 100 00 b position 468 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values position 5 Side V Center Y Side V vertical center 100 00 to 100 00 9 a Shared with knob 3 for parameter group 2 b The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side V At 100 00 the center is at the left edge of the screen and at 100 00 the center is at the right edge of the screen c The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side V At 100 00 the center is at the bottom edge of the screen and at 100 00 the center is at the top edge of the screen Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Side H Size X Side H horizontal 0 01 to 8 00 magnification 2 Side H Size Y Side H vertical 0 01 to 8 00 magnification 3 Height Height of brick 0 01 to 100 00 2 4 Si
147. 0 to 100 00 a The Density adjustment only affects the key edge This can be adjusted separately from Key Density and if Key Density is set to 0 00 the embossed edge effect only can be applied Key Setting Operations Using Menus 391 sfog py saideyo skey p 13 dey9 392 To make edge fill adjustments carry out the settings in step 6 Select the edge fill signal in the lt Edge Fill gt group Utility 1 Bus signal selected on the utility 1 bus Matte signal from dedicated color matte generator It becomes possible to adjust color 1 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 When the edge type is outline in place of the edge fill signal the selected key fill signal fills the outline and elsewhere remains as the background Carry out the following operation depending on the selection in step 4 When Utility 1 Bus is selected Hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal in the background A bus row While the UTIL button is held down the background A bus changes to the utility 1 bus To enable the UTIL button its operation mode must be set to Hold beforehand See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 When Matte is selected Press Matte Adjust in the same EDGE menu to display th
148. 00 Press the MORE button lit amber changing it to green then adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Saturation 0 to 100 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block sfog vp Jaideyo skey p 13 dey9 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Hue Hue 359 to 0 4 Density Density O to 100 Masks Using the main mask In the key control block press the MAIN MASK button turning it on The parameter settings depend on the mask source selected as Box or Pattern in the lt Mask Source gt group of the Main Mask menu for the key e When box is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top position 100 shown as 00 to 100 2 Left Left position 100 shown as 00 to 100 3 Right Right position 100 shown as 00 to 100 4 Bottom Bottom position 100 shown as 00 to 100 When box is selected and the MORE button is lit amber there are more settings Press the MORE button so that it changes from amber to green to make the extra setting Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Soft Box softness 0 to 100 e When pattern is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 2 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 243 a Th
149. 00 00 to 200 00 Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same time The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest numbered channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings this changes the settings on the other channels by the same amount To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen In the lt Position gt group press Center Displaying and moving the position of the DME wipe pattern position select 1 N In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears In the lt Position Select gt group the one of the Top Left Top Right Bottom Left and Bottom Right buttons that is on indicates the current display position of the DME wipe pattern In the lt Position gt group press Position turning it on Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows In one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on In two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time To move the position of the DME wipe pattern press the button where you want to move to turning it on The DME wipe pattern displayed on the screen moves to the position of the specified button Setting relative positions to move the DME wipe pattern In two channel mode use the following procedure 1 In
150. 001 to 7008 e Squeeze pattern numbers 7021 to 7031 e Frame in out pattern numbers 7201 to 7208 7221 to 7224 3 Press the desired pattern to select it For more about resizer DME wipe modifiers see Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers page 478 Resizer DME Wipe Setting 481 s d M IWA 9 19jdeuo sodiM IWA 9 19jdeuo 482 DME Wipe Snapshots DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad To carrv out DME wipe snapshot operations use the Flexi Pad control block You can save recall and delete DME wipe snapshots using the procedures similar to the procedures for wipe snapshot operations In DME wipe snapshot operations use the DME button instead of the WIPE button used in wipe snapshot operations e A button in the memory recall section in which a DME wipe snapshot is saved shows the pattern and lights yellow For a user programmable DME the register number see page 483 appears Depending on the setting of the Setup menu see Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 you can also display a register name e Ina simple type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to delete a DME wipe snapshot For details of the operating procedures see Wipe Snapshots page 460 DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus In the same way as for wipe snapshots you can save recall and delete DME snapshots For details of the operations see Wi
151. 0M Color Corrector Board To use the color corrector function on the MVS 8000G requires the MKS 8442G Frame Memory Board and BZS 8420 Color Corrector Software To use the software you are required to input an install key For the method of inputting an install key see Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 suonouny 0008 SAW L dojdeuD The color corrector includes the following functions Input video processing Carrying out the following corrections to a YUV signal before conversion to an RGB signal e Overall gain adjustment of the video signal Gain adjustment of the Y signal Gain adjustment of the C signal Hue delay Black level adjustment Primary color correction Carrying out the following corrections to each of the R G and B signals Black balance adjustment setting the output level for a 0 level input signal White balance adjustment setting the output level for a 100 level input signal Gamma correction adjusting the curvature of the gamma curve Knee correction adjusting the position of the maximum point of the gamma curve Color Corrector 223 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 224 Output level White balance adjustment Output level A A i i A gt Input level O p Input level i Knee correction v Black balance adjustment Ud iii Unadjusted signa Adjusted signal It is also possible to mask part of the region to be correc
152. 1 In the menu screen press the menu page number button to open the top menu window For details of the top menu window see Function of the top menu window page 332 2 Press Shut down A confirmation message appears 3 Press Yes This shuts down the menu system after a while and the menu display changes to black Now power off the system To restart menu operations Power on the control panel once more Add Favorite button Pressing this button allows the currently displayed menu to be registered to the Shortcut menu Registering a menu to the Shortcut menu 1 In the Home gt Favorites gt Shortcut menu select the desired group 2 Display the menu you want to register and then press the Add Favorite button The currently displayed menu is automatically registered to a blank button and hue pressing a knob parameter button displays a color palette window Basic Menu Operations jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ JSUB4 JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JAJdEUQ 334 Color Palette Color palette buttons Sel Copy BOperation buttons Color display ONumeric keypad Luminance 0 00 100 00 Default HUE Cancel Color palette buttons Press one of these to enter the corresponding color in the display By default the following settings are available First row white yellow cyan green Second row magenta red blue black Third row all black
153. 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 68 Applying modulation to the wipe pattern Modulation You can apply modulation independently to the main pattern and sub pattern When using 1080PsF mode in an HD system the modulation function is not available 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 Depending on the desired effect in the lt Modulation gt group select one of the following H Modulate the pattern applying waviness in the horizontal direction to edges V Modulate the pattern applying waviness in the vertical direction to edges Fringe Modulate the pattern applying waviness in the radial direction to edges Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 3 Set the following parameters a See page 69 b See page 69 Applying barrel or pincushion distortion to the edge of the wipe pattern Spring You can set the spring function independently for the main and sub patterns 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 Press Spring turning it on 3 Set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter Gain Adjustment Setting values Degree of barrel distortion 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 71 Applying a spiral effect to the wipe pattern Spiral You can set the spiral function independently for the main and sub patterns 1
154. 11 applying toakey 400 415 channel selection buttons 269 setup 202 special effects 122 DME channel copy 101 swap 101 DME monitor 270 287 309 DME override 549 DME patterns user programmable 483 DME Wipe Modify Clear 83 DME wipe pattern 72 edge modification 470 groups 72 selection 466 DME wipe pattern list for one channel mode 566 for two channel mode 575 DME wipe settings 466 for independent key transitions 477 DME wipes 72 465 copy 99 100 direction 470 modifiers 469 modify clear 476 position 471 478 resizer 481 snapshot 82 482 swap 99 100 Door 567 Downstream key control block 306 Drop border 53 parameters 411 dual resizer effects 432 Duration effect 171 keyframe 171 modes 170 setting buttons 283 Dust mix 62 443 E Edge 65 fill 55 modifiers 52 EDIT ENBL button 282 Edit point specification buttons 282 Editing buttons 283 EFF LOOP button 284 Effect 168 attributes 169 dissolve 169 183 duration 171 editing 169 execution 180 resizer 427 saving recalling 169 Effect execution direction selection buttons 284 Emboss 54 Enhanced wipes 561 Enter button 330 332 Explosion 138 Extended VTR control 161 External key 90 processed key 270 403 417 External devices 158 connections 197 disk recorder control 161 Extended VTR control 161 GPI device control 160 P Bus device control 159 shared control functions 158 VTR control 161 External hard disk drive 532 F Fade to black 47 369 control
155. 21 suonouny 0008 SAN 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Wire frame Range displaved on normal monitor screen To automaticallv erase the graphic displav Turn Auto Erase on The graphic displav is erased automaticallv whenever a kevframe is executed It is displaved again after the kevframe ends after the time set in Recoverv Time Flex Shadow center axis When using the Flex Shadow function see page 125 turn Flex Shadow Axis on to displav the Flex Shadow center axis This is an effective aid in making settings for this function The Flex Shadow center axis function is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A Three Dimensional Parameter Display You can display a three dimensional parameter list for the currently controlled image When more than one DME channel is selected the status of the reference channel is displayed For the method of displaying a parameter list and an example display see Three Dimensional Parameter Display in Chapter 11 Volume 2 DME Special Effects You can use DME to add a variety of special effects To add effects use the DME menu See DME Special Effect Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 122 Digital Multi Effects DME Border Crop Defocus This effect adds a border to the image frame You can adjust the width or thickness of the border its color and the softness of the border edges This effect crops away the edg
156. 2605 2606 2607 2608 2621 2622 2623 2625 2626 2627 2631 2642 DME Wipe Pattern List 575 L auuNjoA xipuoddv L ewnjoA xipueddv 576 Picture in picture Page turn 2651 2652 i Fi ii Ex iii 2705 y 2706 N 2707 N 2708 l R Pa 2709 b 2710 4 2711 2712 kW wa K A iu 2744 2745 DME Wipe Pattern List Page roll DME Wipe Pattern List 577 L auuNjoA xipuoddv L SLunjoA xipueddv 578 Brick 2801 2802 2803 2804 2811 2812 2813 2814 Frame in out 2861 est 2862 kesad 2863 User programmable DME The illustrations for patterns 2901 to 2999 show an effect register number or register name 2901 201 DME Wipe Pattern List 2999 299 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three Channel Mode Brick User programmable DME The illustrations for patterns 3901 to 3999 show an effect register number or register name 3901 301 e o o 13999 399 DME Wipe Pattern List 579 L OLnjoA xipuoddv L SLunjoA xipueddy 580 Resizer DME Wipe Pat
157. 3 4 Key Priority Setting Key priority after the transition 3 2 1 4 Indicators 1 3 flashing 2 1 flashing 3 4 Lit Lit Lit Flashing Flashing BKGD KEY2 KEY3 KEY1 l Example key status display showing the key priority after the transition Key Priority Setting 347 SUOMISUBIL 19 JdEUQ SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation 348 You can also select the required transition type by a menu operation 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears Select the required transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group The parameter settings can now be adjusted with the knobs according to the selected transition type For details see the following e Super Mix Settings page 349 e Color Matte Settings page 350 e Setting the Transition Rate page 352 When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 there may be cases in which two or more transition types have been selected Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation Super Mix Settings For an overview of the super mix see page 42 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition
158. 311 Mix 41 61 Mode selection buttons 265 285 303 Modulation 69 452 Mono 127 MORE button 269 Morphing 61 Mosaic 128 glass 132 wipes 563 Motion decay 142 Multi 67 451 459 mirror 135 move 127 Multi Program 2 230 basic operation 232 restriction 243 MVE 8000A 109 MVE 9000 109 N NAM 42 90 261 311 Nega 128 Negative NAM 61 Network configuration 187 Next transition 34 selecting 34 Non additive mix 42 261 311 Nonlinear effects 131 Non Svnc state 360 Normal edge 413 Index selection buttons 261 310 XOPUJ 585 xepu MM 586 mix 49 Numeric display 266 303 Numeric keypad 286 control block 284 window 330 O ON AIR indicators 270 One stroke mode 42 One time mode 42 Operation buttons 272 modes 88 settings 197 Outline 54 parameters 412 Output destination specification buttons 270 signal settings 200 OVERRIDE button 270 P Page Roll 571 Page turn 137 570 Pair file processing 94 527 Pair mode 87 Pairing 68 452 Panel setup 195 Panorama 137 Parameter group button 322 Paths 174 DME 176 switcher 174 types 179 Pattern key 90 Pattern limit 46 355 buttons 262 302 setting by a menu operation 356 setting with the fader lever 356 transition 357 Pattern mix 61 441 types 61 Pattern replication 67 Index P Bus devices 158 control 159 Perspective 119 Picture in picture 570 576 Plane function 50 Positioner 65 448 456 471 478 Positive NAM 61 Posterizati
159. 331 Keyer copy 99 swap 99 Keyframe 168 control block 281 duration 171 effect registers 166 status 323 strobe 143 KF button 263 Knob 269 294 parameter buttons 323 K SS button 305 L Left button 332 Lens 136 Level selection buttons 290 Lighting 140 Line feed button 332 Linear key 48 Local coordinate space 111 Location size 118 XYZ 116 Lock function 508 Luminance key 48 M E bank display 259 copy 98 swap 98 Macro 210 attachment 218 creating 213 editing 212 214 218 events 210 execution 215 menu macro 222 overview 210 registers 210 timeline 216 Magnitude 66 MAIN and SUB delegation button 235 Main mask 56 using 397 414 Main menu site 335 Main sub modifier link 63 Maintenance 193 Manual transition 45 359 Mask DME 130 Masks 55 397 414 Master region 166 snapshot registers 167 timeline registers 167 timelines 181 Matte data copv 100 swap 100 Max min value indication 330 Melt 139 Memorv card slot 295 initialization 192 recall buttons 298 Memory card USB adaptor block 295 Memory Stick USB connections block 296 Memory Sticks 296 Menu accessing 314 321 control block 294 display 294 operations 323 organization 313 page number button 322 screen 322 shortcut menu 335 shutting down 333 switching between the main menu sites 335 title button 322 top menu list 313 MENU button 276 Menu macros 222 Metal 129 Minus button 330 Mirror 135 Misc menu operations 548 MIX 90 261 263
160. 606 d Not patterns 1 to 8 17 and 18 e Not patterns 220 to 223 f Not patterns 19 and 20 g But patterns 21 23 and 24 are possible h But patterns 21 and 23 are possible Wipe Modify Clear Press Default Recall at the lower left of the menu display turning it on then press VF5 Wipe to return the wipe settings to their initial status For details of menu operations see Menu Operations page 323 454 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions You carry out independent key transition wipe setting operations using the Wipe Adjust menu for each keyer For an overview of independent key transitions see page 37 This section describes the independent key transition wipe settings taking the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust menu as an example Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings Accessing the independent key transition wipe settings menu As an example to access the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust menu carry out either of the following operations e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and select VFI Keyl and HF6 Transition to display the Transition menu for key 1 then press Wipe Adjust In the independent key transition control block of the M E 1 bank press the key delegation button KEY 1 then press the independent key transition type selection button WI
161. 8200 install key first time only Vv Set Multi Program 2 operating mode for each switcher bank Vv Assign output signals and set the background configuration key configuration and key preview configuration Vv For each switcher bank make a main sub assignment one of main dedicated sub dedicated and main and sub shared For a switcher bank assigned to main and sub shared assign the MAIN and SUB delegation buttons ww Create the main and sub images Vv Execute the transition Optional operations Making cross point settings Enabling DME wipe operations for sub Inhibiting utility 2 bus signal selection Including Multi Program 2 data in keyframes and snapshots Changing the key assignment for each output Assigning sub preview output to preview selection buttons in the fade to black control block Changing the matrix size to Standard Making settings for keyframe timeline operation Basic Operations Required Entering the BZS 8200 install key first time only After installing the BZS 8200 Multi Program 2 software in the switcher carry out the following procedure 232 Multi Program 2 1 In the status area of the Engineering Setup gt System gt Install Unit Config menu select the switcher SWRx and press License The License menu appears 2 In the License menu enter the BZS 8200 install key For details of the operation see Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu
162. 9 deyo 170 You can edit either on a keyframe within the effect or at any point between keyframes Insert Insert the current image as a keyframe Inserting a keyframe in an existing effect may change the duration of the effect see page 172 Modify Modify a keyframe You can modify a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Delete Delete a keyframe You can delete a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Deleting keyframes from an effect reduces the duration of the effect see page 173 After deleting a keyframe you can reinsert the keyframe with a paste operation Copy Copy a keyframe You can copy a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Paste Paste the keyframe last copied or deleted anywhere within the effect Pause You can set a pause on a particular keyframe so that when the effect is run it pauses on this keyframe You can make this setting on any number of keyframes To restart the paused effect repeat the operation to run the effect KF Loop Execute the effect the specified number of times through the keyframes in the specified range Undo an edit operation Undo the effect of the last operation to insert modify delete or paste a keyframe Duration modes Keyframes In keyframe editing there are two duration modes switch between them in the keyframe operation section See Time Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Variable dur
163. 96 Color BackKgrounds ccccscccscscsscccsccssccsccssscecscescsesscscscssessecsscssscesecsscesecees 97 COPY ANG S WAP ssiscinsessccactstcscsosesesdessonscasesscesseeaconsseasousoves apscbesessecossenssdussuasie 98 Side FLAGS visscssscscscssscetssonucscstascesssacesscsesssvostasoossvnsesossesssdeadcasesteesssedeccnesbooesses 102 OVERVIEW beck ii asa ol AA Balti Sa Av aa vit ae el 102 Side Flag Setting sioned get sena p a f e 102 Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags sse 103 DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags mn 104 Video Process ssesnesnenzzzennanenzznonenenennensanensaneneeneneenensonensenensenensenensonennonen 107 Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal 107 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus 107 Video Process MeOMOry sisien iii ei i ear ear ke siere ES ejn 108 Digital Multi Effects DME sssesnnsnnonzonsensnsenonnennzonensensensensenseneene 109 Three Dimensional Transformations e neennenezznnenenzznnnzn 110 Transformation Operation Modes e ennennnnnnnnnnnznn 116 Graphics Displays cis i ts oeitea hs a a p hey 120 Three Dimensional Parameter Display sense 122 DME Special Effects is sieb pe desea ds qa e e e 122 Interpolation 13 11 isir fees ba aces voce den Hasta u risen ee ty eeee 151 Key Density Adjustment ss enennenennnnnnnennnnansnnennnznna 152 Key Source Selecto sisissesissiiiiei iii ia ei ki eb 152 GOB ALE TTS CHS i ie
164. 9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JAJdEUQ 282 Effect execution direction selection buttons EFF LOOP button STOP NEXT KF button EDIT ENBL button Duration setting buttons AUTO INS button 6 KF LOOP button PAUSE button Effect execution section B Edit point specification Editing buttons buttons EDIT ENBL edit enable button Press this button turning it on to enable effect editing operations with the keyframe control block When macro editing is carried out this button lights red B Edit point specification buttons GO TO TC Go to timecode Press this button turning it on to enter a numeric value from the numeric keypad control block and move the edit point to the specified timecode position GO TO KF Go to keyframe Press this button turning it on to enter a numeric value from the numeric keypad control block and move the edit point to the specified keyframe Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel During macro editing pressing this button moves the edit point to the event number specified by numeric entry with the numeric keypad control block PREV KF previous keyframe When this button is pressed the edit point moves to the keyframe immediately before the current time the position where the effect is currently stopped During macro editing pressing this button
165. AB b vi ob belt 57 Blinks iso a a A el lewis T 57 Key Default sisa i seeks oats thane a aa a ose ge 57 Key Modify Clears scr2 i ie a b b dhe RR 58 RESIZER 5 82 a BAD Ein Ue A ak N 58 WIDEN i iii sig G qe g asa Sa ada 60 Types Of Wipe Pattern ssiri si ibni peti sdesbaaseys essre a i sisip rsisi 60 Pattern Mix sis bii ii pei ie to i ee a a L REER 61 Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers se neneenennnnnezi 63 Wipe Snapshots red cusses vet rd ates dua ebla reals sa e 71 Wipe Modify Clearicissisce c gehts i iinet eatin TI 71 DME WADES sscsacccscscssccosnrecvoossassenasoassascoestenasessestonssedsoossussonaesssevaseasscnsoosseatons 72 Types of DME Wipe Pattern ooien ia a E S 72 DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers sse 80 Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects 00 eee 81 Table of Contents 5 DME Wipe Snapshots s seen eneennnzznnznnzznnnnnanznnnnnznnznnnnnznnzzi 82 DME Wipe Modify Clear nee nnnennnnnnenn ens 83 Resizer DME Wipes cnisia ibu pet BDL da aa e A 83 Frame Memory sscsssssccsessseriseseiecedscernssscesncsatenteceessiesdsvectesoobssesssusssessescoanteasoes 85 COVED VIEW ae A OE E EE E TERA 85 Still Image File Functions sessist tiii etaa 89 Frame Memory Clip Function e nneenenennnnnn ern nn nesa 92 Image Data Management nenenennnznnenznzznnznnnnnnnnnnnznnnzn 94 Image Data Transfer sisien ee ves 94 External Hard Disk Drive ACCESS ecceeseesseceseeeneeceaeeeseeeneeeeaeeeeeeeene
166. AUX bus assigned to output connector OUT23 or OUT724 you can select a P P row output signal If these buses are assigned to other than OUT23 or OUT24 then it is not possible to select a P P row output signal Assigning these buses to the two connectors is recommended Output connector Assignable bus OUT23 Edit preview bus OUT24 AUX bus Format converter output restrictions On the MVS 8000G the signal output from the format converter output connectors FC1 FC2 can be assigned in either of the following ways e Out 15 16 Assignment fixed signals OUT15 for FC1 and OUT 16 for FO2 e Out 17 22 Select from the OUT17 to OUT22 signals It is not however possible to select the same signal for FC1 and FC2 It is not possible to select FC1 and FC2 differently For example it is not possible to select Out 15 16 for FC1 and Out 17 22 for FC2 FC3 and FC4 always have the same signals assigned OUT39 and OUT40 respectively and therefore it is not possible to select OUT17 OUT22 Logical assignment of the physical PGM PST In the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt Logical M E Assign menu it is not possible to assign the physical PGM PST as a logical PGM PST In the lt Logical M E to Physical P P gt group you can select from M E 1 M E 2 and M E 3 Simple P P Software Output Fixed assigned outputs Poets Standard mode Multi program mode DSK mode 9 OUT17 Program P P O
167. Adjust the following parameters with the knobs Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Location X Move key HD 99 9999 to horizontally 99 9999 SD 4 3 33 3333 to 33 3333 SD 16 9 24 9999 to 24 9999 Resizer 41 9 shey vp saideyo skey vp Ja deyo 420 Resizer Parameter group 1 2 ratio horizontally and vertically ata Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Location Y Move key vertically HD 99 9999 to 99 9999 SD 4 3 33 3333 to 33 3333 SD 16 9 24 9999 to 24 9999 3 Size Magnify or shrink 0 0000 to 99 9999 key Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Aspect X Change aspect 0 0000 to 99 9999 ratio horizontally 2 Aspect Y Change aspect 0 0000 to 99 9999 ratio vertically 3 Aspect Ratio Change aspect 0 0000 to 2 0000 time Key control block operations for key shrinking magnification and movement Delegation buttons RESIZER button e O O ME 6 0 HOH O O Knobs OVER RIDE rece MORE button 1 Use the delegation buttons to select the key to which you want to apply a resizer function 2 Press the RESIZER button turning i
168. Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Rate Mix proportion 0 00 to 100 00 Still Image Operations 505 Kowa ewes 7 J9JdEUQ Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo 506 3 When you selected a pattern key press Pattern Adjust The Pattern Adjust menu appears In the menu set the pattern modifiers as required e When turning Position on and setting the pattern position Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 100 00 to 100 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 65 e When turning Multi on and replicating the pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of 1 to 63 pattern horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of 1 to 63 pattern vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 42 a See page 68 e When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob 1 Parameter Aspect Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 67 e When turning Rotation Anglel on and inclining the pattern Knob 1 Parameter Angle Adjustment Angle of pattern rotation Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 To select the pattern display the Pattern Select menu by pressing Pattern Select in the Pattern Adjust menu You can c
169. At 100 00 tiles appear from the top or left edge of the screen at 100 00 from the bottom or right edge of the screen b At 100 00 all rows appear simultaneously at 100 00 until one row of tiles is completely displayed the next row does not start to appear e When a random wipe is selected pattern number 273 Knob Parameter 1 H Size Adjustment Tile width Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings sodiM G 9jdeuQ sodiM g Jaydeyo 440 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 V Size Tile height 0 00 to 100 00 3 Volatility Rate of tile generation 0 00 to 100 00 e When a diamond dust wipe is selected pattern number 274 Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Size Particle width 0 00 to 100 00 V Size Particle height 0 00 to 100 00 Flash Rate Rate of generation of particles 0 00 to 100 00 When Flash Rate is set to 0 00 you cannot change the pattern In this state adjusting H Size or V Size has no effect on the pattern For details of a pattern mix see the next section For details of applying pattern modifiers see Setting Wipe Modifiers page 443 Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block To select a pattern with a standard type Flexi Pad control block use the following procedure It is not possible to select a wipe pattern with a simple type Flexi Pad control block
170. Button Edit menu press Clear This deletes the button settings The shortcut menu settings are handled as part of the control panel setup You can recall and save them in the same way as setup data Basic Menu Operations 337 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Basic Menu Operations 338 Chapter 3 Transitions BasicOperatinsi Procedure ATA A 340 KevoPrioritviSettin i i LA Ta Ta at 343 Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block 343 Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation nn 345 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority L 346 Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation sccesseees 348 Super Mix SEINES A NA 349 Colors Matte Settings A a 350 Executing asfiransitione A Ta 351 Transition Indicator Function eA A A AA 351 Settinpathesjiransitio ni a ie aa e a 352 Pattern E A rere eee eee 355 JEP COUNTY AVM PAUL ora n Si i o f A A 359 Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever Manual Transition 359 Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions sen 360 INOn Syncs EE E A E A enone 360 Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode seen 361 illransitiomibrevieva 8 nE EEREN ETES EE ETES 363 Independent Key Transitions sessesessosocsossesossesossosoosossesosscssesossessesosse 364 Basic Independent Key Transition Operations sen 364 Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a M
171. C Operation Manual e MVS 8000A C 8000AS C Installation Manual MVS 8000G C 8000GS C Switcher Processor Pack e MVS 8000G C 8000GS C Operation Manual e MVS 8000G C 8000GS C Installation Manual MVS 8000SF C Switcher Processor Pack e MVS 8000SF C Operation Manual e MVS 8000SF C Installation Manual MVE 8000 C DME Processor Pack e MVE 8000 C Operation Manual e MVE 8000 C Installation Manual MVE 8000A DME Processor Pack e MVE 8000A Operation Manual e MVE 8000A Installation Manual MVE 9000 C DME Processor Pack e MVE 9000 C Operation Manual e MVE 9000 C Installation Manual CCP 8000 Center Control Panel Pack e CCP 8000 Operation Manual e CCP 8000 Installation Manual DCU 8000 Device Control Unit Pack e DCU 8000 Operation Manual e DCU 8000 Installation Manual DCU 2000 Device Control Unit Pack e DCU 2000 C Operation Manual e DCU 2000 C Installation Manual Introduction 21 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Features of the MVS 8000 Multi Format Switcher System The MVS 8000 Multi Format Switcher system boasts extensible high performance and multifunctionality The following are some of the principal features of this system System configuration flexibility Multiformat support This system supports both HDTV and SDTV signal formats The format selection can be switched by a simple control panel operation The MVS 8000G supports either the HDTV or SDTV signal format depending on the
172. Chapter 8 Color Backgrounds Color Background Setting Operations ssesenesnsennzzzssnesnnsenesensennonnoes 538 Color Background Settings Menu enennennennnznnznn 538 Basic Color Background Setting Operations 538 Chapter 9 Copy and Swap Basic Copy and Swap Operations sscscscsscsscssscssssssssessesssessessscsseees 544 Copy and Swap Menu Operations senenenennnenne nee 544 Copy by Button Operation e cece eeeseeeeeessessesseseesenseeseeaes 545 Chapter 10 Misc Menu Etc Misc Menu Operations ssresesnnenzennensenzonsensensnseneeneensenennennensensenseneenz 548 Port Settings for Control From an External Device 0 548 Editing Keyboard Settings seen enenennn sens ns sn 549 Side Flag Setting Sici i isSibt a PIERRE nista a Sib A SEa enii 550 Safe Title Settimpi scires toeni nea aeara eks 552 Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings 553 Table of Contents AUX Menu Operations srssnnsnnsennznnonesnnzznsennoennonaoenneenoeeneenoenseeneennenne 555 AUX BUS Settings 8bieii iii p AI a a ie eee 555 Status MENU wicsccccccccsesetssensedsctesecasceranteccuccconsacssceaseieescescecsessecessecrsteceseccsnsencse 556 Video Process Settings ccsscccsscsscsssssssscessssscscsssscscssessssesescesssesseeeseees 557 Appendix Volume 1 Wipe Pattern List ssnssnonnonnznnenzennoneonsonsenzensensenoenennooneenennenzensenseneenz 560 Standard
173. Crop Edge Soft Path for crop edge softness Beveled Edge Path for beveled edge Key Border Path for key border Art Edge Path for art edge Flex Shadow Path for flex shadow 7 Wipe Crop Path for wipe crop 9 Color Mix Path for color mix Video Modifv Overall path settings for video modifv items are Video Modify All made simultaneously Defocus Blur Path for defocus blur Multi Move Path for multi move Color Modify Path for color modify Mosaic Path for mosaic Mask Path for mask b Sketch Path for sketch Metal Path for metal P Dim Fade Path for dim fade 9 Glow Path for glow b Freeze Path for freeze Non Linear Path for nonlinear effects a This cannot be used on the MVE 8000 8000A b This cannot be used on the MVE 8000 DME Global Effect menu Item Paths that can be set Global Effect All Overall path settings for DME global effect items are made simultaneously Combine Path for combiner Shadow Path for shadow Brick Path for brick Types of path Path types for Curve There are five types as follows OFF Executing the effect causes no change Step There is no interpolation between keyframes so that the effect parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed Linear Linear interpolation between keyframes resulting in constant speed movement S Curve The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and after a keyframe so t
174. E wipes on the M E or PGM PST bank Also by pressing this button then pressing one of the DME channel selection buttons you can preset the DME channel to be used when a DME wipe is selected as the transition type for the next transition When presetting the DME channel for an independent key transition hold down this button then press one of the KEY 1 to KEY4 buttons turning the two buttons on beforehand Key type selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to select the desired key type Depending on the selected key type various parameters are displayed and you can set the values with the knobs LUM luminance key The background is cut out according to the luminance Y of the key source signal and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the background signal LIN linear key This is a type of luminance key with a reduced variation in gain and a higher adjustment precision CRK chroma key A particular hue usually blue in the key source signal is used to determine the hole to be cut in the background and filled with the key fill signal CVK color vector key The background is cut out with a key source created by adding the luminance and chrominance components of the key signal If the saturation is high this allows perfect keying even if the luminance level is low and the signal is not suitable for luminance keying PTN wipe pattern key A hole is
175. E 8000 Digital Multi Effects DME 129 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 130 Dim and Fade Dim makes the picture progressively dimmer into its depths Fade progressively makes the depths of the picture fade into the background Fade The Dim and Fade functions are not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A Glow Softens the edges of highlights giving an effect like being struck by a soft light The Glow function is not supported on the MVE 8000 Mask Masks part of the image so that special effects are applied only inside a selected pattern The mask function is applied in units made up of the following groups The Mask effect can be applied using effect group 1 and effect group 2 simultaneously Effect group 1 Posterization Solarization Nega Sepia Mono Contrast Mosaic Sketch Metal Effect group 2 Defocus Blur Glow Digital Multi Effects DME Effect video Effect video Video image image Mosaic image Mosaic Video image Mask normal Mask invert e The Mask function is not supported on the MVE 8000 e On the MVE 8000A the Mask function cannot be applied to both effect group and effect group 2 simultaneously Freeze Freezes the input video The following types are available Hard Freeze Freezes the input video at an arbitrary timing Time Strobe Freezes the input video at specified intervals for a specified length Film Slows the apparent frame rate f
176. Format Switcher system The MVS 8000 and MVS 8000SF have different numbers of M E banks and input output signals but are otherwise functionally identical This manual refers to these generically as the MVS 8000 system and describes principally the operation of the system using the CCP 8000 series of center control panels The User s Guide for this system comprises two volumes Contents of Volume 1 Overview of functions of the MVS 8000 system and basic switcher operations including transitions keys and wipes Contents of Volume 2 DME effects snapshots keyframes and various operations such as setup which affect the overall system Devices and system nomenclature In this manual when discussing the principal components of the MVS 8000 system in place of the formal product names abbreviated names characterizing the functions and features are sometimes used When distinctions between system configurations must be drawn the terms in the following table are used Principal components and naming The formal product names of the principal components of the MVS 8000 system and the terms used in this manual are as follows Formal product name Term used in this manual MVS 8000 8000SF 8000A 8000ASF 8000G switcher or switcher processor 8000GSF Multi Format Switcher Processor MVE 8000 MKS 8800 8000A Multi Format DME or DME processor or MVE 8000 DME Processor 8000A MVE 9000 Multi Format DME Processor DME
177. Frame gt DME User PGM menu For details of the operating procedures see Transition Mode Settings for User Programmable DME in Chapter 13 Volume 2 483 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns s d M IWA 9 19jdeuo sodiM IWA 9 19jdeuo 484 The following transition modes are available Channels Transition mode Effect group One channel mode Single transition mode Slide Split Door Page turn Page roll Squeeze Mirror Sphere Character Trail Wave Ripple 2D Trans 3D Trans Sparkle Split Slide Flip Tumble Flip Tumble Mosaic Defocus Frame in out Frame in out Frame in out H 9 Frame in out Frame in out V Frame in out Picture in picture P Picture in picture Compress Picture in picture Two channel mode Dual transition mode Slide Squeeze 3D Trans Two channel picture in picture Picture in picture a Transition according to DME wipe patterns 1202 1203 or 1204 b Transition according to DME wipe pattern 1201 c Transition according to DME wipe pattern 1251 For details see DME Wipes page 72 For the following group of effects available in two channel mode no user programmable DME wipe patterns can be created Page turn Page roll Frame in out Brick Notes on creating keyframe effects When creating a keyframe effect to be used as a user programmable DME pattern note the following depending on the transition mode used Notes
178. IDE FLAG button but if you press this button turning it off the side flags are temporarily disabled However when you select a different 4 3 video material the SIDE FLAG button automatically lights once again enabling the side flags Creating an image with side flags For example to create an image with side flags in the background B row of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 bank cross point control block hold down the UTIL button and in the background A row select the signal utility bus signal you want to insert in the side flag areas In the background B row press the cross point button corresponding to the 4 3 video material Misc Menu Operations 551 Oy Nua OSIN O JojdeuQ 913 nue OSIN OL Jadeyuo 552 At this point if auto side flags are on this automatically adds side flags to the 4 3 video material See Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Use either of the following methods to turn the side flags on e Use the Misc gt Enable gt Side Flags menu See page 550 e Use a cross point button operation See previous item This adds side flags to the 4 3 video material Safe Title Settings Switching the safe title function on or off 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button MISC and select VF2 Safe Title The Misc gt Safe Title menu appears Using any of the fol
179. INE button outline EMBOS button emboss For an overview of the edge modifications see page 52 The pressed button lights green and you can now adjust the parameters with the knobs The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the parameter name and the three digit setting value Setting the border parameters When the BDR button is lit green the parameter settings depend on the key type and whether the separate edge function is active To activate the separate edge function press Separate Edge setting it on in the Edge menu for the key e Separate edge off Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 to 8 0 to 100 P 4 Density Border density 0 to 100 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 393 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 b When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type e Separate edge on The border width settings can be made independently for left right top and bottom sides The separate edge function is only available when luminance key linear key or chroma key is selected as the key type 410 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top edge width 0 to 82 2 Left Left edge width 0to8 3 Right Right edge width 0 to 8 4 Bottom Bottom edge width 0 to 8 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 393 is
180. JOJJUOJ pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued O1 U0D pue snua Z JAJdEUQ 286 ALL Select all regions When any region is already selected pressing this button makes all regions unselected M E 1 to M E 3 P P Select the corresponding regions M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST USER 1 to USER 8 Select a User region DME1 to DMES Select a DME channel P Bus Select the P Bus region GPI Select the GPI region RTR Select the router region DEVI to DEV12 Select the Device 1 to Device 12 regions respectively MCRO Select the macro region Function selection buttons UNDO After recalling a register press this button to return to the state before recalling the register STORE STATS store status This lights amber when data is stored in a register After saving data to a register hold down this button and press the UNDO button to return the register to the state before the data was saved TC timecode Press this button turning it on to switch transition rate entry to the timecode entry mode STORE Press this button to switch to the mode for saving a snapshot effect shotbox or macro in a register RCALL recall Press this button to switch to the mode for recalling a snapshot effect shotbox or macro from a register STORE button or RCALL button flashes amber when one or more of the regions assigned to the Region selection buttons are not selected by the Region Select menu Numeric keypad In ad
181. Keyl Wipe Adjust menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameter Knob jParameter Adjustment 1 Soft Edge softness Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 Setting the wipe position Positioner There are two methods of setting the wipe position using the device control block or in a menu 456 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions To set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick You can also set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick in the device control block 1 In the device control block press the M E1 M E2 M E3 or P P button turning it on The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position setting as follows Table 1 Buttons and assigned settings Button name Setting K1 CB1 Wipe position for independent key 1 transition K2 CB2 Wipe position for independent key 2 transition K3 FMI Wipe position for independent kev 3 transition K4 FM2 Wipe position for independent kev 4 transition Table 2 Buttons assigned to functions Button name Function POS Toggle Position on or off X Y Fix the operating direction CTR Return the pattern position to the center of the screen 2 Press one of the buttons in Table 1 above to select the wipe position to which the operation applies Multiple selection is possible 3 Press the POS button turning Position on 4 Move the trackball or joystick to set the w
182. Loc Y Loc Z Paths for the x y and z axes Rot Overall path settings for items relating to Rot All image rotation are made simultaneously Rot X Rot Y Rot Z Paths for the x y and z axes Spin Overall path settings for items relating to spin Spin All are made simultaneously Spin Src X Spin Src Paths for the x y and z axes Y Spin Sre Z Spm X Spin Y Spin Paths for the x y and z axes Asp Overall path settings for items relating to Asp All aspect ratio are made simultaneously Rate X Rate Y Paths for the x and y axes 176 Keyframes Item Paths that can be set Skew Overall path settings for items relating to skew Skew All are made simultaneously Skew X Skew Y Paths for the x and y axes Aspect Path for aspect ratio Pers Overall path settings for items relating to Pers All perspective are made simultaneously Pers X Pers Y Pers Z Paths for the x y and z axes Axis Loc Overall path settings for items relating to Axis All image rotation axis are made simultaneously Axis X Axis Y Axis Z Paths for the x y and z axes DME 3D Trans Global menu Item 3D Trans Global All Paths that can be set Overall path settings for three dimensional transform items in the global channel are made simultaneously Loc Size Overall path settings for items relating to Loc Size All image size changes and movemen
183. M8 are as follows Input Frame memory source bus 1 Frame memory source bus 2 Output FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 FM7 FM8 Pair mode By enabling the pair mode you can link FM1 and FM2 FM3 and FM4 FM5 and FM6 and FM7 and FM8 For example when a freeze or image processing is carried out on FM1 the same operation is carried out on FM2 The same applies to the other pairs When a pair of images are captured in pair mode the image frozen in FMI 3 5 or 7 is referred to as the main file and the other frozen in FM2 4 6 or 8 is referred to as the sub file Frame Memory 87 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 88 Pair files and single files A file that can be recalled in pair mode is termed a pair file A pair file can be created by setting pair mode and capturing an image or by using the coupling function see page 94 to combine two single files A file other than a pair file is termed a single file A single file can be created by switching off pair mode and capturing an image or by using the separation function see page 94 to split a pair file Operation modes The frame memory has the following operation mode V K mode When the pair mode is active the key signal is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 This is convenient for handling the video and key signals together in frame memory For example when you select a video signal on
184. NORM REV normal reverse The wipe direction alternates between normal Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel and reverse every time a transition is executed When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button stops the tape TRANS PVW transition preview button When this button is lit you can check in advance the video changes during the transition on the preview output from the M E or PGM PST bank During the preview you can use the fader lever AUTO TRANS button and CUT button One of the following functions of this button can be selected in a Setup mode e When the transition completes the system returns to the normal mode e The transition preview mode is maintained while this button is pressed Switching is made between the transition preview mode and normal mode every time this button is pressed Pattern limit buttons PTN pattern LIMIT Pressing this button turning it on enables the pattern limit function When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button plays the tape LIMIT SET Use this button to set a pattern limit when the PTN LIMIT button is off Move the fader lever to the position of a particular pattern size and stop it there then press this button to set the pattern limit range When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button st
185. Operation buttons Set If you press any color palette button with this button held down the color shown in the color display is assigned to the color palette button Copy If you press a color palette button with this button held down the color is used as the source for copying Next press a different color palette button to copy to that button Swap If you press two color palette buttons in sequence with this button held down the two colors are swapped Basic Menu Operations Default If you press any color palette button with this button held down the color palette button is set to the default color Color display This shows the setting color and the parameters LUM SAT and HUE By adjusting the parameters with the knobs you can create any color If a parameter value is outside the permitted range for RGB 0 to 255 the indication Ilegal Color appears and this is adjusted to a value in range Cancel Pressing this button returns to the state when the color palette window was opened Numeric keypad Use this to enter numeric values for parameters For details of use see page 330 Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site For menu transitions you can store two separate versions in the main and subsidiary menu sites By switching sites and pressing the lt button and the button you can trace the history in each menu To switch the subsidiary menu site
186. Outputs and Target Frame Memory nn 495 Capturing an Input Image Freeze sse nn 496 Recallinszsullilmases A ees 500 Inverting the Field Polaritv of a Saved Still Image Field Invert Function 501 IrnageProcessi AT eteesresee eS 502 imaseoutputi A E A 507 Continuously Capturing Still Images Record nn 508 Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images Animation 509 Frame Memory Clip Operations ccscccsccssscccscsscccsccssccsccsesescsoess 512 Breparations tom peratonirewes eee era eee eee 512 Recalling Glipsarccse eee eee A L 512 GChipiBlay Dack 2788 txts eee eee A A 514 G lip Great one eee eee sence ees tages Seen ea recog eae esas es eee er res 518 Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders ss 520 Clip Outpuble re eet E E A 521 Recording and Playback of Ancillary Data sen 522 Clip Transition Operations cscccsccscssscsscssscsscseccecsscssecssessscssessseeee 524 Image Data Management 1 a stts Enoe 527 Pairi File Processin p A A 527 Movin pi File AT 528 Delt SoBe sees A tect senna street A ene 529 Renamin pikles A NAAT ANNA eer nee ees Ai Wa 530 kile Backups A eres 531 Restorinpikiles A A IA a A A ETT 531 External Hard Disk Drive ACCESS ssssesensnssnonsenensenonsenensznensenensaneneane 532 Hard DiskeFormattine este eee ete en A 533 SAVINA S Hee tee eee eee eee ee ere en eee eee ee 533 Recalling A E E rere ere eee eee 535 MOWSJA ewe 7 Ja deyo 49
187. Overlays a specified color onto the image You can adjust the sepia color that is overlaid and specify the degree of mixing between the original image and the sepia image Mono Converts the image into a monochrome image Digital Multi Effects DME 127 suonouny 0008 SAW 4a deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 128 Posterization Coarsens the luminance gradations of the image for a painting like effect You can specify the degree of luminance coarsening Solarization Like the Posterization effect creates a painting like effect but does so by coarsening the chroma gradations of the image You can specify the degree of chroma coarsening Nega Reverses the luminance and or chroma of the image Digital Multi Effects Contrast Changes the contrast of the luminance and or chroma of the image Mosaic Divides the image into small tiles so that it looks like a mosaic You can specify the size and aspect ratio of the tiles Digital Multi Effects Digital Multi Effects DME Sketch Provides a sketch like effect based on the outlines of the image using different touches such as sketch edge color drawing relief and sharp Sketch The Sketch function is not supported on the MVE 8000 Metal Provides a metallic gloss like that from gold silver or a rainbow colored surface A metallic gloss can also be given to a freely selected color The Metal function is not supported on the MV
188. PE twice in rapid succession Carrying out the above operation displays the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt Wipe Adjust menu which will be referred to below as simply the Key Wipe Adjust menu Selecting the independent key transition wipe pattern You select the independent key wipe pattern from the list of patterns displayed in the menu In an independent key transition you can only use the standard wipe patterns pattern numbers 1 to 24 To select a wipe pattern for independent key on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 455 sodiM G 9jdeuQ 1 In the Keyl Wipe Adjust menu select Pattern Select The Pattern Select menu appears 2 Press the button for the desired pattern sodiM g Jaydeyo Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers Available modifiers You can use the following modifiers with an independent key transition wipe Note that the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using e Direction e Edge e Positioner e Rotation e Aspect ratio e Pattern replication Setting the wipe direction Direction In the lt Direction gt group of the Key Wipe Adjust menu make any of the following selections Normal regular direction Normal Reverse alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse reverse direction to normal Softening the wipe pattern edge Soft edge 1 Press Soft in the
189. PY and SWAD sissesecacscencoosssscvnssacsoscosseascoasessovdcedosonesossonsccesnssues ciecosonsedensbane 98 Side Flags Sscsssecicestecdeccesiececatocceceessocessoessddevcseseccadeiscseascoodscnerdsunsescendetadseaiate 102 OVEIVIEW is iskop Auch e ews Racists a dest awed woe RNE 102 Side Flag Settings rsisi nnd Hates ied ae b va ie 102 Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags L 103 DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags L 104 Video Process sesnsneznznnznennsnennznsnnoneanensanensaneneanonennneanneeneneanenenneneeneneena 107 Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal 107 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus L 107 Video Process Memory Lm saeara eiiiai riiin 108 Digital Multi Effects DME esssessssesesesesososoeossesosesoesesesesosocorosseseseeosoesesese 109 Three Dimensional Transformations seen eee 110 Transformation Operation Modes e eneneenznnennnz enza 116 Graphics Display lite Meee Rakes Fa AT d 120 Three Dimensional Parameter Display Lee 122 DME Special Effects ssa aids rd 122 Interpolation sosonoan a A nati EE 151 Key Density Adjustment eee nsa nennz ness 152 Key Source Selection L rne E E E a 152 Global Effets iii a g A EEE 152 External Devices cicccsccscscectscsecscscesosssesiadseidesetsssetuesosccaedsecstceessasediecesdoactsaees 158 Shared Functions for External Device Control L 158 Control of P Bus Devices sssini sieaa 159 Control Of GPI Devices sis ap a
190. RGD CCR on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Overall gain of video signal 100 00 to 100 00 2 Y Gain Y signal gain 100 00 to 100 00 3 C Gain C signal gain 100 00 to 100 00 4 Hue Hue offset amount 180 00 to 180 00 386 Key Setting Operations Using Menus Selecting Key Fill and Key Source Selecting key fill and key source To select key fill and key source for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF1 Type The Type menu appears In the lt Key Fill gt group select either of the following for use as key fill Key Bus signal selected on the key 1 fill bus Matte signal from the dedicated color matte generator If you selected Key Bus in step 2 select the key fill signal on the key 1 row in the cross point control block To select key fill for key 3 or key 4 in the cross point control block press the KEY3 button or KEY4 button to the right of the key bus buttons turning it on to allocate the key row or key 2 row to the key 3 fill or key 4 fill then press the desired cross point button If you selected Matte in step 2 in the same Type menu press the Matte Adjust button to display the Matte Adjust menu then adjust the single color or two color combination color matte Select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combina
191. SONY SONY 34 5 83 6 sat T SC Kollez sl lt e 528 Multi Format 245 E Switcher System 8 MVS 8000 8000SF System f With CCP 8000 Series Center Control Panel e 7 3 User s Guide User s Guide Seth Revised 1 Volume 1 2nd Edition Revised 1 3 206 016 12 1 English SONY MVS 8000 8000SF System With CCP 8000 Series Center Control Panel User s Guide Multi Format Switcher System Volume 1 2nd Edition Revised 1 Software Version 7 20 and Later NOTICE TO USERS 2001 Sony Corporation All rights reserved This manual or the software described herein in whole or in part may not be reproduced translated or reduced to any machine readable form without prior written approval from Sony Corporation SONY CORPORATION PROVIDES NO WARRANTY WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON TORT CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF Sony Corporation reserves the right to make any modification to this manual or the information contained herein at any time without notice
192. Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Key Setting Operations Using Menus 389 sfog pv seideyo skey p 13 dey9 Key Edge Modifications To modify the key edge of key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF2 Edge The Edge menu appears 2 Select the edge type in the lt Edge gt group For an overview of the key edge modifications see Edge modifiers page 52 Normal unadorned edge Border edge with border applied Drop Border edge with drop border applied Shadow edge with shadow applied Outline edge used as outline Emboss embossing effect applied to edge If you select Normal skip to step 7 3 Set the border width and other parameters When border or outline is selected The setting parameters depend on the key type and whether the separate edge function is enabled or not To enable the separate edge function press Separate Edge setting it on e Separate edge off Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0 00 to 8 00 2 0 00 to 100 00 gt 3 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 393 is on the setting value range is 0 00 to 4 00 b When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type e Separate edge o
193. Setup Install Unit Config Menu Volume 2 Restrictions on Use Since this software is a simple version of the program preset function there are some restrictions on use The following lists the points at which operation is different from a normal program preset function For details of the normal operations set the relevant sections of this manual Restrictions on using a downstream key DSK3 and DSK4 cannot be used For the key priority set priority 1 or priority 2 The following downstream key types cannot be used Chroma key Color vector key Wipe pattern key Key wipe pattern key When using a matte as the key fill for a downstream key a mix color cannot be used It is not possible to modify a downstream key edge The edge blink also cannot be used For a downstream key main mask and sub mask cannot be used Simple P P Software 227 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 228 e A processed key cannot be used Therefore it is not possible to apply a DME effect to a downstream key e As an independent key transition type wipe and DME wipe cannot be used e The resizer cannot be used e The key frame delay mode cannot be used Restrictions on executing transitions in the transition control block e DME wipes cannot be used e Wipes can be used but there are restrictions on use For details see the next item Restrictions when using wipes Restriction
194. U SUOIISUBIL g 19JdEUQ 374 e The necessarv settings have been made in a Setup menu to enable the split fader See Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e A background is selected for the next transition e For the transition type MIX or NAM is selected Split fader operation The two halves of the split fader lever correspond to the buses as follows Right fader lever Background A bus Left fader lever Background B bus The relationship between the positions of the two fader levers and the image output in a mix is as follows Left lever position Right lever A bus output B bus output position Top Top 100 0 Bottom Top 100 100 Top Bottom 0 0 Bottom Bottom 0 100 Center Center 50 50 e When the transition type is NAM the outputs of the A bus and B bus in the above table are the outputs subjected to NAM e The transition indicators always show the progress of the background A bus e The operation of the left lever and that of the right lever can be swapped See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition You carry out independent key transition operations using the independent key transition control block simple type This controls only keys 3 and 4 However each key button can be assigned to any key in setup see Chapter 16 Overall Control
195. UN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo e Lower left corner of image or monitor When using SD format signals x 4 00 y 2 25 z 0 00 When using HD format signals x 16 00 y 9 00 z 0 00 y axis Z axis x axis 4 00 16 00ja 4 00 16 00 x axis z axis The plus direction on the z axis is depth a The value in parentheses is for HD format into the image or monitor screen Values for x y and z axes 16 9 mode Limits of three dimensional parameters The following table shows the limits of three dimensional transformation parameters The three dimensional parameters of an image change when you use the trackball or Z ring to execute a transformation You can also execute a transformation by entering parameter values from the numeric keypad control block Operation mode Limits of three dimensional transformation parameters Location XYZ HD format 999 9999 to 999 9999 SD 4 3 333 3333 to 333 3333 format 46 9 250 0000 to 250 0000 Rotation Spin 999 9999 to 999 9999 Axis Location HD format 999 9999 to 999 9999 SD 4 3 333 3333 to 333 3333 format 76 9 l 250 0000 to 250 0000 Location Size 0 0000 to 999 9999 Aspect 0 0000 to 2 0000 Perspective x y HD format 999 9999 to 999 9999 SD 4 3 333 3333 to 333 3333 format 46 9 250 0000 to 250 0000 Perspective z 0 0000 to 999 9999 Digital Mu
196. UT1 gt Program 1 OUT18 Program P P OUT1 gt Program 2 OUT19 Preview P P OUT2 gt Key preview 1 1 OUT20 Clean P P OUT3 gt Key preview 2 OUT21 Kev preview P P OUT4 gt Clean 1 OUT22 Preset Preset Clean 2 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo 229 Multi Program 2 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Overview What is Multi Program 2 By operating the switcher in Multi Program 2 mode a single switcher mix effects bank can be used to create two separate video outputs referred to as main and sub You can set backgrounds keys and transitions for each of main and sub Keys 2 to 4 however are common to main and sub For example immediately after a score in baseball two versions of the scene can be provided as shown below and switched simultaneously Keys Background A Background A signal from utility 2 bus Background B signal from utility 3 bus Background B Program output for Main Program output for Sub The Multi Program 2 function is only supported on the MVS 8000A 8000G To enable this function requires the BZS 8200 Multi Program 2 software Depending on the CPU module this function may not be supported For details consult your Sony service representative or sales representative Using the software To use the Multi Program 2 software you are required to enter an install key which validates the software If the software has been factory installed the install
197. Upward e When a transition applies to a combination of more than one of the background and keys 1 2 3 and 4 then the transition for all of these must be in the same direction complying with the above table e If as aresult of an auto transition for example the fader lever position does not agree with the signal output this is a non sync state see page 360 and LEDs light at both end positions of the fader lever travel Moving the fader lever does not carry out a transition but when the fader lever reaches the end position the non sync state is released and it is now possible to carry out the next transition If the fader lever is moved in the direction away from the lit LEDs this carries out the next transition over the remaining part of the fader lever travel Executing a Transition Transition Preview Carrying out a transition preview For an overview of the transition preview see page 46 1 In the M E or PGM PST bank transition control block press the TRANS PVW button The TRANS PVW button lights green and the switcher is now in the transition preview mode At this point the preview output is the same as the program output before the TRANS PVW button was pressed 2 Operate the fader lever or press the AUTO TRANS button or CUT button On the preview monitor you can check the effect of the transition To terminate a transition preview There are three modes for a transition preview To terminate
198. W 19 deyo 110 When using the SDI interface the following operations are different from when using the dedicated interface e Setting the input signals from the switcher to the MVE 9000 AUX bus outputs and signals returned to the switcher as primary inputs reentry inputs See Setting the AUX bus output and reentry input in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e Selecting the combiner channels not in the key control block but in the Global Effect menu See Combiner Settings in Chapter 11 Volume 2 Three Dimensional Transformations Transformation is the process of placing a video image in a three dimensional DME coordinate space and subjecting it to manipulations such as movement rotation magnification or shrinking Three dimensional coordinate space Source coordinate space and target coordinate space Images are placed in one of two types of coordinate space source coordinate space and target coordinate space The source coordinate space is a three dimensional coordinate space with reference to the image itself The x and y axes are defined parallel to the plane of the image and the z axis is defined perpendicular to the plane of the image When you move the image the coordinate axes also move The target coordinate space is a three dimensional coordinate space with reference to the output monitor screen The x and y axes are defined parallel to the plane of the monitor screen and the z axis is defined perpendic
199. Wipesi i seis E ie ras ir TEES 560 Enhanced Wipes ssseisobiietieta cases pen eek ered ee E ened 561 Rotary Wipes meeer oe aa a Ghataeede e iy pene 562 Mosaic Wipes isti cave Anke ss cies trannies Meas vel tenes 563 Random Diamond Dust Wipes e nnnennnnnznnennnennennnznn 565 DME Wipe Pattern List sosesososoosesesososossosesososesoesesosososoeeosesososoosesosososoe 566 DME Wipe Patterns Available in One Channel Mode 566 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two Channel Mode 575 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three Channel Mode 579 Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List ssrsnesnnonzonsononnennzonennennenzensensensene 580 Inde E EAEE ADTAL TEETE TATT 582 Table of Contents 13 14 Table of Contents Chapter 1 MVS 8000 Functions EA E A 19 Features of the MVS 8000 Multi Format Switcher System 06 22 Video Processing Plow i 0tte tibt oss SOES ESEESE OSE Sta SeS TASASE EEE TEES i SE SESE EE 24 SignaltSelectionet A e a tat 25 BasiesotiSignaliselection A 26 BUS SClECHON EN TAT SAL IA 26 Signal Assignment and Selection sse memennennsnnnnzznnnnzznnenzzzzzn 29 SipnaleName DS play e INTA 33 a E E E icon coaococor acannon R A 34 Selecting the Nextsliran siti o AJ 34 independent Kexgiliran siti on Reor a ene eee een 337 TRENIA TON A OE e TE A TA 41 EXeCutin D RO E A AT 44 l ATT seaccescdsscssenceasatvencteneeseaseeneeese 48 Eve Cee eee ene ees 48 Ie VsMO dil ers
200. a 210 Macro Creation and Editing ens nee nzenennn semen 212 Micro Execution Sorner fis Kapi bie ifa Swiss i 215 Micro Pte lit Gs ia ib i Sepa E tlaeeeade te edvtes 216 Macro Editing Using Menus nn ennenenennenenenzenennn senza 218 Macro Attachment iss ssbiv ss i girieiei segteliizi itul ii toast sovea ess aude a 218 Menu Macros vieii a Ia ika A IS Bad IB BISS Ba ep GAS Pb in ee 222 Color Corrector ssesssnezzensnnensnnensnnenenzannanenezzonsenenzonenzonensonensonennonenzonennon 223 Simple P P Software ssessnssenzzzonnnnnnzennonnsenmoensnteneoenezensensoessentoenoennonaa 227 OVERVIEW viiraa Ads a A ees te b E a 227 Restrictionson USE sis iii sea a ERA EE RERE RE 227 Multi Program 2 cessssccsscscsassencccsossdesssccsensecsessssasonssecssonseassisceacsoncscesenseasouss 230 OV ET VIEW inane A ETSI eae asa 230 Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2 232 Basic Operations Required nee nee nee 232 Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode When Sharing a Switcher Bank verpa bi coisas U bie Ba Ba pa a d b a dab 237 Optional Operations ners ens ananas nee 237 Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode u eeennen 241 Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode 242 Restrictions on Using Multi Program 2 Mode L 243 Dual Link Support sessssessesossosossosoosossossesosoesossossesossesossosoesossesossesossessososso 245 Introduction This manual is the User s Guide for the MVS 8000 8000SF Multi
201. a frame memory feed causes the PROC KEY button to light amber PROC KEY processed key When this button is on the key fill source signal subjected to key processing or signal subjected to a DME effect on the currently selected keyer can be selected as a reentry signal PROC V or PROC K for the M E or PGM PST bank on the auxiliary bus or the like Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel OVERRIDE button To select a DME channel already allocated to another keyer or transition to the currently selected keyer or transition hold down this button and press the DME channel selection button B TRACE button When a DME channel is already allocated to another keyer or transition hold down this button and press the corresponding DME channel selection button to switch to the state in which the keyer or transition to which the DME channel is allocated is currently selected AUTO DELEG auto delegation button When this button is on the key delegation selection state of the key control block is linked to the key delegation selection state of the independent key transition control block RESIZER button Enables or disables resizer on the MVS 8000G For details on resizer see page 419 Device Control Block Trackball The description below of frame memory clip operations applies only to the MVS 8000A 8000G The device control block is used for three dimensional transform operations usin
202. a transition preview carry out the operation which depends on the mode and press the TRANS PVW button turning it off Lock Toggling the TRANS PVW button on and off switches between the transition preview mode and the normal mode Hold The preview mode obtains only while the TRANS PVW button is held down One Time Each time a transition ends it reverts to the normal mode Set the transition preview mode in the following combinations For details see Chapter 16 Engineering Setup Volume 2 Transition Preview Switcher setup Panel setup mode Transition menu Operation gt Custom Button lt Transition Preview gt group menu lt Trans Pvw gt group Lock Normal Lock Hold Normal Hold One Time One Time Notes e During a transition whether executed with the AUTO TRANS button or the fader lever it is not possible to press the TRANS PVW button e In bus fixed mode see page 45 transition previews are not available e When using the simple type transition control block see page 371 transition previews are not available Transition Preview 363 SUOMSUBIL g 19 dEU SUOIISUBIL g 19JdEUQ 364 Independent Kev Transitions Kev source name displav kev JOI snapshot buttons Key delegation buttons Independent key transition type selection buttons Independen
203. acro Attachment Macro attachment is a function whereby a macro register is assigned to a control panel button or a particular position of a fader lever linking the execution of the button function or a fader lever operation with a macro execution Setting a macro attachment to a button Select one of the following three linking modes to make the macro attachment Pre macro Mode in which the button function is executed after macro execution has completed 21 8 Macros Post macro Mode in which the macro is executed after carrying out the button function Macro only Mode in which the button function is not executed and the macro only is executed The selection of pre or post macro mode is carried out in the cross point control block of the PGM PST bank or the M E banks For the macro only mode assign the selection function to a utility shotbox control block button or user preference button and make the selection by pressing the button Alternatively without pressing the button you can make the selection simply by simultaneously pressing the pre macro and post macro selection buttons in the cross point control block You can assign any one of the 99 macro registers to a button For a button whose function is switched by delegation you can make a separate macro attachment for each function For each control panel you can make up to 1000 macro attachment settings The macro attachment setting is possible for the following bus button
204. acro attachment setting disappears e After setting a macro attachment to a button for which you can perform function replacement or function assignment if you change the function assignment to the button the macro attachment setting disappears e After setting a macro attachment to a cross point button in the cross point control block if you change the function assignment to the button the macro attachment setting disappears Enabling and disabling macro attachment You can temporarily disable the macro attachment settings When a macro attachment is disabled pressing the button does not cause execution of the assigned macro You can enable and disable macro attachments for the PGM PST bank and M E banks individually Setting a macro attachment to a fader lever You can set a macro attachment to any particular position of a fader lever in the transition control block e In macro only mode it is not possible to set a macro attachment e It is not possible to set a macro attachment to a fader lever in the keyframe control block or downstream key control block e For a split fader you can set a macro attachment to the main split fader For details of a split fader see Split Fader page 373 Clearing the macro attachments You can clear all of the macro attachments in a single operation Displaying the macro attachment list You can display the macro attachment settings in the form of a list in the menu display to check t
205. adjusted page 470 e When the DME wipe edge setting is off the edge applied in the effect is enabled as is In an MVS 8000 system edge cannot be used for a key DME wipe Positioner You can move the DME wipe pattern or center of the effect to an arbitrary position Using the position select function you can also instantaneously move the pattern e 1031 When this pattern number is selected with the progress of the transition the pattern center automatically moves initially from the set position toward the center of the screen see page 65 In other words the effect obtained is the same as in a normal wipe with the positioner set to AUTO CENTER 1201 to 1208 1221 to 1224 1251 When these pattern numbers are selected you can set the pattern position when the first transition completes 1381 1391 1393 1394 1396 When these pattern numbers are selected you can set the center of the transition effect 2651 2652 When these pattern numbers are selected you can move the pattern for each channel or with values relative to the current position the two channels simultaneously 2801 to 2804 2811 to 2814 When the these pattern numbers are selected you can set the vertical position as the brick slides in 2851 to 2854 2861 to 2864 When these pattern numbers are selected you can set the pattern position for each channel setting when the first transition completes Pattern limit You can restrict the range of
206. age Vol 1 Vol 2 Audio mixer Selection of signals linked with the 7322 33 342 350 audio mixer 7322 11 GPI output Addition of Device Recording to the 7325 3 7354 370 439 Table of Contents Functions Newly Supported in Version 7 20 nee 3 Chapter 1 MVS 8000 Functions Introduction cscscsssssssssssessssessssesesecssssessseessseessssessesssserssesssssarsesersssesssess 19 Features of the MVS 8000 Multi Format Switcher System 008 22 Video Processing FloW 1ssnesnznnsnnsennonzzennonneennonnsenzoensnnoeseeensentennoennennoes 24 Signal Selection nsics ccscssccesceecsiecscesesscaccsaaesedcasesaecsaccestecsccscssusesseoscedsebocsdionsoose 25 Basics of Signal Selection 00 e nnnennnnnnnn nn enen en 26 Bus SelecttOn yx nahin ten ese apiancieree wate te aeons 26 Signal Assignment and Selection ss smmennnnnzenzznzznnnnzzzna 29 Signal Name Display sis sssiosiioiezzjo abu pp gabu beta sta et 33 Transitions sessesnsnnzzonnenennznennonennonennonennononnoneaononononenoenenoeneeene riisti 34 Selecting the Next Transition sse nennnsnnnnnnna 34 Independent Key Transitions iseenese ninni 37 Transition PY POS iss ieda ia ei et A EE AE E E 41 Exe utin a Transition ease eeen ete os chinese EA EREE 44 TROY ATA 48 KEVIVpES i i ia cea Aes nid eeu E a E EE EA E aS 48 Key Modifier Seians B Se ea ed 52 Key Memory i spi ands coset g e a B PO e Se R 56 Key Srapshot sosirii aieiaiei J
207. ails see Functional Differences With Models of DME in the Appendix Volume 2 MVE 8000A Multi Format DME Processor The MVE 8000A is a Digital Multi Effects with multi format support For the MVE 8000A a dedicated interface MKE 9020M is available to enable the MVE 8000A to be used in an MVS 8000 series switcher Installation of an optional MKE 8021A Input Output Board in the MVE 8000A provides an SDI interface When using the SDI interface the following operations are required e Setting the interface between the MVE 8000A and the switcher See Setting the interface between the DME and the switcher in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Setting the input signals from the switcher to the MVE 8000A AUX bus outputs and signals returned to the switcher as primary inputs reentry inputs However Ext In cannot be set for the DME channel See Setting the AUX bus output and reentry input in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Selecting the combiner channels not in the key control block but in the Global Effect menu See Combiner Settings in Chapter 11 Volume 2 MVE 9000 Multi Format DME Processor The MVE 9000 is a Digital Multi Effects with multi format support Two interfaces are available for the MVE 9000 a dedicated interface MKE 9020M for use in an MVS 8000 series switcher and an SDI interface MKE 9021M Digital Multi Effects DME 109 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SA
208. al and then combined with the background which has also been cut out with the key signal Additive mix The background which has been cut out with the key signal is combined with the unshaped foreground This is effective for a natural looking composite when the scene includes glass or other translucent objects Plane function In an additive mix the foreground is not shaped by the key signal and variations in the blue background appear in the composite image To prevent this it is possible to set a particular luminance level for the background and any parts below this level are cut forcibly Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma keying include automatic adjustment with the auto chroma key function and manual adjustment carrying out the necessary processing separately The optimum results will be obtained by first carrying out adjustments with the auto chroma key function then making any fine adjustments as required The following manual adjustments are possible Key active When this function is off only the foreground is output and you can make adjustments of color cancel see the next paragraph Color cancel If the foreground image includes shades of the background color turn this function on to remove the color from the foreground image Chroma key window You can adjust the range over which the key signal is determined as matching the specified hue When this adjustment is off the default ranges are use
209. all Unit Config Menu Volume 2 Switching the signal format to 1080P 59 94 or 1080P 50 requires the optional multi format software For details of this software option see page 189 An MKS 8110G 17 input board and MKS 8160G 24 output board set are also required Setting the signal format to 1080P 59 94 or 1080P 50 You can switch the signal format to 1080P 59 94 or 1080P 50 in setup For details see Setting the Signal Format Format Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 You can also switch the signal format with a GPI input For details see the following sections of Chapter 16 Volume 2 depending on the device e Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu in Setup Relating to Switcher Processor Dual Link Support 245 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 246 Interfacing With External Devices in Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu in Setup Relating to DME GPI Input Settings GPI Input Assign Menu in Setup Relating to DCU The available input reference signals are as follows Signal format Input reference signal Tri Syne Black burst 1080P 59 94 59 94 Black Burst 59 94 Sync 59 94 1080P 50 50 Black Burst 50 Sync 50 Switching the signal type of DME output video key assigned to a monitor signal The function for switching
210. ame memory freeze image outputs 1to8 Aux Overall path settings for AUX buses are made Aux All simultaneously Aux 1 to 48 Paths for Aux 1 to 48 Mon Overall path settings for monitor buses are Mon All made simultaneously Mon 1 to 8 Paths for monitor buses 1 to 8 Keyframes 175 Wipe Wipe DME Wipe All Wipe Path for wipes DME Wipe Path for DME wipes Trans Transition path for each M E and P P bank suonouny 0008 SAN 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Item Paths that can be set Color Bkgd Overall path settings for color backgrounds are Color Bkgd All made simultaneously Color Bkgd 1 Paths for color background 1 Color Bkgd 2 Paths for color background 2 CCR Overall path settings for color corrector CCR All CCR1 Path for color corrector 1 CCR2 Path for color corrector 2 Paths relating to DME DME 3D Trans Local menu Item Paths that can be set 3D Trans Local All Overall path settings for local channel three dimensional transform items are made simultaneously Loc Size Overall path settings for items relating to Loc Size All image size changes and movement are made simultaneously Size Path for image size Sa Loc X Post Loc Paths for movement in the x and y axes Post Size Path for size Loc XYZ Overall path settings for items relating to Loc XYZ All image movement are made simultaneously Loc X
211. an HD system the modulation function is not available Horizontal modulation This modulates the pattern applying waviness in the horizontal direction to edges The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves A value of 100 00 generates the maximum downward speed of waves and a value of 100 00 the maximum upward speed Wipes 69 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 70 Spring Wipes Vertical modulation This modulates the pattern applying waviness in the vertical direction to edges The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves A value of 100 00 generates the maximum leftward speed of waves and a value of 100 00 the maximum rightward speed Fringe This modulates the pattern applying waviness in the radial direction to edges The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves A value of 100 00 generates the maximum counterclockwise speed of waves and a value of 100 00 the maximum clockwise speed As the transition progresses the edge of the pattern is subjected to barrel or pincushion distortion a M Spring off Spring on A negative parameter value produces pincushion distortion and a positive value produces barrel distortion Spiral This deforms the pattern spirally Spiral off Spiral on The parameter Magnitude determines the size and directi
212. and allow the immediate decisions that are required in a live operating environment Features of the MVS 8000 Multi Format Switcher System 23 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 24 Video Processing Flow The following illustration shows the flow of operations for carrying out a transition on an M E bank or the PGM PST bank Select current background video page 25 4 Select next transition page 34 Background i _ Select new background video page 25 Make key settings page 48 4 4 Select transition type page 41 4 M Super Preset color DME wipe mix mix l Make wipe settings page 60 Make DME wipe settings page 72 Preview the effect of transition page 46 Keys 1 to 4 pu 4 ji Cut N ee Execute the transition page 44 i Video Processing Flow Signal Selection You carry out signal selection with the cross point buttons in the cross point control block of each M E bank or the PGM PST bank and the buttons in the auxiliary bus control block The number of buttons in each cross point row may be 16 24 or 32 but here the description is of the 32 button case as an example Source name displays Key 2 row Key 1 row Reentry buttons Cross point buttons KEY4 button KEY3 button ULULUE ME ME ME 1 2 3 ME ME ME 1 2 3 JUUUUE l ys i ie l
213. and start tc buttons page 277 Device control block search dial PLAY CUE STOP and START TC buttons Downstream key control block e DSK1 ON to DSK4 ON buttons 7 page 306 TAKE button 2 page 306 e MIX WIPE DME and CUT buttons page 306 Transition control block e PTN LIMIT button 4 page 260 e LIMIT SET and KF buttons 7 page 260 e NORM INORM REVI and REV buttons pages 260 310 e MIX NAM SUPER MIX PST COLOR MIX WIPE and DME buttons pages 260 299 310 e MIX WIPE and DME buttons page 260 e ALL KEY PRIOR BKGD and KEY1 to KEY4 buttons pages 260 299 310 CUT button page 304 Fade to black control block FTB button pages 287 308 Downstream key fade to black control block Utility shotbox control block e DSK1 ON and DSK2 ON buttons e AUTO TRANS button e FTB button Memory recall buttons page 298 Menu control block PREFS 1 to PREFS 16 buttons page 294 Independent key transition control block simple type f KEYx ON button 7 9 TAKE button 2 e MIX WIPE DME and CUT buttons a In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key by an independent key transition the key state at the time of event registration inserted or not inserted is also saved in the macro When the macro is executed the event is only
214. anel Example Configuration 1 With Standard Transition Modules ve eenennnnezzn 251 Control Panel Example Configuration 2 With Simple Transition Modules L esesennzzznzznni 252 Control Panel Example Configuration 3 With Compact Transition Modules ceeceesseeeseeeseeeees 255 Gross Pom ontrolMBlocke AI LERE A 256 Transition Control Block Standard Type 0 0 0 0 cece eennenenena 260 Flexi Pad Control Block Standard Type 0 0 0 0 eeneennena 264 Kevitontrolibjoek ceases tsetse serena E AL 267 Device Control Block Trackball oeoa a oeae EA E 271 IDIA E INE KONE S oa e E 277 Device Control Block Search Dial 2 aea aeee S 278 Kevirame Control BIO e e A A 281 Numeric Keypad Control E OO ennennnnnnnnn seen 284 Fadeito Black Control BIOck e A AL 287 Auxiliary Bus Control Block for AUX Buses L ensnnenn 288 Auxiliary Bus Control Block for Router Control L 291 Meni Control Block eee cre estes crust rttce R cas E 294 Memory Card USB Adaptor Block eennennnnenennena 295 Memory Stick USB Connections Block ve 296 Utility Shotbox Control BIock keee eee ee E E 298 Transition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block Simple Type 299 Independent Key Transition Control Block Simple Type 304 Downstream Key Control Block L E E 306 Downstream Key Fade to Black Control Block 0 0 0 0 eee 308 Transition Control Block Compact Type LL 310 Basic Menu Operations A a asa 313 Menu Organization 43
215. ange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Setting the wipe position Positioner You can set the position independently for the main pattern and sub pattern 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 In the lt Position gt group press Position turning it on and set the pattern position 448 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 65 To return the pattern position to the center of the screen In the lt Position gt group press Center To move the pattern from its current position to the center through the course of a transition In the lt Position gt group press Auto Center turning it on To set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick You can also set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick in the device control block 1 In the device control block press the M E1 M E2 M E3 or P P button turning it on The buttons in the device control block are assigned to the wipe position setting as follows Table 1 Buttons and assigned settings Button name Setting MAIN Wipe position for common transition main pattern SUB Wipe position for common transition sub pattern Table 2 Buttons assigned to
216. apter 16 Volume 2 Recording ancillary data To record ancillary data in a frame memory clip use the Frame Memory gt Clip gt Record menu For details of the operating sequence see Clip Creation page 518 To check ancillary data during recording If the ancillary data to be recorded is embedded audio by first setting the signal output to through mode you can listen while recording For the method of setting the signal output to through mode see Signal Output Settings Output Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 For Freeze Enable or Record Enable in the lt Record Enable gt group pressing Clip or Ext Clip to turn them on or off may result in noise Also with these buttons in the On state selecting the signal on the frame memory source bus may result in noise Playing back ancillary data You can play ancillary data recorded in a frame memory clip by normal playback or an auto transition of the clip transition To play the ancillary data you must use the following procedure to enable playback of the ancillary data For the subsequent playback operation see Clip Playback page 514 After recording a frame memory clip the ancillary data state is enabled for playback To play back the clip set the signal output to through mode For the method of setting through mode see Signal Output Settings Output Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 When the reposition function is on ancillary data cannot b
217. arate Sides Applies separate video signals and key signals to the front and back of the image O Front l l Back Front and back sides Shaped Video For each of the front and back sides of the image specifies whether to handle input video from the switcher as shaped video key processed signals The shaped video function can only be used with the MVE 8000A 9000 SDI interface 150 Digital Multi Effects DME Invert Inverts the input video signal and or key signal horizontally or vertically You can make separate settings for the front and back Horizontal inversion Input signal Vertical inversion Inversion of input signal Interpolation Specifies the methods used for interpolation processing of input video signals and input key signals For input video signals you can select from the following four methods e Detect changes in the luminance and chrominance signals separately and switch automatically between fields and frames You can select the degree of change detection e Detect changes in the luminance signal separately and switch automatically between fields and frames You can select the degree of change detection e Do interpolation in field units e Do interpolation in frame units For input key signals you can select from the following three methods e Detect changes in the luminance signal separately and switch automatically
218. ary data is never played e When you change the saving mode the frame memory is initialized and any existing recorded frame memory data is lost When the frame memory saving mode is set to save with ancillary data the following ancillary data status information is added to a frame memory clip Frame Memory Disable d In this state the ancillary data is not played This is the status when the Ancillary Enable button in the Frame Memory gt Clip menu is set to Off Enable d In this state ancillary data is present and can be played back This is the status when the Ancillary Enable button in the Frame Memory gt Clip menu is set to On This is the status after a clip recording operation This status information is saved in a file and is followed when the file is recalled Frame memory clip settings For frame memory clips you can make the following settings using a menu or device control block trackball search dial joystick Start point Stop point Loop On Off The above settings can be saved in a snapshot register as snapshot attributes and recalled On the MVS 8000A it is only possible to replay extended clips as output from FMI or FM2 Clip transitions A frame memorv clip movie is plaved back linked to a transition using a mix dissolve or wipe The clip transition function is only supported by the MVS 8000A 8000G The following restrictions apply to the use of a clip transition Key frame ca
219. assigned to the FM you selected in step 2 To recall in direct recall mode Direct recall means that pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file In this mode only the front thumbnail file is recalled 1 In step 7 above instead of pressing Recall press Direct Recall 2 Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall This immediately recalls the file To display the subsidiary file in front With the direct recall mode on press Sub Display turning it on Inverting the Field Polarity of a Saved Still Image Field Invert Function This function is valid when the signal format is HD excluding 720P However it is not valid if the frame memory saving mode is set to save with ancillary data Still Image Operations 501 Kowa ewes 7 Je deu9 Aowey ewei4 7 Ja deyo To invert the field polarity of a saved still image 1 In the Frame Memory gt Still menu press HF7 Field Invert The Field Invert menu appears This automatically switches pair mode off and the status area shows thumbnails of all images currently saved in frame memory Press the arrow keys or turn the knob to scroll the thumbnail display Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Scroll Scroll thumbnail display 1 and upwards Select the thumbnail of the still image on which you want to carry out field inversion You can also select more than one image To select all still images press
220. ation folder is the folder selected in step 4 of Combining the background image and input signal page 502 If the entered folder name already exists a message to confirm overwriting appears Selecting the way in which images are combined To select the way in which the background image and input signal are combined see page 90 use the following procedure 1 In the lt Type gt group of the Still gt Composite menu select one of the following methods of combination e Pattern Key pattern key e Ext Key external key This can only be selected when the pair mode is enabled The signal selected on the frame memory source 2 bus is used as the key signal e Mix mix e Nam non additive mix If none of the above is selected image combination is not carried out Depending on the selection in step 1 set the following parameters e When Pattern Key is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Size of pattern 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness of pattern 0 00 to 100 00 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe See Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 560 e When Ext Key is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for key 109 59 to 7 31 signal generation 2 Gain Key sensitivity 100 00 to 100 00 e When Mix is selected Knob Parameter
221. ation mode In this mode inserting or deleting a keyframe increases or reduces the duration Constant duration mode In this mode inserting or deleting a keyframe does not change the duration This is useful for keyframe editing of an effect with a fixed duration In the variable and constant duration modes the keyframes to which a modify operation applies and the effect of a paste operation are different Difference in keyframes to which a modify operation applies Effect position Variable duration mode Constant duration mode On a keyframe Applies to currently Applies to currently selected keyframe selected keyframe Between two Applies to previous Modify operation not possible 2 keyframes keyframe a A new keyframe is inserted at the effect position Difference in the effect of a paste operation Variable duration mode The copied keyframe is inserted at the specified position Constant duration mode The copied keyframe is written over the specified position Transition mode You can use an effect created with keyframes as a DME wipe pattern on the switcher In this case it is necessary to set the transition mode the way in which the effect behaves For details of the setting see User Programmable DME Transition Mode page 483 Time Settings Keyframe duration and effect duration You can determine the execution time of an effect by setting either the keyframe durations or t
222. available for an independent key transition e In the multi program mode you can use a preset color mix only when selecting the background for the next transition One stroke mode and one time mode e You can make a setting such that a preset color mix is carried out in a single transition This is called one stroke mode When the bus fixed mode is selected with a Setup menu setting a preset color mix is always carried out in the one stroke mode e You can also make a setting such that when a preset color mix is completed the next transition switches to the previous transition type automatically This is called one time mode When only the background is changed l A Current video Color matte New video Preset color mix changing background only When a key is inserted Key fades out When a key is selected as the next transition When no key is selected Key fades in Preset color mix transition including key By means of a Setup menu setting it is possible to preserve the key state while carrying out the color matte mix Transitions 43 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 44 When with a key inserted a key is selected in the next transition Key state preserved VIDEO Key gradually p 1 removed are is Preset color mix when set to preserve key state Wipe A wipe replaces the current video by
223. block 287 transition rate 369 Fader lever 261 307 311 Files 205 autoload function 208 backups 531 deleting 529 operations 205 renaming 530 restoring 531 Flag 132 Flex Shadow 125 Flexi Pad control block simple type 299 standard type 264 Flip tumble 569 Flip flop mode 45 Flying bar 134 Format converter 190 Frame in out 569 581 Frame input mode 352 Frame memory clip function 92 continuously capturing still images record 91 508 feed 270 403 418 Index 583 XOPUJ xepu MM overview 85 pair file processing 527 recalling a continuous sequence of still images animation 91 509 settings 200 Frame memory operations 490 capturing an input image 496 clip 512 input image selection 494 menu display 490 preparations 490 selecting frame memory 495 selecting outputs 495 Freeze 89 131 496 Fringe 70 FTB button 287 FULL LINK 63 Function button area 322 selection buttons 286 G Global coordinate space 111 effects 152 Glow 130 GPI Device control 160 GPI output 183 Graphics display 120 Grid 121 H HF buttons 322 Image capturing 89 data management 94 527 data transfer 94 output 90 processing 90 recalling 90 Index saving 89 Image file deletion 529 renaming 530 Independent key transition 37 364 DME wipe settings 477 simple transitions 374 type 365 type selection buttons 263 304 306 wipe modifiers 456 wipe settings 455 Independent key transition control block simple t
224. button The Multi Adjust menu appears 5 Make the following settings as required H Invert When this is on alternate tiles are inverted left to right V Invert When this is on alternate tiles are inverted top to bottom Non Mask When this is on even if the positioner function is used to move the pattern position the pattern is always present on the screen Position By adjusting the following parameters move the pattern position within the divisions determined in step 3 Knob 1 Parameter Position H Adjustment Setting values Horizontal position of pattern 200 00 to 200 00 2 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 451 sodiM gJaydeyo sodiM g Jaydeyo 452 Knob 2 Parameter Position V Adjustment Vertical position of pattern Setting values 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 65 Making a wipe pattern like a Venetian blind Pairing 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 In the lt Pairing gt group select the slit direction H Create slits in the horizontal direction V Create slits in the vertical direction 3 Set the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width of the slits 1 to 128 integer 2 H Offset Spacing in the horizontal direction _190 00 to 100 00 2 3 V Offset Spacing in the vertical direction
225. can select a key source with the cross point buttons for the key bus Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid succession changes its state so that you can make cross point selections on the corresponding key bus Key delegation button Corresponding double press key bus KEY 1 key 19 KEY2 key 2 KEY3 key 3 KEY4 key 4 d a The key bus selection button KEY3 in the cross point control block goes off b The key bus selection button KEY4 in the cross point control block goes off c The key bus selection button KEY3 in the cross point control block lights d The key bus selection button KEY4 in the cross point control block lights Independent key transition type selection buttons Press one of the following buttons turning it on to select the independent key transition type MIX Faded in or out WIPE Inserted or deleted with a wipe DME DME wipe Inserted or deleted with a DME wipe DB Independent key transition execution section KEY1 ON to KEY4 ON DSK1 ON to DSK4 ON in the PGM PST bank buttons Press the corresponding one of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in or out instantaneously When the key corresponding to the button appears in the final program output the button lights red and otherwise lights amber AUTO TRANS transition buttons These correspond to keys 1 to 4 from left to right press one to carry out an auto transition The tra
226. cation deletion or paste operation Macro merging During macro editing you can recall and copy another register to merge it with the macro being edited For example while editing macro register 2 you can recall and copy register 1 to merge it as shown in the following figure Recall macro register 2 and move to another event Recall register 1 A 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 Macro being edited register 2 Newly recalled macro register 1 register 1 and add after current event A ee register 2 1 pe ii A E register 1 remain unchanged Macro Execution To execute a macro recall the register in which the macro is held Simultaneous with the register recall all events stored in the macro are played back executed in sequence without pause Pausing and restarting macro execution It is also possible to execute a macro in the following ways Pause event To adjust the execution timing of a particular event to delay the start of execution of the event by a particular time interval you can store a special event which pauses macro execution This event is called a pause event When you store a pause event you can set the interval for which the macro is paused the pause length to any value in the range 1 to 999 frames When the set time has elapsed the macro is automatically executed Pause zero event By including a pause event with the time set to zero you can make macro execution pause at th
227. ced by the background For an overview of the Y balance see page 51 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Y Balance on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Luminance range 0 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Key gain 100 00 to 100 00 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 385 shey pv Jaydeyo skey p 13 dey9 Knob Parameter Luminance Adjustment Luminance Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 Adjusting the chroma key shadow This function allows a shadow falling on the typically blue background color to be rendered more realistically Since portions of the blue background of less than a certain luminance are treated as shadows there is no effect on cutting out of the foreground 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Shadow on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Reference luminance for shadows 0 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Shadow key gain 100 00 to 100 00 3 Density Shadow opacity 0 00 to 100 00 4 Soft Shadow softness 0 00 to 100 00 When chroma key shadow is on key edge is changed to normal and soft edge is switched off Adjusting the video signal You can change the gain of the foreground signal or vary the Hue There are separate adjustments for the gain of the whole video signal or Y and C individually 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set F
228. cel key e When setting Window on and adjusting the detection range of the color cancel key Knob Parameter 1 Crop Adjustment Crop value Setting values 100 00 to 0 00 Key Setting Operations Using Menus Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Angle Angle value 180 00 to 0 00 For details of the crop and angle parameters see Chroma key window page 50 e When setting Y Balance on and adjusting the ratio in which Y balance is added to the color cancel key Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mixture Ratio of Y balance key 0 00 to 100 00 Adjusting the window Setting the window function on allows you to adjust the detection range used to determine the key signal When this function is off the default range is used for the key For an overview of the window see Chroma key window page 50 After making sure that the values of Clip Gain and Hue are adjusted appropriately use the following procedure to make the window adjustment 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Window on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Crop Crop value 100 00 to 0 00 2 Angle Angle value 180 00 to 0 00 Adjusting the Y balance Setting the Y balance on allows you to specify that even if the hue is the same only portions of a particular luminance will be repla
229. clips Carry out the following operation with the device control block search dial A frame memory clip must first be recalled with a menu operation 1 With the device selection buttons select the frame memory clip to be played FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP If the pair mode is on both main and subsidiary FMs light 2 Press the PLAY button turning it on To stop playback press STOP or any of the SHTL JOG CUE REW FF and ALL STOP buttons For details of the buttons in the device control block search dial see Device Control Block Search Dial page 278 in Chapter 2 To specify the playback start point To make the current position the playback start point press the START TC button To set a different position press the SET START TC button then enter the timecode from the numeric keypad control block To specify the duration Press the SET DUR button and enter a timecode from the numeric keypad control block If the playback start point is already set this automatically sets the playback stop point If the playback stop point is already set this automatically sets the playback start point The duration setting is not displayed in the device control block Frame Memory Clip Operations To specify the playback stop point Start playback and at the desired position press the STOP button to stop playback then press the STOP TC button To set to any position press the SET STOP TC button
230. creen aspect ratios The edges of the screen for example differ between 16 9 and 4 3 For image operations in the device control block first make the settings separatelv on the different channels Recalling a user programmable DME When recalling a user programmable DME select pattern numbers 1901 to 1949 2901 to 2949 or 3901 to 3949 The effects for the 16 9 and 4 3 screen aspect ratios will be recalled linked together Signal format settings Format Make the following settings Signal format Specify the signal format to be handled by the devices The combinations of signal formats that can be selected are as follows System Field frequency Effective number of scan lines HD system 50 1080i 59 94 60 23 976 1080PsF 24 25 29 97 30 50 720P 59 94 SD system 59 94 480i 50 576i Software options for multi format To use the MVS 8000G with multi format support requires the following software options Setup 189 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 190 Setup Product name Model No Switcher Switcher Upgrade BZS 8500M MVS 8000G Software BZS 8510M MVS 8000GSF The following software options are also required depending on the number of M E banks Product name Model No Switcher Mix Effect BZS 8520M MVS 8000GSF 2M E system or Upgrade Software MVS 8000G 3M E system BZS 8520M and BZS 8530M MVS 8000G 4M E system
231. ct like light striking paper cloth or another diffusively reflective surface The function for setting the bar mode of the lighting area is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A Digital Multi Effects DME Combine Shadow When there are several images adds a flex shadow in the depth of an image or overlays multiple flex shadows Example 1 When Flex Shadow is enabled on both of two channels Video Video Over Under Shadow Shadow No combine shadow is set Combine shadow is enabled Combine shadow is enabled Density is set to 100 00 Density is set to 0 00 Digital Multi Effects DME 141 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Trail Example 2 Flex Shadow is enabled on one channel only Video Video Shadow No combine shadow is set Combine shadow is enabled Combine shadow is enabled Density is set to 100 00 Density is set to 0 00 Recursively freezes the input video at regular intervals so that a trail of afterimages is created You can make the afterimages stardust trails Of the three effects of trail motion decay and keyframe strobe only one can be
232. ctangular parallelepiped from 3 successive channels The Brick effect can combine Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 or combine Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 The three images are displayed as shown in the following figure Upper side Combinations of Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 An example of the Brick effect Upper side Ch1 image Side V Ch2 image Side H Ch3 image 156 Digital Multi Effects DME Shadow Combinations of Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 Upper side Ch2 image Side V Ch3 image Side H Ch4 image You can adjust the height of the brick the overlap between the three images and the way to insert the side images This effect gives the image a shadow The effect uses two successive channels You can adjust the position and density of the shadow with respect to the image and the color of the shadow The channel with the largest number for example Ch2 in the case of Chl and Ch2 becomes the shadow Digital Multi Effects Digital Multi Effects DME 157 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 18 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 158 External Devices In this system you can operate while controlling the following types of external device e Devices supporting P Bus Peripheral II protocol referred to as P Bus devices in the manual e Devices supporting GPI e VTRs e Disk recorder Sony disk 9 pin protocol and video disk communications protocol e Extended VTR Abekas A53 protocol The following is an outline of
233. cted the MORE button lights amber Pressing the MORE button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge fill color parameters with the knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Hue 359 to 0 4 Density Density 0 to 100 Setting the outline parameters When the OUTLINE button is lit green the parameter settings depend on the key type and whether the separate edge function is active To activate the separate edge function press Separate Edge setting it on in the Edge menu for the key e Separate edge off Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Outline width Oto8 9 0 to 100 P 4 Density Outline density 0 to 100 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 393 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 b When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type e Separate edge on The outline width settings can be made independently for left right top and bottom sides The separate edge function is only available when luminance key linear key or chroma key is selected as the key type Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top edge width 0 to 82 2 Left Left edge width 0to8 3 Right Right edge width 0 to 8 4 Bottom Bottom edge width 0 to 82 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 393 is on t
234. ction is automatically switched in the key control block press the AUTO DELEG button turning it on Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults Holding down a key type button ILUMI LIN CRK CVK or PTN recalls the key default values page 57 Key modify clear When an M E delegation button is held down holding down a key delegation button together returns the key settings to the initial status settings For details of the initial status see Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 418 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block Resizer Resizer allows you to apply DME like effects such as image shrinking magnification and movement as well as change of the aspect ratio to the processed key e The resizer function is supported on the MVS 8000G only e The image of the key manipulated by resizer has a one frame delay Two Dimensional Transformations of Keys When the screen aspect ratio is 4 3 in HD format when the resizer is used to shrink a video image this is applied to the 16 9 screen including the added video on the left and right sides Use the crop function as required to extract the 4 3 image Menu operations for key shrinking magnification and movement For example to shrink magnify or move key1 of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key menu press Resizer turning it on 2
235. ction on or off Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaued O41U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JaJdEUQ 266 B Bank selection buttons BANKO bank 0 Assigns the memory recall section to bank 0 of registers 1 to 10 BANKI bank 1 Assigns the memory recall section to bank 1 of registers 11 to 20 BANK SEL bank selection After pressing this button press a button in the memory recall section to select banks 0 to 9 Memory recall section This consists of 12 buttons with LCDs These display changes according to various operation modes UNDO button UNDO After recalling a register press this button to return to the state before recalling the register When contents have been saved to a register hold down the STORE STATS button and press this button to return the register to its state before the save operation STORE STATS store status When a save or delete operation has been carried out on a register this button lights amber After saving to a register hold down this button and press the relevant register button to delete the data in the register Again after a save operation on a register hold down this button and press the UNDO button to restore the register to its state before the save operation XPT HOLD cross point hold status display A bus for which cross point hold is set appears as a green light Numeric display Depending
236. ctions of the following items in the Engineering used in the system Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu Single Simul Dual Simul Functions that cannot be e Primary inputs numbers 41 to 80 used in the switcher Outputs number 25 to 48 Monitor buses 2 4 6 8 M E 2 bank a M E 3 bank DME utility 1 and 2 buses Color background 2 Color corrector 2 Frame memory Format converter Functions of the following items in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu Switching Timing M E Config excluding Standard and Logical M E Assign Functions that cannot be DME channels 3 4 7 and 8 used on the DME e Freeze in film mode e Freeze Timing in the following effects Input Freeze Trail Decay KF Strobe always set to Frame e Brick e Editor ports 3 and 4 when the editor port operation mode is set to Independent Other restrictions Auto chroma keying operates on the image of link A Tallies are generated for the link A signal Key frames are created in units of two frames It is not possible to change the interpolation method in the DME a When the simple P P software is not installed b When the switcher is a 2M E system only Dual Link Support 247 suonouny 0008 SAW 4e deyo l Chapter 1 MVS 8000 Functions Dual Link Support 248 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel sssssssenennonsass 251 Control P
237. cus turning it on 2 Set the parameters This operation is the same as the defocusing setting when using the DME with the DME dedicated interface However lt Mosaic Defocus Mode gt appears in place of lt Defocus Mode gt For more details see Defocus Settings in Chapter 11 Volume 2 430 Resizer If defocus is enabled and in the lt Mosaic Defocus Mode gt group you select Video Key then the crop and mask are disabled Applying a mask to mosaic or defocus 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key gt Enhanced Effect menu press Dual Rszr Effect turning it on Press Mask turning it on This enables the mask function To make the mask settings continue with steps 3 and following Press Mask Menu The Mask menu appears In the lt Mask Source gt group select either of Box and Circle Box Use a box pattern as the mask signal Circle Use a circle pattern as the mask signal Set the parameters The valid ranges of the parameter values depend on the combination of signal format SD HD and aspect ratio 4 3 16 9 selected in the system as follows The parameters are the same as for drop shadow For more details see Applying a drop shadow page 428 except that knobs 3 and 5 are as The rotation and inversion operations are the same as for a DME mask setting For more details see Chapter 11 Mask Settings Volume 2 e When a mask effect is applied
238. cut in the background by a wipe pattern Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel selected in the transition and this is filled with the key fill signal Key fill key source selection buttons AUTO SEL selection Use the signal selected on the key fill bus and the paired key source signal The setting of key fill and key source pairs is carried out in a Setup menu SPLIT To use the signal selected on the key fill bus as key fill and a signal separate from the signal assigned in a pair with key fill for key source press this button turning it on To select the signal on the key source bus hold down this button and press a button in the key 1 or key 2 row in the cross point control block To use the signal selected on the key fill bus as key source self keying press the AUTO SEL button and SPLIT button at the same time so that both are off MATTE FILL To use a color matte from the internal generator as key fill press this button turning it on You can adjust the color matte using the knobs When this button is off the signal selected on the key fill bus is used as key fill Key modifier buttons To add an edge modifier to the key press one of these buttons turning it on Depending on the edge type selected parameters appear in the displays and you can set the values with the knobs KEY DROP When drop border or shadow is selected turning this button on lowers the key fill and key
239. d Chroma keying generates a key signal based on a particular color reference color in the foreground typically a plain blue background and the window refers to the range of colors which are regarded as matching this specified reference color to create the key signal As seen on a vectorscope that is in the hue saturation color space the range for this matching corresponds to a truncated sector This range is specified by two parameters the Angle parameter which determines the range of the hue parameter and the Crop parameter which determines the degree of truncation see the following figure Reference color specified by Hue setting Range of colors remaining Range of colors creating the key signal as foreground to be replaced by background signal a The Crop and Angle values do not change even if you use the auto chroma key function Window adjustment Y balance In normal chroma keying the key signal is based on the chrominance component only and all elements of the foreground with the same hue are replaced by the background Using the Y balance function you can specify a luminance level range within which the key is active and replace the specified part by the background You can use the Y balance function independently on the key signal for the composition and the key signal for the color cancel function When applied to the key signal for the composition this produces the foregro
240. d When operating on files or registers in a batch The Save Load Copy and Delete operations are performable Files 205 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 206 Importing or exporting files to or from frame memory Import Import a file in a different format from hard disk or memory card into frame memory after changing its format Export Export a file in a register to hard disk or memory card after changing its format You can import TIFF BMP and TARGA files as follows into frame memory File type Format File name Notes TIFF file RGB Maximum eight e Layers cannot be used uncompressed characters plus e f an alpha channel is format extension tif required present two files are created as a pair BMP file Windows 2 24 Maximum eight bit format characters plus extension bmp required TARGA file RGB Maximum eight e Layers cannot be used uncompressed characters plus e f an alpha channel is compressed extension tga required present two files are format created as a pair a Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries This functionality has been tested and confirmed to work with TIFF files created by Photoshop but it may not be possible to use TIFF files created with some other software Photoshop is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated About import image
241. d as follows 1 Select the DME channel 1 or channel 5 for the first channel see Assigning a DME to a key page 415 In the same way select the DME channel 2 channel 6 for the second channel the DME channel 3 channel 7 for the third channel and the DME channel 4 channel 8 for the fourth channel To select the video signal for the second channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal in the Key1 row DME external video bus To select the video signal for the third channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and carry out the following operation e If the selected DME is channel 3 turn off the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 2 row DME utility 1 bus e If the selected DME is channel 7 turn on the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 4 row DME utility 2 bus To select the video signal for the fourth channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and carry out the following operation e If the selected DME is channel 4 turn on the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 4 row DME utility 2 bus Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block e If the selected DME is channel 8 turn off the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 2 row DME utility bus When using the SDI interface The operati
242. d even numbered rows staggered This slits the pattern into multiple strips making it like a venetian blind MA Ji Pairing off Pairing on H Create slits in the horizontal direction V Create slits in the vertical direction e The parameter Width determines the width of the slits e The parameter H Offset determines the spacing in the horizontal direction If a negative value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move to the left and the odd numbered pairs move to the right The value 100 00 represents the maximum movement If a positive value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move to the right and the odd numbered pairs move to the left The value 100 00 represents the maximum movement The parameter V Offset determines the spacing in the vertical direction If a negative value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move upward and the odd numbered pairs move downward The value 100 00 represents the maximum movement If a positive value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move downward and the odd numbered pairs move upward The value 100 00 represents the maximum movement Modulation The pattern signal can be modulated giving waves on the horizontal or vertical edges or radially The parameter Shape determines the form of the modulation 1 sine wave 2 triangular wave 3 rectangular wave When using 1080PsF mode in
243. d operating the trackball or Z ring changes the aspect ratio of a key to which the resizer function is applied to When this button is held down the trackball or Z ring operation is switched to a finer control fine mode LOC XYZ LOC location Pressing this button and operating the trackball or Z ring moves shrinks or magnifies a key to which the resizer function is applied to When this button is held down the trackball or Z ring operation is switched to a finer control fine mode ROT RSZE resizer Press this button turning it on to enable the resizer CLR WORK BUFR CLR WORK BUFR Pressing this button once returns the two dimensional transformation settings to the defaults Pressing twice in rapid succession returns all resizer parameter values to the defaults X Y These restrict the axes affected by the trackball and Z ring to the x or y axis Z This restricts the axes affected by the trackball and Z ring to the z axis CTR center Pressing this button once changes the two dimensional transformation settings to the closest detent values Pressing twice in rapid succession returns the two dimensional transformation settings to the defaults Trackball When the positioner operation mode is enabled By moving this you can move the pattern in the x axis and y axis directions When the three dimensional transform operation mode is enabled Move the trackball to control the x and y axes in a three dimen
244. d to the utility shotbox control block or a user preference button Alternatively without using the button you can make the selection simply by pressing simultaneously with the POST MCRO button When dual background bus mode is selected in setup this switches the dual background bus mode on and off When set to utility shotbox mode this enables and disables the use of the key 2 row as a utility shotbox If in setup this is assigned to the function for disabling cross point button operations then it enables or disables cross point button operations POST MCRO post macro button Use this button to set a macro attachment in post macro mode For setting in macro only mode use this in combination with a macro only set button assigned to the utility shotbox control block or a user preference button Alternatively without using the button you can make the selection simply by pressing simultaneously with the PRE MCRO button When dual background bus mode or utility shotbox mode is selected in setup this button is disabled If in setup the function for disabling cross point button operations is assigned to the PRE MCRO button then this button is disabled MCRO ATTCH ENBL macro attachment enable button When this button is on the macro attachments set for the buttons of the M E bank are enabled Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 259 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ JSUEq JOJJUOQ pue
245. d when moving a light source with keyframes For example when the longitude of a light source rotates in the clockwise direction from 0 88 315 to 0 12 45 it rotates in the counterclockwise direction the angle grows smaller if the above values are used In this case the value of the second keyframe can be set to 1 12 330 45 1 a Taqa KF1 0 88 KF2 0 12 BA Sg Z KF2 1 12 pee Keyframe trajectory User texture pattern In the spotlighting function a user generated texture pattern can now be selected for the pattern with which the light falls on the image surface To add a texture pattern create a texture package from a bitmap file and install it The installed texture pattern can be selected in the same way as the texture patterns provided by default suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo Digital Multi Effects DME 149 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo The user texture pattern function is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A For details of spotlighting see page 143 For details of how to create a user texture pattern see Adding user texture patterns in Chpater 16 Volume 2 and for how to select a pattern once created see To select a texture pattern in Chapter 11 Volume 2 Background Adds a color or inputs an external signal to the background of the image Note Signal selection for this purpose is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A Sep
246. de H Center X Side H horizontal center 100 00 to 100 00 b position 5 Side H Center Y Side H vertical center 100 00 to 100 00 position a Shared with knob 3 for parameter group 1 b The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side H At 100 00 the center is at the left edge of the screen and at 100 00 the center is at the right edge of the screen c The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side H At 100 00 the center is at the bottom edge of the screen and at 100 00 the center is at the top edge of the screen Selecting a DME wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block In the standard type Flexi Pad control block enter a 4 digit pattern number using the DME button For details see Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block page 440 You cannot select a DME wipe pattern in the simple type Flexi Pad control block Setting DME Wipe Modifiers You can apply various modifiers to the DME wipe pattern setting the DME wipe direction pattern position and so on Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 469 s d M IWA 9 19jdeuo sodiM IWA 9 19jdeuo For an overview of the DME wipe modifiers see DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers page 80 Specifying the DME wipe direction Direction You can specify the DME wipe direction normal reverse To specify the DME wipe direction in a menu 1 2 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu se
247. determines the angle of pattern rotation A value of 100 00 of the parameter Angle corresponds to one whole turn counterclockwise a value of 100 00 corresponds to one whole turn clockwise With a value of 0 00 there is no rotation Speed Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates at a fixed specified speed The parameter Speed determines the speed of pattern rotation A value of 100 00 of the parameter Speed corresponds to one turn per second counterclockwise a value of 100 00 corresponds to one turn per second clockwise With a value of 0 00 the pattern is stationary Magnitude Through the course of the transition the wipe pattern rotates through the specified angle Y The parameter Angle determines an angle of pattern inclination at the beginning of the transition e A value of 100 00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn counterclockwise e A value of 100 00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn clockwise e With a value of 0 00 the pattern is stationary The parameter Magnitude determines an angle of pattern rotation through the course of the transition e A value of 200 00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns counterclockwise e A value of 200 00 corresponds to a rotation of two turns clockwise e With a value of 0 00 the pattern is stationary Aspect ratio You can freely change the aspect ratio of the pattern Aspect off A
248. dge softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 If in the pattern selection described below you select Mask Pattern and Box for the main mask the Size parameter here cannot be adjusted Set Size in the Main Mask menu 3 To adjust the pattern and color press Zabton Adjust The Zabton Adjust menu appears 4 In the lt Zabton Pattern gt group select the pattern Key Wipe Use a key wipe You can change this pattern by pressing Pattern Select to open the menu for key wipe pattern selection Pattern Select menu and make adjustments by pressing Pattern Adjust to open the menu for pattern adjustment Wipe Adjust menu Key Edge Pattern Use a color mixing pattern for key edge You can change this pattern by pressing Pattern Select to open the menu for edge color mix dedicated wipe pattern selection Mix Pattern Select menu and make adjustments by pressing Pattern Adjust to open the menu for pattern adjustment Matte Adjust menu Mask Pattern Use the main mask Box or Pattern You can also press Pattern Select and in the corresponding pattern adjustment menu change the pattern Key Setting Operations Using Menus 5 To adjust the color press Zabton Color and adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 4 Density
249. difiers Same as standard mode e Pairing modulation spring spiral and split cannot be used e Edge fill mattes are single color only e Replication can be selected from four patterns Wipes key Same as wipes background for sub DME wipes _ Use Can be used Cannot be used Can be used with a setting change Patterns for 1 For a dedicated interface each of main and sub can be channel used For the SDI interface only one of main and sub can be used Patterns for 2 Only one of main and sub can be used channels For each M E the number of DMEs that can be used is the same as in standard mode Patterns for 3 channels Backgrounds Wipe edge fill matte Wipe edge fill matte including color mix and single color only other settings in the Matte Adjust menu Modifiers Same as standard mode Wipe border colors are single color only Transitions Key priority Cannot be used Transition Cannot be used preview Preset color Color matte or video signal Color matte only mix selected on the utility 2 bus Snapshots Cross point Utility 2 cannot be set Utility 3 is added BKGD hold A B and Key1 cannot be set Control from an editor Same as standard mode Cannot be used 242 multi Program 2 Item Main Sub Operation setting for Same as standard mode Cannot be used switcher GPI inputs and outputs a Keys 2 to 4 are common to main and sub
250. displays shown in the following figure All operations except those of the DEST button and SHIFT button are the same as for a model with selected source name displays and source name displays AUX delegation buttons KEY button 2ND button Q RTR button Selected source name displays DEST button Level selection buttons IT ITI Golo i Barid LEVEL LEVEL E E LEVEL 2 LEVEL 1 UUUE oes DME DME ra Fus FIS sor DIDITIT ILI gE l i es i SHIFT OOOQODOOD fa oooO e gogga ooooa f OOO B Cross point buttons 1st SHIFT button Source name displays o 4 XPT HOLD buttons Selected bus display AUX delegation buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to select the bus to which to assign the cross Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel point buttons in the auxiliary bus control block The buses that can be selected are as follows AUX buses 1 to 48 MONITOR 1 to MONITOR 8 buses FMS 1 frame memory source 1 and FMS 2 buses DME 1V to DME 8V buses DME IK to DME 8K buses EDIT PVW preview bus M E 1 UTILITY 1 and M E 1 UTILITY 2 buses M E 2 UTILITY 1 and M E 2 UTILITY 2 buses M E 3 UTILITY 1 and M E 3 UTILITY 2 buses P P UTILITY 1 and P P UTILITY 2 buses DSK 1
251. dition to the buttons for numeric input this includes buttons for adding attributes to snapshots 0 to 9 Used to input numeric digits Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel period Enters the decimal point When the TRANS RATE button is lit enters 00 When the EFF button SNAPSHOT button or SHOTBOX button is lit this is used to find an empty register EFF DISS effect dissolve Invert the sign negative or positive When the SNAPSHOT button is lit applies the effect dissolve attribute to a snapshot CLR AUTO TRANS clear auto transition Clear an input value returning to the previous state When the SNAPSHOT button is lit applies the auto transition attribute to a snapshot TRIM GPI ENBL enable After entering a difference value to be added to an existing setting press this button to confirm the change ENTER Confirm an entered value Display This shows the selected region name and entered numeric values Fade to Black Control Block AUTO button FTB button Preview selection buttons FTB fade to black button Press this button to fade to black the program output of the PGM PST bank at the set transition rate You can set the fade to black transition rate in the menu B Preview selection buttons Press one of these buttons to select a signal on the edit preview bus Each button can be assigned
252. e appears in the timecode display STB standby OFF When pressed this button flashes amber and the device selected with the device selection Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel buttons exits from the standby mode This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations CUE When pressed this button flashes amber together with the ALL STOP button and the device selected with the device selection button is cued up to the start point of the material When more than one device is selected the amber flashing continues until the reference device is cued up and when the cueing up is finished this button lights green REW When pressed this button lights amber and material of the device selected with the device selection buttons is rewound To stop during the rewind press the STOP button or ALL STOP button PLAY When pressed this button lights FF amber and the device selected with the device selection buttons plays The playback stops not only if the STOP button is pressed but also if any of the STB OFF SHTL JOG CUE REW PLAY FF and ALL STOP buttons is pressed When the VAR button is pressed while the device is playing back the device plays at one times normal speed in variable mode When pressed this button lights amber and the material of the device selected with the device selection buttons is fast forwarded To stop during the fast forward pre
253. e Key Frame menu is currently shown The menu screen switches to the Key Frame menu When the Key Frame menu is currently shown The menu screen switches to the menu that was on the screen immediately before the Key Frame menu In some parts of menus such as the File menu this functions as a Region selection area for selecting the region to which operations apply Default recall button This only appears in those menus for which the default recall function is available See Menus allowing a return to default settings page 325 Press this button turning it on then press a VF button or knob parameter button to return the settings to their default values in the following groupings e Function grouping the functions within an HF menu under the VF button e Knob parameters parameters currently controlled by the knobs lt previous button and gt next button The 4 button returns to the previous menu Press the gt button to continue to the next menu Menu Operations Selecting an item 1 Press the VF button 1 to 7 for the desired group of items The HF button 1 to 7 indications change to show the items within the selected group 2 Press the HF button for the desired item The indications in the status area and function button area change and you can now make various changes to the selected item Selecting a function Press the appropriate function button within the
254. e Matte Adjust menu and adjust a single color or two color combination color matte You can select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination color matte in the lt Edge Matte gt group For the color mix operation see Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte page 394 When emboss is selected for the edge type adjust the color in the lt Emboss Fill gt group To adjust matte 1 press Matte1 and to adjust matte 2 press Matte2 then adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 Key Setting Operations Using Menus Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 7 To make the edge soft press Soft Edge to set it on and adjust the softness Knob 1 Parameter Soft Adjustment Edge softness Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 For a normal edge when Soft Edge is enabled Key Drop is kept on 8 To make separate fine adjustments to the positions of the left right top and bottom of the source edge press Fine Key to set it on and adjust the following parameters Parameter group 1 2 Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Key top edge position 2 00 to 2 00 2 Left Key left edge position 2 00 to 2 00 3 Right Key right edge pos
255. e Move to the right for the normal direction tape transport disk drive frame memory and to the left for the reverse direction clip operation at a speed determined by the operating buttons Device Control Block Search Dial The description below of frame memory disk recorder VTR other external device clip operations applies only to the MVS frame memory clip or shot box The device 8000A 8000G control block trackball and device control A block joystick can be used together Using the device control block search dial you can directly operate an XDCAM DELAY button TIMELINE button Device selection buttons STOP button B External device operation buttons ENBL Timecode display CURRENT 64 66 98 94 sm STARTTC B9 99 99 9B JOG VAR H DEV H Dev H 4 5 START TC CUE KL Editing buttons Search dial SBOX buttons Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Timecode display This shows the current time CURRENT and the start and stop point timecode values for the current reference device START TC STOP TC When you press a device selection button the button lights selecting the assigned device as the reference device and displaying its setting value In the case of the SBOX butt
256. e Operations 499 Kowa ewes 7 J9JdEUQ Aowsy ewei4 7 Ja deyo Recalling Still Images Recalling a still image To recall a still image file saved in memory using the thumbnails and assign it to an FM output use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VFI Still and HF1 Recall The Recall menu appears e When Pair is on only pair files pairs of main file and sub file are displayed image0o1 image001 S image002 image002 S image004 image004 S image005 image005 Sub file Main file e When Pair is off both single files and pair files appear image001 image001 cj image002 image002 s image003 image004 image004 Single file 2 In the frame memory selection area select the FM to be assigned See page 495 500 stin Image Operations 3 If Direct Recall is on press and turn it off 4 Select the desired folder in the folder selection area By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear 5 Using the arrow keys or turning the knob scroll the file thumbnail display Knob 1 Parameter Scroll Adjustment Thumbnail displav scrolling Setting values 1 and upwards er 7 Press Recall Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall This recalls the still image file which is
257. e Wipe snapshot setting data DME wipe snapshot setting data Key snapshot setting data Shotbox setting data Macro setting data Macro attachment data e Frame memory image data To use the autoload function the data required must first be saved For the on off setting of the autoload function see Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 For details of saving operations see Saving Files Recalled by Autoload in Chapter 17 Volume 2 Files 209 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW Jaldeyo Macros SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 210 Overview The term macro refers to the function whereby a sequence of signal selections and other operations on the control panel is saved as data in memory so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations To record menu operations in memory use a menu macro see page 222 For details of macro operations see Macros in Chapter 18 Volume 2 Macro registers Events Macros The area of memory that holds a macro is termed a macro register For each control panel there are 99 macro registers numbered 1 to 99 The individual control panel operations constituting a macro are termed events One macro can contain a maximum of 99 events The following table shows the operations for each control block of the control panel that can be saved as events in a macro
258. e display changes according to the operation mode Use these in combination with the mode selection buttons to save or recall wipe snapshots DME wipe snapshots or snapshots UNDO button After recalling a register press this button to return to the state before recalling the register With a setup setting this can be switched to a mode selection button for macro setting and used in combination with the buttons in the memory recall section for recalling and executing a macro XPT HOLD cross point hold status display A bus for which cross point hold is set appears as a green light Numeric display Depending on the operation mode this shows a wipe or DME wipe pattern number or a register number in up to four digits In macro mode this provides indications for macro editing INH inhibit button Pressing this button turning it on disables the buttons in the memory recall section and the UNDO button Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 303 jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JaJdEUQ 304 Independent Key Transition Control Block Simple Type The left side of this control block controls In setup you can assign any key to either key 3 and the right side controls key 4 side of this control block For details see The control block for key 3 only is Assigning Keys to the Independent Key described as an example but the operations Transition Con
259. e key fill signal for key 3 or key 4 in the cross point control block press the KEY3 button or KEY4 button to the right of the key bus buttons turning it on to allocate the key bus row or key 2 bus row to the key 3 fill bus or key 4 fill bus then press the desired cross point button Selecting key source e To use the key source paired with the key fill signal selected on the key fill bus press the AUTO SEL button turning it on The pairing of the cross point buttons for key fill and key source is carried out in the Setup menu See Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To select key source independently of the key fill signal selected on the key fill bus and paired with key source hold down the SPLIT button turning it on then press the desired Key 1 or Key 2 button in the cross point control block Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 409 sfog vp saydeyo skey p 13 dey9 e To use as key source the same signal as the key fill signal selected on the key fill bus select the SELF mode by pressing the AUTO SEL button and SPLIT button simultaneously so that both are off When chroma key is selected as the key type select the SELF mode Key Edge Modifications To apply a modification to the key edge press one of the edge type selection buttons in the key control block BDR button border DROP BDR button drop border SHDW button shadow OUTL
260. e keyframe point you can set actions for a maximum of 24 devices P Bus timeline mode actions The actions that can be used in P Bus timeline mode are as follows e Store e Recall e Trigger For the action setting or P Bus timeline editing use the Device menu You can save the data set in the Device menu in keyframe effect registers Recalling the register starts execution of the keyframe effect and when this reaches the keyframe point at which actions are set action commands are output to external devices through the 9 pin serial port assigned to P Bus For details see Chapter 12 External Devices Volume 2 Control of GPI Devices You can control GPI devices from the control panel of this system or through the GPI output port of a DCU GPI timeline For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel the GPI timeline allows you to set an action setting a trigger output from a particular GPI output port at a keyframe point on the GPI timeline At any keyframe point you can make a maximum of eight GPI output port settings GPI timeline actions The actions that can be used on the GPI timeline are as follows e Control panel GPI output port e DCU GPI output port For the GPI output settings keyframe editing use the Device menu External Devices The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect and ad
261. e lowest numbered channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings this changes the settings on the other channels by the same amount Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 473 s d M IWA 9 19jdeuo sodiM IWA 9 19jdeuo 474 Adjusting the DME wipe pattern cropping When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected crop cannot be used 1 2 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows For a pattern in one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time Some patterns need no selection which is fixed in the lt Ch Select gt group In the lt Crop Mode gt group press Crop turning it on Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Crop the top of the image 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Crop the left of the image 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Crop the right of the image 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Crop the bottom of the image 100 00 to 100 00 Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same time The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest numbered channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settin
262. e main and sub patterns are still combined when the transition complete e If the Start and End values are the same the main and sub patterns are interchanged instantaneously at the corresponding point in the transition e If End is less than Start as the transition proceeds it changes from the sub pattern to the main pattern Dust mix You can apply the effect of a diamond dust wipe to a selected pattern You can also apply the diamond dust wipe effect to the pattern resulting from a pattern mix See Pattern Mix page 441 When the pattern mix function is off turning dust mix on results in the main pattern and the diamond dust pattern being mixed This state is the same as a pattern mix when the diamond dust pattern is selected for the sub pattern 62 Wipes Main and sub modifier link function When carrying out a pattern mix it is possible to link the modifier settings for the main pattern and sub pattern There are two modes for this function FULL LINK fully linked mode In this mode all modifier settings are the same for the main pattern and sub pattern Changing the modifier settings for one pattern automatically changes the settings for the other SEMI LINK semi linked mode Only the parameter settings of the modifiers are linked The modifier on off settings are not linked When the parameter values for the modifiers of the main pattern and sub pattern are different then after this link mode is selected c
263. e monitored Off Unassigned DME Specifying the Key Output Destination Using the key processed keyer signals external processed key To select the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the AUX buses press Ext Proc Key turning it on in the Processed Key menu This assigns the key fill and key source signals for M E 1 key 1 to reentry signals PROC V and PROC K You cannot select the PROC V and PROC K signals using the cross point selection buttons of the M E or PGM PST bank Using the key processed keyer signals or signals to which a DME effect is applied in frame memory frame memory feed To use the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the frame memory source buses in the Processed Key menu press FM Feed Ext Proc Key turns on and the key fill and key source signals processed on the currently selected keyer are automatically assigned to frame memory source buses 1 and 2 When a DME is selected on the keyer the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned Key Setting Operations Using Menus 403 sfog vp saydeyo skey p 13 dey9 404 Key Modify Clear Press Default Recall at the lower left of the menu display turning it on then press the corresponding VF button VF1 to VF4 to return the key settings to their initial status For details of menu operations see Menu Operations page 323 Blink Function With the b
264. e page you last accessed in the particular menu After initially powering on the system however the page of VF1 HFI of the particular menu is always selected Pressing a button other than a top menu button twice in rapid succession see page 316 Depending on the button this may display a fixed page or the page selected last time you accessed the menu Press the menu page selection button at the top left of the menu display The top menu window appears press the top menu selection button for the particular menu or enter the menu number with the numeric keypad and press the Enter button For details of the VF buttons and HF buttons see Interpreting the Menu Screen page 322 Basic Menu Operations Menus accessed from a top menu selection button Buttons Menus Function See HOME Home Recalling menus using the top Top menu list page 313 menu list or shortcut menu Shortcut menu page 335 M E 1 M E 1 Transition keys and wipe page 348 transitions page settings for the M E 1 bank 378 keys page 438 wipes M E 2 M E 2 Transition keys and wipe settings for the M E 2 bank M E 3 M E 3 Transition keys and wipe settings for the M E 3 bank P P PGM PST Transition downstream key and wipe settings for the PGM PST bank FRAME Frame Memory Frame memory settings page 490 MEM COLOR Color Bkgd Color background settings page 538 BKGD AUX MON
265. e pattern is the same as a standard wipe See Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 560 Using the subsidiary mask In the key control block press the SUB MASK button turning it on The parameter settings depend on the mask source selected as Wipe or Utility 1 Bus in the lt Mask Source gt group of the Sub Mask menu for the key 414 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block e When wipe is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 2 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100 e When utility 1 bus is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for 109 to 7 creating mask signal 2 Gain Gain 100 shown as 00 to 100 Applying a DME Effect to a Key For one M E bank DME effects including DME wipes can be used in up to two places on the dedicated interface and in only one place on the SDI interface simultaneously When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface you can apply DME effects to a maximum of three keys Requires a setting in setup Assigning a DME to a key 1 In the key control block press the delegation buttons M E1 and KEY 1 2 Using the DME channel selection buttons select the DME channel DME1 to DME8 for applying the effect The lit colors of the DME1 to DME8 buttons indicate the DME assignment Lit green Shows the DME assigned to t
266. e pause event Macros 215 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 216 Step execution requires a Setup menu setting By selecting step execution mode in the Setup menu you can make macro execution pause every time an event is executed Take operation When a paused macro is restarted this is referred to as a Take operation Macro take operation using a GPI input You can carry out a macro take operation using a GPI input on the control panel and DCU For GPI input settings see Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu and GPI Input Setting GPI Input Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Macro Timeline Macros By recording macro recall and execute action on a timeline in the same way as for key frames in an effect you can automatically execute them in a sequence This timeline is called a macro timeline and one macro timeline can have up to 99 macros being executed simultaneously in parallel There are 99 registers in the Macro region that can be recorded on the macro timeline numbered 1 to 99 These registers are distinct from the registers where individual macros are stored If you use a macro timeline to superimpose more than one macro the macros may not be executed according to the timing information registered in the timeline Available key frame functions The following lists the key frame functions that can be used on the macro timeli
267. e played back Switching reposition function between on and off may cause noise Only the AUX bus and edit preview bus can output ancillary data Frame Memory Clip Operations On the MVS 8000A playing back ancillary data is only possible for FM1 FM3 FMS and FM7 For FM2 FM4 FM6 and FMB8 ancillary data cannot be played back On the MVS 8000G there are no such restrictions For loop playback of clips in the following video formats the loop playback range must be at least 5 frames and set to a multiple of 5 frames 480 59 94i 720 59 94P 1080 59 94i 1080 29 97PsF Recalling operations of still images or clips can cause noise Carrving out file operations on a frame memorv clip mav result in the ancillarv data being discontinuous or in noise occurring However if the first or last frame of the clip is deleted noise will not occur The audio sampling frequency is always 48 kHz When you play back the recorded embedded audio depending on the device to be used noises are produced at the playback start point and end point For details of devices that are used for playback contact your Sony service or sales representative 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF2 Clip HFS Ancillary Enable 2 Select the frame memory folder and file to be played back 3 Set the Ancillary Enable button to On Frame Memory Clip Operations 523 Kowa ewes 7 Je deup Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo 524 Cli
268. e point of the whole effect see following figure during which the image does not change Therefore it is necessary to create the effect so that the image in the intermediate part of the transition is the keyframe for the mid point of the whole effect The range of this dead zone corresponds to the central one third of the range of the transition indicator This also applies to an auto transition Keyframe effect A B C First keyframe Last keyframe Mid point of effect Change in image through transition Image at point C appears Image at point B appears dead zone Image at point A gt appears Transition indicator Fader lever e Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 since the priority is low it will not be visible on the screen so no particular restrictions apply Channel 2 create the image full size e In the Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select P In P Creating User Programmable DME Patterns 487 s d M IWA 9 Jeideyo sodiM AWC 9 19jdeuo 488 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns Chapter 7 Frame Memory Still Image Operations AT aeeoe 490 Preparation si reccoa eo creak accutane ne tase yertac ese uct acuaresuaneed 490 Interpreting the Frame Memory Menu ee nneenenenennennnenn 490 Selecting antinputilimap ei ee eee cece oes eee ene 494 Selecting
269. e switcher bank 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt MP2 Main Sub Assign menu select the switcher bank 2 In the lt Main Sub Assign gt group select Main amp Sub Main use for main operations Multi Program 2 Sub use for sub operations Main amp Sub use for both main and sub operations When Main amp Sub is selected it is necessary to assign MAIN and SUB delegation buttons to the control panel To assign main and sub to two consecutive switcher banks For example to assign the first row first switcher bank to M E 1 main and the second row second switcher bank to M E 1 sub use the following procedure 1 In the status area of the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt MP2 Main Sub Assign menu select 1st Row M E 1 then press Main in the lt Main Sub Assign gt group 2 Press Dual M E Assign to assign M E to two banks In this state both 1st Row and 2nd Row are set to main 3 Set 2nd Row to Sub This cancels the shift non shift assignment for dual M E in standard mode It is not possible to assign the combinations of Main with Main amp Sub or Sub with Main amp Sub Assigning the MAIN and SUB delegation buttons to buttons on the control panel You can assign the MAIN and SUB delegation buttons to any of the following three places To assign to the pattern limit buttons PTN LIMIT and LIMIT SET in the transition control block standard type For de
270. e type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to delete a wipe snapshot Wipe Snapshots Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus Menus used As an example when operating on M E 1 select M E 1 gt Wipe gt Wipe Snapshot The Wipe Snapshot menu appears Page M E 1 i Effect 0 Free KF 0 1157 gt Wipe gt Wipe Snapshot k M E 1 kF o o 01 00 00 00 Key1 Current Pattern No 20 DME Wipe Delete DME Wipe Snapshot Pattern Mix Sub Main Edge Toe Stn Wipe Reread Pattern Pattern Direction Snapshot Prev 1167 Memory recall buttons Button displays In setup you can select whether the memory recall buttons show the pattern number or register name See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Saving a wipe snapshot from the menu 1 Set up the wipe you want to save 2 In the Wipe Snapshot menu press Store lighting it amber 3 Press the memory recall button for the register in which you want to save Wipe Snapshots 463 sedi S13 dey9 sodiM g Jaydeyo 464 e If you press a button which is already lit this overwrites the contents of the register e When both the main pattern and sub pattern are selected for a pattern mix the button in the memory recall section shows only the main pattern Recalling a wipe snapshot from the menu In the Wipe Snapshot menu press the memory recall button for the wipe snapshot you want to recall This recall
271. e x y and Z axeS 120 Digital Multi Effects DME Channel ID This displays the channel number so that you can check which channel you are using a useful feature when you are working with multiple channels Channel IDs are displayed differently in local and global coordinate space e In local coordinate space the channel number is displayed along with F or B to indicate whether you are looking at the front F or back B of the current wire frame For example 1F means the front of the wire frame on channel in local coordinate space e In global coordinate space the channel number is displayed along with G to indicate global For example G2 means channel 2 in global coordinate space Local coordinate space axes Wire frame Channel ID Wire frame local coordinate space axes and channel ID Grid This is a grid pattern representing the whole of the monitor screen The grid makes it easy to set the position of an image in two dimensional coordinates 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 r 3 2 Grid SD format 4 3 mode Shrinking the graphics display You can shrink the graphics display so that you can see beyond the range displayed on the normal monitor screen This makes it possible to visually set the location of images in a larger space The range displayed on a normal monitor screen is indicated by a frame Digital Multi Effects DME 1
272. eafter the fader lever controls the progress of the transition Executing an auto transition after partly moving the fader lever e Press the CUT button to instantaneously complete the transition e Press the AUTO TRANS button to complete the rest of the transition at the preset transition rate If the transition rate is set to 100 frames and the fader lever has moved through 1 4 of the transition then the remaining 3 4 Of the transition is carried out in 100 frames Non Sync State If the fader lever is in an intermediate position when a transition is completed as an auto transition then the lever position no longer agrees with the transition state This is termed a non sync state In a non sync state two lit LEDs indicate the position from which a normal transition can be carried out This is either at one end position or both end positions of the fader lever travel Moving the fader lever toward the position of the lit LEDs does not carry out a transition but when the fader lever reaches the end position the non sync state is released and it is now possible to carry out the next transition Executing a Transition Once the fader lever is moved lt Y 10 this position the non sync state ends and the next transition direction shown by the arrow is possible f ann Manual transition completed as auto Manual transition completed as transition when moving the fader auto transition when moving the
273. eck the pattern size on the preview monitor first press the TRANS PVW button to select the transition preview mode see page 363 2 Press the LIMIT SET button This sets the current fader lever position as the pattern limit Setting the pattern limit by a menu operation 1 When a wipe is selected as the transition type in the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF5 Wipe then HF4 Edge Direction When a DME wipe is selected as the transition type in the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF6 DME Wipe then HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears 356 Executing a Transition Press the Pattern Limit button turning it on Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Pattern Limit Pattern limit 0 00 2 to 100 00 P a 0 00 Executing the transition does not change the video output at all b 100 00 The transition is the same as when no pattern limit is set but the cross point button selections of the background A and B buses do not interchange when the transition completes Executing a pattern limit transition 1 Press the PTN LIMIT button turning it on The button you pressed lights amber Carry out the transition The transition progresses as far as the set pattern limit Even if the transition completes the cross point button assignments of the background A and B buses do not interchange Carry ou
274. ect VF4 File and HF1 Pair Recombination The Pair Recombination menu appears Press Separate The FMI and FM pair file is split into separate single files Moving Files Moving files 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF5 Move The Move menu appears The status area shows files to be moved in the upper area and destination files in the lower area Select the folder which contains the file to be moved Using any of the following methods select the file to be moved e Press the arrow keys to scroll the display e Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area e Turn the knobs Image Data Management sequence Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No File selection 1 and upwards 2 Num Selection of number of files in 1 and upwards 4 Select the destination folder and file 5 Press Move A message for confirming the move appears 6 To confirm the move press Yes and to cancel press No Deleting Files Deleting files 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF5 Delete The Delete menu appears In the status area whether pair mode is on or off all of the saved files appear as thumbnails 2 Select the folder which contains the file to be deleted 3 Using either of the following methods select the file to be deleted If necessary press the arrow keys to scroll the display e Press directly on the thu
275. ect duration Press this button turning it on to set the effect duration from the numeric keypad control block DELAY Press this button turning it on to enter a delay value from the numeric keypad control block CONST DUR constant duration Select the duration mode When this is lit the mode is constant duration mode and when off variable duration mode Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JaJdEUQ 284 KF LOOP keyframe loop button Press this button turning it on to execute the effect the specified number of times through the keyframes in the specified range PAUSE button When this button is pressed a pause is applied to the selected keyframe When editing a macro press this button turning it on to include a pause event in the macro The pause length can be set in the numeric keypad control block Effect execution section RUN When this button is pressed the effect is run from the first keyframe to the last keyframe However if a pause is set on a keyframe the effect stops at that point Press this button again to resume execution and continue to the next pause point or the end of the effect Effect indicator This comprises multiple LEDs which show the progress of the effect Fader lever Moving this up or down manually runs the effect REWIND When this button is pressed the currently recalled effect i
276. ected event DEL delete When this button is pressed the selected keyframe is deleted When the edit point is between two keyframes the immediately preceding keyframe is deleted During macro editing pressing this button deletes the selected event You can also select multiple keyframes or macro events and delete them in a single operation COPY When this button is pressed the selected keyframe during macro editing macro event is copied You can also select multiple keyframes or macro events and copy them ina single operation PASTE When this button is pressed the deleted or copied keyframe during macro editing macro event is inserted after the current keyframe during macro editing macro event Pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT button inserts the deleted or copied keyframe during macro editing macro event before the current keyframe during macro editing macro event SHIFT Hold down this button and press the INS button MOD button or PASTE button to obtain the shifted function for the button UNDO When this button is pressed the last executed keyframe during macro editing macro event insertion modification or deletion or paste operation is canceled Duration setting buttons KF DUR keyframe duration Press this button turning it on to set the keyframe duration of the selected keyframe by numeric value entry from the numeric keypad control block EFF DUR eff
277. ected for the main pattern see the following table Possible combinations of main pattern and sub pattern Yes Combination possible No Combination not possible Main Sub pattern pattern 7 Standard Enhanced Rotary Mosaic Random diamond dust Standard Yes Yes No Yes Yes Enhanced Yes Yes No Yes Yes Rotary No No No No No Mosaic Yes Yes No No Yes Random Yes Yes No Yes No diamond dust Select HF2 Pattern Mix The Pattern Mix menu appears In the lt Pattern Mix gt group select the type of pattern mix Mix mix Nam positive Nam Nam negative Nam Morphing morphing For an overview of types of pattern mix see page 61 Depending on the selection in step 4 set the following parameters e When mix positive Nam or negative Nam is selected Knob 1 Parameter Mix Ratio Adjustment Proportion of sub pattern to the main pattern Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 e When morphing see page 61 is selected pattern is at 100 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 Start Point in transition at which main 50 00 to 150 00 pattern is at 100 3 End Point in transition at which sub 50 00 to 150 00 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 6 In the lt Main Sub Link gt group make the main sub modifier link function settings See Main and sub modifier link function page 63 Full fully linked mode Se
278. ection For a gradual transition such as a mix or wipe Press the TAKE button or operate the fader lever See Setting the Transition Rate page 352 and Pattern Limit page 355 as required Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority You can check the output status of keys 1 and 2 and the key priority setting in the key status display in the transition control block The key status display includes two ON indicators corresponding to keys 1 and 2 Display of the key output status When the key is inserted in the output from the M E or PGM PST bank the indication ON lights and when it is not inserted the indication goes off Key priority display The key lying in front on the program monitor has an indication OVER lit To set the key priority use the Misc gt Key Priority menu for the M E or PGM PST bank For details see Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation page 345 Split Fader What does split fader mean The term split fader refers to the function of carrying out a transition with the fader lever split into left and right halves so that the background A and background B buses can be manipulated separately To use the split fader the following conditions must be met e The fader lever is in bus fixed mode See Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Simple Transition 373 SUOMISUBIL 19 JdE
279. ed for a normal transition and those which can be selected for an independent key transition For independent key transitions see page 37 On the MVS 8000G it is also possible to carry outa DME wipe on a key using the resizer see page 58 Types of DME Wipe Pattern The patterns used for a DME wipe fall into two broad classes Preset patterns predetermined fixed patterns User programmable DME patterns patterns which you can create using keyframe effects DME wipe execution mode and pattern numbers that can be used There are three DME wipe execution modes depending on the number of DME channels available one channel mode two channel mode and three channel mode The pattern numbers that can be used in these modes are as follows Execution mode Preset pattern numbers User programmable DME pattern that can be used numbers that can be used One channel mode 1000 series 1901 to 1999 Two channel mode 2000 series 2901 to 2999 Three channel mode 3000 series 3901 to 3999 DME wipe pattern groups DME Wipes The patterns used in DME wipes fall into the following groups For each group excluding user programmable DMEs for schematic patterns and numbers see DME Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 566 The black part of the pattern represents the old video and the white part the new video with the wipe taking place in the direction of the arrow Slide The new video slides in
280. ed on the key 1 row and the shifted signal on the background B row can be selected on the key 2 row To switch this mode on and off it is necessary to assign this function to the PRE MCRO button in the cross point control block For details of the assignment operation see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 For the following switcher banks dual background bus mode is not available e When set to Dual M E Assign e When M E Config is set to DSK Signal Assignment and Selection Assigning signals to buttons Each of the 32 cross point buttons and reentry buttons has a corresponding button number to which you assign a signal In addition to the signals input to the PRIMARY INPUTS 1 to 80 connectors 1 to 34 connectors for the MVS 8000SF 8000ASF 8000GSF on the rear panel of the switcher you can also select signals generated within the switcher Each button has assigned to it a video signal and a key signal forming a pair You can set these video and key combinations in a Setup menu For details of Setup menu operations see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Signal Selection 29 suonouny 0008 SAW 4e deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 30 Cross point button control block button numbers Shift button H
281. ed source selection buttons By holding down the 2ND button and selecting a destination you can assign a different destination from the 1st row to the 2nd row In the 1st row the button to which a destination is assigned lights amber If a different destination is assigned to a button in the 2nd row the button lights green When the 32nd button is set as a SHIFT button in a 32 button system while the SHIFT button is active these switch to the shifted source selection buttons By using the KEY button you can expand the source selection as follows Selection operation Hold down the KEY button and press the source selection button Source selection 63 to 93 SHIFT KEY Off On 94 to 124 On On Hold down the KEY button and press the SHIFT button turning it on the SHIFT button locks here even when in Hold mode then press the source selection button Source SHIFT KEY Selection selection operation 1 to 31 Off Off Press the source selection button 32 to 62 On Off Press the SHIFT button then press the source selection button Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Pane XPT HOLD cross point hold buttons Not used in router control mode KEY button When this button is enabled by a setting in the Setup menu by holding it down during a source selection you can expand the function of the SHIFT but
282. ee Key Snapshots page 57 Wipe snapshot This includes the wipe settings of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks See Wipe Snapshots page 71 DME wipe snapshot This includes the DME wipe settings of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks The rest of this section describes the snapshots that apply to a particular region or regions Snapshot Attributes An individual snapshot may also have attached special conditions relating to switcher or DME operation when the snapshot is recalled These conditions are called attributes of the snapshot and can be added when the snapshot is saved or recalled Types of attribute There are five snapshot attributes as follows Cross point hold When the snapshot is recalled the cross point button selection remains unchanged This can be set independently for each bus Key disable When the snapshot is recalled the key settings remain unchanged This can be set independently for each keyer A Setup menu allows you to select whether or not the key on off state should also remain unchanged For details of the setting operation see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM CCR Menu in the Chapter 16 Volume 2 Effect dissolve The transition from the state before the snapshot recall to the snapshot settings is carried out smoothly by a dissolve The dissolve duration can be set in the Snapshot menu Auto transition An auto t
283. ee page 68 e When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Aspect Aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 67 e When turning Pairing on and making a wipe pattern like a Venetian blind Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width of the slits 1 to 128 integer e When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and slanting the pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 e When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and rotating the pattern at a constant rate Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 e When selecting H horizontal or V vertical in the lt Modulation gt group and applving waviness to the pattern The modulation is alwavs a sine wave When using 1080PsF mode in an HD svstem the modulation function is not available Color Background Setting Operations Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amplitude Amplitude of modulation 0 001010000 J 2 Frequency Frequency of modulation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Speed Speed of waves 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 70 5 To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the C
284. egree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the amount of movement the width of the partitions the degree of randomness in partition width the center point the starting angle and other parameters You can also fix the direction in which shards scatter Flying Bar Divides the image into bars which peel off in two blocks as they move You can set the degree of transition the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the direction of movement the width of the partitions the degree of randomness in partition width the partition angle and other parameters Blind Divides the image into bars or wedges with blocks rotating like the slats of venetian blinds There are two modes Bar and Wedge You can set the number of rotations by blocks the perspective the width and position of blocks the direction the center position and other parameters ee i Hi L X oy fas Digital Multi Effects DME Split Splits the image upper and lower left and right You can set the degree to which the image is split the split positions and other parameters Split Slide Divides the image into bars which slide alternately in reverse directions You can set the degree of transition the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the degree of sliding block width block angle and other parameters Mirror Partitions the image vertically and horizontally creating an image like
285. elect a key to determine the key priority sequence For details of the key priority sequence see the figure shown for step 2 in the previous item see page 345 The keys appear in the set order on the preview monitor 3 Execute the transition The keys are rearranged in the set order on the program monitor Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority You can check whether keys are currently output and the key priority setting using the key status display in the transition control block of the M E or PGM PST bank The display is above the next transition selection buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank Display of the key output status When a key is included in the output from the M E or PGM PST bank the corresponding ON indicator lights Key priority display The key priority is indicated by numerals to 4 lighting The topmost key as seen on the program monitor is priority 1 and the keys underneath are numbered 2 3 4 away from the viewer see page 345 To display the key priority for after the transition press the KEY PRIOR button in the transition control block turning it on For keys for which the priority after the transition is different from the current priority the corresponding numerals to 4 flash For a key with the same priority the indication remains on Example key status display given when the KEY PRIOR button is pressed Current key priority 1 2
286. elected in the Wipe menu DME A wipe type of transition is carried out using the DME effect selected in the DME Wipe menu FM1 amp 2ClIP FM3 amp 4ClIP FM5 amp 6CIIP FM7 amp 8CIIP A recorded clip is played back together with the transition At this point you can also carry out a transition wipe or mix dissolve simultaneously together with the clip Transition execution section Transition indicator This comprises multiple LEDs which show the progress of the transition Fader lever Move this to carry out a manual transition Transition rate display This shows the transition rate the time from the beginning of a transition to its completion set for an auto transition in frames You can set the transition rate using the numeric keypad control block Flexi Pad control block or menu AUTO TRANS transition button Pressing this button carries out an auto transition of the set transition rate duration The transition starts immediately and the button lights Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 312 amber When the transition completes the button goes off CUT button Pressing this button carries out the transition as a cut i e instantaneously Wipe direction selection buttons When you have selected a wipe or DME wipe as the transition type press one of these buttons turning it on to select t
287. emory Clip Operations Frame memory selection area FI vv 00 00 10 RL Target selection buttons Frame memorv folder selection area Pair selection buttons FM2 uve ILL ald 3 Black 4 MVES Eee Be 010001 f mn l jac 00 00 10 R Pair Ext P E Clip file selection area Black 8 Duration 00 05 00 Direct Recall Recall Vv Direct Recall button 2 In the frame memory selection area select an assigned target FM See page 495 For the MVS 8000A if other than FMI and FM2 is selected extended clips are not display Go ed If Direct Recall is on press the button turning it off 4 In the folder selection area select the desired folder By pressing More to switch the displays you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear 5 Using the arrow keys or turning the knob scroll the file thumbnail display Knob Parameter 1 Scroll Adjustment Thumbnail display scrolling Setting values 1 and upwards Frame Memory Clip Operations 513 Mowa ewes 7 Jaydeyo 6 Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall 7 Press Recall This recalls the clip file which is assigned to the FM you selected in step 2 In pair mode if a clip is selected the main file is output to FM1 and the sub file to FM2 In single mode when only one of FMI and FM2 is selected the front file on
288. en backed up Pair file processing Couple You can create a pair file from two single still image files or clip files Separate You can also separate a pair file into two single still image files or clip files This function is not supported on the MVS 8000 Image Data Transfer Files including ancillary data can be transferred between such devices as a hard disk and memory card In the File menu files can be saved and recalled It is possible to import images such as BMP files or convert frame memory files into a different format and save them in an external device For details see Chapter 17 Files Volume 2 Frame Memory Notes on transferring multiple still images together e Transferring all of the still image files within frame memory together fails if the capacity of the memory card is too small to hold all of the images In this case replace with a larger capacity memory card or delete still images until saving is possible The following table roughly shows the relation between memory card capacity and number of images that can be saved Memory card capacity Number of images that can be saved SD system HD system 7 256 MB 214 46 a For all available signal formats except 720P Note that when transferring to the hard disk there is ample capacity so that problems such as this do not occur e If you cancel the operation during a data transfer between frame memory and hard disk o
289. en recall the snapshots Functions Added in Multi Program 2 Mode You can set video processing for the utility 3 bus signal In the control panel and DCU GPI input settings and switcher GPI link settings the actions that can be selected now also include Sub Cut and Sub Auto Trans A switcher GPI link can now be set also for the utility 3 bus To the macro event configuration parameters and macro attachment settings Main amp Sub and Sub have been added For cross point button link settings M E 1 to M E 3 and P P Sub Program Sub Preset and Sub Trans PGM have been added to the link source bus Snapshot attributes can now be set independently for main and sub There are additional menus for sub which can be recalled by pressing a button twice You can set MP2 Auto Correct to On or Off in the Effect menu or Snapshot menu When this is set to On for example copy destination and source data is automatically recognized as main or sub and the data interchanged Multi Program 2 241 suonouny 0008 SAW 4e deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode The differences from operation in standard mode are as follows Item Main Sub Keys a Keys 1 to 4 can be used Keys 2 to 4 only can be used Wipes Patterns Same as standard mode e Only standard patterns background can be used e Pattern mix is not possible Mo
290. ents 382 composition 381 shadow 51 shadow adjustment 386 window 50 Circle 136 Clean mode 49 Clear button 330 332 Clip function 92 Clip transition 44 operations 524 Close button 330 331 Color combination 97 539 matte settings 350 vector key 48 Color background 97 selection 97 setting operations 538 settings menu 538 Color cancel 50 adjustments 383 Color corrector 223 Copy and swap 226 Input video processing 223 Luminance processing 224 Output video processing 226 Primary color correction 223 RGB clip 224 Secondarycolorcorrection 224 Spot color adjustment 226 YUV clip 226 Color data copy 100 swap 100 Color mix 97 127 539 for edge fill matte 446 for key fill 388 Color palette window 333 Combine Shadow 141 Combiner 152 Contrast 128 Control panel 251 configuration 1 251 configuration 2 252 configuration 3 255 Coordinate axes 120 Copy 98 544 Crop 123 Cross point button numbers 257 button settings 196 buttons 256 control block 256 hold 183 Custom mode 192 Cut 44 CUT button 262 312 Cvlinder 138 D Dead zone 487 Default recall button 323 Defocus 123 Del button 332 Delay setting 174 Delegation buttons 267 DEST button 289 Detents 115 Device management 193 DEVICE connectors 295 Device control block joystick 277 search dial 278 trackball 271 Device Interface 202 Digital multi effects 109 Dim and Fade 130 Direction 64 444 456 470 Disk recorder control 161 Display 269 286 DME 109 261 263 3
291. enu Operation 365 Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate 0 0 00 eee eee 366 Fade ta Black oaa AA SAE AAE AEE I ARASA EETA 369 Bade to BlackeOperatjon arn ae E A A EER 369 Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate 2 mnn 369 Simplesbransitioni A A ATT a 371 Basic Operations for Simple Transitions ss mnnnnennzznnznn 371 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority L 373 DS Plibade meee cs eaten este setae eet anes A eee Ree 373 Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module 374 SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo Basic Operating Procedure The positions of the principal buttons used for basic transition operation are as follows ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 KEVA l reve xe Next transition selection buttons Transition type selection buttons Transition execution section 1 2 Transition control block for standard transitions In the cross point control block select the background video with the background A row of cross point buttons Select the way in which the transition will affect the image using the next transition selection buttons in the transition control block For an overview see Selecting the Next Transition page 34 To change the background Press the BKGD button turning it on To insert or delete a key Press one of the KEY 1 t
292. enus menu shortcuts enabling disabling functions recalling utility commands and recalling shotbox registers or macro registers e User Preference Make the settings for the user preference buttons in the menu control block e Utility Module Assign Make the utilitv shotbox control block settings e KEY 2 4 Bus Button Assign Make the settings for the key 2 row buttons in the cross point control block External device connections Device Interface GPI Input Set the GPI input ports and trigger type and make the action settings GPI Output Set the GPI output ports and trigger type and make the action settings P Bus Control Set the control mode for P Bus devices DCU Serial Port Assign Assign the devices disk recorder V TR Extended VTR connected to a DCU and accessible from the control panel to the DEV 1 to DEV12 buttons which become operative when you press the DEV button on the device control block For a disk recorder or Extended VTR you can also make settings relating to sharing of file lists Further you can make settings for devices disk recorder VTR Extended VTR operable from an editing keyboard Editor Port Assign When the BZS 8050 license is valid make settings for the SCU editor panel port Operation settings Operation e Button Tally Set whether or not the system tally generation results are reflected in the panel tally e Trans Rate Display Select whether the transition rate display mode is in
293. er buses see the following e Settings for a particular input signal Signal input settings in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e Key fill bus settings Video Processing page 405 e Settings for frame memory source buses I and 2 Setting video processing page 498 e Settings for Aux 1 to 48 buses Making video process settings for an AUX bus page 555 e Overview of video process Video Process page 107 This section describes an example on the background A bus of the M E 1 bank For the background B bus or utility bus 1 or 2 make the adjustment with a similar procedure Making video process settings for each bus 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button M E1 and select VF7 Misc and HF2 Video Process 2 In the lt Bkgd A gt group press Video Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Video signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 2 Y Gain Luminance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 3 C Gain Chrominance signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 4 Hue Delay Hue delay 180 00 to 180 00 5 Black Level Black level 7 31 to 109 59 To return the parameter settings to the defaults Press Unity in the lt Bkgd A gt group Video Process Settings 557 Oy Nua OSIN OL JojdeuQ 913 nue OSIN OLJejdeuo 558 Video Process Settings Appendix Volume 1 Wipe
294. ers LCD Color Set the LCD color for source name display Table Copy Copy table contents from the main table to tables 1 to 14 or between tables 1 to 14 it is not possible to copy tables 1 to 14 to the main table Name Export This function sends the source name and destination name to the S Bus Side Flags Button Assign Assign the rightmost button in the background AJB row to the side flag function inserting a selected image on both sides of a 4 3 image Auxiliary bus control block settings Aux Assign Setup e Aux Assign Assign the AUX delegation buttons in the auxiliary bus control block to any bus e Shift Mode Specify whether the rightmost button of the AUX delegation buttons is used as a shift button and when it is used as a shift button the operation mode e RTR Mode Setting Carry out the following settings for using the auxiliary bus control block for router control Assigning destinations Setting the shift operation in the destination selection button rows Source table settings Setting the shift operation in the source selection button rows Assigning levels to the level selection buttons Setting destination selection buttons to be used for snapshots Button assignment settings Prefs Utility Assign the PREFS 1 to PREFS 16 buttons in the menu control block the utility shotbox control block buttons and the cross Point control block This assigns recalling frequently used m
295. es of both of the main pattern and the sub pattern ik Mix Positive NAM Negative NAM Morphing As the transition progresses the pattern morphs from the main pattern through the mix combination to the sub pattern Wipes 61 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo i Parameter settings Main pattern at 100 Start Point in the course of the transition at which the main pattern Sub pattern at 100 is at 100 End Point in the course of the transition at which the sub pattern is at 100 0 00 ii 100 00 Transition 0 00 100 00 l I I l h l l 7 l l Start Mix combination of Mix ends during End value main and sub transition which i value i patterns already ends with sub 1 begun pattern at 100 i Begins with main Ends with sub pattern at 100 pattern at 100 ie 0 0 00 eee 100 00 6 10 00 90 00 l l Transitionends with main and i l Mix begins after sub patterns i transition starts still in mix i l I 1 combination kk x e 10 00 Meski L 110 00 e A value of 0 00 corresponds to the beginning of the transition and a value of 100 00 to the end of the transition e A negative Start value signifies that the main and sub patterns are already combined when the transition starts e An End value of 100 00 or more signifies that th
296. es of the image You can crop the top bottom left and right sides individually or all together You can also soften the cropped edges Defocuses the whole image The degree of defocusing can be set simultaneously or separately for video and key signals However when the DME dedicated interface is used the degree of defocusing can be set for video signals only You can also cancel the black level leaking that occurs at the edge of the screen when the Defocus effect is used Digital Multi Effects DME 123 suojouny 0008 SAW 48 deu9 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 124 Blur Applies a rounded blurring to the whole image Beveled Edge This gives an image a beveled edge You can set the edge width and color The inner edge softness and edge boundary softness can also be set Effects Color Key Border This effect adds borders to keys or gives a key consisting of an outline only Digital Multi Effects The Key Border function is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A Art Edge Adds edges to the inner and outer side of the input image The following items can be set e Art edge width and position e Separate softening of the art edge inner and outer sides e Color of art edges Digital Multi Effects DME Examples of Art Edge source Gradation Matte Radial Gradation Rainbow Matte Radial Rainbow Example effect using Art Edge source Rainbow Matte The Art Edge function is not su
297. ess 0 00 to 100 00 3 Density Key density 0 00 to 100 00 When the MENU button in the device Going back to the previous menu control block is lit you can use the trackball and Z ring to control the parameters e Move the trackball on the x axis to control the parameter for knob 1 or on the y axis to control the parameter for knob 2 Moving up or to the right increases the parameter value and moving down or to the left decreases the parameter value e Use the Z ring to adjust the parameter for knob 3 Turning clockwise increases the parameter value and turning counterclockwise decreases the parameter value Basic Menu Operations To return to the last displayed menu press the previous page button Returning to default state in function groupings 1 Press the Default Recall button turning it on This enters the menu default recall mode 2 Press the VF button you want to return to the default state This returns the settings within the function grouping to the default state and the Default Recall button goes off The default state of the settings depends on the setting of the initial status mode set in the Setup menu of system setup as follows User The state when Initial Status Define is executed Factory Factory default settings Returning knob parameters to default state 1 Press the Default Recall button turning it on This enters the menu default recall mode 2 Press the knob param
298. et color mix in two stroke mode e For details of audio mixers that can be used Sony service or sales representative Basic Operating Procedure Key Priority Setting You can select the key priority that is the order in which the keys are laid over each other in the current video and after the transition There are two ways of setting the priority either using the PRIOR SET button in the transition control block or using the Misc menu to access the Key Priority menu for the M E or PGM PST bank When the operating mode is set to multi program the key priority setting cannot be made Setting the Key Priority in the Transition Control Block The positions of the buttons used for the operation are as follows ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 Next transition selection buttons KEY PRIOR button PST IcoLon MX a SUPER MIX Sole PRIOR SET button Transition control block standard type Changing the currently inserted key priority 1 If the next transition selection button KEY PRIOR is on press another next transition selection button to turn the KEY PRIOR button off When the KEY PRIOR button is on the transition control block switches to the mode for changing the key priority for after the transition Key Priority Setting 343 SUOMISUBIL g 19 JdEU
299. eter button you want to return to the default state This returns the knob parameter value to the default state and the Default Recall button goes off e Inthe following table Menus allowing a return to default settings the default recall function does not apply to some knob parameters For details see the table Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall on page 328 The default recall function does not return the horizontal H and vertical V position settings to their default state individually Returning the horizontal H position to its default state also returns the vertical V position to its default state automatically and vice versa For details see the table Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall on page 328 Menus allowing a return to default settings Top menu selection button VF number Menu number Menu name name HF number M E1 VFI 1110 series Key1 9 VF2 1120 series Key2 9 VF3 1130 series Kev3 2 VF4 1140 series Key4 9 VF5 1150 series Wipe 9 VF6 1160 series DME Wipe 2 VF7 1170 series Misc 2 Basic Menu Operations 325 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOD pue snua z JaJdEUQ Top menu selection button VF number Menu number Menu name name HF number M E2 VF1 1210 series Key1
300. etting the transition rate in the Flexi Pad control block In the PGM PST bank or when using a simple type transition control block you cannot use the Flexi Pad control block to set the transition rate 1 In the M E bank Flexi Pad control block press the TRANS RATE button The memory recall section display is now ready to accept the entered transition rate TRANS RATE button TC button ENTR button Memory recall section Flexi Pad control block standard type 2 Enter the desired transition rate with the numeric keypad If required press the TC button to toggle the input mode frame input or timecode input e Enter a value of up to three digits e To cancel the entry press any of the six buttons in the leftmost column IWIPEJ DME or the TRANS RATE button Executing a Transition 353 SUOMSUBIL g 19 JdEU SUOIISUBIL g 19JdEUQ 354 3 Press the ENTR button This confirms the entrv and the new setting appears in the transition control block displav Setting the transition rate in the numeric kevpad control block TRANS RATE button Displav Numeric kevpad DOOOOODOOOOOOU Region selection buttons TC button ENTER button Numeric ke
301. ettings For details of the operations see Setup Relating to Operations From the Control Panel in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Panel settings Config MEE Assign Set the logical configuration of the M E and P P banks M E Operation For each of the M E and P P banks make operations possible not possible or disabled Enable Disable Inhibit Dual M E Assign Using two M E banks assign the shift and non shift button rows of a single M E bank Dual M E Xpt Swap When a setting has been made for Dual M E Assign swap the shift and non shift button rows DSK Fader Assign Carry out fader function assignment and key delegation for the key delegation buttons in each of the maximum of four downstream key control blocks External Bus Link Make link settings relating internal switcher buses to routing switcher destinations Key Trans Link Select whether or not to link transitions between keyers and if so which keyer to link to You can set the links between keyers for each M E bank separately Reference Module When a trackball module and a joystick module are both connected as device control blocks select which is used as the reference 10 Key Region Assign Assign any regions to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block Also used for setting the regions included in the selection when the All button is pressed Program Button Make assignments for buttons of some control blocks such as assigning the buttons in
302. ever in the Clip gt Play menu you can also select both FM1 and FM2 Selecting a frame memory folder Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area see page 494 By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear Capturing an Input Image Freeze Freezing an image and writing it to memory To freeze the signal selected as input material and write it to memory use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VFI Still and HF2 Freeze Store The Freeze Store menu appears 2 Select the target frame memory For the procedure see Selecting outputs FM and target frame memory page 495 3 To enable V K mode press V K Mode turning it on 496 stil Image Operations 4 Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area to select the folder to hold the freeze image For details of the selection method see page 496 The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze image It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following step 5 An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder Press Freeze Enable turning it on The signals of frame memory source buses and 2 are assigned to the pair of FMs selected in step 2 a freeze is now possible If necessary make the video process settings see pa
303. ever possible to copy or PGM PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 swap wipe settings to or from an external downstream keyer DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the banks listed in the following table Copy and Swap 99 suonouny 0008 SAN 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Target bank M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST Target data DME wipe settings It is not however possible to carry out copy or swap involving independent key transition DME wipe settings DME wipe copy and DME wipe swap in the independent key transition control block You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the 16 keyers listed in the following table Target bank M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 Target keyer Target data Keys 1 to 4 DME wipe settings in the independent key transition control block PGM PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 Matte data copy and swap You can copy or swap the matte data among the 38 color generators listed in the following t able Target bank M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST Target keyer and data e Matte data for key fill e Keys 1 to 4 e Matte data for key edge fill e Downstream keys 1 to 4 Matte data for wipe border edge Color background e Matte data for color background 1 e Matte data for color background 2 Color data copy and You can copy swap or swap the colo
304. f a menu macro e Recalling frame memory clips Utility Shotbox control block Recalling the functions assigned to memory recall buttons a In the case of an event that inserts or deletes a key the key state at the time of event registration inserted or not inserted is also saved in the macro When the macro is executed the event is only replayed if the key state matches the saved state Example For a macro with an event that deletes a key when the macro is executed if the key is inserted it is deleted but otherwise nothing occurs as concerns keying b Function valid only when PLAY STOP and CUEUP have been set in the Setup menu c When using the device control block search dial this operates as a reference module When not used this operates on the module selected in the Panel gt Config menu For details of reference module selection see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Macro Creation and Editing You can create or edit a macro by recalling a macro register To create a new macro recall an empty macro register and create the desired sequence of events by executing the sequence of operations on the control panel that you want to save as events in the macro 212 Macros To add an event to an existing macro recall the register holding the macro and create the event you want to add While editing a macro it is not possible to execute another macro
305. f operations see Color Background Setting Operations page 538 Color Backgrounds 97 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 98 Copy and Swap You can copy and swap the settings among the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks or between keyers The following settings can be copied or swapped Overall settings for the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks Keyer settings Wipe settings in a transition control block Wipe settings in an independent key transition control block DME wipe settings in a transition control block DME wipe settings in an independent key transition control block Matte data color 1 color 2 and how to compose them Color settings DME channel settings Format converter input settings copy only Format converter output settings copy only You can carry out copy operations with a simple button operation Swap operations and copy operations on DME data can only be done with a menu operation For details of the operations see Chapter 9 Copy and Swap page 543 and for color correction settings Copy and Swap Operations in Chapter 19 Volume 2 M E copy and M E swap You can copy and swap the overall bank settings among the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks Target bank Target data M E 1 Bank settings excluding the following data items M E 2 e Setup data M E 3 Flexi Pad settings PGM PST e Snapshots e Keyframe effects e Key snapshots
306. f pattern 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 e When Magnitude is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation at start of 1090 00 to 100 00 2 transition 2 Magnitude Angle of rotation through course 990 00 to 200 00 2 of transition a See page 67 Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio Aspect ratio You can set the aspect ratio independently for the main pattern and sub pattern 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 2 Press Aspect turning it on 3 Set the following parameter Knob 1 Parameter Aspect Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 67 Setting the wipe pattern replication Multi Xou can set pattern replication independentiv for the main pattern and sub pattern 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears 2 Press the Multi button turning it on 3 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Shift Replication layout 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 68 4 To make more adjustments press the Multi Adjust
307. f the Type menu select Matte and press Matte Adjust The Matte Adjust menu appears Select Mix Color in the lt Fill Matte gt group Adjust the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Softness of the edge of the 0 00 to 100 00 pattern Select the combining pattern in the lt Mix Pattern gt group Key Wipe The wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition is used for combination You can change this pattern by pressing Pattern Select to open the menu for key wipe pattern selection Pattern Select menu and make adjustments by pressing Pattern Adjust to open the menu for pattern adjustment Wipe Adjust menu Key Edge Pattern Combine using the dedicated pattern selected for the color mix in the key edge fill You can change this pattern by pressing Pattern Select to open the menu for edge color mix dedicated wipe pattern selection Mix Pattern Select menu and make adjustments by pressing Pattern Adjust to open the menu for pattern adjustment Matte Adjust menu For details see Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte page 394 In the Type menu adjust color 1 and color 2 To adjust color 1 select Color1 and to adjust color 2 select Color2 then adjust the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation
308. fect registers There are 99 dedicated registers for keyframe effects in each region numbered 1 to 99 Shared user programmable DME registers In addition to the 99 DME registers for each region i e each channel there are also shared registers for each processor as shown in the following table These are used for user programmable DME Register number Register allocation 101 to 199 Shared register for one channel effects 201 to 299 Shared register for two channel effects 301 to 399 Shared register for three channel effects When operating with these shared registers be sure to select the appropriate regions depending on the number of channels When recalling registers in the Regions and Registers 200 range select two consecutive channels for the regions as for example IDMEL and DME2 Similarly for registers in the 300 range select three consecutive registers Work register This is a temporary register used when editing keyframes When you recall an effect it is read from the effect register into the work register and when you save the contents of the work register are written to the effect register Master timeline registers There are 99 master timeline registers numbered 1 to 99 for each control panel They store keyframe effect regions and the register numbers saved in the regions Snapshot registers These are registers for snapshots and there are 99 numbered 1 to 99 for each region
309. ffect like a flag waving in the wind There are two modes H amp V and Size You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image the wave form the amount of wave movement and the range In H amp V mode you can also set the wave angle Digital Multi Effects DME Twist Twists the image You can twist the image in the horizontal or vertical direction You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image the wave form the amount of wave movement and other parameters Ripple Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image There are four modes Radial Angular Both and Shape The direction of modulation differs depending on the mode You can set the size and frequency of the ripples their direction and speed their center point and other parameters In Shape mode you can select ripple shapes other than circles stars etc Rings Partitions the image into rings that rotate while moving in the same direction You can set the degree of transition the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the amount of movement the width of the partitions the degree of randomness in partition width the center point the starting angle and other parameters Digital Multi Effects DME 133 suonouny 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 134 Broken Glass Partitions the image like broken glass with shards flying outward You can set the degree of transition the d
310. fill to DSK 4 fill buses DSK 1 source to DSK 4 source buses M E 1 Key 1 fill to Key 4 fill buses M E 2 Key 1 fill to Key 4 fill buses M E 3 key 1 fill to M E 3 key 4 fill buses M E 1 Key 1 source to Key 4 source buses e M E 2 Key 1 source to Key 4 source buses e M E 3 key 1 source to M E 3 key 4 source buses M E 1 external DME bus M E 2 external DME bus M E 3 external DME bus P P external DME bus DME UTILITVI and DME UTILITY2 buses CCR color corrector 1 and 2 buses Selected source name displays These show the name of the currently selected signal source on the bus corresponding to the delegation button DEST destination button Press this button turning it on to display the names of buses allocated to the delegation buttons in the selection source name displays In the case of a module without selected source name displays this button is invalid Selected bus display This shows the name of the bus selected by the auxiliary bus delegation buttons Cross point buttons The cross points in the auxiliary bus control block are arranged in two rows an upper row 1st row and a lower row 2nd row and are allocated to the buses selected with the AUX delegation buttons The 1st row contains the cross point buttons for unshifted buses and the 2nd row contains the cross point buttons for shifted buses When the DME 1V K to 8V K buses are selected with the AUX delegation buttons the Ist row cross po
311. frame memory source bus 1 the key signal assigned to it is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 You can also use the signal automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 as akey signal when processing keyframe memory 1 To change the pair mode or operation mode use the Frame Memory menu Frame memory folders Still images and clips can be managed in a maximum of twelve groups Such a group is called a frame memory folder Folders can be added or deleted and can be given a name of up to 8 characters e This function is not supported on the MVS 8000 e When the system is powered off the folder names are deleted The folder names need to be saved on media e The following names cannot be used for folders Flash1 Flash2 CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COMA COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPTI LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 A folder named Default is provided and this folder cannot be renamed or deleted e Still images and clips in different frame memory folders cannot have the same name Frame Memory Still Image File Functions The frame memory functions provides the following still image file functions e Freezing an input image e Saving a still image e Recalling a still image e Processing an image e Image output e Continuously capturing images record e Recalling a continuous sequence of images animation Capturing an input image freeze As
312. frame point for which the action is set an action command is output to the external device through the 9 pin serial port assigned to the VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR Recalling disk recorder Extended VTR files Material held on a disk recorder Extended VTR is managed in units of files You can recall a file to play it back In the case of an Extended VTR the register number is recalled Accessing the file list Before playback and suchlike operations on a disk recorder Extended VTR it is first necessary to display a list of the disk recorder files on the DCU The file list includes the following information e File name e Date of last update e Duration of recorded material To recall the file list use the Device menu 1 Not displayed in the case of an Extended VTR Recalling a file In the recalled list of files select the file you want to play back and open the file File list sharing You can connect multiple DCU serial ports to a single disk recorder Extended VTR You can share the recalled list of files between serial ports connected to the same disk recorder Extended VTR For settings relating to file list sharing see Serial Port Settings Serial Port Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 External Devices 163 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 164 File creation To record a new file on the disk recorder use the Device menu to create a new file In the
313. frames or timecode units e S Bus Name Link Copy the S Bus description name to the source name e Effect For keyframe effects you can make the following settings See Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects Volume 2 Recall mode Automatically turning off the EDIT ENBL button when an effect is recalled Automatic insertion of a first keyframe when an empty register is recalled Effect Auto Save Default KF Duration Setting whether or not to replay the first keyframe after rewinding a GPI P Bus disk recorder VTR Extended VTR Macro effect Setup 197 suonouny 0008 SAW L dojdeuD SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Source Dest Name For the Source Dest source destination names used by the system select one of the following Source name set by cross point assignment or fixed bus name Description name set on routing switcher Type Num name set on routing switcher Names assigned with Xpt Assign can be replaced later with description names Name Display Specify the number of characters for display of the names selected in Source Dest Name above as two characters four characters or Auto Flexi Pad Carry out Flexi Pad settings Specify the delegation selection coupling and display mode for the LCD buttons You can also make menu settings for wipe snapshots Custom Button Set the following button operation modes ALL button for next transition selection AUTO TRANS TAKE
314. function see page 383 Using the plane function In an additive mix since no key is applied to the foreground any variations in the typically blue background may appear in the composite image To avoid this a particular luminance level can be set for the blue background and regions of lower luminance forcibly cut 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Plane on 2 Adjust the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance level 0 00 to 100 00 Chroma Key Adjustments There are two ways of making chroma key adjustments automatically using the auto chroma key function or manually making individual adjustments such as color cancel adjustments and window adjustments Making auto chroma key adjustments Auto chroma key is an automatic adjustment function which allows you to specify a part of the foreground video for example the blue background color and use it as a reference for creating the chroma key image 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF1 Type then select Chroma in the lt Key Type gt group 2 Select Chroma Adjust The Chroma Adjust menu appears 3 Select Sample Mark in the lt Auto gt group The foreground video only appears on the monitor with a white box shaped sample selector 4 Adjust the position and size of the sample selector to specify the color to be used as the basis of chroma keying typically a blue background
315. g This is the character string being input in the keyboard window Close button This closes the keyboard window BS button This clears the character immediately before the cursor in the input string Caps Lock button This enables input of capital letters only You can enter items to be displayed on the control panel LCD using lowercase letters but these will be converted to capitals for display 331 Basic Menu Operations jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ JSUEH JO4JUOD pue snua Z 13 deyo 332 MS DOS does not distinguish case in filenames and therefore you are recommended to enter filenames in capital letters Shift button This selects the characters on the shift side of the keys The shift is released when you enter a character Space button This enters a space character Clear button This clears all of the characters in the input string Del button This clears the character immediately after the cursor in the input string Function of the top menu window O Left button This moves the cursor one character to the left in the input string QD Right button This moves the cursor one character to the right in the input string D Enter button This sets the input string as a parameter value and closes the keyboard window if the value has been entered correctly If the value has not been entered correctly the display color changes Line feed button After pressing t
316. g a DME for wipe pattern position setting and for VTR disk recorder frame memory clip operation MENU button Region selection buttons Trackball Operating buttons Z ring Region selection buttons The operation mode allocated to the device control block depends on the selection state of the region selection buttons When the M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and When the DME 1 to DME 8 buttons are selected This enables the three dimensional transform operation mode in the device control block Press a button turning it on to select a P P buttons are selected This enables the wipe pattern position setting positioner operation mode in the device control block You can select multiple buttons simultaneously When the USER button is selected This enables pattern position setting used for color backgrounds DME channel You can select multiple buttons simultaneously The number of valid buttons depends on the number of DME processor channels installed When the DEV button is selected This enables the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode in the device Names and Functions of Parts of the Con
317. ge 198 e DME setup DME Settings particular to the DME processor see page 202 e DCU setup DCU DCU input and output settings see page 202 e Router tally setup Router Tally Router interface and tally settings see page 203 System Setup The system setup settings apply to the whole system Here the whole system refers to all devices connected on the Control LAN The DCU is connected through the control panel but is also included in the whole system You can make the following settings Network configuration Network Config This provides automatic configuration of all devices connected to the Data LAN excluding the DCU and displays a list of them System configuration System Config Specify the overall system operation mode and the hierarchical relationship of the devices Setup 187 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Operation mode setting e Single Proc mode The control panel controls a single switcher and up to two DMEs e Single Simul mode See Special system setting Single Processor Simul mode page 188 e Dual Simul mode The control panel controls two switchers and DMEs simultaneously Device hierarchical relationship setting e Panel Assign Specify the switcher controlled by a control panel e Switcher Assign Specify the DME connected to a switcher Special system setting Single Processor Simul mode When using a combination of a 4M
318. ge 498 or mask settings see page 499 for application to the selected signal In the state in which you want to freeze press one of the following in the lt Freeze gt group to write the freeze image to temporary memory Frame Freeze one frame Field Freeze one field Off Release the freeze and delete the recorded freeze image After carrying out the freeze to return to the state immediately before the freeze press Undo in the lt Freeze gt group All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system is powered off If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the freeze images written to temporary memory all the freeze images in temporary memory are lost unless the auto store function has been enabled in setup With the auto store function enabled the freeze images written to temporary memory are saved automatically when the frame memory selection is changed For the following signal formats a field freeze is not possible 1080PsF 23 976 1080PsF 24 1080PsF 25 1080PsF 29 97 720P 50 720P 59 94 Still Image Operations 497 Kowa ewes 7 J9JdEUQ Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo Saving a freeze image To save a captured still image in a file use the following procedure in the Still gt Freeze Store menu 1 2 Press Store The keyboard window see page 331 appears In the keyboard window enter the file name maximum 8 characters The following names ca
319. ge Matte gt group select Mix Color turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Softness of pattern edge 0 00 to 100 00 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 243 a The patterns are the same as standard wipes For details see Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 560 To select the pattern display the Mix Pattern Select menu by pressing Mix Pattern in the edge fill Matte Adjust menu After selecting one of the patterns standard wipe patterns to 24 displayed in the Mix Pattern Select menu you can adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Softness of pattern edge 0 00 to 100 00 4 Adjust color 1 and color 2 Key Setting Operations Using Menus To adjust color 1 press Color 1 and to adjust color 2 press Color 2 turning it on respectively and adjust the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 If required set the pattern modifiers e When turning Position on and setting the pattern position Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical pos
320. ge data saved in memory is lost when the system is powered off using an external hard disk drive allows required data to be preserved This function is only available on an MVS 8000A 8000G system Only one hard disk drive can be connected to a single switcher processor While the hard disk is being accessed frame memory operations are not possible During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the target FM selection buttons see page 514 frame memory operations may not be performed properly Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip playback Consult your Sony service representative or sales representative about the hard disk drives that can be connected Selecting the switcher When the system is operating in Dual Simul mode select the switcher on which to carry out formatting file saving and file recall operations For details of Dual Simul mode see System configuration System Config page 187 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF6 External HDD and HF1 Format or HF2 Backup Restore The Format menu or Backup Restore menu appears 2 In the region selection area see page 323 press SWR A popup window for selecting the switcher appears 3 Press SWR1 or SWR2 to select the switcher The button for the selected switcher lights You can select two switchers simultaneously In this case the last operated button lights green and the other lights amber T
321. ge with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions The image at the transition start point and end point also moves The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following First transition Transition start completion point Transition end A ili ae Image created by interpolation Effect execution A Background A B Background B l At the first transition completion point if you move the image with the positioner the transition appears as in the following figure First transition Transition start completion point Transition end i by interpolation Effect execution Background A Background B B State before modification Signals forming part of the background for a DME wipe For a two channel mode page turn page roll brick frame in out and so on the part of the pattern shown in gray see Appendix Volume 2 is filled with the signal selected on the DME external video bus For three channel mode brick the part of the pattern shown in dark gray is filled with the DME external video signal and the light gray portion with the signal selected as follows For a DME dedicated interface When the DME channel used is 3 or 4 the signal selected on the DME utility 1 bus For channel 7 or 8 the signal selected on the DME utility 2 bus For an MVE 8000A or MVE 9000 SDI interface Signal selected on the AUX bus assigned in the Engineering Se
322. ghts red and otherwise lights amber TAKE buttons These correspond to downstream keys 1 2 3 and 4 from left to right press to execute an auto transition The transition starts immediately and the button lights amber When the transition completes the button goes off Fader lever Move this to carry out a manual downstream key transition Transition indicator This comprises multiple LEDs which show the progress of the downstream key transition Key snapshot setting buttons K SS key snapshot This enables key snapshot mode K SS STORE Key snapshot store To save a key snapshot hold down this button and press the key source name display key snapshot button for the register you want to save UNDO Key snapshot recall undo This undoes the last key snapshot recall Key source name display key snapshot buttons These display the selected source name for each corresponding keyer In snapshot mode they correspond to registers 1 to 4 of the selected keyer and pressing the button saves or recalls a key snapshot Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 307 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeueg JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JaJdEUQ 308 Downstream Key Fade to Black Control Block D Key source name display key snapshot buttons B K SS button FTB button Independent key transition Key delegation l A Key 9 execution section buttons
323. gn SIDE FLAG to the rightmost cross point buttons For more details see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Wipe Action on Images With Side Flags When a wipe is carried out on an image with side flags all wipe patterns can be used The following illustration shows the action in a wipe Side Flags 103 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo suoljounj 0008 SAW 4a deu9 104 Wipe from a 4 3 image to a 16 9 image Side flag areas 16 9 image 4 3 image Side flags on Wipe from a 4 3 image to another 4 3 image when side flags are on for both images Side flag areas Side flag areas i O 4 3 image Side flags on The circles indicate the position of the wipe pattern edge when the transition is half finished DME Wipe Action for an Image With Side Flags When a DME wipe is carried out on an image with side flags all wipe patterns can be used Depending on the setting On Off of Auto Crop in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu the appearance of the 4 3 image changes e When using the MVE 9000 MVE 8000A through SDI interface with Auto Crop being off side flags are not added to the new image during DME wipe For signals with the following DME wipe pattern selected on the DME external video bus gray part shown in the pattern illustration side flags are not applied when auto side flags are set to Off Two channel page tu
324. gnal to each button using the Setup menu This assignment is common to the cross point buttons in the M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST banks and the auxiliary bus Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 258 control block According to the settings made in the menu the video and key signals are assigned to the cross point buttons in pairs You can also make separate signal assignments for each operating control block Visual indications on cross point buttons The currently selected button in a row i e the last button pressed lights amber or red Amber low tally The signal selected on the bus does not form part of the program output from the switcher Red high tally The signal selected on the bus forms part of the program output from the switcher XPT cross point HOLD buttons Turning one of these buttons on enables you to recall a keyframe or snapshot while keeping the current cross point selection unchanged When the XPT HOLD button in the key 1 or key 2 row is on then the operation is as follows depending on the setting in the Setup menu When the panel setup is Normal The operation is as follows depending on the setting in switcher setup Key Disable The snapshot or keyframe is recalled without changing the current key settings Key Disable with Status The snapshot or key frame
325. group 1154 Edge Direction Split in lt Edge gt group 1 Split No 1154 1 Edge Direction gt Mix Color in lt Edge Matte gt 3 Pattern Matte Adjust group Multi 3 Invert Type 1155 Main Modify H and V in lt Pairing gt group 1 Width H V and Fringe in 4 Shape lt Modulation gt group 1164 Edge Direction Independent Trans Rate in 1 Transition lt Pattern Limit Release gt group Rate 1171 Transition Mix Nam Super Mix 1 Transition Preset Color Mix Wipe DME Rate Wipe and FTB in lt Transition Type gt group a The menu numbers shown by way of example are those for M E 1 the same applies for M E 2 M E 3 and P P Also content applying to Key1 applies equally to Key2 Key3 and Key4 Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall Menu number Menu name Button name Knob 1111 12 Type gt CRK Adjust Sample Mark in the lt Auto gt group 11 1112 1 2 Edge gt Matte Position i Adjust 11132 Main Mask Position 1116 1 2 Transition gt Wipe Position Adjust Parameter Position H Position V Basic Menu Operations Knob parameters subject to restriction on default recall Menu number Menu name Button name Knob __ Parameter 1116 32 Transition gt DME Position 1 H Wipe Adjust 2 V 1154 1 2 Edge Direction Position 1 Position H gt Matte Adjust 2 Position V 1155 Main Modify Position in
326. group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select FRAME I O Notes on Frame in out H one channel mode Create a minimum of three keyframe points Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen As the state after completion of the first transition move the image horizontally to make it visible within the screen At this time press the PAUSE button in the keyframe control block turning it on to set a pause for the keyframe For the last keyframe move the image horizontally to place it outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that the image is not visible within the screen In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select FRAME I O H Notes on frame in out V one channel mode Create a minimum of three keyframe points Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen As the state after completion of the first transition move the image vertically to make it visible within the screen At this time press the PAUSE button in the keyframe control block turning it on to set a pause for the keyframe For the last keyframe move the image vertically to place it outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that the image is not visible within the screen In the lt Transition Mode gt grou
327. gs this changes the settings on the other channels by the same amount In 16 9 mode to crop to 4 3 aspect ratio In the lt Crop Mode gt group press 4 3 turning it on To set the action when a DME wipe crop transition is executed 1 2 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings For a pattern in one channel mode in the lt Ch Select gt group press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channels You can select more than one channel at the same time 3 In the lt Crop Mode gt group press Crop or 4 3 Crop to crop from 16 9 to 4 3 aspect ratio turning it on 4 In the lt Crop Mode gt group press Remove From Begin The Remove From Begin menu appears 5 In the lt Crop Transition gt group select the execution mode for the DME wipe crop transition Cut Cut mode The cropping does not change during the transition but at the end point of the transition the cropping is removed enlarges Last 5 The cropping is maintained for the first 95 of the transition and is progressively removed during the last 5 of the transition enlarges Linear The cropping is removed linearly through the whole course of the transition enlarges T
328. h function button corresponds to a function which can be set in the currently selected menu Press it to enable the function to display a parameter group and adjust the parameters with the knobs or to execute the function These buttons are in groups by function In the screen example shown on the previous page the Key Bus and Matte function buttons constitute the lt Key Fill gt group Parameter group button This displays parameter group names for which the knobs can make adjustments the current parameter setting page number and the total number of the parameter setting pages Example Color Vector 1 2 When there are more than five parameters within the same parameter group press this button to display the sixth and subsequent parameters which can then be controlled by the knobs Knob parameter buttons These show the parameters currently controlled by the knobs and their values Pressing one of these buttons displays the numeric keypad window see page 330 and you can then enter a new value for the corresponding parameter with the numeric keypad Previous page button This shows the page number of the previously displayed menu screen Press it to go back to that page When the indication Parent appears this displays the parent directory O Keyframe status This shows the keyframe status of the reference region Pressing this button switches the menu screen as follows When a menu other than th
329. hange the pattern selected in step 2 here After selecting one of the patterns standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 displayed in the Pattern Select menu you can adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 Still Image Operations 4 When you selected a pattern key or external key if required press Key Invert in the Still gt Composite menu to invert the key Image Output There are two functions related to image output the reposition function for moving the output image and the lock function for fixing the output image For an overview of the image output see page 90 Moving the output image reposition function 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF3 Reposition Lock and HF1 Reposition The Reposition menu appears In this menu you can also enable the V K mode see page 496 2 In the frame memory selection area select the FM output See page 495 3 In the lt Reposition gt group select the movement mode see page 90 Normal Move in normal mode Black amp White Move in black amp white mode 4 With the knobs adjust the parameters to move the image Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Move in horizontal direction 990 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Move in vertical direction 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 65 The surrou
330. hanging the value of a parameter for one pattern changes the value of the parameter for the other pattern to maintain the same difference between the two When carrying out a wipe transition using a pattern mix it is recommended that you set the modifier link function to FULL LINK mode If the link function is off or SEMI LINK mode is selected the desired effect may not be obtained at the start or end of the transition Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers You can carry out a wipe with the following variations and modifications to the selected pattern For details see Setting Wipe Modifiers page 443 Wipes 63 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Direction You can specify the direction of the wipe the regular direction is referred to as normal and the other direction as reverse You can also select alternating directions each time the transition is completed normal reverse mode NA O N Normal NO 7 ZON Reverse Split This splits the pattern making the parts of the wipe move in opposite directions Split off is Split on The parameter Split No specifies the number of splits The parameter Spacing specifies the spacing between adjacent patterns 64 Wipes Edge You can apply a border to the pattern soften the edges or soften the applied border In an independent key tra
331. hat the rate of change is maximum midway between two keyframes PF Spline The effect follows a smooth curved path from each keyframe to the next Path types for Hue There are four types as follows Keyframes 179 Item Paths that can be set Light Overall path settings for lighting items are Light All made simultaneously Lighting Path for lighting Spot Lighting Path for spotlighting 4 Trail Path for trails In Out Overall path settings for items relating to input In Out All output are made simultaneously Bkgd Path for background Video Key Path for video key suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 180 CW The hue changes in a clockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope CCW The hue changes in a counterclockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope Short The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is shorter Long The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is longer Path types for Xpt There are two types as follows Xpt Hold off When replaying a keyframe change the inputs to the settings saved in memory Xpt Hold on When replaying a keyframe do not change the inputs Effect Execution Keyframes By pressing the RUN button in the keyframe control block you can replay the effect as a continuous sequence of images This is referred to as effect execution It is also possible to execute effect
332. he wipe direction NORM normal The wipe proceeds in the direction from black to white as shown on the pattern in the lists of patterns see Wipe Pattern List page 560 and DME Wipe Pattern List page 566 in Appendix Volume 1 or in the direction of the arrow When the VTR disk recorder operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button plays the tape REV reverse The wipe proceeds in the opposite direction to that when the NORM button is pressed When the VTR disk recorder operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button cues the tape automatically to the start point NORM REV normal reverse The wipe direction alternates between normal and reverse every time a transition is executed When the VTR disk recorder operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button stops the tape G TRANS PVW transition preview button When this button is lit you can check in advance the video changes during the transition on the preview output from the M E or PGM PST bank During the preview you can use the fader lever AUTO TRANS button and CUT button One of the following functions of this button can be selected in a Setup menu Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel When the transition completes the system returns to the normal mode The transition preview mode is maintained while this button is pressed Switching is made between the transition preview mode and nor
333. he Backup Restore menu appears If in Dual Simul mode select the switcher to operate see page 532 To get the hard disk drive information Press Refresh Status The Model Name item shows the product information for the hard disk drive and the names of directories within the logical drives 2 Using any of the following methods select a logical drive FMHDD1 to FMHDDS e Press directly on the list to select e Press a button in the lt Partition gt group e Turn the knob Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Partition Logical drive selection 1t05 3 Press Backup A popup window for confirming file saving appears When you save the files all of the saved files in the logical drive is erased immediately before the saving operations 4 Press Yes This starts the file saving operation If there is no directory in the logical drive a directory is automatically created and the files are saved within it A progress bar and numerical indication appear to show the progress of the operation When the operation is completed a popup window reading Completed appears 5 Press OK To rename a directory Select a directory in the list and in the button area press Rename In the keyboard window that appears enter the new directory name and press Enter The name of a directory is limited to eight characters The following names cannot be used External Hard Disk Drive Access
334. he Control Panel Mode selection buttons Display ooog D Numeric keypad Function selection buttons B Region selection buttons Mode selection buttons EFF effect Press to save or recall an effect SNAPSHOT Press to save or recall a snapshot SHOTBOX Press to save or recall a shotbox MCRO macro Press to save recall or edit a macro TRANS RATE transition rate Press to set the transition rate Hold down this button and press one of the key delegation buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 in the transition control block to set an independent key transition rate Region selection buttons These select the functional block region of the control panel to which operations apply You can select more than one region at the same time The first button you press is taken as the reference region and lights green while the next pressed button lights amber With the exception of the MASTER and ALL buttons you can change the region assignment to the buttons as desired in the Setup menu MASTR Press this turning it on to save region information in a master snapshot register or master timeline register or to recall such region information Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 285 jaued
335. he Misc gt Transition menu depends on the selection in the lt Key Transition gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Transition menu for each of the M E and PGM PST banks When Same On direction and Off direction settings the same is selected in the lt Key Transition gt group Only Key or DSK in the PGM PST bank appears When Independ On direction and Off direction settings independent is selected in the lt Key Transition gt group Key On and Key Off each appear In the case of the PGM PST bank DSK On and DSK Off appear For more details see Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Setting the transition rate in the Transition menu For example to make the settings for the M E 1 bank use the following procedure To set the M E transition rate 1 In the lt M E 1 Transition Rate gt group of the Misc gt Transition menu press Transition 2 Turn the knob to set the number of frames Misc Menu Operations 553 O19 Nua OSIN OL JojdeuQ 913 nue OSIN OL Jejdeuo 554 Knob _ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Rate Transition rate 0 to 999 frames When a clip transition is selected as the transition type it is not possible to change the transition rate in this menu To set the independent key transition rate 1 In the lt M E 1 Transition Rate gt group of
336. he Shift button press this button to feed a line The input string shows af ME ME 1 2 FRAME COLOR MEM BKGD COPY SWAP STATS Top menu selection buttons Shut down button Add Favorite button B Numeric entry section Clear button Clear Basic Menu Operations Q Top menu selection buttons These are the same as the top menu selection buttons in the menu control block Pressing one of these buttons closes the top menu window and displays the selected menu in the menu display Input display This shows the page number entered with the numeric entry section Numeric entry section Enter a page number Clear button Press this to clear the input display Enter button Pressing this button without entering a page number closes the top menu window with the current menu remaining in the menu display If you enter a page number then press this button this confirms the value in the input display If it is a correct page number the top menu window closes and the menu display shows the new menu If it is not correctly set the input display changes color Close button Press this to close the top menu window Shut down button Shuts down the menus Be sure to shut down the menus before powering off the control panel Use of the color palette window When a parameter is assigned to the knobs as a combination of luminance saturation Shutting down the menus
337. he currently selected key Lit amber Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently selected key Off DME is not assigned To select a DME being used by another keyer Press Override turning it on then select the DME channel The later selection is valid and the button lights green Using two or three DME channels on one keyer When using the DME dedicated interface proceed as follows Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 415 sfog vp saydeyo skey p 13 dey9 416 1 2 Select the DME for the first channel see the previous item Assigning a DME to a key then select the successive channel for the second channel For the third channel select the channel after that To select the video signal for the second channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal in the Key1 row DME external video bus To select the video signal for the third channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and carry out the following operation e If the selected DME is channel 3 or channel 4 turn off the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 2 row DME utility 1 bus e Ifthe selected DME is channel 7 or channel 8 turn on the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 4 row DME utility 2 bus Using four DME channels on one keyer When using the DME dedicated interface procee
338. he effect duration Keyframe duration This is the time from the keyframe to the next keyframe You can set this time in the keyframe control block See Time Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2 In constant duration mode see page 170 it is not possible to change the keyframe duration setting Effect duration This is the total execution time of the effect from the first keyframe to the last You can set this time in the keyframe control block See Time Settings in Chapter 13 Volume 2 When you change the effect duration the keyframe duration for each keyframe in the effect is automatically recalculated proportionally Keyframe duration Keyframe number 1 alla 2 3 4 5 Le Effect duraton gt Schematic view of keyframe duration and effect duration Keyframes 171 suonouny 0008 SAN 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 172 The effect duration may also be changed by inserting or deleting keyframes Changes in the effect duration caused by inserting a keyframe Keyframes e When the effect is stopped on a keyframe inserting a keyframe increases the effect duration by the duration of the inserted keyframe e When the effect is stopped between two keyframes inserting a keyframe does not change the effect duration In constant duration mode see page 170 the duration of the current keyframe is reduced to zero and the new keyframe is inserted with
339. he first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half with the new video maintained at 100 output This transition type is not available for an independent key transition Super mix In this dissolve the current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half with the new video maintained at 100 output Note that you can set the output levels of the current and new video signals at the mid point of the transition in the range 0 to 100 See Super Mix Settings page 349 This transition type is not available for an independent key transition Preset color mix Transitions This is a two stage dissolve comprising two transitions the first a dissolve to a color matte and the second from the color matte to the new video In the first transition the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix dissolve then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix dissolve You can specify the color matte by luminance saturation and hue values See Color Matte Settings page 350 Also in place of a color matte you can use an image selected on the utility 2 bus e This transition type is not
340. he knobs to scroll the thumbnail display of the files Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Scroll Thumbnail display 1 and upwards scrolling Select the thumbnail of the files to be used for the keyframe If necessary turn the knob to check the animation effect in the thumbnail display Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Viewer Animate thumbnail display 00 00 00 and upwards of files Still Image Operations 8 Using the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block select one of the regions Userl to User8 to which the frame memory output signals have been assigned 9 Carry out either of the following e To clear the effect register selected in step 4 and create a new effect press Create Key Frame e To add to the end of the effect register selected in step 4 press Append Key Frame A confirmation message for creating the effect appears If there is an inappropriate condition for creating the effect an error message appears For details of error messages see Error Messages in the Appendix Volume 2 1 Opress OK This creates the effect in the selected user region register To cancel creating the effect Press Cancel The effect is built with the selected files in increasing order of the last three characters of the file name If you do not want to include some of these files in the effect first delete or rename them e A
341. he menu shows the information for the switcher lit green External Hard Disk Drive Access 4 Press OK Hard Disk Formatting When you connect a hard disk drive for the first time it is necessary to format the hard disk This partitions the disk creating five logical drives FMHDD1 to FMHDDS 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF6 External HDD and HF1 Format The Format menu appears If in Dual Simul mode select the switcher to operate see page 532 To get the hard disk drive information In the button area press Refresh Status The Model Name item shows the product information for the hard disk drive 2 Press Format A popup window for confirming formatting appears Carrying out formatting erases any existing data on the hard disk 3 Press Yes This starts the hard disk formatting A progress bar and numerical indication appear to show the progress of the operation When the operation is completed a popup window reading Success appears 4 Press OK Saving Files You can save all of the files from frame memory to the external hard disk drive Before carrying out this operation for the first time it is necessary to format the hard disk see previous item Hard Disk Formatting External Hard Disk Drive Access 533 Kowa ewes 7 J9JdEUQ Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo 534 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF6 External HDD and HF2 Backup Restore T
342. he register holding the effect then make the changes When you have finished creating or editing the effect save it in the recalled register or another specified register Auto save function When you recall an effect the currently recalled effect is automatically saved in aregister This is called the auto save function You can disable this function in a Setup menu Effect Attributes An individual effect may also have attached special conditions relating to switcher or DME operation when the effect is recalled These conditions are called attributes of the effect and can be added when the keyframe effect is saved or recalled Type of attribute The attribute that can be attached to an effect is as follows Effect dissolve The transition from the state before the effect recall to the state at the effect start point is carried out smoothly by a dissolve The dissolve duration can be set in the Effect menu Temporary attributes When a keyframe is recalled independently of the attributes held in the register you can also enable or disable temporary attributes These temporary attributes are set when the keyframe effect is recalled Effect Editing For editing operations such as to insert delete or modify a keyframe it is necessary to stop the effect at the corresponding point on the time axis This is termed an edit point Keyframes suonouny 0008 SAW 4e deyo 169 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 1
343. he setting value range is 0 to 4 When Outline is selected with separate edge on the MORE button lights amber Pressing the MORE button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the key fill density parameter with a knob Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block Knob Parameter Density Adjustment Outline density Setting values 0 to 100 Setting the embossing parameters When the EMBOS button is lit green adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Setting values 1 Width 0 to4 2 Position 359 to 0 4 Density 0 to 100 Selecting a normal edge When all five edge type selection buttons are off a normal edge is selected If one of the buttons is lit press it turning it off Softening the edge Press the SOFT EDGE button turning it on The button lights green and you can now adjust the softness with the knob Knob Parameter 1 Soft Adjustment Edge softness Setting values 0 to 100 e For anormal edge when SOFT EDGE is enabled Key Drop mode turns on e When a luminance key or linear key is selected as the key type and clean mode is enabled enabling SOFT EDGE ends the clean mode Applying the zabton effects When the ZABTN button is lit green adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 2 Soft Pattern edge softness 0 to 1
344. hem Macros 221 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Menu Macros The term menu macro refers to the function whereby a sequence of menu operations is saved as data in memory so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations For more details of menu macros see Menu Macros in Chapter 18 Volume 2 Menu macro registers The area of memory that holds a menu macro is termed a menu macro register For each control panel there are 99 menu macro registers numbered 1 to 99 You can manipulate these in the menu macro register menu Menu macro events The events that can be recorded in a menu macro are operations carried out in a menu For menu operations which are not recorded in menu macros see the appendix Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro Volume 2 Menu macro creation and editing Carry out menu macro creation and editing in the menu Executing menu macros You execute a menu macro after recalling a menu macro register You can recall and execute simultaneously You can also recall and execute a menu macro from a macro recalled on the control panel 222 Macros Color Corrector The color corrector enables video signal color correction black balance white balance adjustment gamma correction knee correction etc To use the color corrector function on the MVS 8000 8000A requires the MKS 842
345. hen select VFI Enable and HF3 Side Flags The Misc gt Enable gt Side Flags menu appears The status area shows the buttons for Bkgd A and Bkgd B for each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST P P banks 2 In the lt M E 1 Side Flags gt group press Bkgd B Each time you press the button toggles between Enable and Disable Misc Menu Operations To display a menu for the aspect ratio 4 3 auto side flags and auto crop settings In the Misc gt Enable gt Side Flags menu press Setup gt SWER gt Side Flags To display a menu for assigning the side flags on off function to a cross point button In the Misc gt Enable gt Side Flags menu press Side Flags Button Assign Enabling and disabling side flags with a button operation For example to enable side flags for the background B row of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 First in the Setup menu assign the rightmost cross point button to the SIDE FLAG button For details of the assignment operation see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Press the SIDE FLAG button at the right end of the background B row of the M E 1 bank The button you pressed lights amber and this enables the side flags e The operations of enabling or disabling the side flags by menu operation and by control panel button operation are linked e When the auto side flags are on selecting a 4 3 video material automatically lights the S
346. hen this is pressed turning it on a translucent pattern is inserted behind the key With the knobs you can adjust the color size density and softness parameters SOFT EDGE Soften the edge of the key MORE button When there are more than four parameters this button lights amber When it is pressed it changes from amber to green and the fifth and subsequent parameters are assigned to the knobs allowing them to be adjusted SHOW KEY button While this button is held down a key processed key source signal is output from the specified output port You can make the output specification independently for each of edit preview and the preview of each M E or PGM PST bank in a Setup menu Knobs Turn the knobs to adjust the parameter values Displays Each display shows the initial letters of the parameter name and the parameter value maximum three digits including a minus sign for a negative value DME channel selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to delegate a DME channel to the keyer The number of valid DME channel selection buttons depends on the number of channels installed in the DME processor A maximum of four consecutively numbered DME channels from the two sets DME 1 to 4 and DME 5 to 8 can be assigned to one kever A DME channel assigned to a kever cannot be selected on another kever However using the override function it is possible to allocate a channel already alloca
347. hese two modes For an overview of the auto transitions and manual transitions see Executing a Transition page 44 Transition Indicator Function In each of the M E banks and PGM PST bank to the left of the fader lever is a transition indicator composed of multiple LEDs This indicator shows the state of the transition whether auto or manual by which LEDs are lit Lit Transition indicator For example in the previous illustration it can be seen that the transition is more than half completed When the transition is completed all of the LEDs go off Executing a Transition 351 SUOMSUBIL g 19 JdEU SUOIISUBIL g 19JdEUQ Setting the Transition Rate There are two wavs of setting the transition rate using the Flexi Pad control block or numeric kevpad control block to enter a numeric value or using the Misc menu to access the Transition menu for the M E or PGM PST bank You can also display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate for each of the M E and PGM PST banks and change the settings See Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings page 553 When a clip transition is selected as the transition type it is not possible to set the transition rate Frame input mode and timecode input mode For numeric input of the transition rate value there are two modes frame input mode and t
348. his masks out a part of the background which will result in the key fill appearing Key mask Background mask Main mask and subsidiary sub mask Each keyer allows two masks to be used simultaneously and these are referred to as the main mask and the sub mask The signal that determines the mask shape and size is termed the mask source and different sources are used for the main mask and sub mask Main mask This uses the signal from the dedicated box generator provided on each keyer or the signal from the dedicated pattern generator as the mask source When the box generator is selected a rectangular mask is formed You can adjust the positions of the four sides of the box separately When the pattern generator is selected you can select the pattern and apply modifiers Sub mask This uses the wipe generator signal or the signal selected on the utility 1 bus as the mask source When the wipe generator is selected the patterns and the pattern modifiers are the same as in a wipe transition Key Memory Keys The key memory function allows the keyer settings on each cross point button to be automatically stored so that the next time the same cross point button is selected these settings are recalled automatically There are two modes for key memory simple mode and full mode The parameters stored in each mode are as follows Simple mode key type clean mode including the plane setting for chroma keying key p
349. i a i 160 VTR Disk Recorder Extended VTR Control Lee 161 Regions and Registers ssessnsenesnnsnnnsnnoennnnnosnnennoeneennsennennoennennoensoenenz 165 RES10DS is a E eee AG eu A eee 165 Registers cds aes ches a Hans Sia Seat Bete Neve oes eee thet ee ages 166 l ATA B e tas E Eros E nET SSE noD S oSA SDESSE ERES 168 Effects oeeie eie edt OEA A A Ee EA E E estes A OAE 168 Saving and Recalling Effects Leone 169 Effect Atte DUtes s areenaa u ee sieb has coves ps aa Ag est R 169 Effect Editin cerina anani ei ae aE 169 Time Seting Sha ororen Ni tad deaths o a a E E aden 171 Paths essnee a a EREE di e FT ob 174 Effect Execution merin ie b da A a bj 180 Master Timelines ena e Seebonca RE E as 181 EIDET I TIT 182 Snapshot TVpES issir ada Se ba b aid 182 Snapshot Attributes 31302558 si iet ie eee re fb i seitse isane 183 UE i EAT T ae sest 185 SHOCD OK AE AREON ETE EA ETEA 186 Setup Ovetview OL Setup aer o E R E ERRE RRE 187 System Setup eerror rae aid AS raS E AER 187 Saving and Recalling Setup Data ss e ennennennnenn 194 Panel SetuP naea a E E N i 195 SWitcher Settur 198 DME Setup arira eae Mine a te 202 Setup Relating to DCU Input Output ena 202 Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface 203 Simple Connection to MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel ODOM aa heeds ee e t a ashe a aa ba ada 204 Files E E A EA E E EE E nemes oneea 205 IE Tul l IP 210 OVERVIEW ins f Kok na A a d a
350. ice or sales representative e When the signal is switched with a snapshot keyframe and so on the audio mixer is not linked e When bus fixed mode is selected in setup see page 45 the audio mixer program output is linked to the bus output as the background Signal Name Display You can attach a name source name to each signal assigned to a cross point button with a maximum of 16 characters e The source name displays in the cross point control block and auxiliary bus control block show the source names of the video signals assigned to numbers to 31 e To display the source names for numbers 32 to 62 press the SHIFT button to the right of the source name displays e To display the source names of the key signals assigned to buttons hold down the SPLIT button in the key control block or the KEY button in the auxiliary bus control block Colors of lit cross point buttons In a particular row of cross point buttons only the last pressed button is effective and lights amber or red The amber indicates the low tally state and the red indicates the high tally state to indicate whether or not the selected signal appears in the final output video Significance of colors of lit cross point buttons Color State Significance Amber Low tally Does not appear in final output video Red High tally Appears in final output video Signal Selection 33 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo
351. iew All detailed settings for basic operations such as transitions keys DME or wipes are made in menus There are also menus for carrying out general system control managing setting data and initial setup About the Top Menu List When the control panel is powered on the top menu list appears as shown below You can also display this by selecting VF1 Top Menu List after pressing the HOME button at the upper left in the top menu selection button area of the menu control block To display the top menu In the same way as for the top menu selection buttons in the menu control block press each button to display the particular top menu in the menu display The top menu list button is the same as the default layout of the top menu selection buttons However even if the assignment of the top menu selection buttons is changed this does not affect the top menu list To shut down the menus Press the Shutdown button at the lower right This operation is the same as the shut down operation in the top menu window For details Shutting down the menus page 333 Basic Menu Operations 313 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 314 Accessing Menus You can use any of the following methods to access a menu and the initially displayed menu page depends on the method used Pressing a top menu selection button in the menu control block This displays th
352. ifying the DME wipe pattern edge page 470 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions Resizer DME Wipe Setting e This function is supported by the MVS 8000G e When the screen aspect ratio is 4 3 in HD format when the resizer DME wipe is used to shrink a video image this is applied to the 16 9 screen including the added video on the left and right sides Use the crop function as required to extract the 4 3 image Relation between DME wipes and other effects The following relations hold between a resizer DME wipe and other effects Relation to processed keys It is not possible to select a resizer DME wipe for a key with processed key enabled Relation to resizer It is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe for a key with resizer enabled It is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe for a key forming a pair with a key with the dual resizer effect enabled The key combinations forming pairs are keys and 2 and keys 3 and 4 For example when a dual resizer effect is enabled for key 1 it is not possible to use a resizer DME wipe on key 2 Making resizer DME wipe settings 1 In the lt Pattern Select gt group of the Key DME Wipe Adjust menu press 1ch turning it on The Ich Pattern Select menu appears 2 Select Resizer Slide Squeeze or Resizer Frame I O The patterns of the selected group appear The wipe patterns that can be used for a resizer DME wipe are as follows e Slide pattern numbers 7
353. ignal For each of primary inputs 1 to 80 you can switch video process adjustments on or off and can adjust the parameters Video Gain Y Gain C Gain Hue Delay and Black Level in the Setup menu The adjustments do not however apply to the output video on the MON monitor bus For details of the settings see Signal Input Settings in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus Buses to which the adjustments apply For each of the following buses you can switch video process adjustments on or off and adjust the parameters e Following buses in the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks Key fill buses for keys 1 to 4 Background A and background B buses Utility 1 and utility 2 buses e Frame memory source 1 and frame memory source 2 buses e Aux to 48 buses These settings also apply to keyframes and snapshots Video Process 1 07 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 108 Making the adjustments Adjust VIDEO GAIN Y GAIN BLACK LEVEL C GAIN and HUE DELAY in the following menus Applicable bus Menu used for operation See page M E 1 to M E 3 Key fill buses for keys M E 1 to M E 3 menus page 405 banks 1 to 4 Background A and B Video Process menu page 557 buses Utility 1 and 2 buses PGM PST bank Key fill buses for PGM PST menu page 405 DSKI to DSK4 Background A and B Video Process menu page 557 buses Utility 1 and 2 buse
354. ilar operations menu operations for all settings can be locked Changing the password Setup 193 suonouny 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 194 Saving and Recalling Setup Data Setup menu Setup Define Non volatile memory ROM User setup data Factory default setup data Hard disk memory card User setup data File menu File menu Load Save RAM Current setup data If in Resume mode settings data is saved Initialize In Custom mode power on or reset Setup menu All Clear Setup Concept of saving and recalling setup data Updating the switcher or control panel setup data saves the updated setup data in RAM in each device e In Resume mode see page 192 even if devices are reset or powered off the data is preserved in RAM and recalled when the power is turned back on The Resume mode cannot be used for DMEs and DCUs e In Custom mode see page 192 the user defined settings user setup data saved in non volatile memory or factory default setup data held in ROM in each device is recalled when a reset is made or the power is turned back on See Selecting the start up state Start Up page 192 Note that the setup data in RAM can also be saved to the control panel hard disk or memory card Panel Setup In panel setup you carry out settings particular to the control panel You can make the following s
355. imecode input mode You select one of these modes using either the Flexi Pad control block page 353 or the numeric keypad control block page 354 Frame input mode The entered value is a number of frames Example Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 123 frames Timecode input mode The entered value is a timecode value Example Entering 123 constitutes an entry of 1 second 23 frames Whereas you can enter a value of up to 999 in frame input mode a value not smaller than 10 seconds cannot be entered in timecode input mode Frame display mode and timecode display mode For the transition rate display in the transition control block there are two modes frame display mode and timecode display mode You can select one of these modes in setup See Operation Settings in Chapter 16 Volume 2 The setting is common to all banks of the switcher Frame display mode Values are shown as from 0 to 999 frames In this display mode a value entered in timecode input mode is converted for display as a number of frames Timecode display mode Values are shown as timecode values consisting of seconds and frames In this display mode a value entered in frame input 352 Executing a Transition mode is converted for display as a timecode value If the value consists of four or more digits the last digit is not shown Example A value of 9 seconds 23 frames appears as 9 23 and a value of 10 seconds 1 frame appears as 10 0 S
356. in the following buses The corresponding name also disappears from the source name display e Background A background B e Keys 1 to4 e Utility 1 utility 2 e DME utility 1 DME utility 2 e External DME To inhibit operation of a cross point button Hold down the button which Inhibit Set is assigned and press the cross point button whose operation you want to inhibit The button you pressed flashes amber and this makes the operation inhibited Even when you inhibit operation of a cross point button macro attachment settings are still possible see page 218 To clear a cross point button operation inhibit setting Hold down the button to which Inhibit Set is assigned and press the button whose operation is inhibited flashing amber This clears the operation inhibit setting for the button you pressed To clear all operation inhibit settings Press the button to which Inhibit Set is assigned and the button to which Inhibit All Clear is assigned simultaneously Signal Selection Selection of signals linked with the audio mixer When you select a signal in a switcher bank background A row or AUX bus control block which is set to be linked with the audio mixer the program output of the audio mixer follows the signal selection For details of the setting see Chapter 16 Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign menu Volume 2 e For details of audio mixers that can be connected contact your Sony serv
357. inear key or color vector key you can enable the clean mode When the clean mode is on the key source does not affect the key fill which is added unchanged to the background This improves the keyed image quality but means that the part of the key fill signal which is not to be inserted must be completely black or it will color the background You set the clean mode with the Type menu of the respective keyer See Setting the key type in a menu page 379 Note that in the following situations the clean mode goes off and cannot be turned on When the key type is a pattern key When key inversion is on When the key fill is a matte When the key edge is an outline When the key edge is normal with soft edge being on When fine key is on When the key positioner is on Chroma key A key signal based on a particular color is used to cut out the background and the key fill is then inserted The inserted signal is also referred to as the foreground and the composite image is called a chroma key image Foreground Background Chroma key image Normal mix and additive mix In creating a chroma key image either a normal mix or an additive mix can be used To select which use the Type gt Chroma Adjust menu for the keyer See Chroma Key Composition page 381 Keys suonouny 0008 SAW 4a deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 50 Keys Normal mix The foreground is cut out with the key sign
358. ing Operations With the Key Control Block s00s000 8 406 Operations in the Key Control Block m eeseeseeeeereeeeeeseeee 406 Key Edse Modifications teea Aa A A SA 410 Mao IRON earnest eS 414 Appin DME B iet i OAL Rey e 415 OthemMeysSetuine Operation ees terete E 417 TIRES samnmamnzanmntansanzznnameannimrtia tarax nibni 419 Two Dimensional Transformations of Keys LL 419 Resizer Interpolation Settings eee ses eecee esses e ee e a reese 424 Resizem rop Border Settin p Sie eneee e ae E E E 424 HNTOYOIN AINE RAES VAS E bl tie e A A E 427 Kee ysSmapShOtsisscsccasccessessecssvessescectesssoseserecateatsoncsscsnnesesseascesscatsosssacssssnssases 433 Keyes napshote peratl on Speers sence ee ee eee eee eee cee ee S 433 Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module 435 skey p 13 dey9 378 Key Setting Operations Using Menus There are two ways of making key settings either using menus or using the key control block This section describes basic procedures for making key settings using the menus taking the M E 1 gt Key1 menu as an example Operations in the Key menus are the same for all banks M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST For details of the method of using the key control block see Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block page 406 Key Setting Menus The key setting menus for each bank M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST are as follows Bank Keys set Menus
359. ing of the top of the image 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Cropping of the left of the image 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Cropping of the right of the image 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Cropping of the bottom of the 100 00 to 100 00 image To crop to 4 3 in 16 9 mode In the lt Crop Mode gt group press 4 3 Crop turning it on To set the operation for DME wipe crop transition execution 1 In the lt Crop Mode gt group of the Key DME Wipe Adjust menu press Crop turning it on 2 In the lt Crop Mode gt group press Crop or 4 3 Crop to crop to 4 3 in 16 9 mode turning it on 3 In the lt Crop Mode gt group press Remove From Begin DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions s d M IWA 9 19jdeuo sodiM INWA 9 19jdeuo 480 The Remove From Begin menu appears For subsequent operations see step 5 of To set the action when a DME wipe crop transition is executed page 474 To set the timing of transition completion 1 In the lt Crop Mode gt group of the Key DME Wipe Adjust menu press Crop turning it on 2 In the lt Crop Mode gt group press Remove From Begin For subsequent operations see Setting the timing of transition completion page 475 Applying a border to a key DME wipe In the lt Edge gt group of the Key DME Wipe Adjust menu press Border turning it on For subsequent operations use the same process as in step 4 of Mod
360. int buttons are for the currently showing side of DME and the 2nd row are for the reverse side By holding down the 2ND button and making an AUX delegation selection you can allocate the 2nd row to a different bus from the Ist row In this case if the 32nd button is set to be a SHIFT button in a 32 button system the cross point buttons switch to the shifted allocation while the SHIFT button is enabled XPT HOLD cross point hold buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to enable cross point hold KEY button While this button is held down you can use the cross point row of buttons to select key signals 2ND button After selecting a bus with an AUX delegation button hold down this button and select another AUX delegation thus allocating a different bus in the 2nd row from the Ist row Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ Source name displays These show the names of the source signals which can be selected by the cross point buttons While the SHIFT button is enabled the shifted signal name is displayed If a different bus is allocated to the 2nd row while the 2ND button is held down the 2nd row signal name is displayed While the KEY button is held down the source name of the key signal assigned to the cross point buttons appears SHIFT button While this button is enabled the
361. ion e If the selected DME is channel 4 turn on the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 4 row DME utility 2 bus e If the selected DME is channel 8 turn off the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 2 row DME utility 1 bus When using the SDI interface The operations to select the video signals for the third and fourth channels differ from those in the previous procedure select the video signals on the AUX bus allocated in a Setup menu Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface gt DME Type Setting gt DME SDI Interface menu In setup Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface menu if Up to 3Kevs is selected the second channel video signal is also selected on the AUX bus For details see Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu see page 556 Key Setting Operations Using Menus Assigning a DME output signal as a monitor signal 1 In the Processed Key menu press Monitor The Monitor menu appears 2 Press Monitor Set turning it on 3 In the lt DME Select gt group select the DME channel DMEI to DME8 to be used This assigns the selected DME output to DME MON V and DME MON K The colors with which DME1 to DME8 are lit show the key assignment status Lit green DME currently being monitored Lit amber DME that can b
362. ipe position By pressing the X button turning it on you can restrict movement to the horizontal direction and by pressing the Y button turning it on you can restrict movement to the vertical direction To set the wipe position by a menu operation 1 Press Position in the Keyl Wipe Adjust menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 2 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 457 sodiM gJaydeyo sodiM g Jaydeyo 458 a See page 65 To move the pattern from its current position to the center through the course of a transition Press Auto Center in the lt Position gt group turning it on Rotating the wipe pattern Rotation 1 In the lt Rotation gt group of the Key 1 Wipe Adjust menu select the rotation type Angle Incline the pattern through a fixed angle Speed Rotate at a speed rate Magnitude Rotate the pattern through a fixed angle during the course of the transition 2 According to the selection in step 1 set the following parameters e When Angle is selected Knob 1 Parameter Angle Adjustment Angle of pattern rotation Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 e When Speed is selected Knob 1 Parameter Speed Adjustme
363. ist 133 U UNDO button 266 303 User preference button 294 User programmable DME 574 578 Notes on keyframe creation 484 patterns 483 transition mode 75 483 User regions 165 User texture pattern 149 UTIL button 258 Utility 185 Utility shotbox control block 298 V V K mode 88 VF buttons 322 Video processing 24 405 signal adjustment 51 switching 200 Video process 107 memory 108 settings 557 VTR control 161 WwW Wave 131 Wind 143 Window adjustment 51 385 WIPE 261 263 311 Wipe 44 60 copy 99 enhanced 60 modify clear 454 mosaic 60 pattern list 560 random diamond dust 60 rotary 60 standard 60 swap 99 Wipe crop 126 Wipe direction 444 456 selection buttons 262 302 312 Wipe modifiers 443 Index XOPUJ 587 XOPUI HI Wipe Modifv Clear 71 Wipe pattern aspect ratio 450 458 edge modification 445 key 52 modifiers 63 modulation 452 replication 451 459 rotation 450 selection 438 tvpes 60 variation 63 Wipe pattern modifier combinations 454 Wipe position 448 456 Wipe settings 200 438 for independent key transitions 455 Wipe snapshot 71 460 deleting 462 recalling 462 saving 461 Wire frames 120 X XPT HOLD buttons 258 289 status display 303 Y Y balance 51 adjustment 385 Z Zabton 54 396 413 Z ring 275 Index The material contained in this manual consists of infor mation that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers
364. itcher processor to S Bus space and select the matrix size and positioning level source address settings and so on External Box To obtain the signal selection status of external devices with a parallel input assign a matrix as an external selector in the S Bus space Make the matrix size assignment level source address and other settings Alias Name Gp Set the group number for an S Bus description name to be displayed in the source name displays for a cross point operation Tally interface setup Tally Group tally settings Group Tally e Tally Group Select the group tally Gp1 to 4 or Gp5 to 8 which can be used For the parallel tally all groups can be used regardless of this setting e S Bus Tally Enable Specify S Bus tally enabled or disabled Wiring information input Wiring Input the information which specifies the physical wiring between switcher and routing switcher or between two routing switchers These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally Tally enable settings Tally Enable Specify the destination to be the reference for tally generation and make various settings These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally e Tally Type Specify the tally type e Destination Specify the address and level e Tally Enable Specify the timing at which a tally is enabled Enable Always enabled Disable Always disabled Tally Input Follow the tally input status Setup 203 suo
365. ite see page 335 Menu page number button This shows the menu screen page number When you press this button the top menu window see page 332 appears You can enter the page number for the desired menu or press one of the top menu selection buttons in the window to display that menu While the system is accessing the hard disk the indicator lights red Indicator for frame memory external hard disk e Indicator for internal hard disk When the indicator is lit do not power off the switcher or disconnect the IEEE1394 cable P 1 When an external hard disk drive is connected VF buttons These indicate the larger subdivisions of this menu Basic Menu Operations Depending on the selected item the menu screen contents including the HF button indications change HF buttons These indicate the items within the menu Depending on the selected item the menu indications change Depending on the function if any one is on the status is shown by an orange bar as in the following figure Input Process Status area This shows the status of the settings items controlled by the selected menu An orange frame appears around the parameter area relating to the displayed menu For each of the twelve areas pressing the display jumps to the related menu Function button area This shows the functions which can be operated in the currently selected menu by means of buttons Eac
366. ition 2 00 to 2 00 4 Bottom Key bottom edge position 2 00 to 2 00 Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Phase Key horizontal position Left edge position value shown 2 V Phase Key vertical position Top edge position value shown In the emboss function it is not possible to set Fine Key on e When the edge type is normal drop border or shadow enabling the Fine Key function keeps Key Drop on e When applying a border to the key edge enabling the Fine Key function halves the border width setting range To fix key fill and key source in key drop off mode 1 In the Edge menu press Key Delay Mode The Key Delay Mode menu appears Key Setting Operations Using Menus 393 sfog vp saideyo skey p 13 dey9 394 This function is only supported on the MVS 8000G 2 Press Frame Delay setting it to On This function uses the resizer and therefore the expected result of the setting may not be obtained if conditions do not allow the resizer to be used Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte When you select Matte for the edge fill of a border drop border or shadow you can create a combination of color 1 and color 2 using a wipe pattern generated by the dedicated pattern generator 1 In the lt Edge Fill gt group of the Edge menu select Matte then press Matte Adjust The edge fill Matte Adjust menu appears 2 In the lt Ed
367. ition 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 65 e When turning Multi on and replicating the pattern Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 42 a See page 68 e When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob 1 Parameter Aspect Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 67 e When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and inclining the pattern Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 Key Setting Operations Using Menus 395 sfog vp saideyo skey p 13 dey9 396 e When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and rotating the pattern at a constant speed Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 6 To interchange color and color 2 press Color Invert turning it on Applying the zabton effects 1 In the Edge menu press Zabton turning it on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Pattern e
368. ition wipe start transition mix completes with the start kev deleted Example 2 When the common transition AUTO TRANS button is pressed later ened a Independent Common The transition key transition transition wipe completes with the mix start start key deleted Time offset execution with the key not inserted Transition Types Selecting the transition type determines the way in which the transition occurs Carry out the type selection with the transition type selection buttons in the transition control block of each M E or PGM PST bank For details of this operation see Basic Operating Procedure page 340 The following are the transition types This is a dissolve in which the new video progressively fades in over the current video with the sum of the two video outputs maintained constant At the mid point of the transition when the fader lever is in the center position the output of each is 50 This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition In this case the key either dissolves in or dissolves out similarly with the progress of the transition Transitions 41 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 42 NAM non additive mix In this dissolve the current video and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output The current video is maintained at 100 output for t
369. justment Setting values 1 H Horizontal gain adjustment 0 00 to 100 00 2 V Vertical gain adjustment 0 00 to 100 00 3 All Both horizontal and vertical H value is displayed adjustment Applying a mosaic 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key gt Enhanced Effect menu press Mosaic turning it on Resizer shey vp saideyo s y pv J1a deyo 2 Set the parameters This operation is the same as the DME mosaic setting For more details see Mosaic Settings in Chapter 11 Volume 2 3 In the lt Mosaic Defocus Mode gt group select the signal to which to apply the mosaic effect Video Key Video signal and key signal Video Video signal only If mosaic is enabled and in the lt Mosaic Defocus Mode gt group you select Video Key then the crop and mask are disabled 4 Set the parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal defocusing 0 00 to 100 00 V Vertical defocusing 0 00 to 100 00 All Horizontal and vertical defocusing H value shown To make the mosaic like a relief pattern 1 With Mosaic on press Relief turning it on 2 In addition to the mosaic parameters set the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Gain Relief depth of mosaic cells 0 00 to 100 00 4 Angle Light source direction 8 00 to 8 00 Defocusing 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key gt Enhanced Effect menu press Defo
370. k the contents of the frame memory clip through the thumbnail display Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Viewer For a movie the current frame 00 00 00 and position For a still image no effect upwards 4 Press Rename A keyboard window appears 5 Enter the new name then press Enter in the keyboard window This renames the file Image Data Management The following names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COMA COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 File Backups To back up a file saved in memory to hard disk use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF7 Backup Restore The Backup Restore menu appears 2 Press Backup This backs up the saved file Restoring Files Restoring backed up files To recall files backed up on the hard disk use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF7 Backup Restore The Backup Restore menu appears 2 Press Restore This recalls the backed up file Image Data Management 531 Kowa ewes 7 Je deu9 Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo 532 External Hard Disk Drive Access In an MVS 8000A system and MVS 8000G system you can connect a hard disk drive to the IEEE1394 port of the switcher processor and save and recall image data from frame memory Since ima
371. key is not required Multi Program 2 For the method of obtaining an install key contact your Sony representative To obtain a key you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the switcher you are using You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu of the switcher For details of the operation see Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Assigning main and or sub to switcher banks For Multi Program 2 operations a single switcher bank may be shared and switched between main and sub or two separate switcher banks may be used each dedicated to main or sub Example 1 Assigning M E 1 main and sub to a single switcher bank and switching between them Used switched between M E 1 main and sub Example 2 Assigning separate switcher banks as M E 1 main dedicated and M E 1 sub dedicated Used for M E 1 main operations o00000 OOOOOODOOO OOQ OO Used for M E 1 sub operations Video creation operations in Multi Program 2 mode For each of main and sub there are differences from the operations in standard mode Multi Program 2 231 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo For details see Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode page 242 Sequence of Operations in Multi Program 2 Basic operation sequence Enter the BZS
372. l All par ag utility buses are made Bkgd A Path for background A Bkgd B Path for background B Util 1 Path for utility 1 Util 2 Path for utility 2 DME 2nd Video Path for video to be used for second DME channel Item Wipe DME Wipe Paths that can be set Overall path settings for items relating to wipes and DME wipes are made simultaneously Useri to User8 menus The items that can be adjusted depend on the settings in the Setup menu For details see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Item User All to User8 All Paths that can be set Overall path settings for the following items for each User are made simultaneously FM All Overall path settings for frame memory items are made simultaneously FM Src Overall path settings for frame memory source FM Src All items are made simultaneously FM Srci Path for frame memorv source 1 and video process FM Src2 Path for frame memorv source 2 and video process FM Proc Overall path settings relating to the signal FM Proc All bid Paihia matnp feces opis ate ide simultaneously FM Proci Path for frame memory signal processing 1 FM Proc2 Path for frame memory signal processing 2 FM Still Store Overall path settings for frame memory freeze FM Still Store All image output are made simultaneously FM Still Store 1 to 8 Paths for fr
373. l Reverse Start Timing Reverse Reset Detault Transition Video Key Priority Next Key Assign Snapshot Recall Process Key Priority Clip display area Press the Clip button The Clip menu appears and the status area shows a list of clips Select the clip to use in the clip transition Return to the Clip Transition menu and in the lt BKGD Transition Type gt group select the background transition type Aowey ewes z Jaydeyo For details of the background transition selected here see the various adjustments in the M E 1 gt Misc gt Transition menu In the lt Select gt group press BKGD Transition Use either of the following methods to set the background transition start point independently of the clip playback timing e Move the fader lever to the desired position and in the lt BKGD Transition Set Timing gt group press Start Clip Transition Operations 525 Aowsey ewes4 7 Ja deyo 526 Turn knob 1 to set the number of frames The left end of the reference axis see following figure is the position of frame 0 Position of frame 0 Reference axis Current 32 on Rate BKGD Trans Start 24 Stop 39 FM1 amp 2 Clip Start 0 T Stop 60 8 Using either of the following methods set the end point of the background transition e Move the fader lever to the desired position and in the lt BKGD Transition Set Timing gt group press Stop e Turn knob 2 to
374. ld Invert File excluding Pair Recombination menu Folder External HDD menus Still lmage Operations Frame memory selection area OTarget FM Auto store status display Display of available image capacity 0 Pair selection button selection buttons Pair button 01 Frame memory folder Free KF 497 selection 00 00 00 area Reposition Lock Name image001 Folder External HDD Freeze Default Recall Sore clipooot 00 00 10 Pair Ext P Composite Animation Create Record Key Frame File selection area Duration Still Direct Recall Recall Field Invert Prev 2551 Direct Recall button Frame Memory menu Auto store status display Depending on the setup settings this appears when the auto store function is enabled Display of available image capacity This shows the remaining number of frames When no more frames can be stored in pair mode 1 or 0 appears in red and in single mode 0 appears in red The lower figure shows the remaining number of frames that can be used as extended clips Still Image Operations 491 Aowey ewes z Jaydeyo Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo 492 Target FM selection buttons Ancillary data attached clip display Extended clip display Status display ClipO01 00 30 00 ii Still duration displav Reposition Lock status displav The border color shows the status as follows
375. lect HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears In the lt Direction gt group specify the DME wipe direction Normal regular direction Normal Reverse alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse reverse direction to normal To specify the DME wipe direction with a button in the transition control block In the transition control block of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks press the following direction selection buttons NORM Normal NORM REV Normal Reverse REV Reverse Modifying the DME wipe pattern edge 1 2 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows For a pattern in one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time In the lt Edge gt group select the edge type Border border Soft Border soft border 4 Set the parameters according to the selection in step 3 470 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings e When border is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 00 to 100 00 3 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 4 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 5 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 e When soft bo
376. lection buttons These select the menu appearing in the menu display It is also possible to change the assignment of these buttons in setup For details see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Menu display This shows the menu currently in use Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Knobs These adjust the parameter values appearing in the menu User preference buttons These recall the functions or menus assigned to them in the Setup menu In the default setup nothing is assigned to the PREFS 1 to PREFS 7 buttons It is also possible to change the assignment of these buttons in setup For details see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 PREFS 8 button When this button is on control of an editor from the Remotel port on the rear panel of the switcher is possible However even when it is off control of the Edit PVW bus is always possible Memory Card USB Adaptor Block Memory card slot DEVICE connectors Memory card slot This slot accepts a PCMCIA Type II compliant memory card You can use it in software installation and for saving and reading in data such as snapshot keyframe effect and setup data B DEVICE connectors There are three USB connectors You can c
377. link function you can obtain the following effects Key blink The key is alternately inserted and deleted at regular intervals You can set the period of blinking and the proportion of each cycle for which the key is inserted Edge blink The key fill and key edge fill signals are interchanged at regular intervals You can set the period of blinking and the proportion of each cycle for which the original state holds Using the blink function For example to make the required settings for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF6 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 In the lt Blink gt group select Key Blink or Edge Blink to set it on 3 Set the blink parameters e When key blink is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 1 to 100 2 Duty Proportion of cycle for which key 0 00 to 100 00 inserted e When edge blink is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 1 to 100 2 Duty Proportion of cycle for which 0 00 to 100 00 original state holds Key Setting Operations Using Menus Video Processing You can adjust the luminance and hue of the selected key fill signal For example to apply video processing to the signal selected on the M E 1 bank key 1 fill bus use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select
378. lip A clip consists of a sequence of still images which appears as a movie on playback In this manual this is also referred to simply as a clip The files still files constituting clips are referred to as a clip file When the above distinctions are not being made an image is simply referred to as an image Frame Memory About extended clips When two frame memory boards MKS 8440A for the MVS 8000A MKS 8442G for the MVS 8000G are installed one is dedicated to clips Such clips held in a frame memory board are called extended clips Use of frame memory There are eight frame memory channels FM1 to FM8 and each channel independently allows a freeze image to be saved or recalled By allocating FM1 to FM8 to cross point buttons you can use the still image output or clip output from each channel as input material On the MVS 8000A an extended clip can only be recalled from FM1 or FM2 It is not possible to recall from FM3 to FM8 Note that this restriction does not apply to the MVS 8000G Correspondence between input and output There are two buses for capturing frame memory material the frame memory source bus and the frame memory source 2 bus These input buses are used by allocation to one of the pairs of output FM 1 amp 2 FM3 amp 4 FM5 amp 6 and FM7 amp 8 You can freeze a frame in each channel separately or freeze in the two channels simultaneously The source buses allocated to FMI to F
379. lock page 296 Utility Shotbox control block page 298 a im 00000 453630 m m 60000 9000 o la la aaa BEEHB PEER G5 ia ojj 00000 0000m 5 oo BeBe 000 oo 8 c O Q oO 5 oot ia im D o 2000 o Ant la Srjezu m Oot m OO OOF D ea GELI 5000 000 00 Cocco 20000 oooo oooo tA Transition control block Downstream key control block page 306 standard type page 260 Numeric keypad control block page 284 ade to black control block page 287 Flexi Pad control block standard type page 264 Control panel configuration 1 right side with standard transition modules Control Panel Example Configuration 2 With Simple Transition Modules The following illustration shows a typical modules used in the transition control configuration with simple transition block Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Except for the simple modules this is the same configuration as in example configuration 1 1 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel J QOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOVOOQ oo oo oor OO QO 000 0 D JIODOQ 0 oVo0000
380. lowing methods select the signal to which the settings apply e Directly press the list in the status area e Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor e Turn the knob to make the setting Knob _ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Output Signal to which the settings 1 to 48 apply e It is not possible to change the setting for the output for which the safe title is set off in a Setup menu e The safe title function cannot be used for output signals for which through mode is set to Enable in a Setup menu For more information about the Setup menu settings referred to above see Signal Input Settings Input Menu and Signal Output Settings Output Menu in Chpater 16 Volume 2 3 Press Safe Title to set it on or off Misc Menu Operations Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings In the Transition menu for each bank you can display a list of the M E or PGM PST transition rates and independent key or DSK transition rates and change the settings These settings are linked to the other transition rate setting operations You can also display and set the fade to black transition rate Displaying the Transition menu In the menu control block press the top menu selection button MISC then select VF3 Transition The Misc gt Transition menu appears About the Transition menu display The display of the independent key transition rate in t
381. ltaneous transitions Time offset execution If the AUTO TRANS buttons for the two transitions are pressed with a time offset the following is the result Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent key transition is a mix dissolve Transitions 39 suonouny 0008 SAW L doldeuQ SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 40 Transitions Time offset execution with the key inserted With the key inserted it is deleted with the two transitions acting with a time offset Whichever button is pressed first when the common transition completes even if the independent key transition is still not completed the two end simultaneously Example When the independent key transition AUTO TRANS button is pressed later kl eh e The key is deleted Common one Pie kev even if the wipe start transition mix start independent key transition has not completed Time offset execution with the key inserted Time offset execution with the key not inserted With the key not inserted it is inserted with the transition whose AUTO TRANS button is pressed first Since the key is then in the inserted state with the transition whose AUTO TRANS button is pressed later the key is deleted When the key is completely deleted both transitions complete Example 1 When the independent key transition AUTO TRANS button is pressed later PH A Common transition Independent kev The trans
382. lti Effects DME Detents Operation mode Limits of three dimensional transformation parameters Skew 9 9999 to 9 9999 The system defines points called detents at regular intervals on the three dimensional space Pressing the CTR button in the device control block sets the current three dimensional parameter values to the closest detent points For details see Three Dimensional Transformation Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 The following table shows the interval between successive detents for each transformation operation mode see page 116 Operation mode Detent interval Location XVZ 1 0000 Rotation Spin 0 2500 Axis Location 1 0000 Location Size 0 2500 Aspect 1 0000 2 Perspective x y 1 0000 Perspective z 1 0000 A Skew 0 1000 a When a value is smaller than 1 1 Aspect or 1 Perspective z is adjusted to an integral value Three dimensional parameter default values Each of the transformation operation modes has default values for three dimensional parameters If required you can return the current value to the defaults by pressing the CTR button in the device control block twice in rapid succession For details see Three Dimensional Transformation Operations in Chapter 11 Volume 2 The following table shows the default parameter values for each transformation operation mode Operation mode Default value Location XYZ
383. lti Program 2 Mode page 243 Press the MAIN and SUB buttons simultaneously turning them on If both buttons are lit the control panel shows the status of main Carry out the transition Both main and sub video images are switched Optional Operations Making cross point settings Cross point assign tables can be set not only for main output but also for sub output You can set cross point assign tables for the following banks M E 1 SUB to M E 3 SUB P P SUB The table actuallv used is that for which the control panel delegation button is lit Multi Program 2 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 238 For details see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Enabling DME wipe operations for sub By factory default DME wipe operations are inhibited for sub background To enable them in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu set DME Wipe Sub Enable to On This enables DME wipe operations for sub background This setting applies to the whole control panel all M E banks and PGM PST bank Ifa DME wipe for sub is recalled in a snapshot or keyframe the image will not be handled correctly Inhibiting utility 2 bus signal selection In Multi Program 2 mode you can inhibit other uses of the utility 2 bus signal in order to use the signal as the background for sub This setting applies to the whole control panel all M E banks a
384. mal mode every time this button is pressed Key status display For each of keys 1 to 4 the corresponding ON indicator lights when the key is inserted It also shows the priority 1 to 4 of each key PRIOR priority SET button While this button is held down you can set the key priority The setting mode when this button is pressed depends on whether or not the KEY PRIOR button is lit as follows e When the KEY PRIOR button is off the current key priority is set e When the KEY PRIOR button is lit the key priority after the next transition is set Press the KEY PRIOR button as required to switch between these two modes In either mode hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the button KEY 1 to KEY4 corresponding to the key you want to bring to the front Independent key transition execution section KEXI TRANS transition to KEY4 TRANS DSK1 TRANS to DSK4 TRANS in the PGM PST block buttons Press the corresponding one of these buttons to cut key 1 to key 4 in or out automatically at the set transition rate When the key corresponding to the button appears in the final program output the button lights red and otherwise lights amber During a transition the button lights green Basic Menu Operations Menu Organization Operations on the MVS 8000 switcher system make frequent use of menu operations This section describes the menus and their interrelationships Overv
385. mbnail in the status area e Turn the knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No File selection 1 and upwards 2 Num Selection of number of files in 1 and upwards sequence e To delete all files press Select All turning it on e When a clip thumbnail is selected the still image files making up the clip are also selected for deletion Image Data Management 529 Kowa ewes 7 Je deup Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo 530 4 If necessary turn the knob to check the contents of the frame memory clip through the thumbnail display Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Viewer For a movie the current frame 00 00 00 and position For a still image no effect upwards 5 Press Delete A message for confirming the deletion appears 6 To confirm the deletion press Yes and to cancel press No Renaming Files Renaming a file 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF6 Rename The Rename menu appears In the status area whether pair mode is on or off all of the saved files appear as thumbnails 2 Using either of the following methods select the file to be renamed If necessary press the arrow keys to scroll the display e Press directly on the thumbnail in the status area e Turn the knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No File selection 1 and upwards 3 If necessary turn the knob chec
386. ment Setting Values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 To soften the inner edge of a border 1 In the Border Crop menu press Border Soft 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values 1 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0 00 to 100 00 To apply a beveled light edge 1 In the lt Border Mode gt group of the Border Crop menu press Beveled Light Edge 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values 1 Top Top edge 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Left edge 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Right edge 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Bottom edge 100 00 to 100 00 5 All Four edges Value of Left shown 3 Press Border Soft 4 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting Values 1 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0 00 to 100 00 2 Bound Soft Border boundary softness 0 00 to 100 00 To apply a beveled color edge 1 In the lt Border Mode gt group of the Border Crop menu press Beveled Color Edge 2 In the lt Color Adjust gt group select the edges for adjustment among the Top Left Right and Bottom edges To select all the four edges press All 3 Set the color parameters For details see To apply color to a border page 426 4 Press Border Soft 5 Adj
387. meter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 2 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100 3 Density Key density 0 to 100 Selecting key fill Select whether to use a color matte as key fill or the signal on the key fill bus When using a color matte Press the MATTE FILL button setting it on The button lights green and you can now set the parameters with the knobs 408 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Color 1 luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Color 1 saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Color 1 hue 359 to 0 When Mix Color is selected in the key fill Matte Adjust menu you can further adjust color 2 When Mix Color is on and the MORE button is lit amber Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Color 1 luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Color 1 saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Color 1 hue 359 to 0 4 Size Pattern size 0 to 100 When Mix Color is on and the MORE button is lit green Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Color 2 luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Color 2 saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Color 2 hue 359 to 0 4 Soft Edge softness 0 to 100 When using the key fill bus signal Press the MATTE FILL button turning it off To select the key fill signal use the key 1 or key 2 bus buttons in the cross point control block To select th
388. meters Three dimensional parameters are x y and z values which define the position of an image its axis of rotation the position of an imaginary point of view on the image and so on The standard values of parameters are as follows depending on the aspect ratio of your monitor 4 3 or 16 9 Values for 4 3 mode e Origin at center of image source coordinate space or center of monitor target coordinate space x 0 00 y 0 00 z 0 00 e Upper right corner of image or monitor When using SD format signals x 4 00 y 3 00 z 0 00 When using HD format signals x 12 00 y 9 00 z 0 00 Digital Multi Effects DME e Lower left corner of image or monitor When using SD format signals x 4 00 y 3 00 z 0 00 When using HD format signals x 12 00 y 9 00 z 0 00 z axis x axis 4 12 a z axis The plus direction on the z axis is depth into the image or monitor screen a The value in parentheses is for HD format Values for x y and z axes 4 3 mode Values for 16 9 mode e Origin at center of image source coordinate space or center of monitor target coordinate space x 0 00 y 0 00 z 0 00 e Upper right corner of image or monitor When using SD format signals x 4 00 y 2 25 z 0 00 When using HD format signals x 16 00 y 9 00 z 0 00 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo Digital Multi Effects DME 113 SUOJJ
389. mi semi linked mode Applying the effect of a diamond dust wipe to the selected pattern Dust mix 1 In the Pattern Mix menu press Dust Mix turning it on 2 Set the following parameters as required Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Ratio Proportion of diamond dust 0 00 to 100 00 pattern in mix 2 H Size Particle width 0 00 to 100 00 3 V Size Particle height 0 00 to 100 00 4 Flash Rate Rate of generation of particles 0 00 to 100 00 You can also apply the dust mix function to the pattern generated by a pattern mix When a random diamond dust wipe pattern numbers 270 274 is selected the dust mix function is not available Setting Wipe Modifiers You can apply various modifiers to the wipe pattern setting the wipe direction pattern position and so on For an overview of the wipe modifiers see Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers page 63 Note that the available modifiers may depend on the pattern you are using For details see Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers page 454 Main pattern and sub pattern modifiers You can make independent settings of the modifiers for the main pattern and sub pattern Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 443 sodiM G 9jdeuQ sodiM g Jaydeyo e To set the modifiers for the main pattern in the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify and make the settings in the Main Modify menu e T
390. mory settings Key Wipe FM CCR e Key Memory Set the key memory operation mode for each of the M E and P P banks 200 Setup Video Proc Memory Enable or disable video process memory Show Key Enable or disable show key for edit preview M E and P P Pvw K Pvw Kev Auto Drop For each switcher bank M E 1 to M E 3 PGM PST specify a key to be turned off automatically when you press a cross point button for the bus to be output as the background Mask Border Process Set the processing order of masks and borders for each M E or P P bank Key Priority Set the key priority operation mode for each of the M E and P P banks In DSK mode the key priority is fixed Xpt Hold mode Set the operation mode for the cross point hold button provided on the key bus for each of the M E and P P banks Pattern Limit Transition Set the operation mode when the pattern limit is released for each of the M E and P P banks Wipe Edge Default Adjust the wipe edge softness for each of the M E and P P banks CCR Internal Signal Enable Select whether signals generated internally to the switcher can be select as input material to the color corrector MVS 8000G 8000GSF only FM Auto Store Switch on or off the function to automatically attach a name and save in frame memory Link settings Link Internal Bus Link Make a setting of the bus link function that links together two buses internal to the switcher GPI Link Make settings for linking any c
391. n The Key Assign menu appears and the current key assignment is shown in the status area 2 Change the setting in Key Enable as required Keys recalled in a snapshot recall If a snapshot is recalled independently on main or sub this only retrieves the settings for the key assigned to the recalled side For example if key 1 and key 2 are assigned on main and key 3 and key 4 are assigned on sub then if you recall a snapshot on main this only retrieves the settings for key 1 and key 2 and the state of key 3 and key 4 assigned on sub is not affected Assigning sub preview output to preview selection buttons You can assign the sub preview output to a preview selection button in the fade to black control block or downstream key fade to black control block For details see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 When the Multi Program 2 license is valid by assigning the Shift function to a button you can assign two preview outputs Shift and Unshift to a single button To use the shift output always assign Shift to some button Changing the matrix size to Standard When using a router if the matrix size is set to Compact 128x128 it is not possible to control the utility 3 bus on the S Bus When using Multi Program 2 in the lt Matrix Size gt group of the Engineering Setup gt Router Tally gt Router menu select Standard 136x138 For details see A
392. n The left right top and bottom border or outline widths can be adjusted 390 Key Setting Operations Using Menus independently The separate edge function is only valid when a luminance key linear key or chroma key is selected as the key type Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top edge width 0 00 to 8 00 2 Left Left edge width 0 00 to 8 00 2 3 Right Right edge width 0 00 to 8 00 2 4 Bottom Bottom edge width 0 00 to 8 00 9 5 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 393 is on the setting value range is 0 00 to 4 00 When drop border or shadow is selected The setting parameter values depend on the on off setting of key drop and the selection of 4H mode 8H mode see page 54 e Key drop OFF mode Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0 00 to 8 00 2 Position Position 359 99 to 180 00 3 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 e Key drop ON mode Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0 00 to 8 00 Position Position 359 99 to 0 00 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 393 is on the setting value range is 0 00 to 4 00 When emboss is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0 00 to 4 00 2 Position Position 359 99 to 0 00 3 Density Density 0 0
393. n SDTV system can store 222 frames in memory while up to eight frames can be recalled and used simultaneously In an MVS 8000A system and MVS 8000G system an HDTV system can hold approximately 1 000 still image frames or 2 000 frames in 720P 59 94 format and an SDTV system can hold approximately 5 000 frames in 480i 59 94 format or 4 000 frames in 5761 50 format in memory and up to eight frames can be recalled and used simultaneously Link operation with DME By means of the dedicated DME interface a range of DME functions including DME wipes and processed keys can be handled as switcher functions By connecting two MVE 8000 8000A or MVE 9000 units in any combination you can interface to a maximum of eight DME channels Note that the MVE 8000A and MVE 9000 can also be used with this system by connecting through an SDI interface Designed for use in a live broadcasting environment Flexible control panel layout Because of its modular design the various sections of the control panel can be laid out as required This allows a flexible layout appropriate to the system operation High performance user interface The menu control block provides a large color LCD panel with rapid touch panel menu selection The source name displays and buttons in the Flexi Pad and shotbox control blocks have color backlit LCD displays The signal names and graphical representations of the patterns associated with buttons provide intuitive feedback
394. n out mode which is specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical direction The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end point See page 78 DME Wipes 75 suonouny 0008 SAW L doldeuD SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 76 DME Wipes Transition mode Compress The change in the image when the transition mode is set to Compress is as follows in comparison to the case of Picture in picture e Example of the image change in the transition mode Picture in picture one channel mode A A A A A M First stroke Second stroke e Example of the image change in the transition mode Compress A B A First stroke Second stroke Transition mode frame in out In this mode when the first transition has completed you can move the image with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions but the image position at the transition start point and end point does not change The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following First transition Transition start completion point Transition end A A A Image created by interpolation Background A B Background B Effect execution At the first transition completion point if you move the image with the positioner the transition appears as in the following figure First transition Transition start completion point Transi
395. n the screen 3 Press the button to select the desired pattern Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers You can add modifiers such as pattern position and size for an independent key transition DME wipe For introductory information see Positioner page 80 and Size page 81 Setting the DME wipe position Positioner For applicable pattern numbers see page 80 1 In the lt Position gt group of the Keyl DME Wipe Adjust menu press Position turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 478 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions To return the DME wipe pattern position to the center of the screen In the lt Position gt group press Center Setting the DME wipe pattern size Size For applicable pattern numbers see page 81 1 In the Key 1 DME Wipe Adjust menu press Size turning it on 2 Set the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Set size of effect 0 00 to 200 00 2 a The effect size when Size is off is taken as 100 00 Cropping a key DME wipe 1 In the lt Crop Mode gt group of the Key DME Wipe Adjust menu press Crop turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Cropp
396. nable or disable through mode Through mode can be enabled for AUXI to 48 outputs M E and PGM PST program outputs and clean output Safe Title Enable or disable safe title and carry out settings for box 1 and 2 cross and grid for the MVS 8000G only Ref Output Phase Set the reference output mode and phase adjustment for the MVS 8000 8000A only 4 3 Crop Set the actual video image to be cropped to a 4 3 aspect ratio when an HD system has a screen aspect ratio of 4 3 FC Adjust for MVS 8000G only Set the format converter outputs Settings relating to video switching Transition Transition Preview Specify the operation mode for transition preview for each of the M E and P P banks Key Transition Specify the operation mode for independent key transitions Bus Toggle Switch the bus toggle for each of the M E and P P banks on or off Split Fader When the bus toggle is off the split fader settings are enabled For each of the M E and P P banks select enable or disable Fade To Black Enable or disable fade to black for each final program output Preset Color Mix Set the stroke mode for a preset color mix the key status for a transition including a key and the mode in which the transition type after a transition ends returns to the previous setting Transition Curve Set the relationship when carrying out a transition between the fader lever position and the advancement state of the transition Key wipe and frame me
397. nctions of Parts of the Control Panel jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued OJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ LOCAL DELAY Press this button turning it on to enter a delay value from the numeric keypad control block GLB STB OFF standby off Press this button to switch to standby off mode This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations SRC REC record Press this button at the same time as the Y button to start recording This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations TRGT STOP Press this button to stop the tape disk or frame memory clip AXIS LOC START TC start timecode Press this button to set the timecode of the start point at that time The timecode of the start point is updated to the current time each time this button is pressed When the device the operation applies to is a VTR disk recorder the start point updated by the setting of the MENU button is as follows When the MENU button is On start point of the timeline When the MENU button is Off start point of Cueup amp Play ASP PERS STOP TC stop timecode Press this button to set the timecode of the stop point at that time The timecode of the stop point is updated to the current time each time this button is pressed When the device the operation applies to is a VTR disk recorder the stop point updated by the setting of the MENU button is as follows When the MENU button is On stop point
398. nd PGM PST bank In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt MP2 Main Sub Assign menu set Util2 Inhibit to On This inhibits operations of selecting from the background B row while holding down the UTIL button in the cross point control block Including Multi Program 2 data in recall operations of keyframes and snapshots In the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config menu set Recall M E Config to On When a keyframe or snapshot is stored or recalled the following data is included M E Config PGM Config M E Output Assign and Key PVW Config For details of the above data see Setting the operating mode for each switcher bank page 233 and Assigning output signals for Multi Program 2 mode page 233 This setting applies to the whole control panel all M E banks and PGM PST bank M E Config data is saved even when this setting is Off Multi Program 2 Changing the key assignment for each output Misc menu In Multi Program 2 mode you can change the key assignments independently The following describes an example using M E 1 but the operation is the same for other banks e This setting is linked to the setting in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt PGM Config menu e It is not possible to make this setting while the above PGM Config menu is locked or Recall M E Config see previous item is set to Off 1 In the M E 1 menu select first VF7 Misc then HF5 Key Assig
399. nd a key independent transition for the same key you can apply two different effects such as a wipe and mix dissolve see page 41 to the key simultaneously When carrying out such a combination of transitions simultaneously on a key as auto transitions see page 45 the result depends on the timing of pressing the respective AUTO TRANS buttons 38 Transitions Simultaneous execution If the AUTO TRANS buttons for the two transitions are pressed simultaneously the following is the result Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent key transition is a mix dissolve Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions With the key inserted it is deleted simultaneously with the two transitions When the common transition completes even if the independent key transition is still not completed the two end simultaneously xi kl Wipe and mix The key is deleted dissolve are even if the carried out independent key simultaneously transition has not completed Deleting a key with simultaneous transitions Inserting a key with simultaneous transitions With the key not inserted it is inserted simultaneously with the two transitions If the common transition or independent key transition ends first the other continues to completion Wipe and mix The transitions dissolve are continue until both carried out are completed simultaneously Inserting a key with simu
400. nd set the parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Phase Key horizontal position 4 00 to 4 00 2 Left Key left edge position 4 00 to 4 00 3 Right Key right edge position 4 00 to 4 00 To set the key priority Press Key Priority or select VF7 Misc and HF3 Key Priority to access the Key Priority menu For details see Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation page 345 Chroma Key Composition Composing an image by chroma keying There are two types of composition for chroma keying normal mix and additive mix For an overview of the chroma key composition see page 49 1 In the M E 1 PKevi menu select HF1 Type 2 Select Chroma in the lt Key Type gt group It becomes possible to adjust the key density see page 380 3 Select Chroma Adjust The Chroma Adjust menu appears 4 Carry out auto chroma key adjustments Also carry out manual adjustments if necessary to obtain an optimum chroma key image For the adjustment procedures see page 382 5 In the lt Mix Mode gt group select Normal Mix or Additive Mix depending on the desired type of chroma key composition Key Setting Operations Using Menus 381 sfog vp saideyo skey p 13 dey9 382 When using an additive mix for chroma keying the typically blue background parts of the foreground video must be converted to black For this use the color cancel
401. ndent Key Transitions page 455 For details of DME wipe settings see DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 477 Execute the transition To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition Press the AUTO TRANS button For details of the transition rate see Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate page 366 For details of operation together with a common transition see Combining other transitions with independent key transitions page 38 To cut the key in or out instantaneously Press the KEY ON button on the keyer In an independent key transition the pattern limit function is not available Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation You can also select the required independent key transition type by a menu operation 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first the desired one from VF1 Keyl to VF4 Kev4 then HF6 Transition The Transition menu for the selected appears Select the required transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group If in the Setup menus you set insertion deletion as independent modes make the settings for insertion in the lt On Transition Type gt group and the settings for deletion in the lt Off Transition Type gt group Independent Key Transitions 365 SUOMISUBIL g 19 JdEU SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate There are two
402. ndent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate for each of the M E and PGM PST banks and changing the settings Port Settings for Control From an External Device Enabling or disabling control from an external device 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button MISC then select VF1 Enable and HF1 Port Enable The Misc gt Enable gt Port Enable menu appears with the status area showing the settings of the following ports e Switcher Remote to Remote 4 ports RS 422A D sub 9 pin e Switcher GPI port parallel 25 pin e DME1 DME2 Editor ports RS 422A D sub 9 pin e DME1 DME2 GPI ports parallel 25 pin 2 In the lt Switcher gt or lt DME gt group press on the name of the port for which you want to disable control from an external device turning it off To re enable control for the port press on its name once more For the AUX bus operation from the Remote to Remote4 ports of the switcher the setting Enable Disable Manual in the Setup menu takes precedence Only when the setting is Manual the settings made in the Port Enable menu apply For details see Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu under Setup Relating to Switcher Processor in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Misc Menu Operations DME override 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button MISC then select VF1 Enable and HF1 Port Enable
403. ndings of the moved image on the screen are filled with black 5 To return the image moved by the reposition function to the center position in the lt Reposition gt group press Center It is not possible to write the image moved by the reposition function directly to frame memory Still Image Operations 507 Kowa ewes 7 Je deup Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo Fixing the output image selection lock function 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF3 Reposition Lock and HF2 Lock The Lock menu appears 2 In the frame memory selection area select the FM output See page 495 3 Press Lock turning it on This fixes the currently selected frame memory output image To release the lock set Lock to off Continuously Capturing Still Images Record Continuously freezing input images and writing to memory 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VFI Still and HF4 Animation Record The Animation Record menu appears 2 Select the desired frame memory For details of the operating procedures see Selecting outputs FM and target frame memory page 495 3 To use V K mode press V K Mode turning it on 4 Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area to select the folder to hold the freeze image For details of the selection method see page 496 The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze image It is not possible to change the selection of
404. ne e RECALL 1 to 99 STORE I to 99 RECALL UNDO STORE UNDO search for empty register AUTO SAVE RECALL MODE RECALL RECALL amp REWIND e EDIT ENABLE EDIT UNDO e CONST DUR EFF DUR KF DUR DELAY PAUSE INSERT BEFORE INSERT AFTER MODIFY DELETE COPY PASTE BEFORE PASTE AFTER FROM TO ALL e PREV KF NEXT KF GOTO TC GOTO KF RUN REWIND FF STOP NEXT KF NORMAL JOG KF FADER The following key frame functions cannot be used e KF LOOP EFFECT LOOP REVERSE NORMAL REVERSE e PATH Saving to a register Set the recall and execute actions for the macros to be registered in the timeline using the Macro Timeline menu The setting data can be saved in a register as key frame data You can manipulate this data by recalling the register in which it is saved and using the key frame control block For details see Chapter 18 Macros Volume 2 An action set for a key frame is only executed when the key frame effect is executed in the forward direction It is important to remember that the action is not executed in the reverse direction when executing simultaneously with switcher and DME key frame effects Forcibly ending a macro timeline e If the timeline has completed but a macro is still executing press the REWIND or RUN button in the key frame control block to forcibly end the macro timeline In amacro timeline since a take operation is not possible if a macro included in the timeline has a pause event with a
405. ne key and edge type settings key fill and key source are fixed in key drop off mode In this mode key image has a one frame delay e This function is only valid on the MVS 8000G 8000GSF e This function uses the resizer and therefore the normal effect of the setting is not obtained while using DME wipe or other effect that uses the resizer When a border drop border or shadow modifier is selected you can select a signal to fill these edge effects The edge fill may be either the signal from the dedicated color matte generator or the signal currently selected on the utility 1 bus In the case of an outline there is no edge fill signal selection because the key fill signal fills the outline and the rest of the image remains as the background For the emboss effect in place of the edge fill signal the emboss fill matte 1 and emboss fill matte 2 signals are used A mask is used to inhibit the effect of a key over a part of the image This allows parts of the background which would otherwise be keyed to be protected or to correct the key if it is not of the desired shape For details of masking operations see Masks pages 397 and 414 Key mask and background mask There are two types of mask a key mask and a background mask Key mask This masks out a part of the key which will result in the background appearing Keys 55 suonouny 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 56 Background mask T
406. ned to the utility 1 bus and can be used to select the signal on that bus Background B row Press the desired button to select the signal as the background after the next transition on this M E bank or PGM PST bank While the UTIL button on the right hand side is held down in Hold mode these buttons are assigned to the utility 2 bus and can be used to select the signal on that bus Reentry buttons These allow you to select the video created on another bank as background A or B or one of the keys 1 to 4 For example to use the video created on the M E 1 bank as background B on the M E 2 bank press the reentry button M E 1 in the background B row of buttons on the M E 2 bank Cross point button numbers This description applies to the example of a 32 button system From the left the first 31 buttons are numbered 1 2 30 31 When the 32nd button is set to be a SHIFT button these buttons can also be switched to select signals numbered from 32 to 62 While the SHIFT button is held down these switch to numbers 32 to 62 or alternatively every time the button is pressed switching is made between numbers to 31 and 32 to 62 Similarly the reentry buttons can be switched between two sets of numbers 121 to 123 and 125 to 127 Both the assignment of the 32nd button to a SHIFT button and the selection of the button operation mode can be done in a Setup menu Assigning signals to button You can assign a si
407. nel as follows Channel 1 create the image full size Channel 2 either create the image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen e Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 either create the image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen Channel 2 create the image full size e In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select Dual Notes on picture in picture two channel mode Create a minimum of three keyframes e Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 create the image full size Channel 2 since the priority is low it will not be visible on the screen so no particular restrictions apply In the Global Effect gt Ch1 to Ch4 gt Combiner menu when setting the priority of channel and channel 2 set the channel priority higher e In the intermediate part of the transition create the two images so that both are visible within the screen In the Global Effect gt Ch1 to Ch4 gt Combiner menu when setting the priority of channel 1 and channel 2 set the channel 2 priority higher Creating User Programmable DME Patterns It is recommended to make the priority settings at a keyframe point at which the two images are not overlapping e During the course of a transition there is a dead zone corresponding to the intermediat
408. ng it on The signals of frame memory source buses and 2 are assigned to the pair of FMs selected in step 2 and the combining of the background signal the signal providing the background for combination and the input signal the signal providing the foreground for combination is now possible The input signal is lowered by one line but when you apply a freeze the freeze image is returned to the correct position To use a color matte signal for the input signal press Frgd Color turning it on Even when pair mode is enabled you can make separate settings for each FM Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 If you turned Frgd Color off in step 6 if required press Input Adjust to display the Input Adjust menu and make the video process see page 498 and mask see page 499 settings for the input signal Still Image Operations 503 Kowa SWEJJ 7 J9JdEUQ Aowey ewei4 7 Ja deyo 504 9 To set the background signal to black press Bkgd Black turning it on e When the background signal is originally black Bkgd Black remains on e When the background signal is a freeze image an image frozen but not saved turning Bkgd Black on erases the unsaved freeze image and as a result Bkgd Black remains on 1 On the lt T
409. ng the frame memory in units of two frames only Creating an effect with still image files as a keyframe 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VFI Still and HF5 Create Key Frame The Create Key Frame menu appears Still Image Operations 509 Kowa ewes 7 Je deu9 MOWSJA ewei4 7 Ja deyo 510 e A thumbnail appears for each group of files having the same characters except for the last three characters in the file name e When Pair is on only pair files each pair comprising a main file and a sub file appear e When Pair is off both single files and pair files all appear In the frame memory selection area select the frame memory to be assigned This creates the effect in the user region to which the selected frame memory is assigned For details of the operating procedures see Selecting outputs FM and target frame memory page 495 Select the desired folder in the folder selection area By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear Turn the knob to select the register number in the user region Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 5 Register Effect register number 1 to 99 To search for an empty register in the user region use the numeric keypad control block see step 3 of Recalling a Register in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Use the arrow keys or turn t
410. ning it on Signal Selection 27 suonouny 0008 SAW 4e deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 28 Bank Auxiliary bus control block Bus name AUX1 to AUX48 buses MONITOR 1 to MONITOR 8 buses Frame memory source 1 and frame memory source 2 buses DME 1 to DME 8 video buses DME 1 to DME 8 key buses Edit preview bus M E 1 UTILITY 1 and M E 1 UTILITY 2 buses M E 2 UTILITY 1 and M E 2 UTILITY 2 buses M E 3 UTILITY 1 and M E 3 UTILITY 2 buses P P UTILITY 1 and P P UTILITY 2 buses M E 1 Key 1 fill to M E 1 Key 4 fill buses M E 1 Key 1 source to M E 1 Key 4 source buses M E 2 Key 1 fill to M E 2 Key 4 fill buses M E 2 Key 1 source to M E 2 Key 4 source buses M E 3 Key 1 fill to M E 3 Key 4 fill buses M E 3 Key 1 source to M E 3 Key 4 source buses DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 fill buses DSK 1 source to DSK 4 source buses M E 1 external DME bus M E 2 external DME bus M E 3 external DME bus P P external DME bus DME UTILITY 1 and DME UTILITY 2 buses Cross point button row 1st row 2nd row Delegation operation Turn on the appropriate buttons in accordance with the signal assignment made in the Setup menu Signal Selection a Dual background bus mode see below can be selected Dual background bus mode In this mode the shifted signal on the background A row can be select
411. ning it on To carry out a transition while playing back a frame memory clip Press one of the buttons corresponding to the clip to be used FM1 amp 2CLIP FM3 amp 4CLIP FM5 amp 6CLIP and FM7 amp 8CLIP You can also use the Misc gt Transition menu to select a desired transition type for the M E or PGM PST bank See Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation page 348 For an overview of the transition types see Transition Types page 41 The transition type selection buttons in the transition control block can be interchanged in the setup menu For details see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Make the required settings according to the selected transition type For details of the settings see the relevant section Super mix Super Mix Settings page 349 Preset color mix Color Matte Settings page 350 Wipe Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings page 438 Basic Operating Procedure 341 SUOMISUBIL g 19 dEU SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo 342 DME Wipe Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings page 466 Clip transition Clip Transition Operations page 524 Using the transition preview function page 363 you can check the transition on the preview monitor 7 Carry out the transition in the transition execution section For a gradual transition such as a mix dissolve or wipe Press the AUTO TRANS button or operate the
412. nitial state of the devices when the system is powered on For each device you can select Resume mode or Custom mode Resume mode This resumes the setting state at the previous power off operation This setting is only available for the switcher processor and panel Custom mode This uses the settings saved in non volatile memory or ROM within the device In this mode there are Setup and Initial Status settings which can be set separately e Setup mode Select the setup state to be used after powering on from the following User Start up using the user data previously saved with Setup Define Factory Start up with the factory default settings e Initial status mode Select the state of each device after powering on excluding the settings to which setup applies User Start up using the user data previously saved with Initial Status Define For the control panel this applies to the key bus delegation buttons only Factory Start up with the factory default settings For details of saving and recalling setup data see Saving and Recalling Setup Data page 194 and the appendix Data Saved by Setup Define and Initial Setup Define Volume 2 Autoload function Switch on or off the function to automatically load predetermined register data or frame memory image data at power on Set the data to be read in the File menu System reset and memory initialization Initialize e Reset Reset to state after p
413. nk this inserts or removes downstream keys 1 to 4 KEY PRIOR priority When this button is lit the setting of the key priority after the next transition is enabled The key priority after the next transition appears in the key status display ALL Pressing this button turns on a preselected set of the BKGD KEY 1 to KEY4 and KEY PRIOR buttons Make this setting in a Setup menu B Transition type selection buttons You can assign these buttons in setup to any transition type see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Press one of these buttons turning it on to determine the type of the next transition When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 two or more of the following buttons may light MIX In a background transition the new video fades in as the current video fades out During the transition the overall signal level is maintained at 100 In a key transition the key fades in for insertion or out for removal NAM non additive mix The current and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to ze
414. nk or PGM PST bank To select the key 1 fill signal check that the right hand KEY3 button in the M E bank or the DSK3 button in the PGM PST bank is off then press the button assigned to the desired signal To select the key 3 fill signal press the KEY3 button turning it on While the UTIL button on the right hand side is held down these buttons are assigned to the DME external video bus allowing you to select the signal on that bus Key 2 row The buttons in this row select the key 2 or key 4 signals to be inserted into the video on this M E bank or PGM PST bank To select the key 2 fill signal check that the right hand KEY4 button in the M E bank or the DSK4 button in the PGM PST bank is off then press the button assigned to the desired signal To select the key 4 fill signal press the KEY4 button turning it on While the UTIL button on the right hand side is held down these buttons are assigned to the DME utility 1 or 2 bus as follows When the KEY4 button is off holding down the UTIL button assigns these buttons to the DME utility 1 bus Holding down the UTIL button and pressing the KEY4 button turning it on assigns these buttons to the DME utility 2 bus Background A row Press the desired button to select the signal as the current background video on this M E bank or PGM PST bank While the UTIL button on the right hand side is held down in Hold mode these buttons are assig
415. nnot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO COM1 COM2 COM3 COMA COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPTO LPTI LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPTO In the kevboard window press the Enter button This saves the still image file in memorv The destination folder is the folder selected in step 4 of Freezing an image and writing it to memory If the entered folder name already exists a message to confirm overwriting appears When the system is powered off the file saved in memory is erased However you can recall a backed up file in the Frame Memory menu For details see File Backups page 531 and Restoring backed up files page 531 Carrying out a freeze and store simultaneously Press Freeze amp Store turning it on The system enters the freeze and store mode In this state if you press Frame or Field this carries out a freeze and simultaneously stores in a still image file Setting video processing To set video processing for the signal selected on a frame memory source bus use the following procedure in the Still gt Freeze Store menu 1 In the lt Video Process gt group press Video Process turning it on 2 Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters Still Image Operations Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Overall gain of the video signal 200 00 to 200 00 2 Y Gain Y signal gain 200 00 to 200 00
416. nouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 204 Copy Tally Copy Copy the tally information pertaining to a particular source to a different source These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally Parallel port settings Parallel Tally Make the parallel port settings for output of tally information pertaining to sources and destinations For each of the tally output terminal numbers specify the tally type and source address or destination level and address Serial tally settings Serial Tally Make the serial tally settings including tally type and source address for each serial tally port Simple Connection to MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel Option Setup To connect the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel to a CCP 8000 Center Control Panel using an S Bus data link requires a BKPF R70A Routing Switcher Controller Board or similar primary station and various settings for connection However using a simple connection the need for an S Bus data link primary station is avoided and direct connection to the MKS 8080 8082 is possible A simple connection is possible if the following conditions are met e There are no devices other than the CCP 8000 and MKS 8080 8082 connected on the S Bus data link e There are no more than 16 MKS 8080 8082 units connected on the S Bus data link For details of the connection procedure see Procedure for Simple Connection in Chapter 16 Vol
417. ns in the DME local coordinate space GLB global Enable operations in the DME global coordinate space The LOCAL and GLB buttons can be selected at the same time SRC source Enable operations in the DME source coordinate space TRGT target Enable operations in the DME target coordinate space The SRC and TRGT buttons cannot be selected at the same time When these buttons are held down trackball and Z ring operation is switched to a finer control fine mode AXIS LOC location When this button is lit the trackball moves the rotational axis of the image in the x axis and y axis directions and the Z ring moves the axis in the z axis direction ASP PERS aspect perspective When the SRC button is lit pressing this button enables the trackball to control the x axis and y axis directions independently and the Z ring controls the x axis and y axis directions together to vary the aspect ratio When the SHIFT button is held down and this button is pressed the trackball controls the skew of the image in the x axis and y axis directions When the TRGT button is lit pressing this button enables the trackball to control the perspective of the image in the x axis and y axis directions The Z ring controls the distance to the viewpoint LOC location SIZE When this button is lit the Z ring controls the image size The trackball moves the image in the x axis and y axis directions LOC locati
418. nsition Pattern Use the dedicated pattern 4 Depending on the selection in step 3 set the following parameters Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings e When Wipe is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 e When Pattern is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe See Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 560 If you selected Pattern you can also carry out the pattern selection by pressing the Mix Ptn Select button in the Matte Adjust menu to display the Mix Ptn Select menu Select any pattern appearing in the Mix Ptn Select menu standard wipe patterns to 24 by pressing the appropriate button and you can then adjust the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 If you selected Pattern in step 4 if required the following modifiers can be added After selecting a wipe mix skip to step 6 e When turning Position on and setting the pattern position Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position
419. nsition only the Soft setting is available Border Soft Soft border Border You can adjust the border width Soft You can adjust the edge softness Soft border You can adjust the border width and the softness of the inner and outer edges of the border When a border or soft border is selected the signal filling the border is called edge fill For the edge fill you can use a matte generated by the dedicated color matte generator or the signal selected on the utility 2 bus A matte can include color 1 and color 2 and a combination of the two colors a color mix Positioner Rotation You can move the wipe pattern to any position Positioner off gt Positioner on e The parameter H Position controls the horizontal position of the pattern A negative value moves the pattern to the left and a positive value moves the pattern to the right e The parameter V Position controls the vertical position of the pattern A negative value moves the pattern down and a positive value moves the pattern up You can rotate the pattern There are three rotation modes as follows Wipes 65 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 66 Wipes Angle This carries out a wipe with the pattern in a fixed angle Mm Angle off Angle on The parameter Angle
420. nsition type DME twice in quick succession Carrying out the above operation displays the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Transition gt DME Wipe Adjust menu which will be referred to below as simply the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu Selecting the independent key transition DME wipe pattern You select the independent key DME wipe pattern from the list of patterns displayed in the menu To select a DME wipe pattern for independent key1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the lt Pattern Select gt group of the Key DME Wipe Adjust menu press 1ch for one channel mode or 2ch for two channel mode The Pattern Select menu appears DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 477 s d M IWA 9 19jdeuo sodiM AWC 9 19jdeuo 2 Select the desired DME wipe pattern group with one of the following buttons In two channel mode only Page Turn and Page Roll are selectable Slide Squeeze slide and squeeze Split Door split and door Mirror Sphere mirror and sphere Character Trail character trail Wave Ripple wave and ripple Page Turn Roll page turn and page roll Frame I O frame in out 2D Trans 3D Trans 2D Trans and 3D Trans Sparkle Split Slide sparkle and split slide User Program user programmable DME For details of DME wipe patterns see Types of DME Wipe Pattern page 72 and DME Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 566 The patterns from the selected pattern group appear o
421. nsition rate for an independent key transition can be Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 263 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JHEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 264 set in the numeric keypad control block in the Flexi Pad control block or in a menu B Key source name display key snapshot buttons These display the source name selected on the corresponding keyer In key snapshot mode press these buttons corresponding to registers to 4 for the selected keyer to save or recall a key snapshot Key snapshot setting buttons K SS key snapshot This enables key snapshot mode K SS STORE key snapshot store To save a key snapshot hold down this button and press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register you want to save K MOD ENBL key modifier enable To recall key adjustment values and key modifier settings when recalling a key snapshot press this button turning it on K TR ENBL key transition enable To recall independent key transition settings when recalling a key snapshot press this button turning it on Flexi Pad Control Block Standard Type The Flexi Pad control block is used for saving and recalling wipe snapshots DME wipe snapshots and snapshots for recalling effects and shotbox content and for entering the transition rate Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Mode selection buttons 6 XPT HOLD
422. nt Rotation rate of pattern Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 e When Magnitude is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation at start of 400 00 to 100 00 9 transition 2 Magnitude Angle of rotation through course 200 00 to 200 00 2 of transition a See page 67 Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio Aspect ratio 1 Press Aspect in the Key Wipe Adjust menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameter Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions Knob Parameter 1 Aspect Adjustment Aspect ratio Setting values 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 67 Replicating the wipe pattern Multi 1 Press Multi in the Key Wipe Adjust menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1to49 a See page 68 Wipe Settings for Independent Kev Transitions 459 sodiM G 9jdeuQ Wipe Snapshots sodiM g Jaydeyo Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad Buttons used 460 You can snapshot and save a wipe pattern together with the current settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register fo
423. o KEY4 buttons or DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank turning it on To enable the key priority setting which determines the key overlay order after the transition Press the KEY PRIOR button turning it on You can press more than one button at the same time To change the keys and background presets in Setup menus simultaneously Press the ALL button To allocate a particular next transition button to the ALL button function see Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 340 Basic Operating Procedure 3 For the transition to change the key priority set the priority for after the transition For details of the key priority see Selecting the key priority page 36 For details of the key priority setting operation see Key Priority Setting page 343 Select the new video used for the transition e In the background B row of cross point buttons select the new background video e When inserting a key select the key signal and make any required settings For details of key settings see Chapter 4 Keys page 377 To carry out a cut transition skip to step 7 otherwise continue to step 5 Select one of the transition type selection buttons in the transition control block To carry out a dissolve to the new video Press one of the MIX NAM SUPER MIX and PST COLOR MIX buttons turning it on To carry out a wipe Press the WIPE or DME button tur
424. o 1 produces the through state in which no the value the more strongly the filter applies e When a chroma key is selected filter is applied The larger Knob 3 Parameter Density Adjustment Key density Setting values 0 00 to 100 00 e When a color vector key is selected Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Y Clip Reference level for creating 109 59 to 7 31 luminance signal 2 Y Gain Luminance signal sensitivity 100 00 to 100 00 C Clip Reference level for creating 100 00 to 0 00 chrominance signal C Gain Chrominance signal sensitivity 100 00 to 100 00 5 Density Key density 0 00 to 100 00 Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Y Filter Luminance signal filter coefficient 1 to 9 2 C Filter Chrominance signal filter 1to9 coefficient e When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Degree of edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 Density Key density 0 00 to 100 00 5 Make the following settings as required 380 Key Setting Operations Using Menus To invert the black and white sense of the key source Press Key Invert turning it on To adjust the horizontal position or key source width for a luminance key linear key or chroma key Press Key Position turning it on a
425. o a KEV Le ens 415 Other Key Setting Operations ens 417 RESIZED AAAA ET EE OA A 419 Two Dimensional Transformations of KeVs en 419 Resizer Interpolation Settings sse nenn nn nnz 424 Resizer Crop Border Settings ss enennenen ness 424 Applying Resizer Effects ss nnnennenannnnnnana men nn ena 427 Key Snapshots ccvsissssssccosscscctssesecessasscssencssossesvoonscccsesseosssassaesscsdesesseevssvaseasin 433 Key Snapshot Operations ss ennnnnnennnnnnnenn sense 433 Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module 435 Chapter 5 Wipes Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings ssessnnsenesnnzznnssnonnennsennennoensnnoenes 438 Wipe Settings Menu s 33 33 issi sas ii jistizita hotatasagscvtenieeseasevseseaececboeyeastevsovecd 438 Wipe Pattern Selection ic s iscecsssssesysosses seni stescascsestebessessseapesisvedscoegezeee ee 438 Pattern MIX ia A e E tte 441 1 0 Table of Contents Setting Wipe Modifiers asane n Ea a EERE 443 Wipe Modity Cleafs i e A E As 454 Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions cccscsssssssscsseees 455 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings 455 Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers 456 Wipe Snapshots viciscsccccsccrcsssoessssssecocossenssonessceessesosovsesocensecsoactesonsssassacecteseate 460 Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad sse 460 Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus
426. o set the modifiers for the sub pattern select HF6 Sub Modify and make the settings in the Sub Modify menu Operations in the Main Modify menu and Sub Modify menu are the same Independently set modifiers for the main pattern and sub pattern Positioner Rotation Aspect ratio Pattern replication MULTI Pairing Modulation Spring Spiral The following sections show examples of modifying the main pattern Specifying the wipe direction Direction You can specify the wipe direction normal reverse To specify the wipe direction in a menu 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears 2 In the lt Direction gt group specify the wipe direction Normal regular direction Normal Reverse alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse reverse direction to normal To specify the wipe direction with a button in the transition control block In the transition control block of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks press the following direction selection buttons NORM Normal NORM REV Normal reverse REV Reverse Splitting the wipe pattern 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears 444 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings 2 Press Split turning it on 3 Set the following parameters Modifying the wipe pattern edge 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select
427. oint control block see page 256 or using the user preference buttons in the menu control block see page 294 Utility 185 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 186 Shotbox The term shotbox refers to a function whereby for each specified region any snapshot or keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously The simultaneous recall setting data such as region names snapshot numbers and keyframe effect numbers are stored in registers There are 99 registers for each control panel r Register 1 M E 1 Snapshot 1 User2 Effect 5 Auto Run On DME ch3 Effect 1 Register 2 M E 1 Snapshot 1 DME chi Snapshot 15 GPI Effect 1 Auto Run Off Register 3 M E 1 Effect 1 P P Effect 90 Useri Effect 1 Auto Run Off Shotbox registers Register 99 _ P P Effect 2 DME chi Snapshot 1 Auto Run On The previous figure shows schematically the settings in the 99 shotbox registers Each register may contain any combination of the regions to which the register applies with the snapshots or effects to be recalled The Auto Run function is an attribute which can be set for each register When this is set to On an effect recalled by a shotbox operation is automatically run e When register 1 is executed this recalls M E 1 snapshot 1 User2 effect 5 and DME ch3 effect 1 For register 1 auto
428. olor Invert button turning it on Color Background Setting Operations 541 spunosbyoeg 10 09 8 saldeyp Q a gt D el a D QO 2 fe Q D Q A a f c pe a n 542 Color Background Setting Operations Chapter 9 Copy Basic Copy and Swap Operations and Swap Pree yy Copy and Swap Menu Operations sen ennnenennnnnznnznnzznnzna Copy by Button Operation Basic Copy and Swap Operations dems pue Adoy 6 Jajdeup 544 Copy and Swap Menu Operations There are two ways of carrying out a copy operation by using the menus or by a simple button operation Swap operations and operations on DME data can only be done with a menu operation Accessing the Copy Swap menu In the menu operation section top menu selection buttons press the Copy Swap button then press VFI Copv Swap The Copy Swap menu appears Here a copy swap operation on wipe data is described by way of example using the Copy Swap gt Wipe menu but the same general procedure applies to all of the following menus e M E Copying and swapping M E data e Key Copying and swapping key data e Wipe Copying and swapping wipe data e DME Wipe Copying and swapping DME wipe data e Matte Copying and swapping matte data e Color Copying and swapping color data e DME Copying and swapping data by DME channels e Format Converter Copying format converter data for MVS 8000G only For details see
429. olume 2 Wipe Snapshots 461 sodiM G Jaydeyo sodiM g Jaydeyo 462 Meaning of the state of buttons Off Nothing is saved in the register Lit orange Settings are saved in the register Lit yellow The most recently recalled register Canceling the saving of a wipe snapshot To cancel the saving of a wipe snapshot immediately after performing it hold down the STORE STATS button and press the UNDO button The STORE STATS button changes from amber to green On a simple type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to cancel the saving of a wipe snapshot Recalling a wipe snapshot 1 In the Flexi Pad control block press the WIPE button This switches the Flexi Pad control block to the mode for recalling a wipe snapshot 2 Press the memory recall button for the register from which you want to recall the wipe snapshot The button lights and the saved wipe snapshot is recalled At this point the numeric display shows the pattern number or register name Canceling the recall of a wipe snapshot To cancel the recall of a wipe snapshot press the UNDO button Deleting a wipe snapshot When the WIPE button is lit in the Flexi Pad control block hold down the STORE STATS button and press the memory recall button for the register in which you want to delete the wipe snapshot The indication of the memory recall button reverts from the wipe pattern or register name to the register number In a simpl
430. on This inserts or deletes key 3 instantaneously When key 3 is present in the final program output from the switcher this lights red and otherwise lights amber TAKE button This carries out an auto transition on key 3 K SS key snapshot button This enables key snapshot mode In key snapshot mode it is possible to save and recall key snapshots Key source name display key snapshot buttons These show the signal name of the key fill selected for key 3 and the transition rate on two buttons In key snapshot mode these correspond to registers 1 and 2 for key 3 press to save or recall a key snapshot To save a key snapshot with the K SS button lit amber hold down SHIFT button and press one of the key snapshot buttons This saves a key snapshot in the button you pressed which lights yellow Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 305 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeueg JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 306 Downstream Key Control Block Key delegation buttons Key source name display key snapshot buttons Key snapshot setting buttons Independent key transition execution section Independent key transition type selection buttons Key delegation buttons Press one of the DSK1 to DSK4 buttons to delegate this control block to the corresponding ke
431. on XYZ When this button is lit the trackball moves the image in the X axis and y axis directions and the Z ring moves the image in the z axis direction SHIFT While holding down this button pressing the ASP PERS button or ROT button switches to the shifted version of the corresponding function CLR WORK BUFR clear work buffer Press this button once to clear only the three dimensional transform parameters of the information held in the work buffer Press twice in rapid succession to clear all of the parameters and return to the default state ROT rotation When this button is lit the trackball rotates the image about the x and y axes and the Z ring rotates the image about the z axis Pressing this while holding down the SHIFT button enables rotation of the image in the Spin mode The trackball and Z ring operate in the same manner X Y Z These restrict which axes the trackball and Z ring can control You can select more than one When one of these buttons is selected you can enter the parameter value for the corresponding axis using the numeric keypad control block CTR center Pressing this button changes the values of the three dimensional parameters currently controlled by the trackball and Z ring to the closest detent values Pressing twice in rapid succession returns the parameter values to their defaults When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled Names and Fu
432. on the setting value range is 0 to 4 To adjust the edge fill color When BDR is selected the MORE button lights amber Pressing the MORE button to turn it green then allows you to adjust the edge fill color parameters with the knobs Knob __ Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Hue 359 to 0 4 Density Density 0 to 100 Setting the drop border or shadow parameters When the DROP BDR or SHDW button is lit green the parameter settings differ between the key drop OFF and key drop ON modes see page 54 as shown below Switching between these two modes is made by turning the KEY DROP button on or off e Key drop OFF mode Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0to8 2 Position Position 359 to 180 4 Density Density 0 to 100 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 393 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 e Key drop ON mode Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0to8 2 Position Position 359 to 0 4 Density Density 0 to 100 a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 393 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 411 sfog vp saideyo skey p 13 dey9 412 To adjust the edge fill color When DROP BDR or SHDW is sele
433. on 128 Preset color mix 42 Preview 46 363 selection buttons 287 Previous page button 323 PRIOR SET button 263 312 PST COLOR MIX 261 311 R Random diamond dust wipes 565 Reentry buttons 26 257 Reference region 166 Regions 165 selection buttons 285 Registers 166 Related manuals 20 Replication 459 Resizer 58 Resizer DME wipe 481 Resizer DME wipe patterns 580 Resume mode 192 Right button 332 Rings 133 Ripple 133 Roll 137 Rotary wipes 562 Rotation 65 117 450 458 Router interface setup 203 RTR button 290 S Screen saver 198 Search dial 278 Second 2ND button 289 Selected bus display 289 source name displays 289 SEMI LINK 63 Separate sides 150 Sepia 127 Setup 187 DCU input output 202 overview 187 panel 195 router interface 203 switcher 198 system 187 Setup data saving recalling 194 Shadow 53 157 parameters 411 Shaped Video 150 SHIFT button 259 Shift button 332 Shortcut 335 Shotbox 186 SHOW KEY button 269 Show key function 418 Side flags DME wipe action 104 MISC menu 550 overview 102 settings 102 wipe action 103 Signal assignment to buttons 29 name display 33 selection 25 Simple transition 371 Simple P P Software 227 Sketch 129 Skew 120 Slide 566 575 580 Snapshot 182 attributes 183 registers 167 Soft edge 54 456 Softening edge 413 wipe pattern edge 456 Solarization 128 Source coordinate space 110 name displays 290 Space button 332 Speed 66 Sphere 138 Spin 117 Spiral 71 453
434. on and off Assign SUB MENU SITE to a menu control block top menu selection button or user preference button To switch to the subsidiary menu site press this button turning it on For details of the assignment operation see Assigning functions to the menu control block Top menu and user preference buttons in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Shortcut Menu Recalling a menu using the shortcut menu 1 In the Home menu select VF2 Favorites and HF1 Shortcut The following menu appears Progrem DME Wipe Transition Edoe Rate Pin Limit 1264 2 In the Group Select box select the group The group buttons appear 3 Press the button for the desired menu Creating a shortcut menu Assign frequently used menus to buttons to create a Favorites menu To create a menu group 1 In the Home menu select VF2 Favorites and HF1 Shortcut The following menu appears 2 Press Group Edit The following menu appears Basic Menu Operations 335 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JaJdEUQ 336 3 With the cursor select the group name in this case a blank button for the operation 4 Press Rename A keyboard window appears 5 Enter a group name maximum 24 characters and press Enter This confirms the group name To copy a menu group 1 In the Home gt Favorites gt Group Edit menu press the button for the copy source grou
435. on at a time When one of them is on turning another of them on automatically turns off the one that has been on Motion Decay Blurs the motion of a moving video by creating afterimages of the moving video See Note in the preceding section Trail Digital Multi Effects DME You can make the afterimages stardust trails Keyframe Strobe Freezes the video each time the effect passes a keyframe See Note in the section Trail You can make the afterimages stardust trails Wind This effect strobes the image at regular intervals and moves the frozen image in a fixed direction leaving an afterimage Note The Wind function is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A Spotlighting Creates the effect of a spotlight striking the surface of the image You can set up to three light sources lights 1 to 3 Notes e The Spotlighting function is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A e The BZDM 9050 Texture Lighting Software for MVE 9000 is required to set lights 2 and 3 Digital Multi Effects DME 143 suonouny 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 144 Adjustments to the image surface The following adjustments can be made to the image surface struck by the light e Adjusting the brightness of the whole image e Selecting the image surface effect Flat The image surface is unchanged causing the selected light source to appear as the effect Texture A texture appears on
436. on of the spiral A value of 100 00 represents the maximum movement in the counterclockwise direction and a value of 100 00 represents the maximum movement in the clockwise direction The parameter Wave Speed determines the speed of the lateral waves A value of 100 00 represents the maximum speed to the left and a value of 100 00 represents the maximum speed to the right Wipe Snapshots You can snapshot and save a wipe pattern together with the current settings of its modifiers and pattern limit in a dedicated register for recall when required There are 10 wipe snapshot registers on each M E bank and the PGM PST bank Use the Flexi Pad control block in each switcher bank or the Menu control block to save and recall wipe snapshots For details see Wipe Snapshots page 460 For simple transitions see page 371 there are eight wipe snapshot registers on each M E bank and the PGM PST bank Wipe Modify Clear By a simple operation you can return the wipe state to that set in initial status For details of the menu operation to return the wipe state to that set in initial status see Returning to default state in function groupings page 324 Wipes 71 suonouny 0008 SAW L doldeuD SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 72 DME Wipes A DME wipe is a wipe transition that uses a DME effect to change from one video image to the next There are two types of DME wipe those which can be select
437. on rate by a menu operation 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first the desired one from VF1 Keyl to VF4 Key4 then HF6 Transition The Transition menu for the selected key appears 2 Select any transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group If in the Setup menus you set insertion deletion as independent modes make the settings for insertion in the lt On Transition Type gt group and the settings for deletion in the lt Off Transition Type gt group Independent Key Transitions 367 SUOMISUBIL g sa deyo SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo 368 3 Turn the knob to set the transition rate Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Rate Transition rate O to 999 frame count Independent key transition rate display To check the set independent key transition rate press the key source name display key snapshot button above the corresponding delegation button when the K SS button is off Displaying the independent key transition rates in a menu and changing the settings For each of the M E and PGM PST banks you can also display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate and change the settings For more details see Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings page 553 Independent Key Transitions Fade to Black Fade to Black Operation FTB button ME
438. on single transition mode one channel mode e Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen e Create the last keyframe to be a full size image e In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select Single Notes on flip tumble one channel mode e Create the first keyframe image at full size In the lt Back gt group of the DME gt Input Output gt Video Key menu depending on the direction of the rotation you want during the transition press H Invert or V Invert turning it on Creating User Programmable DME Patterns Create the last keyframe with the image inverted so the back side is visible and with the size at full size In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select Flip Tumble Notes on frame in out one channel mode Create a minimum of three keyframes Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the screen At this point press the PAUSE button in the keyframe control block turning it on to set a pause for the keyframe Either create the last keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen In the lt Transition Mode gt
439. onnect a device such as a mouse keyboard pen tablet and so on that is equipped with a USB interface to any of these connectors For details on the devices that can be connected consult your Sony representative Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 295 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JaJdEUQ 296 Memory Stick USB Connections Block Memory Stick status indicator 6 Memory Stick slot DEVICE connectors Memory Stick status indicator Lights in red during access to a Memory Stick Do not power the unit off or remove a Memory Stick when the Memory Stick status indicator is lit Memory Stick slot Insert Memory Sticks You can use it in software installation and for saving and reading data such as snapshot keyframe effect and setup data See the next item Memory Sticks for more information about the usable Memory Sticks and their handling Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel DEVICE connectors There are three USB connectors You can connect a device such as a mouse keyboard pen tablet and so on that is equipped with a USB interface to any of these connectors For details on the devices that can be connected consult your Sony representative About Memory Sticks Usable
440. ons To insert or delete key 1 and key 2 simultaneously Hold down the KEY 1 and KEY2 buttons and press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME buttons To use a super mix or preset color mix Select Super Mix or Preset Color Mix in the Misc gt Transition menu for the M E or PGM PST bank To set the key priority use the Misc gt Key Priority menu for the M E or PGM PST bank For details see Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation page 345 The transition type selection buttons IMIX NAM WIPE and DME can be assigned to other transition types in setup For details see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Select the new background for after the transition e Select the background video with the background B row of cross point buttons e To insert a key select the key signal and make various settings as required For details of key settings see Chapter 4 Keys page 377 Depending on the transition type selected in step 2 make the required settings For details of the settings see the following sections Super mix Super Mix Settings page 349 Preset color mix Color Matte Settings page 350 Wipe Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings page 438 DME Wipe Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings page 466 Clip transition Clip Transition Operations page 524 5 Carry out the transition in the transition execution s
441. ons the display does not change When the operation applies to a VTR disk recorder the displayed setting value depends on whether the TIMELINE button is on or off as follows When the TIMELINE button is on Displays the start and stop points of the last set keyframe on the timeline When the keyframe number is changed and the last register and keyframe change the display also changes timeline setting mode When the TIMELINE button is off Displays the Cueup amp Play rewind action start and stop points B Device selection buttons These buttons are used for selecting assigned external devices or frame memory clips Each button can only be assigned to a single device Carry out the assignment in the Setup menu see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To select an assigned device press the corresponding button which lights green To select more than one device simultaneously hold down the button for the first selection while pressing the buttons for the other selections in turn The second and subsequent selected buttons light amber If you press another button without holding down the first selected button the second button will be the reference device and light green DEV Assign external devices DEVI to DEV12 FM CLIP Assign frame memory clips FMI to FM8 Device selection buttons can be set as SBOX buttons or DELAY button in the Setup menu SBOX shotbox bu
442. ons 549 OF Nua OSIN OL JojdeuQ 913 nue OSIIN OL Jadeyuo 550 Enabling or disabling control from the editing keyboard 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button MISC then select VFI Enable and HF2 Plug In Editor The Misc gt Enable gt Plug In Editor menu appears 2 In the lt Control From Plug In Editor gt group press Editor Enable Each time you press the button toggles between enable and disable To enable control of the preview bus only When control from the editing keyboard is disabled when Editor Enable is set to Disable to enable control of the preview bus only press PVW Bus Enable in the lt Control From Plug In Editor gt group Side Flag Settings The side flag function is only supported on an MVS 8000A system and MVS 8000G system The term side flags refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect ratio 4 3 embedded within a 16 9 frame when these areas are filled with a selected image from the utility 1 bus For details of the side flag function see Side Flags on page 102 Enabling and disabling side flags with a menu operation You can enable or disable side flags for the backgrounds A and B of each of the M E and PGM PST banks As an example to enable side flags for background B row on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button MISC t
443. ons to select the video signals for the third and fourth channels differ from those in the previous procedure select the video signals on the AUX bus allocated in a Setup menu Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Device Interface gt DME Setting gt DME SDI Interface menu When using a second key in combination with a dedicated interface select the signal to be used on the AUX bus You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu see page 556 Assigning the DME output signal to a monitor signal 1 Holding down the output destination specification button MON in the key control block use the DME channel selection buttons to select the DME channel DMEI to DME8 you want to use The selected DME output is assigned to DME MON V and DME MON K 2 To check the DME assignment status hold down just the MON button While it is held down the lit color of the DME1 to DME8 buttons shows the key assignment status Lit green Shows the DME currently being monitored Lit amber Shows a DME which can be monitored Off DME is not assigned Other Key Setting Operations Using an external processed key You can select and use the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the AUX buses 1 Select the keyer to be allocated 2 In the key control block press PROC KEY turning it on The button lights amber and on the currently selected keyer the key fill and key source are assigned to reentry signals PROC V
444. ontrol block or simple type independent key transition control block Key transition selection buttons Key status display Transition type selection buttons INN g A Transition execution section Transition control block simple right hand tvpe Basic Operations for Simple Transitions Carrving out a transition using a simple tvpe transition control block 1 With the background A row of cross point buttons in the cross point control block select the background video Simple Transition 371 SUOMISUBIL g 19 JdEUQ SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo 372 2 Simple Transition Using one of the following methods select the way in which the transition will affect the image Use a combination of the transition type selection buttons MIX NAM WIPE and DME and the next transition selection buttons IKEX 1 and KEY2 For an overview of the mix NAM wipe and DME wipe transition types see Transition Types page 41 To change the background only Press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME buttons The KEY 1 and KEY2 buttons go off and the system changes to the background transition mode To insert or delete key 1 Hold down the KEY 1 button and press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME buttons To insert or delete key 2 Hold down the KEY2 button and press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME butt
445. ops the tape KF keyframe button When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button cues the tape automatically to the start point When not pressing this button to turn it on allows you to use the fader lever as a key frame fader Key status display For each of keys to 4 the corresponding ON indicator lights when the key is inserted It also shows the priority 1 to 4 of each key PRIOR priority SET button While this button is held down you can set the key priority The setting mode when this button is pressed depends on whether or not the KEY PRIOR button is lit as follows e When the KEY PRIOR button is off the current key priority is set e When the KEY PRIOR button is lit the key priority after the next transition is set Press the KEY PRIOR button as required to switch between these two modes In either mode hold down the PRIOR SET button and press the button KEY 1 to KEY4 corresponding to the key you want to bring to the front The following controls are used as the independent key transition control block O Key delegation buttons These buttons delegate this independent key transition control block to a desired keyer Press one of the KEY 1 to KEY4 buttons DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank turning it on You can press more than one button to select two or more keyers While these buttons are held down you
446. or DME processor or MVE 9000 CCP 8000 series Center Control Panel Control panel or center control panel DCU 8000 MKS 8700 Device Control Unit DCU or MKS 8700 DCU 2000 MKS 2700 Device Control Unit DCU or MKS 2700 Introduction 19 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 20 a Where there are differences among the MVS 8000 8000SF system MVS 8000A 8000ASF system and MVS 8000G 8000GSF system these may be noted specifically in the relevant place System nomenclature The following terms are used for systems depending on the combination of installed options and the signal format System configuration and features Term for system System with installed option boards and HD system settings to support HDTV format System with installed option boards and SD system settings to support SDTV format A system in which the center control panel has 4M E system four M E banks A system in which the center control panel has 3M E system three M E banks Asystem in which the center control panel has 2M E system two M E banks Related manuals Introduction The following manuals are supplied with the individual products of the MVS 8000 Multi Format Switcher system MVS 8400 8300 8200 Switcher Processor Pack e MVS 8400 8300 8200 Operation Manual e MVS 8400 8300 8200 Installation Manual MVS 8000A C 8000AS C Switcher Processor Pack e MVS 8000A C 8000AS
447. or Extended VTR in an effect register and recalling this register you can operate the following buttons in the keyframe control block to automatically control the VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR REWIND button Cue up to the start point timecode RUN button Play With this function you can also stop the VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR used for playback at the stop point timecode recalled from the same register Disk recorder video disk communications protocol operation when loop recue is set When loop is set playback repeatedly between the start point and stop point When recue is set when playback reaches the stop point automatically cue up to the start point VTR disk recorder Extended VTR timeline For a keyframe effect controlled from the center control panel the timeline allows you to set a VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR action at a keyframe point on the timeline Timeline actions The actions that can be used on the timeline are as follows e Start External Devices e Stop e Cue up e Variable speed e For a disk recorder the maximum number of files for a single register is eight e The timeline does not support loop and recue For the action settings VTR disk recorder Extended VTR timeline editing use the Device menu The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect and advance the effect to the key
448. or an effect like film You can specify the ratio of advancement For Hard Freeze and Time Strobe you can select the first field or the frame as the freeze timing Nonlinear Effects You can add a variety of effects including effects that change the shape of the image as a whole The following nonlinear effects are available For more information about settings and operations with nonlinear effects see Nonlinear Effect Settings in Chapter 11 Volume 2 It is not possible to apply two or more nonlinear effects at the same time Turning any nonlinear effect on automatically turns all other nonlinear effects off Wave Produces a wave like effect in the image Digital Multi Effects DME 131 suojouny 0008 SAW 4a deu9 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 132 There are two modes H amp V and Size You can set the size and frequency of the waves the wave form the amount of wave movement and the range In H amp V mode you can also set the wave angle GARA Pura pisigal PMs ANDOA When 720P 59 94 signal format is used the wave effect is not supported on the MVE 8000 Mosaic Glass Makes the image rougher and finer at a specified interval There are two modes H amp V and Size You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image the wave form the amount of wave movement and the range In H amp V mode you can also set the wave angle A pe GIES Riche oe Flag Applies an e
449. or recall when required There are 10 DME wipe snapshot registers for each of the M E and P P banks DME Wipes To save and recall these registers use the Flexi Pad control block in each switcher bank or the Menu control block See DME Wipe Snapshots page 482 In the case of a simple transition system there are eight DME wipe snapshot registers for each switcher bank DME Wipe Modify Clear By a simple operation you can return the DME wipe state to that set in initial Status For details of the menu operation to return the DME wipe state to that set in initial status see Returning to default state in function groupings page 324 Resizer DME wipes Using the resizer you can carry out key DME wipes This function is supported by the MVS 8000G DME wipe patterns available for resizer DME wipe You can use the following patterns of the DME wipe pattern one channel mode that can be used in a resizer DME wipe 7000 series numbers e Slide pattern numbers 7001 to 7008 e Squeeze pattern numbers 7021 to 7031 e frame in out pattern numbers 7201 to 7208 7221 to 7224 Relation between resizer DME wipes and other effects The following relations hold between resizer DME wipes and other effects Relation with processed keys It is not possible to select a resizer DME wipe for a key for which processed key is enabled Relation with resizer A resizer DME wipe cannot be used for a key for which
450. ortion in the previous illustration is as shown in the following table 154 Digital Multi Effects DME Combination Indication in figure Chi Ch2 Chi and Ch2 30 70 Mixing Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 mnl 7 Mix1 gt ch2 2 gt gt Ch3 Mix2 ch3 3 gt If the Mixli setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40 the proportions of the channels in the mixed portions in the previous illustration are as shown in the following table Combination Indication in figure Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch1 and Ch2 30 70 Ch2 and Ch3 mm 60 40 Ch1 and Ch3 mm 3096 70 Ch1 Ch2 andChsjamm 30 42 28 Pairwise mixing of Ch1 and Ch2 and Ch3 and Ch4 Chi 1 gt Chi Mix1 gt Ch2 2 Ch3 3 jw Ch3 Mix2 gt cha 4 Digital Multi Effects DME 155 suonouny 0008 SAW 4a deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo If the Mixli setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40 the proportions of the channels in the mixed portions in the previous illustration are as shown in the following table Combination Indication in figure Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Chi and Ch2 p 30 70 Ch3 and Ch4 60 40 Ch1 crossed with Ch2 Chi 1 gt Depth ch2 2 gt Brick This effect creates a re
451. osition key inversion and adjustment values for the particular key type Clip Gain Density Filter etc This includes color vector key wipe pattern key key wipe pattern key and chroma key However in the case of a chroma key it excludes color cancel Y balance foreground CCR window and shadow Full mode All settings except transition the same parameters as simple mode Fine Key key modifiers main and sub mask settings chroma key detailed settings and so on For the settings for these modes see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Key Snapshots Key settings other than the key on off status and the key priority can all be instantaneously saved in a dedicated register for recall when required A key snapshot comprises three values a cross point button number key memory full mode and independent key transition and can be called in any combination There are four key snapshot registers for each keyer For details of key snapshot operations see Key Snapshots page 433 Blink The blink function provides the following effects Key blink The key is inserted and deleted at the specified frequency You can also set the frequency and the proportion of the cycle for which the key is inserted Edge blink Key fill and key edge fill are interchanged at the specified frequency You can specify both the frequency and the proportion of the cycle for
452. ou can adjust the width of the side flag area Image to fill the side flag Input source with aspect ratio areas selected from utility 1 bus Turn the side flag function on Side flag area Side flag area Note The side flag function is only supported on the MVS 8000A 8000G Side Flag Settings To use the side flags the following settings are required Side Flags Input source aspect ratio auto side flags and auto crop settings Aspect ratio 4 3 setting Set the input signal to aspect ratio 4 3 If set to 16 9 the side flags are disabled Auto side flag setting This function automatically applies side flags when a 4 3 signal is selected in the cross point control block Auto crop setting When carrying out a DME wipe this function automatically crops the image during transition to 4 3 Adjusting the width of the side flag area You can set the left and right sides separately For the operation for the above setting see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Side flag enable disable setting Using the Misc menu or a button operation you can enable or disable the side flags for the background bus of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks For more details see Side Flag Settings page 550 Assigning the side flag function to a cross point button To switch the side flags on and off with a button operation it is first necessary to assi
453. ource signals being keyed by the currently selected keyer to frame memory source buses and 2 When DME is selected on the keyer the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory Selecting outputs FM and target frame memory The following description applies to the case of settings for FM1 amp 2 but the procedures are similar for the other cases 1 In the Frame Memory menu press one of VFI to VF4 and select the required HF menu The current status of frame memory appears See page 490 2 From the pair selection buttons press the buttons corresponding to FM1 and FM2 This assigns the signals to FMI and FM2 Still Image Operations 495 Kowa SWEJJ 7 J9JdEUQ Aowsey ewe 7 Ja deyo To the right of the target FM selection buttons the FMI and FM2 output status appears see page 492 3 If required press Pair to select the FM operation mode pair mode On Operate on FM1 3 5 7 and FM2 4 6 8 as a pair Off Operate on FM1 3 5 7 and FM2 4 6 8 individually For more details see Pair mode page 87 In the Pair Recombination menu the Pair operation is not possible 4 Press the target FM selection button FM1 or FM2 see page 492 to select the FM operations apply to When Pair is On Whichever of FM1 and FM2 you press the pair is selected When Pair is Off One of the targets must be selected How
454. overview of the color background see page 97 Color Background Settings Menu Accessing the Color Bkgd1 menu Use either of the following operations e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button COLOR BKODI and press VF1 Color Bkgd1 e Press a cross point button assigned to color background 1 twice in rapid succession The above operation displays the Color Bkgd1 menu Basic Color Background Setting Operations Making a single color matte Flat Color If you are not using the color mix function to combine two colors use the following procedure 1 In the lt Matte gt group of the Color Bkgd 1 menu press Flat Color turning it on You can now adjust color 1 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 538 Color Background Setting Operations Making a color combination color mix To combine color 1 and color 2 use the following procedure 1 In the lt Matte gt group of the Color Bkgd1 menu press Mix Color turning it on 2 Set the following parameters as required Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 Soft Degree of softening of edge 0 00 to 100 00 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 249 a The patterns are the same as for a standard wipe
455. oves e Selecting the lighted area You can select the area lit by the spotlight FRGD The light strikes the image foreground BKGD The light strikes the image background Both The light strikes both foreground and background Digital Multi Effects DME Background Foreground Spotlight No effect FRGD selected BKGD selected Both selected e Surface Flat For the currentiv selected light source onlv vou can forciblv make the image surface effect flat This is effective when vou have selected texture as image surface effect and want a flat effect for one light source only e Light shape Creates the light shape Select the shape pattern For shape patterns see the appendix Shape Patterns Volume 2 Set the size degree of deformation softness and rotation e Ring settings Shines the light with a hole in the middle like a doughnut Adjust the following parameters Offset Distance to move the center of the ring from the initial position the position set when selecting the light source in the lt Spot Mode gt group Radius Inner side radius of the ring Angle When an Offset is set the rotation angle of the ring around the initial center position Angle Rotation angle Initial center position Radius Digital Multi Effects DME 147 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 148 e Fill blending modes Specifies the way in
456. owering on e All Clear Clear the memory and carry out initialization The Network Config System Config Format and Start Up setup values are set by reference to data stored in non volatile memory and the system automatically starts up It is not necessary to reset the Date Time settings For more details see Saving and Recalling Setup Data page 194 Installation and device settings Install Unit Config This installs the software and firmware in all devices including the DCU connected to the Data LAN 192 Setup Install Automatically detects the software that can be installed on each device and installs the selected software There are also the following functions Detail Information Gives details of the software and firmware installed in each device Unit Config Carries out device settings Switches the color corrector function of the switcher processor between secondary color correction and spot color adjustment sets the field polarity of frame memory images and so on License Makes the license valid or invalid Device management Maintenance e Date and time setting e Formatting a memory card e Primary settings for USB external storage device e Reloading a USB driver e Formatting the hard disk e Locking setup menu operations For each VF button group selecting a set of candidate menus to be locked then locking all of the candidates using a password Except for list scrolling moving menus and sim
457. p 2 Press Copy 3 Press the button for the copy destination group 4 Press Paste This copies the menu group settings To delete menu group settings 1 In the Home gt Favorites gt Group Edit menu select the group to be deleted 2 Press Clear A confirmation message appears Basic Menu Operations 3 Press Yes This deletes the settings To register a menu on a button You can register 15 buttons in one group 1 In the Home gt Favorites gt Shortcut menu press Button Edit Button name 2 Move the cursor to the position where you want to display the button To change the content of an already displayed button press the button to select it 3 Press Page Set A page number input window appears 4 Enter the page number for the menu you want to register 5 Press Rename A keyboard window appears 6 Enter the button name maximum 24 characters 7 9 To change the button color press Color Set Button color samples appear Press the desired color This completes the assignment of the menu to the button Repeat steps 2 to 8 to complete the Favorites menu To copy button settings 1 In the Home gt Favorites gt Button Edit menu press the copy source button to select it Press Copy Press the copy destination button to select it Press Paste This copies the button settings To delete button settings In the Home gt Favorites gt
458. p gt Recall assigned buttons a When the TIMELINE button is Off b When the TIMELINE button is On Downstream key fade to black control block Buttons Menus See DSK1 DSK2 e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3XX 2 Chapter 16 Volume 2 a When a key other than DSK1 or DSK2 is assigned the menu for the corresponding key appears Transition control block and Flexi Pad control block simple type Buttons Menus See KEY1 DSK1 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 gt XX page 378 e PGM PST gt DSK1 gt XX KEY2 DSK2 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key2 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK2 gt XX WIPE e M E 1 2 3 gt Wipe gt Main Pattern page 438 e PGM PST gt Wipe gt Main Pattern DME e M E 1 2 3 gt DME Wipe 2XX page 467 e PGM PST gt DME Wipe gt XX SNAPSHOT Snapshot gt Snapshot gt XX Chapter 14 Volume 2 MCRO 2 Macro gt Register gt XX Chapter 18 Volume 2 a When the button is assigned to macro function in the Setup menu Basic Menu Operations Displaying a Menu To display for example the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu use either of the following operations e Press the top menu selection button M E 1 then press the VFI Key1 button and the HFI Type button in that order e Press the menu page number button in the upper left corner of the menu screen to display the top menu window then enter the page number of the M E 1 PKevi gt Type menu which is 1111 and press the Enter button For details of the menu page number
459. p Transition Operations For an overview of clip transitions see Frame Memory Clip Function page 92 e The clip transition function is only supported by the MVS 8000A 8000G e When a clip transition is selected as the transition type if one of the wipe direction selection buttons in the transition control block is lit it indicates the direction of clip playback Setting a clip transition The following example describes the case of a clip transition using FM 1 amp 2 Clip on the M E 1 bank To use a clip transition effectively the image from the frame memory clip being played back during the clip transition should be seen in the M E 1 program output For example inserting a key using frame memory output 1 and frame memory output 2 1 Display the M E 1 gt Misc gt Transition menu and in the lt Transition Type gt group select FM1 amp 2 Clip 2 Press Clip Transition The Clip Transition menu appears Clip Transition Operations Background transition display area Clip transition display area Page M E 1 4 4 gt Effect 0 Free KF 0 1176 gt Misc gt Clip Transition M E 1 kF o o 01 00 00 00 1171 1176 1 Key Trans Rate 15 Current 32 Direction Normal Ni Start 24 Stop 39 Duration 00 02 00 60 Direction Normal FM182 Clip Start 0 Stop 60 Super Mix Preset DME Wipe Color Mix Select Transition Clip Snapshot DME Wipe BKGD Transition Direction BKGD Transition Set Timing Norma
460. p of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select FRAME I O V Notes on picture in picture one channel mode Create a minimum of three keyframes Creating User Programmable DME Patterns 485 sodiM AWG 9 19jdeuo sodiM IWA 9 19jdeuo 486 e Either create the first keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen e Create the first transition to end such that the image can be seen within the screen At this point press the PAUSE button in the keyframe control block turning it on to set a pause for the keyframe e Either create the last keyframe image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen e In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select P In P Notes on compress one channel mode Create a minimum of three keyframe points e Create the first keyframe with the image at full size e In the state at completion of the first transition create the image to be visible within the screen At this time press the PAUSE button in the keyframe control block turning it on to set a pause for the keyframe e For the last keyframe once again set the image size to full size e In the lt Transition Mode gt group of the Key Frame gt DME User PGM menu select Compress Notes on dual transition mode two channel mode e Create the first keyframe for each chan
461. pause time of zero the remainder of the timeline after the pause is ignored and the macro timeline ends at that point Register editing functions You can use the following editing functions on a register in which a macro timeline is stored Copy Move Swap Merge Lock Name Delete File related functions You can save and recall a created macro timeline as effect data in the File menu Macros 217 suonouny 0008 SAW Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Macro Editing Using Menus Macro Register Editing You can lock copy and delete the contents of macro registers and rename macro registers Lock Write protect the contents of a macro register Copy Copy the contents of a macro register to another macro register Delete Delete the contents of a macro register Rename Rename a macro register Online editing of macro events Using the On Line Edit menu you can carry out the following editing operations while checking the control panel operation sequence You can also carry out editing using the panel and menu Insert Insert a macro event Delete Delete a macro event Modify Modify a macro event Offline editing of macro events Using the Off Line Edit menu you can carry out the following editing operations in the menu only unrelated to operation of the control panel Insert Insert a macro event Add Add a macro event Delete Delete a macro event You can also create a new macro M
462. pe Flexi Pad standard type Recalling the following data control block Snapshots Wipe snapshots DME wipe snapshots simple type Recalling the following data Snapshots Wipe snapshots DME wipe snapshots Numeric keypad control block Recalling the following data Effects Snapshots Shotbox Master snapshots Master timeline Macros 211 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo L Jaydeyo SUOIUN4 0008 SAW Control block Event Effect rewind Effect execution Effect fast forward Selection of effect execution direction Keyframe control block Device control block e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory trackball clips start point setting joystick e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory search dial clips playback e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips stop e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips cue up e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips fast forward e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips rewind e VTR disk recorder record e Frame memory clip loop setting Independent key transition execution section auto transition and cut 2 e Key snapshot recall Downstream key control block Fade to black control block Execution of fade to black transition Menu control block e Disk recorder Extended VTR file recalling e Recalling the functions assigned to PREFS 1 to PREFS 16 buttons e Execution o
463. pe Snapshot Operations With the Menus page 463 DME Wipe Snapshots Creating User Programmable DME Patterns With a user programmable DME you can use DME effects created through the use of keyframes for a transition on the switcher system Note the following points when creating a keyframe effect for use as a user programmable DME pattern Register numbers and pattern numbers When saving a keyframe effect as a user programmable DME pattern specify the register number that corresponds to the pattern number as shown in the following table Execution mode Register number Pattern number One channel mode 101 to 199 1901 to 1999 Two channel mode 201 to 299 2901 to 2999 Three channel mode 301 to 399 3901 to 3999 For details of registers and keyframe effects see Registers page 166 and Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects Volume 2 respectively Keyframe effects in the global channel When the effect with the same number as the reference channel is present on the DME global GLBL channel executing the user programmable DME will also execute the effect on the global channel simultaneously When executing a user programmable DME take note of whether the effect is present on the global channel User Programmable DME Transition Mode To create a user programmable DME it is necessary to set the transition mode the way in which the effect moves To set the transition mode use the Key
464. perations With the Menus ssseessnsenzensa 463 sodiM g Jaydeyo 438 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings You catry out wipe setting operations principally using the Wipe menu for each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks This section describes the basic procedures for wipe settings taking the M E 1 gt Wipe menu as an example For details of independent key transition wipe settings see Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 455 Wipe Settings Menu Accessing the wipe settings menu To access the M E 1 gt Wipe menu use any of the following operations e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and press VF5 Wipe e In the transition control block of the M E 1 bank press the transition type selection button WIPE twice in rapid succession e In the Flexi Pad control block of the M E 1 bank press the WIPE button twice in rapid succession Any of the above operations displays the M E 1 gt Wipe menu Wipe Pattern Selection You can select a wipe pattern in the Wipe menu or by entering a pattern number from the Flexi Pad control block For how to use the Flexi Pad control block see Selecting a wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block page 440 Selecting a wipe pattern by a menu operation 1 In the M E 1 gt Wipe menu select HF1 Main Pattern The Main Pattern menu appears 2 Select the wipe pattern group with the patte
465. pported on the MVE 8000 8000A Flex Shadow This effect allows a shadow to be added to the image using only one DME channel The following settings can be made for the shadow e The signal to use for the shadow External Generate shadow using input key signal Digital Multi Effects DME 125 suonouny 0008 SAW 4e deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Internal Generate shadow using an internally generated full size DME key signal Shadow shrinking and magnification Shadow position Shadow color and density Center axis of deformation Shadow slant and perspective External Internal The Flex Shadow function is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A Wipe crop This effect crops the video image to be visible inside or outside a wipe pattern Background a b ta Te U When Invert is On Video image The Wipe Crop function is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A 126 Digital Multi Effects DME Color mix This is a combination of two colors with a pattern generator This color mix signal can be used to fill parts such as a background or border e Color 2 c Color 1 Note The Color Mix function is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A Multi Move Shrinks the image and lines up a number of copies vertically and horizontally You can specify the center point of the shrinking the shrinking ratio and the aspect ratio of the image screen Sepia
466. procedure in the transition control block For an overview of the auto transition see page 45 To carry out an instantaneous cut transition Press the CUT button To carry out a gradual transition Press the AUTO TRANS button This executes the transition at the preset transition rate see page 352 While the transition is executing the AUTO TRANS button lights amber When it completes the button goes off To complete a partially executed transition instantaneously Press the CUT button The AUTO TRANS button goes off Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever Manual Transition To execute a manual transition with the transition control block fader lever use the following procedure For an overview of the manual transition see page 45 Executing a Transition 359 suonisuel g 19 dEU SUOIISUBIL g 19JdEUQ 360 To carrv out the transition completelv Move the lever over the full range of its travel To pause a partiv executed transition Stop moving the fader lever To resume a paused transition Resume moving the fader lever Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions Using the AUTO TRANS button the CUT button and the fader lever use the following procedures Moving the fader lever during an auto transition During an auto transition started by pressing the AUTO TRANS button operating the fader lever immediately enables the fader lever and the AUTO TRANS button goes off Ther
467. pshot Operations in the Menus in Chapter 14 Volume 2 Temporary attributes When recalling a snapshot you can temporarily apply attributes distinct from the attributes set for each register These are called temporary attributes You can set temporary attributes when recalling a snapshot For details of snapshot operations see Chapter 14 Snapshots Volume 2 Bus override If you recall a snapshot while holding down an A or B bus button the selection of the signal on the A or B bus does not change when the snapshot is recalled This function is called bus override This function is effective when cross point hold is off and you want to temporarily maintain the cross point setting When cross point hold is on the above operation is not necessary Snapshots Ut lity The utility function refers to a function whereby you can assign an arbitrary action or a shortcut for frequently used menu to a particular button then instantly recall the action or menu by pressing the button The functions you can assign include menu shortcuts enabling disabling functions recalling utility commands and recalling shotbox registers or macro registers Carry out the button assignment in the Setup menu For details of the operation see Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 You can carry out the utility function in the utility shotbox control block see page 298 in the cross p
468. pture is not possible It is not possible to apply a pattern limit Transitions executed in two strokes such as a preset color mix with the stroke mode set to Normal or a DME wipe with a picture in picture pattern will not execute correctly It is not possible to vary the transition rate of a clip transition Transition preview cannot be used The clip transition settings cannot be copied or swapped among the M E and PGM PST banks No instantaneous state of a clip transition can be saved as a snapshot Frame Memory 93 suonouny 0008 SAW Jeldeyo e When recalling a snapshot including a clip transition during executing another clip transition the follow on transition does not operate properly Be sure to complete the transition before recalling a snapshot SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 94 Image Data Management Frame memory folder editing Create Create a new folder Delete Specify a folder and delete it You can also delete all folders together in a single operation Rename folder Rename a specified folder File management The following operations are possible on files created to hold images Delete Specify a file to be deleted It is also possible to delete all files simultaneously in a single operation Rename file Change the name of the specified file Move file Move a file from one folder to another Backup Save all files to hard disk in a single operation Restore Restore the files which have be
469. r an overview of the key snapshots see page 57 Key Snapshot Operations Key snapshot operations are carried out in the independent key transition control block or downstream key control block Each keyer is provided with four dedicated key snapshot registers Key source name display key snapshot buttons Key delegation buttons Key snapshot setting buttons AUTO TRANS Independent key transition control block standard type Saving a key snapshot For example the following procedure saves the state of the M E 1 key 1 settings 1 In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the key delegation button KEY 1 turning it on 2 Press the K SS button turning it on Key Snapshots 433 shey vp Jaideyo skey p 13 dey9 434 The system switches to key snapshot mode and the key source name display key snapshot buttons show the status of registers 1 to 4 for key 1 Off Nothing is saved in the register Lit orange Settings are saved in the register For a register holding a snapshot the register name is shown as up to eight characters Hold down the K SS STORE button and press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register in which you want to save the snapshot The key source name display key snapshot button which you pressed lights yellow If
470. r data among the 152 color generators listed in the following table Target bank M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST Target keyer and data e Colors 1 and 2 for key fill e Colors 1 and 2 for key edge fill e Zabton color data e Kevsito4 e Downstream keys 1 to 4 Colors 1 and 2 for wipe border Color data for preset color mix Color backgrou nd e Colors 1 and 2 for color background 1 e Colors 1 and 2 for color background 2 Frame memory e FM1 color e FM2 color 100 Copy and Swap Target bank DME ch1 to ch8 Target keyer and data e Background e Border e Sepia e Light e Shade e Drop shadow other than DME ch4 and DME ch8 e Trail DME channel copy and swap You can copy and swap the channel data among DME channels 1 to 4 or DME channels 5 to 8 It is not possible to copy or swap the channel data between DME channels to 4 and DME channels 5 to 8 Copying format converter data On the MVS 8000G you can copy data from one format converter input to another or from one output to another Copy and Swap 101 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo Side Flags suoljoun 4 0008 SAW 4a deu9 102 Overview The term side flags refers to the areas to left and right of an image with aspect ratio 4 3 embedded within a 16 9 frame when these areas are filled with a separate image selected from the utility 1 bus See following figure Y
471. r memory card then an image which was not completely transferred will not be reproducible Avoid canceling such operations e When loading a still image file from hard disk or memory card if Freeze Enable in the Freeze menu is on the loaded still image file may sometimes be overwritten by the frame memory input image To avoid this when loading a file ensure that Freeze Enable is turned off Notes on saving or recalling a frame memory still image for or by a snapshot keyframe e The saving and recalling of frame memory images for snapshots and keyframes is restricted to the still images or clips on the eight frame memory outputs The settings made for frame memory images in the Freeze menu Composite menu or other menus do not apply to snapshots or keyframes e To reproduce a frame memory still image or a clip of them by recalling a snapshot or keyframe you must have the same images that were present in the frame memory when you saved the snapshot or keyframe Therefore when saving a snapshot or keyframe using frame memory you must also save the images to a storage media such as the hard disk Note on transferring ancillary data Ancillary data is recorded when the frame memory saving mode is set to save with ancillary data and can be saved to an external storage device such as a hard disk or memory card and recalled However the ancillary data can only be saved or recalled when the frame memory saving mode is set to save wi
472. r or for one transition the Combiner automatically combines the selected images Up to four channels can be combined You can also control the way in which the combination is carried out as a mix or an overlap with priority set automatically For a mix you can control the relative amounts of each channel Images can also be crossed in three dimensions Three dimensional image crossing is not supported on the MVE 8000 8000A Digital Multi Effects DME Combination of channel 1 Ch1 and channel 2 Ch2 Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 gt Combiner gt Ch1 2 gt CO h4 Combination of Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Chi Combiner CO h bl T a Digital Multi Effects DME 153 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Combination of Ch1 and Ch2 combination of Ch3 and Cha Chi 1 gt Combiner s Chi mia 2 gt 1 Ch2 Ch3 3 gt Combiner gt Ch3 cha 4 gt 2 Combination of Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 chi 1 Ch2 2 gt Combiner Ch3 3 gt Ch4i 4 j Mixing Ch1 and Ch2 Ch1 1 gt Chi Mix1 gt Ch2 2 gt If the Mix1 setting is 70 the proportion of the channels in the mixed p
473. r recall when required In a standard transition system there are ten wipe snapshot registers for each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks and in a simple transition module eight registers for each bank Numeric display UNDO button WIPE button STORE STATS button WIPE UNDO Memory recall buttons Flexi Pad control block standard type Wipe Snapshots WIPE button Numeric display XPT HOLD ABU U1234 Memorv recall buttons UNDO button Flexi Pad control block simple tvpe Saving a wipe snapshot 1 Make the wipe settings that you want to save 2 In the Flexi Pad control block hold down the WIPE button and press the memory recall button corresponding to the register in which you want to save e If you press a button which is lit orange or yellow the existing contents of the register are overwritten e If you carry out a pattern mix and both the main pattern and sub pattern are selected then the memory recall button shows the main pattern The pattern appears on the button you pressed which lights yellow The numeric display shows the number of the corresponding pattern It is also possible to display the register name using a Setup menu see Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 V
474. ransition Transition Transition Cropping Cropping Cropping y y oo ii 95 100 t t 0 0 95 100 100 Cut Last 5 Linear t transition execution time y change in transition and cropping amount Setting the timing of transition completion When the execution mode for a DME wipe crop transition is set to Last 5 you can select the timing of transition completion from 70 Last 30 95 ILast 5 and 100 Off Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 475 sedim JWG 9 Jeideyo sodiM INWA 9 19jdeuo 1 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears 2 In the lt Crop Mode gt group select Remove From Begin The Remove From Begin menu appears 3 In the lt Release Transition gt group select the timing of transition completion Last30 The transition completes at the end of 70 of the transition execution time The transition has a dead zone from 70 to 95 of the transition time Last5 The transition completes at the end of 95 of the transition execution time When the transition completes the cropping is removed during the last 5 Off The transition completes at the end of the transition execution time During the last 5 of the transition the transition and cropping removal proceed together Transition Transition Transition Cropping Cropping Cropping y y Dead Zone
475. ransition starts the instant the snapshot is recalled The auto transition setting is valid only for M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST If both effect dissolve and auto transition are selected as attributes the auto transition takes precedence GPI output A GPI output is sent to the allocated GPI port the instant the snapshot is recalled The trigger type depends on the switcher GPI output settings made in the Setup menu For details see Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu under Setup Relating to Switcher Processor in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Clip event Recall a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is recalled Snapshots 183 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 184 Clip events are not supported on the MVS 8000 Auto play Play a frame memory clip immediately after the snapshot is recalled Table of available attributes The attributes that can be used depend on the region as follows Yes Can be used No Cannot be used Attribute Region M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and User 1 to User 8 DME ch 1 to PGM PST DME ch 8 Cross point hold Yes Yes Yes Key disable Yes No No Effect dissolve Yes Yes Yes Auto transition Yes No No GPI outputs Yes Yes No Clip event No Yes No Auto play No Yes No Attribute display You can view the attributes of a snapshot in the Snapshot menu For more details see Sna
476. rder is selected Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same time The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest numbered channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings this changes the settings on the other channels by the same amount Setting the DME wipe position Positioner 1 In the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears 2 Depending on whether the DME wipe pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode proceed as follows For a pattern in one channel mode press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the lt Ch Select gt group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time 3 In the lt Position gt group press Position turning it on 4 Set the following parameters Knob 1 Parameter H Adjustment Horizontal position Setting values 200 00 to 4200 00 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 471 Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 00 to 100 00 2 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 4 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 5 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 s d M IWA 9 4e deyD sodiM IWA 9 19jdeuo Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 2 V Vertical position 2
477. resizer is enabled Additionally a resizer DME wipe cannot be used for a key paired with a key for which the dual resizer effect is enabled Paired keys refer to the DME Wipes 83 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 84 DME Wipes combinations of key and key 2 or key 3 and key 4 For example when a dual resizer effect is enabled for key 1 aresizer DME wipe cannot be used for key 2 Frame Memory Overview Frame memory is a function whereby a frame of input video can be frozen and written to memory for further use as material for editing You can also play recorded frame memory clips movies Frame capacity The maximum number of images that can be written to memory is as follows MVS 8000 system HD system 58 frames 88 frames in 720P 59 94 format SD system 222 frames MVS 8000A system and MVS 8000G system HD system Without ancillary data Video format Memory capacity 1080i 50 Approx 1000 frames 1080i 59 94 Approx 1000 frames 1080i 60 Approx 1000 frames 1080PsF 24 Approx 1000 frames 1080PsF 25 Approx 1000 frames 1080PsF 29 97 Approx 1000 frames 1080PsF 30 Approx 1000 frames 720P 50 Approx 2300 frames 720P 59 94 Approx 2300 frames With ancillary data Video format Memory capacity 1080i 50 Approx 700 frames 1080i 59 94 Approx 800 frames 1080i 60 Approx 800 frames 1080PsF 23 976 Approx
478. rn Two channel page roll Side Flags Two channel frame in out Two channel brick Three channel brick The following illustration shows the action in a DME wipe DME wipe from a 4 3 image to a 16 9 image Wipe action using slide No 1001 Side flag area Auto crop off Side flag areas 4 3 image Side flags on Side Flags 105 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo suoljounj 0008 SAW 4a deu9 106 DME wipe from a 4 3 image to another 4 3 image when side flags are on for both images Wipe action using squeeze No 1031 Side flag areas Auto crop off Side flag areas Side flag areas ad Auto crop on 4 4 3 image Side flags on 4 3 image Side flags on a When using the MVE 9000 MVE 8000A through SDI interface side flags are not added during a DME wipe Side Flags Video Process The term video process is applied to adjustments to the luminance and hue of the input video signal There are two types of adjustment depending on the application e Adjustment of an individual primary input signal e Image effects on a particular bus These types of adjustment may be carried out independently However since they are implemented by the same hardware if the same signal is subjected to processing twice there may be limitations on the range of effects obtained in the final result Video Process Adjustments of a Primary Input S
479. rn group selection button Standard standard wipes Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings Enhanced enhanced wipes Rotary rotary wipes Mosaicl to Mosaic3 mosaic wipes Random Dust random diamond dust wipes The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen For details of wipe patterns see Types of Wipe Pattern page 60 and Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 560 Press the button to select the desired pattern The parameters change according to the selected pattern and you can adjust the pattern e When a polygon wipe is selected pattern number 49 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Number of points 3 to 64 2 Star Rate Angularity of star 100 00 to 100 00 2 a A value of 100 00 completely removes the star rays leaving a circle at 100 00 the rays are at their sharpest e When a mosaic wipe is selected pattern numbers 200 to 203 206 to 213 224 to 247 250 to 257 260 to 269 Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Tile No Number of tiles horizontally 2 to 36 2 V Tile No Number of tiles vertically 2 to 18 e When a karaoke wipe is selected pattern numbers 220 to 223 Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Start Position of start tile 100 00 to 100 00 2 Row No Number of rows of tiles 1 to 36 Phase Delay for next row 100 00 to 100 00 P a
480. ro in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 SUPER MIX The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100 The current video is then progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 PST preset COLOR MIX In the first transition the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix dissolve then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix dissolve In place of a color matte you can select any signal on the utility 2 bus WIPE The current video is replaced by the new video using the wipe pattern selected in the Wipe menu DME A wipe type of transition is carried out using the DME effect selected in the DME Wipe menu FM1 amp 2ClIP FM3 amp 4ClIP FM5 amp 6CIIP FM7 amp 8CIIP A recorded clip is played back together with the transition At this point you can also carry out a transition wipe or mix dissolve simultaneously together with the clip Transition execution section Transition indicator This comprises multiple LEDs which show the progress of the transition Fader lever Move this to carry out a manual transition Pressing the KF Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel jaued O1 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JaJdEUQ 262 button to turn it on
481. ross point buttons or CUT and AUTO TRANS buttons in the cross point control block and GPI output ports M E Link Make settings to link together two M E banks Key Trans Link Make settings to link key transitions External device connections Device Interface Remote Assign Set the use of the four 9 pin ports GPI Input Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities and make the action settings GPI Output Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities and make the action settings Aux Control Set whether operations on the AUX buses from the four 9 pin ports are inhibited DME Type Setting When the DME is an MVE 9000 or MVE 8000A carry out interface settings and for an SDI interface set the AUX bus outputs and reentry inputs Setup suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 202 DME Setup In DME setup carry out settings particular to the DME processor You can make the following settings Input signal settings Input e Initial Crop Make the initial crop setting e Matte Illeg Color Limit Switch the illegal limiter for the signal generated by the DME internal matte generator on or off e System Phase Adjust the operation timing of the whole system with respect to the reference signal e TBC Center Set the TBC window center position Output signal settings Output These settings are possible only when the DME is an MVE 9000 or SDI interfaced MVE 8000A e Monitor Output Se
482. rrow as shown in Wipe Pattern List page 560 and DME Wipe Pattern List page 566 in Appendix Volume 1 NORM REV normal reverse The wipe direction alternates between normal and reverse every time a transition is executed Pattern limit buttons LIMIT SET Move the fader lever to the position of a particular pattern size and stop it there then press this button to set the pattern limit range This button is enabled when the PTN LIMIT button is off PTN pattern LIMIT When a wipe or DME wipe is selected pressing this button turning it on enables the pattern limit function Key status display For each of keys 1 and 2 when the key is inserted the corresponding ON indicator lights The OVER indicators show the priority between keys 1 and 2 by lighting when the corresponding key is on top For example when key 1 appears over key 2 on the program monitor the OVER indicator for key 1 lights The following is the Flexi Pad control block Mode selection buttons WIPE When saving or recalling a wipe snapshot use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section DME When saving or recalling a DME wipe snapshot use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section SNAPSHOT When saving or recalling a snapshot use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section Memory recall section This consists of eight buttons with LCDs whos
483. s For button locations see pages in parentheses Block Button PGM PST or M E bank Background A row cross point buttons page 256 Background B row cross point buttons page 256 Key 1 bus cross point buttons page 256 Key 2 bus cross point buttons page 256 Key 3 bus cross point buttons page 256 Key 4 bus cross point buttons page 256 Utility 1 bus cross point buttons page 256 Utility 2 bus cross point buttons page 256 DME external video bus cross point buttons page 256 e DME utility 1 bus cross point buttons page 256 e DME utility 2 bus cross point buttons page 256 e AUTO TRANS button a page 260 e CUT button page 260 e KEY1 ON to KEY4 ON buttons a pages 260 304 e The button to which the same function as that of VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips play cue and stop buttons page 260 e Memory recall buttons i e Buttons set to Inhibit page 256 Auxiliary bus control block Cross point buttonist row gt page 288 e Cross point button 2nd row P page 288 Keyframe control block e RUN REWIND and FF buttons page 287 NORM REV and NORM REV buttons page 281 Macros 219 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Block Button Device control block trackball The buttons to which the same functions as those of joystick VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips play cue stop
484. s Frame memory source 1 and 2 buses Frame Memory menu page 498 Aux 1 to 48 buses AUX MON menu page 555 Video Process Memory When using video process adjustments for an image effect on a bus this function saves the final values for each pair number for the signals The video process on off setting is not saved When you change the adjustments the values are automatically saved and these last values are recalled when the pair number is selected In other words by switching video process memory on regardless of the video process information for each bus you can carry out video process adjustments for each input signal The parameters saved are as follows VIDEO GAIN Y GAIN BLACK LEVEL C GAIN HUE DELAY Switch the video process memory on or off in the Setup menu For details of setting operations see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Video Process Digital Multi Effects DME DME allows you to add three dimensional effects such as image movement rotation magnification and shrinking as well as a wide variety of special effects DME is the general name for all of these effects You can use up to eight channels as dedicated DME channels Each channel can be used on its own or in combination with other channels which allows you to create advanced effects with more complexity Functions that can be used differ with the models of DME For det
485. s see the appendix Menu Tree Volume 2 The M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu appears in the menu display as follows Status area 6 Menu page number button Menu title butto Edge YC 0 00 YG 0 00 CC 0 00 CG 0 00 Matte 8H Drop Source Proc Key WHIT Off Key Type Luminance Linear Chroma Key Invert Key Position DME Wipe Key Fill Mise Default Main Mask Recall Default recall button VF buttons Main Mask Sub Mask Processed Key D HF buttons lt previous button and gt next button 6 Function button area Parameter group button Q Keyframe status Sub Mask Video Proc Off Trans Priority 1 Key4 2 Key3 3 Key2 Key Wipe Wipe Pattern Pattern Ker pa Priority C Gain Se Transition Video Process 1 0 00 Key Source Density Knob parameter buttons Previous page button M E 1 gt Key1 gt Type menu Basic Menu Operations 321 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ JSUB4 JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JaJdEUQ 322 Interpreting the Menu Screen The menu screen consists of the following principal parts When buttons on the screen are lit or represented in a depressed state this indicates that the corresponding item or function is selected set on Menu title button This shows the title of the menu screen You can set different colors for the main menu site and subsidiary menu s
486. s value defines its distance from the image A Change of view point on Change of view point on v x axis axis Change of distance from view point to image 119 Digital Multi Effects DME suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Skew In the source coordinate space change the skew of the image on the x axis or y axis Change of skew on x axis Change of skew on y axis Graphics Display Graphics display is a function that allows you to display wire frames coordinate axes and a grid over the current DME image to make it easier to create effects in three dimensional coordinate space Graphics displayed by this function can also be output to the monitor output connector Note On the MVE 8000 and the MVE 8000A when using the DME dedicated interface these graphics cannot be output to the monitor output connector To make graphics display settings use the DME menu For details see Graphics Display in Chapter 11 Volume 2 You can display the following kinds of graphics Wire frames A wire frame displays an image enclosed in a frames so that you can check the position and size of the image If there is a shadow see page 157 a frame is shown for the shadow as well Coordinate axes This is a three dimensional display of coordinates in local or global coordinate space You can check the origin of the axes and the directions of th
487. s are available e Two dimensional transformations of keys e Resizer interpolation settings e Resizer crop border settings e Resizer effect settings wide key border drop shadow edge enhance mosaic defocus mask e The resizer function is supported on the MVS 8000G only e The image of the key manipulated by resizer has a one frame delay e Some effects of resizer are different from what you would expect of DME effects Restrictions on the use of effects Keys There are restrictions on combined use of resizer effects themselves and that with DME wipes For details see Impossibility of simultaneous use within the same keyer page 432 Relation between resizer and other effects You cannot apply DME effects to a key for which the resizer function is enabled When one of the three functions resizer DME wipe and DME effects is enabled the other two are disabled Keys 59 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 60 Wipes A wipe is a transition from the current video stream to a new video stream using a wipe pattern Changing the background by means of a wipe is referred to as a background wipe and inserting or deleting a key with a wipe is termed a key wipe There are two types of wipe those that can be selected in a common transition and those that can be selected in an independent key transition For details of independent key transitions see page 37
488. s from the device control block see page 271 the Flexi Pad control block see page 264 or the transition control block see page 260 Range of execution Each time the RUN button is pressed the range of execution of the effect is from timecode 01 00 00 00 or the current time the position at which the current effect is stopped to the end point of the effect However if there is a pause set on a keyframe the execution range is up to that point Pressing the RUN button again resumes the effect which then runs to the next pause point or the end of the effect Run mode setting You can select from the following run modes for when the effect is executed DIRECTION Specify the effect execution direction STOP NEXT KF Run the effect and stop at the next keyframe EFFECT LOOP Repeat the effect in an endless loop Make these settings in the keyframe control block See Run Mode Setting in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Master Timelines You can save the regions selected for a keyframe effect and the register numbers saved in the regions in a master timeline register so that operation can be applied to two or more regions at a time To save master timeline registers use the numeric keypad control block or menu to recall them you can use the numeric keypad control block menu or the Flexi Pad control block For more details see Creating and Saving a Master Timeline in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Keyframes 181
489. s rewound to the first keyframe FF fast forward When this button is pressed the currently recalled effect is advanced to the last keyframe Effect execution direction selection buttons NORM normal When this button is lit effect execution runs from the first keyframe to the last keyframe REV reverse When this button is lit effect execution runs from the last keyframe to the first keyframe Pressing one of these buttons automatically turns the other off NORM REXV normal reverse Press this button turning it on to reverse the direction of the effect when it reaches the last keyframe or first keyframe STOP NEXT KF stop next keyframe button When this button is pressed turning it on the effect execution range is from the current time to the next keyframe O EFF LOOP effect loop button When the effect reaches the last keyframe with this button on it returns to the first keyframe and repeats AUTO INS auto insert button When editing a macro press this button turning it on to enable the auto insert function so that every control panel operation you carry out is added to the macro as an event Numeric Keypad Control Block The numeric keypad control block is used for region selection for saving and recalling snapshots effects and shotboxes for entering numeric values for trackball operation and keyframe operation and for transition rate entry Names and Functions of Parts of t
490. s the wipe snapshot and the button you pressed lights amber In the upper left is shown the currently recalled register name or number The Flexi Pad and menu settings are linked A setting in setup determines whether register names or pattern numbers appear Deleting a wipe snapshot from the menu 1 In the Wipe Snapshot menu press Delete 2 Press the memory recall button for the wipe snapshot you want to delete This deletes the wipe snapshot Wipe Snapshots Chapter 6 DME Wipes Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings s ccccsccssscscsssssccsceseseese 466 ID MBAWape sett ps Menugtian ANA AL INTA 466 PME MPO battemes elec tlonme ence enews teem aae enemas reese a eer 466 Settings D MIE WI pe Modi es te sstescee retreats teen eee eer 469 DME Wipe Modify Clear see ee E R ree seees eeeee 476 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions seosos00s00000 477 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings 477 Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers 478 Resizer DME Wipe Settinpe A ata 481 DME Wipe Snapshotsi a sa a ata 482 DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad 482 DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus 0 0 0 0 eee eeeeeees 482 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns ssesensssesensennsensennsenees 483 User Programmable DME Transition Mode nee 483 sodiM AWC 9 19jdeuo Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings You carry o
491. s when using wipes e The wipe patterns that can be used are standard wipes pattern numbers 1 to 24 only e A pattern mix cannot be used e A split splitting the wipe pattern cannot be used e When a border or soft border is selected for a wipe edge the signal to be inserted in the edge edge fill is restricted as follows The utility 2 bus cannot be selected When using a matte a mix color cannot be used Even if the wipe border width is set to the same numeric value for M E and Simple P P the same image is not obtained e The following wipe modifiers cannot be used Replication Shift and Multi Adjust menu adjustments Pairing Modulation Spring Spiral e Changing modifier parameter settings changes the wipe pattern size Restrictions on utility buses The utility 1 and utility 2 buses cannot be used Assignment of signals to output connectors Connectors to which the P P row output signal assignment is fixed The assignment of the following signals to output connectors OUT17 to OUT22 is fixed Simple P P Software a In DSK mode the backgrounds that can be selected in the PGM Config menu are restricted to background 1 and background 2 b Depends on the setting in the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt M E Output Assign menu OUTS and OUT6 cannot be used Connectors for which a P P row output signal can be selected For an edit preview bus or
492. see Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Resizer 423 sfog vp saydeyo skey p 13 dey9 424 Resizer Interpolation Settings For example to make the interpolation settings for key 1 of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key menu press Resizer turning it on This enables the resizer function Press Resizer Process The Resizer Process menu appears In the lt Video Field Frame Mode gt and other groups make the interpolation settings These settings are the same as those for input video signals For details see Interpolation Settings in Chapter 11 Volume 2 Resizer Crop Border Settings Making a crop setting for a key for which resizer is on For example to make the crop settings for key 1 of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure Resizer 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key menu press Resizer turning it on This enables the resizer function Press Border Crop The Border Crop menu appears Press Crop turning it on This enables the adjustment of crop Set the parameters These settings are the same as those for crop of DME For details see Crop Settings in Chapter 11 Volume 2 If mosaic or defocus is enabled and in the lt Mosaic Defocus Mode gt group you select Video Key then the crop is disabled Applying a border to a key
493. select a key which is already inserted the transition will delete the key A simultaneous combination of deleting and inserting keys is also possible Deleting key 1 and inserting key 2 Transitions 35 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 4e deuo SUOHJUN4 0008 SAW 4a1deu9 Simultaneously changing the background and keys You can change any of the four keys downstream keys on the PGM PST bank and the background at the same time Key 1 Changing the background and key 2 simultaneously Key 1 Key 2 Changing the background and keys 1 to 4 simultaneously Selecting the key priority If a number of keys are already inserted in the current video you can check or change the key priority that is to say the order in which the keys are overlaid When a key priority KEY PRIOR is selected as the next transition you can also change the key priority in the new video For details of this operation see Key Priority Setting page 343 36 Transitions The key priority values go from to 4 with a higher priority key being in front as seen on the screen Priority sequence on the screen Independent Key Transitions What is an independent key transition In addition to common transitions it is possible to carry out independent transitions on the keyers of the M E banks and PGM PST bank These are called independent key transitions By carr
494. selected for a mask the modifier Edge and Direction settings are not available Utility 1 Bus signal selected on the utility 1 bus When you selected Utility 1 Bus hold down the UTIL button in the M E 1 bank cross point control block and select the signal with the background A bus buttons While the UTIL button is pressed the background A bus switches to the utility 1 bus To enable the UTIL button its operation mode must be set to Hold beforehand See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 4 Set the mask source parameters e When wipe is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 e When utility 1 bus is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for creating mask 109 59 to 7 31 signal 2 Gain Gain 100 00 to 100 00 5 To invert the black and white sense of the mask source press the Mask Invert button turning it on Applying a DME Effect to a Key For one M E bank DME effects including DME wipes can be used in up to two places on the dedicated interface and in only one place on the SDI interface simultaneously When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface you can apply DME effects to a maximum of three keys Requires a setting in setup Key Setting Operations Using Menus For details see In
495. set the amount of swirl the swirl region the amount of rotation and the swirl center position Melt Melts the image away from a specified part You can set the degree of transition the degree of extension in the image the jaggedness of the melting sections and the amplitude frequency amount of movement and speed of the melting sections You can also set the slant of the borders the shape of the sections that begin to melt and other parameters Character Trail Extends the edge of the image like a trail Digital Multi Effects DME 139 suojouny 0008 SAW 4a deu9 suoljoun4 0008 SAW 4a deu9 140 You can set the effect starting position the degree of expansion the slant angle of the effect region and trail direction the degree to which the image disappears the trail type and amount of stardust and other parameters Lighting Provides the effect of light striking the image You can specify the intensity and color of the light and the lighting pattern The following lighting patterns are available Plane Illumination of the entire screen Bar Bar illumination You can specify the width and angle of the bar and its softness Preset Lighting pattern suitable for nonlinear effects When Bar is selected the following modes can be selected Normal Specular Normal Emphasizes the bar highlight area Specular An effect like light striking a surface with metallic reflections Mat An effe
496. set the number of frames 9 If Wipe or DME Wipe is selected in the lt BKGD Transition Type gt group in the lt BKGD Transition Direction gt group select the background transition direction 1 On the lt Select gt group press FM 1 amp 2 Clip 1 1 Using either of the following methods set the start point of the clip e Move the fader lever to the desired position and in the lt Clip Transition SetTiming gt group press Start e Turn knob 1 to set the number of frames The left end of the reference axis see following figure is the position of frame 0 It is not possible to set the end point 1 in the lt Clip Transition Direction gt group select the playback direction of the clip To reset the start point and end point Press Timing Reset The background transition start point and end point and the clip start point are all reset Clip Transition Operations Image Data Management You can carry out the following operations on the files in which images are saved Pair file processing Move Delete Rename Backup Restore For an overview of file management see page 94 The following sections describe the operations available in the MVS 8000A system and MVS 8000G system The MVS 8000 system uses the same menus as those of Version 5 30 For its operating procedures see the User s Guide of Version 6 00 or earlier During playback of a frame memory clip of the pair assigned to either of the targe
497. setting for color background 1 is enabled K2 CB2 Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 2 DSK2 K3 Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 3 DSK3 K4 Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 4 DSK4 MAIN Press this button to enable main wipe pattern position setting for normal transitions SUB Press this button to enable sub wipe pattern position setting for normal transitions Among the K1 CB1 button K2 CB2 button K3 button K4 button MAIN button and SUB button you can select multiple buttons POS Press this button to enable pattern movement in the x axis and y axis directions with the trackball When the USER button is selected this enables the trackball to move the pattern in the x axis and y axis directions and the Z ring to adjust the size of the pattern X Y These restrict the axes affected by the trackball and Z ring to the x or y axis Z This restricts the axes affected by the trackball and Z ring to the z axis CTR center When this button is pressed the pattern position returns to the center When the USER button is selected the pattern size also returns to 50 00 SHIFT CLR WORK BUFR Press this button twice in rapid succession to reset all parameters on the target M E or PGM PST to their initial values When the three dimensional transform operation mode is enabled LOCAL Enable operatio
498. shrinks and the new video appears In the second half of the transition the new video expands and the old video disappears You can move the pattern from the current position by a relative amount During the transition the signal from the utility 2 bus of the M E bank appears as the background Pattern numbers 2651 and 2652 two channel mode 2D trans The new video appears over the old video while undergoing expansion two dimensional rotation and translation Pattern numbers 1051 to 1058 1061 to 1064 1068 one channel mode 3D trans In one channel mode the new video appears over the old video while undergoing expansion three dimensional rotation and translation Pattern numbers 1071 1072 1074 1076 1077 1088 1091 to 1094 one channel mode In two channel mode the old video changes to the new video while both undergo expansion three dimensional rotation and translation Pattern numbers 2631 to 2634 2642 2644 two channel mode Sparkle The new video appears over the old video with a nonlinear effect applied such as broken glass explosion or melt Next this returns to the original video as the effect gradually reduces Pattern numbers 1391 1393 1394 1396 1398 1399 one channel mode Split slide The new video appears in strip form while sliding interleaved in the opposite direction over the old video Pattern numbers 1384 to 1389 one channel mode Mosaic In the first half of the transition
499. simultaneously for main and sub then for the following common to main and sub the main settings are reflected Key M E Config DME external video bus and utility 1 bus Multi Program 2 243 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 244 Multi Program 2 When a macro attachment is set on the DME utility 1 bus or DME utility 2 bus it is not possible to make separate main and sub settings When snapshots with different M E Config settings are recalled If M E Config data is not to be included in the snapshot data the current system settings are used for snapshot reproduction If M E Config data is to be included in the snapshot data and if it was created before Version 5 30 then standard mode is used If created in Version 5 30 or later first M E Config data is set and then other snapshot data is recalled The bus override function is only available on the following buses MIE 1 to M E 3 Main BKGD A B buses MIE 1 to M E 3 Sub BKGD A B buses UTIL 2 UTIL 3 buses P P Main PGM PST bus P P Sub PGM PST buses UTIL 2 UTIL 3 buses When a master snapshot or master timeline is executed with a kev being assigned to both main and sub it is uncertain which data will be reflected When recalling a master snapshot with different register numbers for main and sub the recall timing mav differ bv one field or more between main and sub The link state is maintained even
500. sional transform When the SRC or TRGT button is held down the trackball operation is switched to a finer control fine mode When the resizer control mode is enabled for the MVS 8000G only By turning the trackball you can move in the x and y directions of the key to which the resizer is applied and change the aspect ratio When the LOC SIZE or LOC XYZ button is held down the trackball operation is switched to a finer control fine mode Z ring When the positioner operation mode is enabled When the USER button is selected by turning the ring you can adjust the size of the pattern When the three dimensional transform operation mode is enabled Turn this ring to control the z axis in a three dimensional transform When the SRC or TRGT button is held down the Z ring operation is switched to a finer control fine mode When the effect run control mode is enabled By turning the Z ring you can run the keyframe effect independent of the STOP NEXT KF EFF LOOP and similar settings in the keyframe control block Turn clockwise to run the effect in the normal direction and counterclockwise for the reverse direction When the resizer control mode is enabled for the MVS 8000G only By turning the ring you can zoom the key to which the resizer is applied and change the aspect ratio When the LOC SIZE or LOC XYZ button is held down the Z ring operation is switched to a finer control fine
501. size Files Pay attention to the following depending on the signal format which you use SDTV 480i Images 720 x 487 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full screen The following figure shows how an import image is processed when the 4801 59 94 format is used Images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin When an image is smaller than the screen the remainder of the screen is filled with black When it is larger parts which extend beyond the screen are discarded 720 pixels 1 487 pixels Position of small picture Parts discarded when image is too large Section filled with black for a small picture No pixel ratio conversion is performed when images are imported for the SDTV format When the signal format is 480i 59 94 if you create an image with a size of 720 x 540 on a computer and then import it just as it is the image will be too tall To maintain the shape of the image first create it as a 720 x 540 image and then use computer software tools to compress the vertical dimension to 487 pixels before importing it HDTV 1080i Images of 1920 x 1080 pixels in size are exactly the size which fills the full screen Like SDTV images are placed with the upper left of the screen as the origin When an image is smaller or larger than the screen processing is the same as for SDTV Since the pixel ratio of the HDTV format is 1 1 files created on computers are imported in
502. snua z JAJdEUQ 260 Transition Control Block Standard Tvpe In the transition control block vou can common transition and independent kev modifv the output of the M E bank or PGM transition operations are possible PST bank and perform transitions Both PRIOR SET button Next transition selection buttons 6 Key status display Transition type selection buttons Key snapshot setting buttons Key delegation buttons Key source name display key snapshot buttons ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 KEY2 KEV3 KEVA Independent key transition execution section W Independent key transition type selection buttons KF button B Pattern limit buttons DB TRANS PVW button Transition execution section Wipe direction selection buttons Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Next transition selection buttons Press these buttons turning them on to determine what the next transition will apply to BKGD Next transition changes the background KEY1 to KEY4 DSKI to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank Press this button turning it on to make the next transition insert or remove the corresponding key keys 1 to 4 Ifa key is currently inserted it will be removed and vice versa In the PGM PST ba
503. spect on A negative value of the parameter Aspect stretches the pattern verticallv a positive value stretches the pattern horizontally Pattern replication Multi The same pattern can be repeated horizontally and vertically or both up to 63 times You can also change the orientation of alternate copies or change the position gt gt t gt gt t gt gt t Multi off Multi on Wipes 67 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 68 Pairing Wipes e The parameter H Multi determines the number of pattern replications horizontally and the parameter V Multi determines the number of pattern replications vertically e The parameter Shift determines the manner of replication At a value of 100 00 the pattern of the adjacent odd numbered column on the left lines up with the central coordinate horizontally At a value of 100 00 the pattern of the adjacent odd numbered column on the right lines up with the central coordinate horizontally For an independent key transition wipe you can use the Invert Type parameter to select from the following four types of replication pattern 1 2 3 4 a ka ka NV daa 7 1 All replications in the same orientation 2 Even numbered rows staggered 3 Even numbered columns and rows inverted 4 Even numbered columns and rows inverted an
504. ss the PTN LIMIT button and the button goes off In this case execution continues for the time specified by the dedicated transition rate in the menu setting as far as the state of the next transition For details of the setting see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes and Frame Memory Key Wipe FM Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To set the transition rate when the pattern limit is released 1 In the lt Pattern Limit Release gt group of the Edge Direction menu select one of the following Auto Trans Rate Use the transition rate set in the transition rate control block Independ Trans Rate Independent transition rate 2 If you selected Independ Trans Rate in step 1 adjust the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Rate Independent transition rate 0 to 999 frames Executing a Transition Executing an Auto Transition ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 WIPE NORM JREV KEVI Key revs seve SUPER MIX DME MIX Fader lever PST COLOR MX NORM rev TRANS PVW AUTO TRANS button CUT button Transition control block standard type To execute a transition on the M E or PGM PST bank by a button operation use the following
505. ss the STOP button or ALL STOP button ALL STOP When pressed all device material playback and other operations stop During cueing up of any of the devices this button flashes amber and when all cueing up operations are completed it lights green REC When pressed simultaneously with the PLAY button this button lights red the PLAY button lights amber and the image from the selected device is recorded This button cannot be used for frame memory clip operations G External device operation buttons ENBL enable When this is pressed turning it on the search dial VAR JOG and SHTL button operations are enabled VAR variable Sets the search dial to variable mode JOG Sets the search dial to jog mode SHTL shuttle Sets the search dial to shuttle mode TIMELINE button Press to switch the device selected with the device selection buttons to timeline setting mode STOP button When pressed this lights amber and operation of the device selected with the device selection buttons stops Search dial Use this for search and other operations on the material of an external device For details of the method of use see Controlling Tape Disk Transport in Chapter 12 Volume 2 Keyframe Control Block In the keyframe control block you can carry out effect editing and execution Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 281 jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J
506. ssigning switcher inputs and outputs to S Bus space in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Multi Program 2 239 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo As for the bus number of the utility 3 bus a DME Key bus number is used as follows No Bus Standard Bus MP2 70 M E 1 DME Key M E 1 Utility3 85 M E 2 DME Key M E 2 Utility3 100 M E 3 DME Key M E 3 Utility3 115 P P DME Key P P Utility3 Making settings for timeline related keyframe operations To assign sub regions to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config gt 10 Key Region Assign menu assign regions to the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block For details see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To make region and reference region selections using a menu During snapshot or keyframe operations you can select a region including sub in the Key Frame gt Region Select menu This is convenient for selecting some of the regions assigned to the numeric keypad control block or changing the reference region For details see Specifying the Region and Edit Points in Chapter 13 Volume 2 To assign regions shown in the Timeline menu You can select how regions assigned to region selection buttons appear in the Key Frame gt Timeline menu For details see Setting the display of regions in
507. ssively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 WIPE The current video is replaced by the new video using the wipe pattern selected in the Wipe menu Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 301 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JaJdEUQ DME This applies a wipe like transition using the DME effect selected in the DME Wipe menu FM1 amp 2ClIP FM3 amp 4CIlIP FM5 amp 6CIIP FM7 amp 8CIIP A recorded clip is played back together with the transition At this point you can also carry out a background transition wipe or mix dissolve simultaneously together with the clip B Key transition selection buttons To insert or delete key 1 on the next transition hold down the KEY 1 button and select the type of transition using the transition type selection buttons If the key is currently not inserted the transition will insert it and if the key is currently inserted the transition will delete it You can use the KEY2 button in a similar way While these buttons are held down you can select a key source with the cross point buttons on the key bus Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid succession changes the state of the corresponding key bus so that a cross point can be selected Key delegation button Corresponding double press key bus KEY1 key 12 KEY2 ke
508. suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 182 Snapshots The term snapshot refers to a function whereby the various settings required to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in memory as a set of data for recall as required to recover the original state You can carry out snapshot operations using the numeric keypad control block the Flexi Pad control block in each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks and the Snapshot menu If the M E bank has the Inhibit setting see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 it is not possible to recall a snapshot on that M E bank For details of snapshot operations see Chapter 14 Snapshots Volume 2 Snapshot Types Snapshots Snapshots are divided as follows Snapshots applying to a particular region functional block of the switcher or DME The term snapshot alone usually refers to this type of snapshot This only applies to regions assigned to region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block Master snapshot This applies to the selected regions and the register numbers saved in the regions A master snapshot can be saved and recalled using the numeric keypad control block Snapshots applying only to particular functions This type of snapshot includes the following Key snapshot This includes the key on off state and all key settings other than key priority for each keyer S
509. t 1to49 a See page 68 e When turning Aspect on and setting the aspect ratio of the pattern Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Aspect Aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 67 e When turning Angle on in the lt Rotation gt group and setting the angle of the pattern rotation Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Pattern angle 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 e When turning Speed on in the lt Rotation gt group and setting the rate of pattern rotation Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Speed Rate of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 2 a See page 66 Using the subsidiary mask For example to use the subsidiary mask for key on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF4 Sub Mask The Sub Mask menu appears In the lt Mask Type gt group select the mask type Key Mask Masks a part of a key Bkgd Mask Masks a part of a background In the lt Mask Source gt group select the mask source Wipe wipe pattern selected for a transition If you select Wipe select the pattern and make modifier settings in Key Setting Operations Using Menus 399 sfog vp saideyo shey pv Ja dey9 400 the M E 1 gt Wipe menu see page 438 then return to this M E 1 gt Key1 menu In the case of a wipe pattern
510. t FM selection buttons see page 514 frame memory operations may not be performed properly Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip playback Pair File Processing You can create a pair file from two single files In the reverse direction you can split a pair file into two single files Creating a pair file from two single files Carrying out the following operation automatically switches Pair to On The following description applies to the case of FM 1 amp 2 but the procedures are similar for the other cases 1 In the Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall menu or Frame Memory gt Clip gt Recall menu recall the two single files you want to convert to a pair file to FMI and FM2 Select the folder in which the file to be moved is stored Image Data Management 527 Kowa ewes 7 Je deu9 MOWSJA ewe 7 Ja deyo 528 3 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF1 Pair 4 Recombination The Pair Recombination menu appears Press Couple This converts the files output to FM1 and FM2 to a pair Splitting a pair file into two single files Carrying out the following operation automatically switches Pair to Off The following description applies to the case of FM 1and FM2 but the procedures are similar for the other cases 1 2 In the Frame Memory gt Still gt Recall menu or Frame Memory gt Clip gt Recall menu recall the pair file In the Frame Memory menu sel
511. t are made simultaneously Size Path for image size Loc X Post Loc Paths for movement in the x and y axes Post Size Path for size Loc XYZ Overall path settings for items relating to Loc XYZ All image movement are made simultaneously Loc X Loc Y Loc Z Paths for the x y and z axes Rot Overall path settings for items relating to Rot All image rotation are made simultaneously Rot X Rot Y Rot Z Paths for the x y and z axes Spin Overall path settings for items relating to spin Spin All are made simultaneously Spin Sre X Spin Sre Paths for the x y and z axes Y Spin Sre Z eu X Spin Y Spin Paths for the x y and z axes Pers Overall path settings for items relating to Pers All perspective are made simultaneously Pers X Pers Y Pers Z Paths for the x y and z axes Keyframes 177 suonouny 0008 SAW L doldeuQ SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 178 Keyframes Item Axis Loc Axis All Paths that can be set Overall path settings for items relating to image rotation axis are made simultaneously Axis X Axis Y Axis Z Paths for the x y and z axes DME Effect menu Item Paths that can be set Effect All Overall path settings for DME effect items are made simultaneously Edge Overall path settings for edge items are made Edge All simultaneously Border Path for border
512. t key transition execution section Independent key transition control block standard type To set independent transitions for the keyers on the M E or PGM PST bank use the independent key transition control block For an overview of the independent key transitions see page 37 Basic Independent Key Transition Operations 1 Select one or more of the delegation buttons KEY 1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank turning them on You can press more than one button at the same time 2 Select the transition type To fade a key in or out Press the MIX button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated wipe pattern Press the WIPE button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern Press the DME button turning it on If in the Setup menus you set insertion and deletion as independent modes make the settings for the next transition in the independent key Independent Key Transitions transition control block Separate settings are required both when inserting a key and when deleting it For example with the key not inserted if you select the transition type and carry out a transition this will be the setting when inserting a key You can also use the Transition menu to select a desired independent key transition type for each key see the next section For details of the wipe settings see Wipe Settings for Indepe
513. t on 3 Adjust the following parameters with the knobs To switch between displaying parameter group 1 2 and 2 2 press the MORE button Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 X Move key HD 99 to 99 horizontally SD4 3 83t0 33 SD 16 9 24 to 24 2 Y Move key vertically HD 99 to 99 SD 4 3 33 to 33 SD 16 9 24 to 24 Resizer 421 shey ploldeu skey y Ja dey9 422 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 S Magnify or shrink 0 0 to 99 key Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 X Change aspect 0 0 to 99 ratio horizontally 2 Y Change aspect 0 0 to 99 ratio vertically 3 R Change aspect 0 0 to 2 0 ratio horizontally and vertically at a time Device control block operations for key shrinking magnification and movement Resizer Delegation buttons RSZR CTRL button Trackball RSZR button LOC button ASP button Z ring 1 Press the RSZR CTRL button turning it on 2 Press the delegation button to select the key 3 Press the RSZR b
514. t settings for particular knob parameters for the relevant knob parameters see page 327 Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply Menu number 2 Menu name Button name Knob Parameter 1111 Type Luminance and Linear in 4 Filter lt Key Type gt group Color Vector in lt Key Type gt 1 Y Filter group 2 C Filter Parameter group 2 2 1111 1 Type gt CRK Adjust Key Active 5 Filter Color Cancel in lt Color 5 Filter Cancel gt group 1112 1 Edge gt Matte Mix Color in lt Edge Matte gt 5 Pattern group Multi Invert Type 1113 Main Mask Pattern Pattern Multi Invert Type Basic Menu Operations 327 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 328 Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply Menu number 9 Menu name Button name Knob Parameter 1116 Transition Wipe in lt ON Transition Type gt 1 Transition group Rate 5 Pattern Wipe in lt OFF Transition Type gt 1 Transition group Rate 5 Pattern Key Blink and Edge Blink in 1 Blink Rate lt Blink gt group Mix in lt Transition Type gt group 1 Transition Type Wipe in lt Transition Type gt q Transition group Rate 5 Pattern 1116 1 Transition gt Multi 3 Invert Type Wipe rai H and V in lt Pairing gt group 41 Width H V and Fringe in 4 Shape lt Modulation gt
515. t the signals output from the four monitor output connectors e Clip Adjust Adjust the clip levels of DME1 and DME2 outputs Interface with external devices Device Interface e Editor Protocol Set the protocol to be used on the Editor port e Editor Port Setting Make settings relating to the control of the four editor ports installed in the DME e GPI Input Set the GPI input ports and trigger polarities and make the action settings e GPI Output Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities and make the action settings Setup Relating to DCU Input Output In DCU setup carry out settings particular to the DCU You can make the following settings e Input Config Assign GPI inputs to Parallel input ports e GPI Input Assign Make GPI input settings Output Config Assign GPI outputs to parallel output ports inserted in an option slot GPI Output Assign Make GPI output settings Serial Port Assign Set the protocol to match the devices connected to a 9 pin serial port You can also select the control panel used to control each device Setup Setup Relating to the Router Interface and Tally Interface Carry out settings relating to the interface with the routing switcher and settings relating to the tally interface You can make the following settings Router interface setup Router These settings are common to the parallel tally and serial tally Matrix Size Assign the switcher matrix of each sw
516. t the transition once again The status before the previous transition is restored To cancel the pattern limit To cancel the pattern limit after completion of step 3 in the previous procedure press the PTN LIMIT button turning it off If after carrying out step 2 in the previous procedure the pattern limit has been reached carry out the following procedure 1 2 Press the PTN LIMIT button The button you pressed lights green Carry out the transition The PTN LIMIT button goes off and the pattern limit state is released Depending on the way in which the transition was executed the action will be as follows e When you press the CUT button the pattern limit is immediately released and the image switches instantaneously e When you press the AUTO TRANS button until the state of the next transition the transition is carried out over the duration given by the transition rate Executing a Transition 357 SUOMSUBIL g 19 dEU SUOIJISUBIL g 19 deyo 358 e When you move the fader lever the transition is carried out from the pattern limit state to the state before the pattern limit transition was carried out Moving the fader lever even a little synchronizes the fader lever position with the transition state and you can move the fader lever either in the forward direction or in the reverse direction Depending on the Setup settings the transition may be executed at the instant you pre
517. tails of the transition control block standard type see page 260 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config menu press Program Button The Program Button menu appears 2 Press Transition Module The Transition Module menu appears Multi Program 2 235 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 236 3 Select the switcher bank then in the lt PTN LIMIT LIMIT SET KF Button Assign gt group press Main Sub You can now use the PTN LIMIT button as MAIN and the LIMIT SET button as SUB To assign to the wipe direction selection buttons NORM and NORM REV in the transition control block This applies to a standard type and compact type transition control block For details of the transition control block standard type see page 260 and for details of the transition control block compact type see page 310 1 In the Transition Module menu select the switcher bank 2 In the lt NORM NORM REV REV Button Assign gt group press Main Sub You can now use the NORM button as MAIN and the NORM REV button as SUB To assign to macro buttons in the cross point control block For details of the cross point control block see page 256 1 In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config menu press Program Button The Program Button menu appears 2 Press Xpt Module The Xpt Module menu appears 3 Select the switcher bank then in the lt PRE MCRO POST MCRO gt gro
518. tcher internal reference phase Switch Timing Specify the timing of video switching M E Config Set the program configuration for the M E and P P outputs Standard mode Fix the maximum of four outputs Out to 4 and program output configuration as follows Out1 Program output Out2 Preview output Out3 Clean output Out4 Key preview output Program output Clean output key 1 key 2 key 3 key 4 Multi program mode Increase the number of M E or P P programs and assign any of the following to the maximum of six outputs Out to 6 M E Output Assign Program outputs 1 to 4 preview output key preview outputs 1 and 2 clean output Further you can select the program background from Clean or Utility2 and change the combination of signals from which it is configured PGM Config DSK mode Treat P P as four DSKs with no background transitions Of backgrounds to 4 set one to configure the program output PGM Config The signals which can be selected as the background are limited to Out to 6 from M E 1 to M E 3 Regardless of the current M E Config mode you can set the key preview configuration to be video mode or key mode In key mode select whether to link the key state to the on off operation or have it always on K PVW Config User 1 to 8 Config Assign the User regions being color backgrounds 1 and 2 AUXI to 48 monitor 1 to 8 frame memory 1 to 8 and color correctors 1 and 2 to any of Userl to
519. ted Secondary color correction RGB clip For the six colors R red G green B blue Y yellow C cyan and M magenta adjust the luminance and saturation and also the hue within a range of 30 degrees of the center value for each color You can mask a part of the region to be corrected This function is disabled when spot CCR is enabled with a setup setting For details see Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 On the MVS 8000G this function and spot CCR can be enabled at the same time For each of the R G and B signals you can make dark clip and white clip adjustments Luminance processing After converting a signal to which RGB color correction has been applied to a XUV signal dividing the luminance levels into three regions referred to as Color Corrector Dark Middle and Bright and applying video signal adjustments to these regions Under Dark point Middle Dark point Bright Middle point Over Bright point Dark Middle Bright Input signal luminance level 0 100 There are three modes for luminance processing as follows Tint mode adding a specified color to the original video signal Color Modify mode adjusting the original video signal Y Modify mode adjusting the output levels of the input luminance signal e White balance adjustment setting the output level for an input luminance signal at the 100 level e Black balance adjus
520. ted key 1 row operation you can only select a key signal assigned to a cross point button For the method of selecting a video signal see To select a video signal assigned to a cross point button below On the MVS 8000 the video signal selection operation is not supported When Split is selected the key memory function see page 56 is disabled To select a video signal assigned to a cross point button By selecting the key source bus with an auxiliary bus control block AUX delegation button and pressing the cross point button it is possible to select the video signal assigned to the cross point button If you press the cross point button with holding down KEY the key signal assigned to the cross point button In the above operation the following settings must have been made e Assigning the key source bus to an AUX delegation button For details see Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings Aux Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e Setting the KEY button operating mode For details see Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 This operation is not supported on the MVS 8000 Carrying out a color mix for key fill When Matte is selected for key fill you can combine color and color 2 For the combination you can use not only a key wipe generator pattern but also the dedicated pattern for key edge color mix Key Setting Operations Using Menus 1 In the lt Key Fill gt group o
521. ted to another keyer to the currently selected keyer If DME channel allocations have been made in a Setup menu these buttons cannot be used to make DME channel allocations Using the trace function it is possible to check which keyer a DME channel is allocated to Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 269 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JAJdEUQ ON AIR indicators These light red when the corresponding DME channels are included in the final program output Output destination specification buttons MON DME monitor Hold down this button and press the selection button for the DME channel you want to assign to the monitor output you can then monitor the output signal on the DME monitor output While this button is held down the DME channel selection buttons light as follows allowing you to check the monitor assignment Lit amber DME channel that can currently be monitored Lit green DME channel currently assigned to the monitor output FM FEED frame memory feed When you press this button it lights momentarily amber then for the currently selected keyer the key processed signals are selected for frame memory sources and 2 If a DME is selected on the currently selected keyer the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned to frame memory sources and 2 otherwise the key fill and key source are assigned Carrying out
522. ter 13 Volume 2 SHOTBOX Shotbox gt Register gt Store Recall Chapter 15 Volume 2 MCRO Macro gt Register gt XX Chapter 18 Volume 2 Basic Menu Operations 317 jaued JOJJUOJ pue snua Z J9JdEUQ Key control block 2 Buttons Menus See KEY1 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 gt XX page 378 e PGM PST gt DSK1 gt XX KEY2 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key2 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK2 gt XX KEY3 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key3 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK3 gt XX KEY4 e M E 1 2 3 gt Key4 gt XX e PGM PST gt DSK4 gt XX LUM e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Type page 379 LIN e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Type CVK Z PTN o CRK e M E 1 2 3 gt Key1 2 3 4 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust page 382 B e PGM PST gt DSK1 2 3 4 gt Type gt Chroma Adjust me ke a The menu recalled depends on which of the M E delegation buttons and kev delegation buttons X are selected in the key control block Numeric kevpad control block pm Buttons Menus See e EFF Effect gt Effect 1 99 gt XX b Chapter 13 p Effect gt Master Timeline gt Store 7 Volume 2 F 2 SNAPSHOT Snapshot gt Snapshot gt XX b Chapter 14 e Snapshot gt Master Snapshot gt Store c Volume 2 SHOTBOX Shotbox gt Register gt Store Recall Chapter 15 Volume 2 MCRO Macro gt Register gt XX Chapter 18 Volume 2 TRANS RATE 2 Misc gt Transition page 355 STORE RCALL Key Frame gt
523. terfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Assigning a DME to a key 1 2 In the M E 1 gt Key1 menu select HF5 Processed Key The Processed Key menu appears In the lt DME Select gt group select the DME channel DMEI to DME8 to be used The lit colors of DME1 to DME8 indicate the DME assignment Lit green Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key Lit amber Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently selected key Off DME is not assigned To select a DME being used by another keyer Press Override turning it on then select the DME channel The later selection is valid and the button lights green Using two or three DME channels on one keyer When using the DME dedicated interface proceed as follows 1 Select the DME for the first channel see the previous item Assigning a DME to a key then select the successive channel for the second channel For the third channel select the channel after that To select the video signal for the second channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and select the signal in the Key1 row DME external video bus To select the video signal for the third channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and carry out the following operation If the selected DME is channel 3 or channel 4 turn off the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the
524. tern position and size and use the repetition function The following figure shows examples of a texture pattern repeated in the X and Y directions DIGITAL Original image DIGITAL GITAL DIGITAL DIGITA DIGITAL DIGITAL GITAL DIGITAL DIGITA DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL Repetition in X Repetition in Y Repetition in X and Y direction direction directions Setting lights e Light source types The following type of light sources are available see figure Parallel Parallel light source Point Point light source As the light source is placed further away the illuminated range becomes wider and the light become weaker Line Line light source Whole Non directional light source which illuminates the whole image Digital Multi Effects DME 145 suonouny 0008 SAW 4a deyo suoljoun 4 0008 SAW 4a deu9 146 Light source Light source Light source l Parallel Point Line Whole e Linking and unlinking image and spotlight The spotlight can move together with a DME image or be fixed in place Source Place the light source in source coordinate space The spotlight is linked and moves when the image moves Target Place the light source in target coordinate space The spotlight does not move even when the image moves Spotlight Image before movement Coordinate axis Source Coordinate axis Target Spotlight moves together Spotlight does not move with DME image even if DME image m
525. tern List Slide 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 Squeeze 7021 7023 7025 7027 7029 7030 7031 Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List Frame in out kul A 7201 S E 72o 7203 je Rd 7204 id L k t 7205 7206 7207 7208 7221 7222 7223 7224 Resizer DME Wipe Pattern List 581 L auuNjoA xIpueddy xepu MM 582 Index A Additive mix 49 Ancillary data 92 522 Angle 66 Art Edge 124 Aspect ratio 67 450 458 Attributes 184 Audio mixer 33 Auto chroma key adjustments 382 transition 45 183 359 AUTO button 287 AUTO DELEG button 270 AUTO INS button 284 AUTO TRANS button 262 263 311 Auto manual transition combination 360 Autoload function 208 AUX bus settings 555 delegation buttons 288 menu operations 555 Auxiliary bus control block for AUX buses 288 for router control 291 settings 196 Axis location 118 Background 150 A B row 257 changing 34 mask 56 Bank selection buttons 298 Basic menu operations 313 Beveled edge 124 Blind 134 Blink 57 function 404 Index Blur 124 Border 53 123 parameters 410 Brick 156 Broken glass 134 BS button 331 Bus fixed mode 45 fader operation 361 wipe direction 363 Bus selection 26 Button assignment settings 197 numbers 30 31 C Caps Lock button 331 Channel ID 121 Character trail 139 Chroma key 49 adjustm
526. tern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 5 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 242 a The pattern is the same as a standard wipe See Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 560 To select the pattern display the Mask Ptn Select menu by pressing the Mask Ptn Select button in the Main Mask menu After selecting one of the patterns standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 displayed in the Mask Ptn Select menu you can adjust the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 To invert the black and white sense of the mask source press the Mask Invert button turning it on When a pattern is selected as the mask source set the pattern modifiers as required e When turning Position on and setting the pattern position Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 2 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 2 a See page 65 e When turning Multi on and replicating the pattern Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 horizontally Key Setting Operations Using Menus Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern 1 to 63 vertically 3 Invert Type Replication layou
527. th ancillary data and when ancillary data is present in the saved or recalled frame memory file and moreover when the system signal format is the same as the signal format in the file Frame Memory 95 suonouny 0008 SAN 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 96 External Hard Disk Drive Access In an MVS 8000A system and MVS 8000G system you can connect a hard disk drive to the IEEE1394 port of the switcher processor to carry out the following operations Format Format the hard disk Backup Batch saving of files from frame memory to the hard disk Restore Restoring frame memory from files saved on the hard disk Frame Memory Color Backgrounds The dedicated generators generate color signals and these can be used as color backgrounds in video effects Color background selection There are two color backgrounds color background 1 and color background 2 which you use by assigning to cross point buttons Color combinations color mix The color generators can output the result of combining two colors which are color 1 and color 2 Using a pattern from a dedicated pattern generator color 1 and color 2 can be combined in the boundary region forming a color gradation This is referred to in the menu system as color mix You can also apply modifiers to the selected pattern When the color mix function is not used the result is a flat color and color 1 is always output For details o
528. the key priority for after the transition Key Priority Setting When the next transition selection button KEY PRIOR is on the selected key appears on top on the preview monitor The priority of keys other than the selected one does not change 3 To change the priority of more than one key repeat the previous operation as required 4 Execute the transition The keys are rearranged based on the set priority Setting the Key Priority by a Menu Operation Changing the priority of the currently inserted keys 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF3 Key Priority The Key Priority menu appears 2 For each of lt Priority1 gt lt Priority2 gt lt Priority3 gt and lt Priority4 gt select a key to determine the key priority sequence The keys are inserted in the key priority sequence with priority 1 at the front Priority 1 Priority 2 tikri Prioritv 3 l im Prioritv 4 It is not possible to select the same key for two or more priority numbers The keys appear in the set order on the program monitor Key Priority Setting 345 SUOMISUBIL g 19 dEU SUOIISUBIL g 191dEUQ Changing the kev prioritv for after the transition 346 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF4 Next Key Priority The Next Key Priority menu appears 2 For each of lt Priority1 gt lt Priority2 gt lt Priority3 gt and lt Priority4 gt s
529. the Timeline menu on or off in Chapter 13 Volume 2 Enabling re entry between the main and sub sides of the same M E bank In the Engineering Setup gt Panel gt Config menu set MP2 Free Re Entry to On e Re entry adds a 1H delay to the video Nested re entry may lead to problems in the video 240 Muri Program 2 A maximum of eight re entry stages are possible with the final output having a delay of 4H The selection order of re entry signals affects the number of lines by which the output signal is lowered If a delay occurs in the image even when the through mode is set the ancillary data does not pas through For example it is possible to select the re entry of M E 1 main on M E 1 main Restrictions on Mutual Re entry When Using Multi Program 2 The snapshot function is affected by this re entry function When the MP2 Free Re Entry button is On and any of the switcher banks are in Multi Program 2 mode then the following restrictions apply If you save and recall snapshots simultaneously with more than one region specified the recorded state is played back in the order of precedence of regions M E 1 gt M E 2 gt M E 3 gt P P Therefore if you save and recall snapshots with more than one region specified the cross point settings may not be recalled correctly To recall the snapshots correctly press the cross point button before recalling the snapshots to select a signal other than the re entry signal th
530. the next transition When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 two or more of the following buttons may light MIX In a background transition the new video fades in as the current video fades out During the transition the overall signal level is maintained at 100 In a key transition the key fades in for insertion or out for removal NAM non additive mix The current and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video increases progressively to 100 then the current video is progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 SUPER MIX The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100 The current video is then progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 PST preset COLOR MIX In the first transition the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix dissolve then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix dissolve WIPE The current video is replaced by the new video using the wipe pattern s
531. the surface of the image Textures can be selected from among 30 patterns See the appendix Texture Patterns Volume 2 for the texture patterns Non Linear Spotlighting effect is applied to an area to which a DME nonlinear effect is applied The BZDM 9050 is required to enable Texture and Non Linear settings e Test sphere function A test sphere is a translucent sphere virtually embedded in the center of the input picture to provide an intuitive way for you to check the position and direction of the spotlight When you change the position or direction of a light source the side of the sphere closest to the light source grows brighter You can easily check the position and direction of the light source by viewing the test sphere For more information about test sphere see Relation between test spheres and parallel rays page 148 Adjusting the bumpiness of the image surface Coordinate axis on surface of image Specify where to apply the texture or test sphere on the image surface Move The texture moves together with the DME image DIGITAL gt Image before movement Coordinate axis Move Texture moves together with DME image Fix The texture does not move even if the DME image moves Digital Multi Effects DME DIGITALI gt ID Image before movement Coordinate axis Fix Texture does not move even if DME image moves e Texture deformations You can change the texture pat
532. the transition as desired However this is not available for a DME wipe in the independent key transition control block For more details see Pattern Limit page 355 Size This can only be used when one of the following pattern numbers is selected e 1201 to 1208 1221 to 1224 1251 e 2651 2652 2851 to 2854 2861 to 2864 You can set the size of the image Crop You can crop the image It is also possible in 16 9 mode to crop both sides to convert the image to a 4 3 aspect ratio For the execution of a DME wipe crop transition you can select from the following three possibilities e Cut e Last 5 e Linear When Last 5 is selected you can set the Release Transition as follows e Last 30 e Last 5 e Off e When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected crop cannot be used e The MVS 8000 does not support the Last 5 setting for Release Transition Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects The relations between DME wipes and other effects are as follows DME Wipes 81 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo suoljouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo 82 Relation to ordinary wipes e DME wipes do not use the wipe generator built into the switcher Therefore during the execution of a DME wipe you can still use a pattern produced by the wipe generator as the source for a pattern key or mask e A DME wipe pattern cannot be used as the source for a pattern key or mask Relation to processed keys
533. their original shapes The following table shows the image sizes which exactly fill the full screen for the various signal formats Signal format Image size H X V 480i 59 94 720 X 487 5761 50 720 x 576 Files 207 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW L Jaldeyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 208 Signal format Image size H X V 1080i 50 1920 x 1080 1080i 59 94 1080PsF 23 976 1080PsF 24 1080PsF 25 1080PsF 29 97 720P 50 1280 x 720 720P 59 94 Importing 720P movie material To import movie material in 720P format it is necessary to treat each frame as a separate image file Directory operations You can create a new directory within a hard disk or memory card and carry out other operations such as renaming and deleting For details of operations see Directory Operations in Chapter 17 Volume 2 File copying between different unit IDs Switcher and DME files within the hard disk or memory card are managed by unit ID To copy files between different unit IDs use the Unit ID Copy menu For details of operations see Copying Files Between Different Unit IDs in Chapter 17 Volume 2 Saving data recalled by autoload Files At power on you can automatically recall data previously stored on the hard disk Autoload function The following data can be loaded by the autoload function e Keyframe effect setting data e Snapshot setting data
534. therefore when executed within a macro sequence a pause event must be inserted to adjust the timing e Rewinding effects involving external device control e VTR disk recorder Extended VTR cue up For example create a macro to cue up a VTR and then play back as follows Macros 213 suonouny 0008 SAW 4e deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 214 A ee Macro event execution order 4 2 3 Macro events CUE PAUSE PLAY 5 00 Auto insert mode on off setting You can switch on or off the mode auto insert mode in which at the same time that a control panel operation is carried out the event is automatically saved in a macro Editing a macro Macros You can carry out the following macro editing operations Event insertion Insert the control panel operation as an event in a macro Event modification Modify any event You can modify all events within a macro or events within a specified range in a single operation Event deletion Delete any one event You can delete all events within a macro or events within a specified range in a single operation You can then paste the deleted event using the paste function Event copy Copy any one event You can copy all events within a macro or events within a specified range in a single operation Event paste Paste a copied or deleted event at a desired position within a macro Undoing an editing operation You can undo the last event insertion modifi
535. these two assignments To assign a bus to the cross point buttons in the auxiliary bus control block press one of the AUX delegation buttons to select the bus The following table illustrates the correspondence between buses and cross point button rows and the delegation operations Bank Bus name Cross point Delegation operation button row M E 1 Background A bus a Background A M E 2 row M E 3 Background B bus 7 BackgroundB row Kev 1 bus Key 1 row Turn off the KEY3 button Key 2 bus Key 2 row Turn off the KEY4 button Key 3 bus Key 1 row Turn on the KEY3 button Key 4 bus Key 2 row Turn on the KEY4 button 26 Signal Selection Bank Bus name Cross point Delegation operation button row PGM PST Program bus Program row Preset bus Preset row DSK 1 bus DSK1 row Turn off the DSK3 button DSK 2 bus DSK2 row Turn off the DSK4 button DSK 3 bus DSK1 row Turn on the DSK3 button DSK 4 bus DSK2 row Turn on the DSK4 button M E 1 Utility 1 bus Background A When UTIL button mode M E 2 row is Hold hold down the Mbs Utility 2 bus BackgroundB UTIL button row DME external video bus Key 1 row Hold down the UTIL button DME utility 1 bus Key 2 row Hold down the UTIL DME utility 2 bus button and press the KEY4 button turning it off Hold down the UTIL button and press the KEY4 button tur
536. this folder after the following step 5 An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder 5 Press Record Enable turning it on 508 stil Image Operations The signals of frame memory source buses and 2 are assigned to the pair of FMs selected in step 2 the recording function is now possible 6 Input the file name if required Pressing File Name displays the keyboard window and you can enter the first character string up to four characters of the file name 7 Set the recording time if required Pressing Duration displavs the numeric kevpad window in which vou can enter the recording time in the form of timecode If vou set the recording time to zero this uses all frame memorv in which storing is possible for recording 8 If required set video processing for the selected signal For details of the operating procedures see Setting video processing page 498 9 Press Record to start recording When the recording time is set recording stops once the time has elapsed 1 Opress Stop to stop recording Even if the recording time is set you can still stop recording before the set time has elapsed Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images Animation To recall a continuous sequence of still images create an effect in the user region with the still image files as a keyframe and run the created effect With the 720P format you can continuously recall images usi
537. tically used as the clip name when the images are treated as a frame memory clip Second character string A four digit number 0000 or greater which is incremented each time a still image is captured e When using the record function to continuously capture frames it is not possible to use the mask function e On the MVS 8000 the image file name is anmxxyyy anm is constant xx is a two digit number from 00 to 99 incremented by 1 for ever recording operation and yyy is a three digit number from 000 to 999 incremented by 1 for each captured image Recalling a continuous sequence of still images animation You can use a continuous sequence of images captured with the record function as keyframes to create an effect By executing this effect you can recall the continuous sequence animation e For example to create an effect using FM1 FMI must be assigned to a user region For details of user region settings see Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 e To execute the effect you must assign the user region to which FMI is assigned to a region selection button in the numeric keypad control block For details of assigning to region selection buttons in the numeric keypad Frame Memory 91 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 92 control block see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2
538. ting FC Input 1 8 FC Input 9 16 480i 59 94 720P 59 94 720P 59 94 1080i 59 94 1080i 59 94 1080PsF 29 97 1080PsF 29 97 5761 50 720P 50 720P 50 1080i 50 1080i 50 1080PsF 25 1080PsF 25 720P 50 576i 501080i 50 576i 501080i 50 720P 59 94 480i 59 94 480i 59 94 1080i 59 94 1080i 59 94 1080i 50 5761 50 5761 50 720P 50 720P 50 1080i 59 94 480i 59 94 480i 59 94 720P 59 94 720P 59 94 1080PsF 25 576i 50 5761 50 1080PsF 480i 59 94 480i 59 94 29 97 FC Output 1 4 Format selected for FC Input 1 8 Screen aspect ratio Switch the screen aspect ratio to 4 3 or 16 9 Changing the input reference signal in an HD system This changes the input reference signal e Tri Syne tri level sync for an HD system e BB Black Burst black burst or sync for an SD system The following table shows the relation between signal format and the frequency of a signal that can be used as the input reference signal Signal format Input reference signal Tri Syne Black burst 1080PsF 29 97 59 94 Black Burst 59 94 Sync 59 94 1080i 59 94 1080PsF 25 1080i 50 50 Black Burst 50 Sync 50 1080PsF 23 976 47 952 Black Burst 59 942 Sync 59 94 9 1080PsF 30 1080i 60 60 1080PsF 24 48 720P 59 94 59 94 Black Burst 59 94 Sync 59 94 720P 50 Black Burst 50 Sync 50 a Interlock mode Setup 191 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Selecting the start up state Start Up Set the i
539. tings are required both when inserting a key and when deleting it For example with the key not inserted if you select the transition type and carry out a transition this will be the setting when inserting a key Carry out the transition in the independent key transition execution section To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition Press the TAKE button To set the independent key transition rate using a simple type transition control block use the key 3 and key 4 Transition menus For details see Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate page 366 To cut the key in or out instantaneously Press the KEY 3 ON button or KEY 4 ON button In an independent key transition the pattern limit function is not available Chapter 4 Keys Key Setting Operations Using Menus cscccscscscsscscsccsscssecesscsesoees 378 Keys S Clin Seen US eee ee a een uence saeco T 378 Keyally pessettiii A EE 379 Chroma Key Composition ee eee ee ee ee 381 Chroma Key Adjustments ee A JA 382 Selecting Key Fill and Key Source ee eee E a 387 Key Edge Modifications tae enea e e sacs see sces ses sees E sorters 390 Mak E EA E E EE A A E AA E E 397 App yne 2 OMP OR sac aeaesaesooseeanae0a7H 400 Specifying the Key Output Destination ss mnenenennnnnnenni 403 Key Modify Clear T a tere E A E A nee 404 JBA DEDI REMTE TOIA E eee E ere een eg ane eee ee eee 404 Wild CO Process p A A eee nee 405 Key Sett
540. tion the following patterns can be used Execution mode DME wipe patterns that can be used One channel mode Slide split squeeze door 2D trans 3D trans frame in out page turn page roll mirror sphere character trail wave ripple split slide sparkle user programmable DME Two channel mode Page turn page roll User programmable DME in transition mode For the transition mode set when creating a keyframe effect for a user programmable DME pattern the following can be used Single single transition mode Flip tumble Flip Tumble flip tumble transition mode Dual dual transition mode Picture in picture PinP one channel and two channel picture in picture transition mode Compress a type of picture in picture in which the new image is the background and the currently visible image shrinks and then expands to its original size See example in the next item Frame in out Frame I O frame in out transition mode When the first transition completes if you move the position of the image you can move it both horizontally and vertically Frame in out H Frame I O H a type of frame in out mode which is specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal direction The image movement is reflected at both the transition start point and end point See page 77 The operation is carried out according to DME wipe patterns 1202 1203 or 1204 Frame in out V Frame I O V a type of frame i
541. tion button to select the operation target In the folder selection area select the folder containing the clip to be recorded In the lt Record Enable gt group select the clip type e To record a normal clip press Clip e To record an extended clip press Ext Clip To set the clip name press Name A keyboard window appears Enter the clip name and press Enter To start recording press Record Start To end recording press Record Stop Frame Memory Clip Operations 519 Aowey ewes 7 Jaydeyo MOWSJA ewes 7 Ja deyo 520 To set the clip duration 1 Press Clip Duration A numeric keypad window appears 2 Enter a timecode value or number of frames and press Enter This confirms the clip duration Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders You can create rename and delete frame memory folders Creating a new folder 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF5 Folder The Folder menu appears The status area shows a list of the current folder settings Select New A keyboard window appears Enter the folder name and press Enter This confirms the folder name Changing the folder name 1 In the Frame Memory gt Folder menu select the folder with the arrow keys or by turning the knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Folder selection 1 to 12 2 Num Number of files to select 1 to 12 consecutively from selected file
542. tion end A E A A e ri Image created besi bv interpolation El ones B A Background A B Effect execution Background B State before modification Transition mode frame in out H This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the horizontal direction In this mode when the first transition has completed you can move the image with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions The image at the transition start point and end point also moves The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following First transition Transition start completion point Transition end A A A p cea Image created Me dst by interpolation E Ni EB A Background A Effect executio execution B Background B At the first transition completion point if you move the image with the positioner the transition appears as in the following figure DME Wipes 77 suonouny 0008 SAW 4a deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 78 DME Wipes First transition Transition start completion point Transition end A A i mo Image created by interpolation Background A Background B Effect execution State before modification Transition mode frame in out V This mode is specified when creating a transition effect in the vertical direction In this mode in the state at completion of the first transition you can move the ima
543. tion in the lt Fill Matte gt group Flat Color Adjust color 1 with the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Mix Color Carry out a color mix Adjust color 1 and color 2 and select a mix pattern see the next section In the lt Key Source gt group specify the key source selection mode Self The key fill bus signal is automatically selected as the key source When the key type is selected as chroma key select Self Auto Select The signal allocated being paired with the key fill bus signal to a cross point button is automatically selected as the key source The setting of key fill and key source pairs is carried out in the Setup menu Key Setting Operations Using Menus 387 sfog vp saideyo skey p 13 dey9 See Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Split You can select a key source signal independently of the key source automatically selected in Auto Select mode 6 When Split was selected in step 5 hold down the SPLIT button in the key control block then in the cross point control block key 1 row select the key source signal Alternatively hold down the key delegation button in the transition control block and press a cross point button in the key 1 row to select the key source signal In the above sta
544. tment setting the output level for an input luminance signal at the 0 level e Y lift correction adjusting the curvature of the curve e Y dark correction adjusting the position of the maximum point of the curve Output signal luminance level 3 A i i White balance adjustment Output signal luminance level A i 1 A gt Input signal O gt Input signal T luminance Y Dark luminance I v level level Black balance adjustment Unadjusted signal Adjusted signal It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected Color Corrector 225 suonouny 0008 SAN 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Spot color adjustment You can change the color of a specified color region to a different color without affecting other regions You can also mask part of such a region Then for the region other than the region whose color you have changed you can make the following corrections e Video signal overall gain adjustment e Y signal gain adjustment e Y signal offset adjustment e C signal gain adjustment e C signal hue adjustment This function is disabled when secondary CCR is enabled with a setup setting For details see Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 On the MVS 8000G this function and secondary CCR can be enabled at the same time Output video processing YUV clip Carrying out the following corrections on the
545. to any preview output in setup see Chapter 16 Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu Volume 2 PST preset When this button is pressed the signal selected on the background B row of the PGM PST bank is selected on the edit preview bus M E 1 to M E 3 P P M E1 to M E 3 P P preview The preview signal M E 1 PVW M E 2 PVW M E 3 PVW P P PVW of the M E or PGM PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus M E1 K to M E3 K P P K M E1 to M E 3 P P key preview The key preview signal M E 1 K PVW M E 2 K PVW M E 3 K PVW P P K PVW of the M E or PGM PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus DME V DME monitor video When this button is pressed the DME monitor output video signal DME MON V is selected on the edit preview bus DME K DME monitor key When this button is pressed the DME monitor output key signal DME MON K is selected on the edit preview bus AUTO button When this button is pressed the M E or PGM PST bank preview signal selected on the edit preview bus is automatically switched to the program signal depending on the on air status Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 287 jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeueg JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ 288 Auxiliary Bus Control Block for AUX Buses There are also models without the selected source name displays and source name
546. ton See Expanding the shift function in Chapter 16 Volume 2 2ND button After selecting a destination with the destination selection buttons hold down this button and make another destination selection to assign a different destination from the 1st row to the 2nd row Source name displays These display the names of signals sources that can be selected with the cross point buttons While the SHIFT button is active the shifted signal names appear While the KEY button is held down the expanded signal names appear When a different destination is assigned to the 2nd row the 2nd row signal names appear only while the 2ND button is held down Q SHIFT button While this button is active the source name displays show the shifted signal names Press this button to toggle between the shifted and unshifted states Q RTR router button Press this button turning it on to assign the auxiliary bus control block to router control B Level selection buttons To each of the four buttons plural S Bus levels are assigned in the Setup menu Press a button turning it on to make operations apply to those S Bus levels Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 293 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua z JAJdEUQ Menu Control Block D Top menu selection buttons B Menu display User preference buttons Knobs Q Top menu se
547. trol Block Simple Type in on the key 4 control block are the same Chapter 16 Volume 2 K SS button Key source name display key snapshot buttons B Independent key transition execution section D Independent key transition type selection buttons Q Independent key transition type SHIFT This has the following functions selection buttons e When setting is made in the Setup Press one of the following buttons turning menu to allow a different transition it on to select the independent key type for inserting or deleting a key it transition type is possible to display and set the MIX Faded in or out transition type after the next WIPE Inserted or deleted with a wipe transition while this button is held DME Switches the key with a DME wipe down CUT Inserted or deleted instantaneously Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel e While this button is held down you can select a key source with the cross point buttons for the key bus If you press this button twice in rapid succession the key bus selection button KEY3 in the cross point control block lights and a key 3 key bus cross point can be selected If you press this button while holding down TRANS RATE button in the numeric keypad control block you can set the independent key transition rate on the control block Independent key transition execution section KEY3 ON butt
548. trol Panel 271 jaued JOJJUO9 pue snua Z J9JdEUQ ae ee een EZ a a JSE jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua Z JAJdEUQ 272 control block In this state the M E 1 to M E 3 buttons P P button and DME1 to DME8 buttons function as the device 1 to device 12 allocation buttons as follows M E1 DEV1 device 1 M E2 DEV2 device 2 M E3 DEV3 device 3 P P DEV4 device 4 USER FMICLIP frame memory clip 1 Unused FM2CLIP frame memory clip 2 ME1 DEVS device 5 ME2 DEV6 device 6 ME3 DEV7 device 7 ME4 DEV8 device 8 cae FM LOOP frame memory GJ OJJ Q Ke MES DEV9 device 9 ME6 DEV 10 device 10 ME7 DEV11 device 11 ME8 DEV 12 device 12 To exit from this mode press the DEV button again turning it off When the RUN CTRL button is selected This enables the effect run control mode in the device control block When the RSZR CTRL button is selected This enables the resizer control mode in the device control block of the MVS 8000G oyyy For details on resizer see page 419 The functions of the operation buttons trackball and Z ring vary with the operation mode as follows Operation buttons When the positioner operation mode is enabled K1 CB1 Press this button to enable wipe pattern position setting for key 1 Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel DSK1 When the USER button is selected pattern position
549. tton lights amber At this point press the MORE button which turns green to assign the fifth and subsequent parameters to the knobs so that the parameter settings can be made 406 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block Selecting the bank and keyer To make key settings first select the bank from M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST and keyer then assign them to the key control block For example to set key 1 on M E 1 with the key control block use the following procedure 1 Using the M E delegation buttons in the key control block press the M E1 button setting it on 2 Using the key delegation buttons in the key control block press the KEY 1 button setting it on This assigns the key control block to M E 1 key 1 Selecting the key type To select the key type press one of the key type selection buttons in the key control block LUM button luminance key LIN button linear key CRK button chroma key CVK button color vector key PTN button key wipe pattern key When using a wipe pattern key as the key type in the lt Key Type gt group of the Type menu for the keyer select Wipe Pattern and make the settings For an overview of the key types see page 48 The button you pressed lights green and you can now adjust the parameters with the knobs The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the parameter name and the three digit setting value e When the LUM or LIN button is
550. ttons Assign a shotbox saved in registers 1 to 99 When you press a button the assigned shotbox is selected and executed Carry out the assignment in the Setup menu see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 SBOX buttons can be set as device selection buttons or DELAY button in the Setup menu DELAY button When pressed this button lights green the numeric keypad control block display changes to DELAY__ and you can set the start delay time for the selected device The setting range is from 00 00 to 59 29 depends on the video format This button goes off when another timecode setting button ISTART TC STOP TC SET START TC SET STOP TC or SET DUR is pressed Carry out the assignment in the Setup menu see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 The DELAY button can be set as a device selection button or an SBOX button in the Setup menu GC Editing buttons These buttons set start and stop points These operations are only valid while a device is selected with the device selection buttons START TC Press this button to set the timecode of the start point at that time The timecode of the start point is updated to the current time each time this button is pressed When the device the operation applies Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 279 jaued O4 U0D pue snua Z J9JdEUQ jeued JOJJUOQ pue snua
551. tup gt Switcher gt Device Interface gt DME Type Setting gt DME SDI interface menu The AUX bus is determined by which DME channel is being used DME Wipes 79 suonouny 0008 SAW 4a deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 80 For the SDI interface on the MVE 8000A or MVE 9000 in some cases the AUX bus is used in place of the DME external bus For details see Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu in Setup Relating to Switcher Processor section of Chapter 16 Volume2 DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers DME Wipes You can modify the selected DME wipe pattern in the same way as an ordinary wipe pattern as follows For the setting operations see Setting DME Wipe Modifiers page 469 Direction You can set the DME wipe direction to normal reverse or alternating normal reverse page 64 except for a key transition which is always in normal reverse mode However a key transition can only be specified when the following patterns are selected and when other patterns are selected this is fixed as normal reverse Patterns 1204 1207 1221 to 1224 Edge You can apply a border or soft border see page 65 In the case of those user programmable DME patterns for keys in which an edge has already been applied to the effect the bahavior is as follows e When the DME wipe edge setting is on only part of the edge applied in the effect is enabled and that portion can be
552. ular to the plane of the monitor screen The coordinates do not move even if the image moves Digital Multi Effects DME Z Source coordinate space Target coordinate space Source coordinate space and target coordinate space For example as shown in the following figure the image moves in a different direction when you move it along the x axis of the source coordinate space and along the x axis of the target coordinate space Source coordinate space Target coordinate space Movement along the x axes of the source coordinate space and target coordinate space Local coordinate space and global coordinate space The coordinates of an individual DME channel are called its local coordinate space The coordinates common to all channels are called the global coordinate space By switching from local to global coordinate space you can add new movement to the movement of images in individual channels and also apply transformation effects to multiple channels that have been combined by Global effects page 152 Digital Multi Effects DME 111 suonouny 0008 SAW L dojdeuD SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 112 Rotation around y axis in j i local coordinate space Se T f i 1 P Rotation around y axis n 1 5 U global coordinate space i 1 l Local coordinate space and global coordinate space Three dimensional para
553. ume 2 Files You can save register data including setup information and snapshot information as a file on a hard disk or memory card and recall it as required You can operate on individual files or registers or together in a batch Regarding frame memory it is possible to capture image data stored in an external device into frame memory You can also convert the format of image data in frame memory into a different format and save it in an external device Files that can be manipulated The following files can be saved and recalled Operation mode setup data for system as a whole and individual devices Device status data for system startup Key memory setting data Video process memory setting data Keyframe effect setting data Snapshot setting data Wipe snapshot setting data DME wipe snapshot setting data Key snapshot setting data Shotbox setting data Macro setting data Macro attachment data Menu macro setting data Frame memory image data File operations You can carry out the following file operations When operating on individual files or registers Save Save the data in a register to the hard disk or memory card Load Load a file from the hard disk or memory card Copy Copy a file within a directory or from one directory to another When a remote panel is used this function applies to it too Rename Rename a file on the hard disk or memory card Delete Delete a file from the hard disk or memory car
554. und an axis is the same as in Rotation mode Axis Location Moves an axis of rotation in the source coordinate space Axis movement X Movement on the x axis Location Size Changes the size of the whole image Movement on the v axis Movement on the z axis Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the source coordinate space is done in three dimensional space magnifying the image emphasizes the sense of perspective e Because shrinking and magnification of the image in the target coordinate space is a conversion of the two dimensional image displayed on the monitor shrinking and magnification does not change the shape of the image Magnification and shrinking in the source coordinate space Digital Multi Effects DME Magnification and shrinking in the target coordinate space Aspect In the source coordinate space changes the aspect ratio in the x axis direction and y axis direction either independently or simultaneously tab Z N s Change of aspect ratio in Change of aspect ratio in Simultaneous change x axis direction y axis direction aspect ratio in x axis direction and y axis direction Perspective In the target coordinate space changes the perspective on the image by changing an imaginary view point without changing the position of the image The x axis and y axis values define the position of the view point The z axi
555. und with the color cancel effect applied This can therefore be used to provide an impression of smoke for example When the Y balance function is applied to the color cancel key the relevant part is output in its original color without canceling and therefore it is possible to combine colors which are the same color as the background i e typically blue in the foreground Chroma key shadow This function provides a more realistic treatment when the shadow of an object in the field of view falls on the blue background Since parts of the blue background darker than a specified intensity are treated as shadows there is no effect on cutting out of the foreground Video signal adjustment You can vary the foreground signal gain or change the hue There are separate adjustments for the gain of the overall video signal and Y and C components Keys 51 suonouny 0008 SAW 4a deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 52 For details of video adjustment operations and the adjustment items see Chroma Key Adjustments page 382 Wipe pattern key This uses the wipe pattern selected for a transition as the key source Key wipe pattern key This uses the wipe pattern selected for an independent key transition as the key source Note on wipe pattern modifiers In a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key you can apply various modifications depending on the pattern used and the modifiers in common with a wipe Howe
556. up press Main Sub You can now use the PRE MCRO button as MAIN and the POST MCRO button as SUB To assign macro operations to different buttons If in the above operation you assigned a Multi Program 2 function to the macro buttons you can assign the PRE MCRO and POST MCRO functions to different buttons For details see Assigning functions to user preference buttons or Assigning a function to a memory recall button in the utility shotbox control block in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Multi Program 2 Examples of Operations in the Multi Program 2 Mode When Sharing a Switcher Bank To create video on the M E or PGM PST bank assigned to both main and sub operations use the following procedure 1 2 Press the MAIN button turning it on and turning off the SUB button With the normal operations create the main video Press the SUB button turning it on and turning off the MAIN button Now you can create the sub video Create the sub video The basic method of operation is the same as for the main video except that the utility 2 bus signal is assigned to background A and the utility 3 bus signal is assigned to background B For sub only keys 2 to 4 can be used and for wipes standard wipe patterns only There are also other differences in operation from standard mode For details see Differences Between Multi Program 2 Mode and Standard Mode page 242 and Restrictions on Using Mu
557. urn the Z ring clockwise and in the reverse direction when you turn it Frame Memory Clip Operations 517 Kowa ewes 7 Je deu9 Aowsey ewes 7 Ja deyo 518 counterclockwise Move the joystick to the right for the forward direction and to the left for the reverse direction When you pressed the JOG button Playback is at a speed corresponding to the turning speed of the Z ring or the movement speed of the joystick When you pressed the SHTL button Playback is at a speed corresponding to the rotation angle of the Z ring or amount of movement of the joystick When you pressed the VAR button Playback is at a speed corresponding to the rotation angle of the Z ring or amount of movement of the joystick in the range 1 to 3 times normal speed Clip Creation You save a movie as a clip If the number of frame memory clips exceed 100 single files 50 pair files an error appears Using the menu to record clips 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF2 Clip and HF3 Record The Record menu appears Frame Memory Clip Operations Frame memory Pair selection selection area buttons Operation target selection buttons Folder selection area l Through 2 3 Black Through ome 5 Black 6 7 7 Name Duration C006 00 00 05 00 Record Enable m T Clip ef poruon Record Record Start Stop gt LI N O With Pair off press the operation target selec
558. urve ratio and the curve center position Page Turn Turns the image like a turning page There are four modes H amp V H V and Off You can select the turn position the radius of the turned portion the amount and angle of turning and the input video for the front and back pages Roll Rolls the image up Digital Multi Effects DME 137 suojouny 0008 SAW 4e deu9 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 138 There are four modes H amp V H V and Off You can select the turn position the radius of the turned portion the amount and angle of turning and the input video for the front and back pages Cylinder Winds the whole image onto a cylinder You can set the degree of winding onto the cylinder the radius the horizontal position of the wound image and front and back side output for the image Sphere Winds the whole image onto a sphere You can set the degree of winding onto the sphere the radius the horizontal position of the wound image and front and back side output for the image You cannot monitor the part of a rotating sphere that corresponds to its axis on the monitor screen Explosion Divides the image into fragments which expand as they fly out Digital Multi Effects DME You can set the pattern shape and aspect ratio the center position the amount of movement by fragments the curvature of the transition path and other parameters Swirl Swirls the image You can
559. ust the following parameters Knob jParameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Inner Soft Border inner softness 0 00 to 100 00 2 Bound Soft Border boundary softness 0 00 to 100 00 Applying Resizer Effects For example to apply effects to key 1 of the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key menu press Resizer turning it on This enables the resizer function 2 Press Enhanced Effect The Enhanced Effect menu appears page Mosaic Enhance Mosaic Defocus e ee Mode Resizer 427 sfog vp saideyo skey p 13 dey9 Applying a wide key border 1 In the M E 1 gt Key1 gt Processed Key gt Enhanced Effect menu press Dual Rszr Effect turning it on 2 Press Wide Key Border turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Simultaneously adjust border 0 00 to 100 00 width of left and right edges 2 V Simultaneously adjust border 0 00 to 100 00 width of upper and lower edges 3 All Simultaneously adjust border Value of H shown width of all four edges 4 Soft 3 Softness of border 0 00 to 100 00 5 Density Density of border 0 00 to 100 00 a Shared with the drop shadow Soft value 4 To add an outline press Out Line turning it on O1 To adjust the border color press Border Color 6 Set the color parameters For details
560. usting DME wipe pattern parameters Of the DME wipe patterns the following have parameters that can be adjusted Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 467 s d M IWA 9 4eideyo sodiM INWA 9 19jdeuo When Brick for two channels is selected pattern numbers 2801 to 2804 2811 to 2814 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Side V Size X Horizontal magnification 0 01 to 8 00 2 Side V Size Y Vertical magnification 0 01 to 8 00 3 Height Height of brick 0 01 to 100 00 4 Center X Horizontal center position 100 00 to 100 00 2 5 Center Y Vertical center position 100 00 to 100 00 b a The horizontal center position of the video pasted on Side V At 100 00 the center is at the left edge of the screen and at 100 00 the center is at the right edge of the screen b The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side V At 100 00 the center is at the bottom edge of the screen and at 100 00 the center is at the top edge of the screen When Frame in out for two channels is selected e Pattern numbers 2851 to 2854 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 5 Delay Timing for video selected on 100 00 to 100 00 a utility bus to appear on the screen e Pattern numbers 2861 to 2864 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Rot X Rotation about the Y axis 100 00 to 100 00 horizontal direction 2 Rot Y Rotation about the X axis 100 00 to 100 0
561. ut DME wipe setting operations principally using the DME Wipe menu for each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks This section describes the basic procedures for DME wipe settings taking the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu as an example For details of independent key transition DME wipe settings see DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 477 For details of resizer DME wipe for MVS 8000G only see page 481 For one M E bank DME effects including external processed keys can be used in up to two places on the DME dedicated interface and in only one place on the SDI interface simultaneously When combining the SDI interface with the dedicated interface you can apply DME effects to a maximum of three keys Requires a setting in setup DME Wipe Settings Menu Accessing the DME Wipe menu To access the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu use any of the following operations e In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and press VF6 DME Wipe e In the transition control block of the M E 1 bank press the transition type selection button DME twice in rapid succession e In the Flexi Pad control block of the M E 1 bank press the DME button twice in rapid succession Any of the above operations displays the M E 1 gt DME Wipe menu DME Wipe Pattern Selection You can select a DME wipe pattern in the DME Wipe menu or by entering a pattern number from the Flexi Pad control block
562. ution section ON ON ON ON 1234123412341234 KEVI KEY2 KEY3 SUPER MIX NORM rn IREN TRANS PVW button Transition execution section Wipe direction selection buttons Next transition selection buttons KEXI to KEY4 DSKI to DSK4 in the Press these buttons turning them on to PGM PST bank Press this button determine what the next transition will turning it on to make the next apply to transition insert or remove the BKGD Next transition changes the corresponding key keys to 4 Ifa background key is currently inserted it will be Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel removed and if it is not currently inserted it will be inserted In the PGM PST bank this inserts or removes downstream keys to 4 KEY PRIOR priority When this button is lit the setting of the key priority after the next transition is enabled The key priority after the next transition appears in the key status display ALL Pressing this button turns on a preselected set of the BKGD KEY 1 to KEY4 and KEY PRIOR buttons Make this setting in a Setup menu Transition type selection buttons You can assign these buttons in setup to any transition type see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Press one of these buttons turning it on to determine the type of
563. utput of each bank in Multi Program mode in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To set the background and key configuration Use the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt PGM Config menu The following are the differences from standard mode Background configuration Consists of the following combinations e For main Clean Bkgd A Bkgd B e For sub Sub Clean Utility 2 Utility 3 Key configuration Key1 can be set to Enable only when the background is Clean Bkgd A or Bkgd B For details see To set the output configuration for each bank in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To set the key preview configuration Use the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Config gt K PVW Config menu The following are the differences from standard mode Background configuration Clean or Sub Clean Key configuration Key1 can be set to On or Link only when the background is Clean For details see To set the key preview configuration in Chapter 16 Volume 2 To assign sub outputs to output ports Use the Engineering Setup gt Switcher gt Output gt Output Assign menu You can assign a sub output signal to a switcher output port number For details see Assigning output signals in Chapter 16 Volume 2 Assigning main and or sub to switcher banks For each switcher bank for which Multi Program 2 mode is selected set whether this is main dedicated sub dedicated or main and sub shared To assign main and sub to a singl
564. utton turning it on 4 e To change the aspect ratio turn on the LOC SIZE ASP e To shrink magnify or move the key turn on the LOC XYZ LOC Hold these buttons down while carrying out the operation of step 5 to enable fine adjustment fine mode 5 Use the trackball and joystick for the operation For details of parameters see step 3 of Key control block operations for key shrinking magnification and movement page 421 For details of parameters see step 3 of Key control block operations for key shrinking magnification and movement page 421 Entering parameters This operation is the same as DME three dimensional parameter input For details see Entering Three Dimensional Parameter Values in Chapter 11 Volume 2 Resetting parameters This operation is the same as DME three dimensional parameter resetting For details see Entering Three Dimensional Parameter Values in Chapter 11 Volume 2 Clearing resizer effects To clear two dimensional transform parameters only and set the initial state In the device control block press the CLR WORK BUFR button in the operation buttons To clear all resizer parameters and set the initial state In the device control block press the CLR WORK BUFR button in the operation buttons twice in rapid succession For the initial state you can select either the factory default settings or user settings For details of how to make this selection
565. vance the effect to the keyframe point for which the GPI output is set a trigger pulse is output to the external device from the specified GPI output port VTR Disk Recorder Extended VTR Control In this system for up to 12 VTRs disk recorders or Extended VTRs connected to a DCU you can carry out the following manual operations and timeline settings e Controlling manually from the device control block trackball or search dial e Saving a start point stop point start delay time variable speed and so on in a data register then recalling the register to control automatically from the keyframe control block Cueup amp Play and VTR disk recorder Extended VTR timeline e In the Device menu you can check the following VTR disk recorder and Extended VTR information Device name Register number VTR disk recorder Extended VTR status Current time Start point Stop point Variable speed Start delay time Loop setting Recue setting Manual operation In the device control block you can carry out the following operations manually e VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR selection e Tape transport and disk drive control You can use the following tape transport and disk drive control buttons REC REW PLAY FF CUE UP VAR PLAY SHTL JOG STANDBY OFF STOP and ALL STOP For details of the operation of the buttons see Device Control Block Trackball page 271 Device Control Block Jo
566. ver modifiers which relate to the wipe direction and edge are not reflected Key Modifiers Edge modifiers Keys You can apply borders and other effects to the edge of the key See Key Edge Modifications pages 390 and 410 Normal This is the state with no key edge modifiers applied Border This applies a uniform width border to the edge of the key You can adjust the border width and density You can also enable the separate edge function and adjust the top bottom left and right border widths separately Drop border This applies a border below and to the right for example of the key You can adjust the border width position and density Shadow This applies a shadow below and to the right for example of the key You can adjust the shadow width position and density Keys 53 suojouny 0008 SAW 4a deu9 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 54 Outline This uses the outline of the original key as the key You can adjust the width and density of the outline You can also enable the separate edge function and adjust the top bottom left and right outline widths separately Emboss This applies an embossing effect to the outline of the key You can adjust the width and position of the embossing and the density You can adjust the density separately for key fill and key edge When embossing is on the Fine Key and zabton functions go off Soft edge This softens the edge of the key
567. when M E Config is changed Set the link setting again as required Since kevs 2 to 4 are shared between main and sub when the main and sub fader lever positions are different if vou move the fader lever the video changes instantaneously to the value of the most recently moved fader lever When the transition type for main or sub is set to preset color mix it is not possible to carry out independent key transition operation common to main and sub Dual Link Support By installing the BZS 8560 switcher upgrade software in the MVS 8000G or the BZDM 8560 DME upgrade software in the MVE 8000A you can switch the signal format to 1080P 59 94 or 1080P 50 In this case signal input output uses a dual link a Standard specified by SMPTE 372M 2002 One video signal is carried by two HD SDI signals allowing data with an increased frame rate to be carried Getting access to the software To use the switcher upgrade software and DME upgrade software you are required to enter an install key which validates the software If the software has been factory installed the install key is not required For the method of obtaining an install key contact your Sony representative On that occasion you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the switcher you are using You can check the unique device ID in the Install menu of the switcher For details of operating procedures see Chapter 16 Installation and Device Setup Inst
568. which the interchange occurs The blink settings are in the Transition menu for each key See Blink Function page 404 Key Default With a simple operation you can return the key adjustment values to their defaults The adjustment values which can be returned to their default values are as follows e Adjustment values for the particular key type Clip Gain Density Filter etc In the case of chroma keying all adjustment values return to their default values e Key position e Key inversion Keys 57 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 58 e Clean mode For details see Returning the key adjustment values to their defaults page 418 For the menu operation to return the key adjustment values to their defaults see Returning to default state in function groupings page 324 Key Modify Clear A simple button operation or a menu operation returns the key settings to the initial status settings For details of the initial status see Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 For the menu operation to return the key state to that set in initial status see Returning to default state in function groupings page 324 Resizer Resizer allows you to apply DME like effects such as image shrinking magnification and movement as well as change of the aspect ratio to the processed key The following function
569. which the light is blended with the image Mix Light as if reflected from a mirror The light can be given a color Multiply Light as if reflected from a dull surface diffuse reflection Relation between test spheres and parallel rays The following figure shows an example of the effect of parallel rays on a test sphere Test sphere The direction of a ray is defined by longitude and latitude e Longitude A direction angle expressed as a plus value for clockwise rotation in the plus direction with respect to the X axis of the input picture e Latitude Latitude The following figure shows the relationships between the longitude and latitude of parallel rays input picture and test sphere Z axis Latitude 0 25 Parallel rays loo X axis 1 Longitude H Input picture Test sphere Latitude 0 25 Digital Multi Effects DME The unit of these direction parameters is the number of rotations with 360 1 rotation expressed as 1 00 in the same way as 3D rotation parameters The following relationships apply in the example shown in the figure Parameter Setting Angle Longitude 0 12 45 Latitude 0 12 45 The fractional part of the setting after the decimal point corresponds to an angle 0 to 360 If the fractional parts of two setting values are the same the effect is the same even if the integral parts are different The integral part of a setting value is use
570. xtended clip A if an ancillary data attached clip and the duration Frame memory folder selection area Select the frame memory folder to be displayed Direct Recall button Toggle on and off the direct recall mode in which pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file Selecting an Input Image For the input image to frame memory you can use either the signal selected on one of the two frame memory source buses or a dedicated color matte signal Still Image Operations When using the signal on frame memory source bus or 2 for the input image select the signal as described below For the method of using a color matte signal see Freezing an image and writing it to memory page 496 Selecting the signal on a frame memory source bus As an example to select a signal on frame memory source bus 1 use the following procedure 1 In the auxiliary bus control block press the AUX delegation button to which frame memory source bus is allocated turning it on For allocation of buses to the AUX delegation buttons see AUX Delegation Buttons Settings Aux Assign Menu in Chapter 16 Volume 2 2 In the auxiliary bus control block cross point buttons select the signal to be used for the input image To select a signal with a key or DME effect applied on the frame memory source bus In the key control block press the FM FEED button turning it on This automatically assigns the key fill and key s
571. y 2 b a The key bus switching button KEY3 in the cross point control block goes off b The key bus switching button KEY4 in the cross point control block goes off Transition execution section Fader lever Move this vertically to carry out a transition When the split fader function is enabled by pressing the projection on the left side of the grip you can release the lock and separate the two halves of the fader lever With the split fader Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel lever in a background mix transition you can control the background A and B buses independently Transition indicator This comprises multiple LEDs which show the progress of the transition Transition rate display This displays the transition rate the time from the beginning of the transition to its completion set for an auto transition in frames You can set the transition rate using the numeric keypad control block or menu TAKE button Pressing this button carries out an auto transition of the set transition rate The transition starts immediately and the button lights amber When the transition completes the button goes off Wipe direction selection buttons REV reverse When this button is off the wipe proceeds in the normal direction When the button is lit the wipe proceeds in the reverse direction The normal direction refers to the black to white direction or in the direction of the a
572. yer Using the Setup menu it is possible to delegate this control block to key 1 to key 4 of the M E bank While these buttons are held down you can select a key source with the cross point buttons for the key bus Pressing one of these buttons twice in rapid succession changes its state so that you can make cross point selections on the corresponding key bus Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel Independent key transition type selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to select the downstream key transition type MIX Carry out a dissolve with the key selected with the key delegation buttons WIPE Carry out a wipe with the key selected with the key delegation buttons DME This switches the key selected with the key delegation buttons using a DME wipe CUT Instantaneously insert or delete the key selected with the key delegation buttons SHIFT When setting is made in the Setup menu to allow a different transition type for inserting or deleting a key it is possible to display and set the transition after the next transition while this button is held down Independent key transition execution section DSKI downstream key 1 ON to DSK4 ON buttons Press these to instantaneously cut the downstream keys 1 2 3 and 4 in or when the downstream keys are already inserted cut them out When the key corresponding to the button appears in the final program output the button li
573. ying out an independent key transition in combination with a common transition different transition types can be used for the background and keys It is also possible to use different transition types for key insertion and key deletion by means of a Setup menu setting For details of this operation see Basic Independent Key Transition Operations page 364 The following description compares the independent key transition with a common transition taking a simultaneous change of the background and key as an example Video used in the transition Key to insert Transitions 37 suojouny 0008 SAW 4e deu9 SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo Effect of a common transition In the case shown in the previous illustration carrying out a common transition produces the following change in the image Transition type wipe Same wipe is applied to background and key Effect of a common transition Effect of use with an independent key transition The key is inserted with an independent key transition as the background changes with a common transition providing the following result Transition type Independent key Different wipe patterns are applied to wipe transition type the background and key transitions wipe Effect of a background transition and independent key transition Combining other transitions with independent key transitions When you set a common transition a
574. ypad control block 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the TRANS RATE button Press the region selection button for the M E or PGM PST bank for which you want to set the transition rate turning it on The numeric keypad control block display now shows the selected region name and the current transition rate setting for the region 3 With the numeric keypad enter the transition rate If required press the TC button to toggle the input mode frame input or timecode input e Enter a value of up to three digits e To clear the entry press the CLR button 4 Press the ENTER button Executing a Transition This confirms the entry and the selected region name and the set transition rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display The transition control block display of the same bank M E or PGM PST also shows the setting To enter a difference from the current value After pressing the button enter the difference and press the TRIM button To change the sign or press the button Setting the transition rate by a menu operation 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 Select any transition type in the lt Transition Type gt group 3 Turn the knob to set the transition rate Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Rate Transition Rate 0 to 999 frame count
575. ype 304 standard type 364 Independent key transition execution section 263 305 307 312 Independentkey transition rate 366 display 368 setting by a menu operation 367 setting in the Flexi Pad control block 366 setting in the numeric keypad control block 367 Input signal settings 199 202 string 331 value 330 Installation 192 Installation and device settings 192 Interpolation 151 Invert 151 Item display 330 331 J Joystick 277 K Kaleidoscope 136 Key 48 1 2 row 256 bus selection buttons 258 control block 267 default 57 delegation buttons 263 306 deleting 35 density adjustment 152 disable 183 edge modifications 390 410 inserting 35 mask 55 memory 56 modifier buttons 268 modifiers 52 modify clear 58 404 output destination 403 output status display 346 373 settings 200 signal adjustments 384 source selection 152 status display 263 303 312 Key active 50 adjustment 383 Key Border 124 KEY button 289 Key fill selection 387 selection buttons 268 Key priority 343 display 346 373 selecting 36 setting by a menu operation 345 setting in the transition control block 343 Key setting using menus 378 Key snapshot 433 buttons 264 307 recalling 434 436 saving 433 435 setting buttons 264 307 using simple transition module 435 Key source name display 264 307 selection 387 selection buttons 268 Key transition selection buttons 302 Key type selection buttons 268 setting 379 Keyboard window
576. ype gt group set the type of combination see page 505 1 1 In the state in which you want to freeze press one of the following in the lt Freeze gt group to write the freeze image to temporary memory Frame Freeze one frame Field Freeze one field Off Release the freeze and delete the recorded freeze image After carrying out the freeze to return to the state immediately before the freeze press Undo in the lt Freeze gt group All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system is powered off If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the freeze images written to temporary memory all the freeze images in temporary memory are lost unless the auto store function has been enabled in setup With the auto store function enabled the freeze images written to temporary memory are saved automatically when the frame memory selection is changed For the following signal formats a field freeze is not possible 1080PsF 23 976 1080PsF 24 1080PsF 25 1080PsF 29 97 720P 50 720P 59 94 Saving a processed freeze image To save a processed freeze image as a file in the Still gt Composite menu use the following procedure 1 Press Store The keyboard window appears 2 In the keyboard window enter the file name maximum eight characters 3 In the keyboard window press Enter Still lmage Operations This saves the freeze image as a still image file in memory The destin
577. ystick page 277 and Device Control Block Search Dial page 278 Depending on the settings made in the Setup menu the CUE UP PLAY and STOP operations can be carried out from the transition control block For details of the operation of the buttons see Transition Control Block External Devices 1 61 suonouny 0008 SAW 19 deyo SUOJJUN4 0008 SAW 19 deyo 162 Standard Type page 260 and Transition Control Block Compact Type page 310 Setting a start point For each selected VTR disk recorder Extended VTR you can set the start point timecode value as keyframe data Setting a stop point For each selected VTR disk recorder Extended VTR you can set the stop point timecode value as keyframe data Setting a start delay time For each selected VTR disk recorder Extended VTR you can set the start delay as key frame data Recording to VTR or disk recorder Record video to the selected VTR disk recorder Loop recue setting You can select loop or recue as the playback mode These operate as follows When loop is selected Playback repeats from the start to the end of the currently recalled file When recue is selected When playback reaches the stop point automatically cue up to the start point 1 EVS XT server EVS Broadcast Equipment dedicated function Cueup amp Play By saving the start point timecode stop point timecode start delay time and so on for a VTR disk recorder
578. zoneanonennenennonennen 369 Fade to Black Operation nee eee ness ns 369 Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate ssemmi 369 Simple Transition sssnesnesnenonennznnonnennenzenseneensensnseneenenneenensennensensenea 371 Table of Contents 9 Basic Operations for Simple Transitions seen 371 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority 0 ee 373 Split Pad er s sisien B TA 373 Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module 374 Chapter4 Kevs Key Setting Operations Using Menus s1sssnssnsennzzzossnsensennonnoennonnoenneena 378 Key Setting Menus ince te ee ae I Se ethers 378 Key Type Settins tweens ac aii AS ead a ass 379 Chroma Key Compositiones e E A RAE E nanna 381 Chroma Key Adjustments mnn nnennnnennnnnnznnnnnnsnnennnznna 382 Selecting Key Fill and Key Source nee 387 Key Edge Modifications seen nenenn nsa n nanna 390 Masks aeiiae eb von pad ceded conser LEE ADE ARE Ba Gw Ep SE efa 397 Applying a DME Effect to a KeV e ens 400 Specifying the Key Output Destination seen 403 Key Modity Clear i fii B ace B A L 404 Blink FUN ON Assi eee ete eat ata Rot vetaeee 404 VideO PLOCESSING 3 Sii isti isibu ei aa b aa ra aAA EEEE RETES 405 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block sessssnssnesnoonz 406 Operations in the Key Control Block nnnan 406 Key Edge Modifications sense sense 410 Masks i a f g l terns 414 Applying a DME Effect t

Sony 8000SF Switch User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents